The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB06-0280 Project Manual 11-01-06_ FO, r F, ,� PROJECT MANUAL . E 1 2006 FOR FF V AIL ..__ 1� 06 - ' qLbc MOUNTAIN VIEW RESIDENCE ON GORE CREEK VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT NO. 2363.00 CID . 301610 �. v ARCHITECT RESORT DESIGN ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL 1434 SPRUCE STREET, SUITE 110 BOULDER COLORADO 80302 1 NOVEMBER 2006 REVIEWED BY JAN 15 2007 COLORADO INSPECTION AGENCY PROJECT MANUAL FOR MOUNTAIN VIEW RESIDENCE ON GORE CREEK VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT NO. 2363.00 ARCHITECT RESORT DESIGN ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL 1434 SPRUCE STREET, SUITE 110 BOULDER COLORADO 80302 1 NOVEMBER 2006 f PROJECT DIRECTORY MOUNTAIN VIEW RESIDENCE ON GORE CREEK VAIL, COLORADO Ron By me & Associates, Real Estate 265 Bridge Street Vail, Colorado 81657 970/476 -1987 970/476 -6747 Fax Resort Design Associates International 1434 Spruce Street Boulder, Colorado 80302 303/449 -4433 303/449 -3366 Fax W.E. O'Neill Construction Co. 229 Vallejo Street Denver, Colorado 80223 303/238 -7900 303/462 -2128 Fax Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. 70 Benchmark Road, Suite 204 Avon, Colorado 81620 970/949 -7768 970/949 -4054 Fax Peak Land Consultants, Inc. 1000 Lions Ridge Loop, Suite 3B Vail, Colorado 81657 970/476 -8644 970/476 -8616 Fax Belfay Engineering 2811 West 9th Avenue Denver, Colorado 80204 303/892 -5980 303/892 -5979 Fax Hughes Associates, Inc. 2 Garden Center, Suite 204 Broomfield, Colorado 80020 303/439 -0485 303/499 -7160 Fax Terrasan 1660 Gilpin Street Denver, Colorado 80218 303/331 -1717 303/331 -1815 Fax Owner Architect General Contractor Structural Engineer Civil Engineer Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Contractor Fire Protection Engineer Landscape Architect RDAI 2363.00 Specifications Consultants, Inc. Specifications 611 North Weber, Suite 103 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719/577 -9414 719/577 -9455 Fax Colorado Code Consultants, Inc. Code Consultant 811 Fourth Street Berthoud, Colorado 80513 303/895 -9988 970/532 -2789 Fax Eagle Valley Surveying, Inc. Surveyor 41199 Highway 6 & 24 Avon, Colorado 81620 970/949 -1406 Geotechnical END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY RDAI 2363.00 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR PROJECT MANUAL FOR MOUNTAIN VIEW RESIDENCES ON GORE CREEK VAIL, COLORADO PROJECT NO. 2363.00 1 NOVEMBER 2006 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00205 Instructions to Subcontract Bidder 00300 Information Available to Bidder 00700 General Conditions 00800 Supplementary Conditions SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 -3 1 1 1 -9 01100 Summary 1 -2 01312 Project Meetings 1 -2 01330 Submittal Procedures 1 -5 01410 Regulatory Requirements 1 01420 References 1 -3 01450 Quality Control 1 -3 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 -5 01569 Tree and Plant Protection 1 -10 01600 Product Requirements 1 -5 01722 Field Engineering 1 -2 01732 Cutting and Patching 1 -2 01741 Final Cleaning 1 01770 Closeout Procedures 1 01780 Closeout Submittals 1-3 DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION 02110 Site Clearing 1 -2 02200 Earthwork - Civil 02240 Dewatering 1 -2 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 1 -2 02300 Earthwork - Structures 1 -6 02370 Slope Protection and Erosion Control 1 -4 02430 Drainage Structures, Pipes and Fittings 02510 Water System 1 -10 02530 Sanitary Sewer System 1 -8 02570 Telephone, Cable Television, and Electric Systems 1 -6 02732 Roadway Base 1 -2 RDAI 2363.00 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 1 -7 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks 1 -6 02780 Interlocking Concrete Unit Pavers 02815 Irrigation System 02920 Soil Preparation 02930 Lawns and Grasses 02950 Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers, and Perennials 02970 Landscape Maintenance 1051 [0PIc3 410P►E 03100 Concrete Formwork 1 -6 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 1 -4 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1 -21 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete 1 -9 03600 Grouts 1 -3 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04060 Masonry Mortar 1 -3 04070 Masonry Grouts 1 -3 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement 1 -2 04090 Masonry Accessories 1 -2 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 1 -7 04853 Mortar Placed Stone Assemblies 1 -5 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 1 -10 05310 Steel Deck 1 -7 05400 Cold- Formed Metal Framing 1 -4 05500 Metal Fabrications 1 -7 05511 Metal Stairs 1 -3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 1 -4 06130 Heavy Timber Construction 1 -3 06200 Finish Carpentry 1 -3 06410 Custom Cabinets 1 -4 06417 Stone Slab Countertops 1 -5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE.PROTECTION 07111 Bituminous Dampproofirig 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 1 -4 07141 Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing 1 -4 07142 Hot Fluid Applied Waterproofing 1 -5 07184 Equipment Room Deck Coating 1 -3 07185 Traffic Deck Sealant and Waterproofing System 1 -5 07187 Balcony Deck Coating 1 -2 07194 Siloxane Water Repellants 1 -3 07210 Building Insulation 1 -2 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 1 -3 07272 Plastic Sheet Weather Barriers 1 -2 07315 Synthetic Slate Shakes 1 -3 07464 Fiber cement Siding 1 -2 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing 1 -7 RDAI 2363.00 2 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 -4 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing 1-3 07720 Roof Accessories 1-2 07730 Fall Arrest System 1 -2 07810 Applied Fireproofing 1 -3 07840 Firestopping 1 -4 07875 Coiling Curtain Shore Containment System 1 -4 07920 Joint Sealants 1-5 DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Paneled Wood Doors 1 -4 08216 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 1 -4 08253 Metal Clad Wood Door and Frame Units 1 -2 08254 Packaged Wood Door Frames - Fire Rated 1 -2 08264 Metal Clad Wood Sliding Glass Doors 1 -2 08310 Access Doors and Panels 1 -2 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors 1 -2 08551 Metal Clad Wood Windows 1 -3 08710 Door Hardware 1-4 08744 Automatic Door Operators 08800 Glazing 1 -4 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09253 Gypsum Sheathing 1 -2 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls 1 -6 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings 1 -3 09300 Tile 1 -4 09637 Stone Flooring 1 -3 09640 Wood Flooring 1 -2 09680 Carpet 1 -3 09685 Carpet with Pad 1 -3 09900 Paints and Coatings 1 -6 DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10210 Wall Louvers 1 -2 10310 Fireplace Specialties 1 -2 10400 Identification Devices 1 -2 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 1 -2 10550 Postal Specialties 1 10810 Bath Accessories 1 10826 All Glass Shower Enclosures 1 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11150 Parking Control Equipment 1 -3 11451 Residential Appliances 1 DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13157 Swimming Pool and Whirlpool 1 -12 RDAI 2363.00 3 DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 Hydraulic Elevators 14241 Hydraulic Service Elevator DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control 15250 Mechanical Insulation 15400 Plumbing Systems 15500 HVAC Piping and Pumps 15550 Boilers 15650 Refrigeration 15750 Heat Transfer 15780 Packaged Air Conditioning Units 15850 Air Handling Equipment 15880 Air Distribution and Sheet Metal 15975 Direct Digital Control Systems 15990 Testing, Balancing and Adjusting DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16020 Work Included 16025 Codes and Fees 16030 Project Record Documents 16035 Reviews and Acceptances 16040 Guarantee 16045 Maintenance Manuals 16055 Temporary Lighting and Power 16060 Identification 16065 Testing, Acceptances and Certifications 16102 Equipment Connections and Coordination 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16120 Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Below) 16122 Fire Seals 16140 Wiring Devices 16160 Panelboards 16165 Load Centers 16170 Disconnect Switches 16175 Modular Meter Centers 16181 Fuses 600 Volts and Less 16400 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) (Service Entrance Switchboard, Parallel Connection) 16403 Packaged Engine Generator System 16490 Transfer Switches 16500 Luminaries and Accessories 16721 Fire Alarm System END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 -5 1 -5 R DAI 2363.00 4 DOCUMENT 00205 INSTRUCTIONS TO SUBCONTRACT BIDDERS CONTRACTS The General Contractor for this project is: W.E. O'Neill Construction Co. 229 Vallejo Street Denver, Colorado 80223 303/238 -7900 303/462 -2128 Fax Except as indicated otherwise, all work under this contract will be under the direction of the General Contractor. The successful bidder(s) will execute a subcontract or purchase order with the General Contractor on the General Contractor's standard forms. Wherever the words Contractor or General Contractor are used in the Project Manual, they shall mean W.E. O'Neill Construction Co. 2. STATE AND LOCAL LAWS Bidders are expected to familiarize themselves with the laws and acts of the state of Colorado and the ordinances of the city or county in which the project is located. 3. INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre -bid documents will be made to any bidder orally. Only interpretations made in conformity with the following procedure will be valid. Interpretations either written or oral by any of the Architect's consultants will not be valid. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Architect and to be given consideration must be received by the Architect before: 12:00 Noon, Seven Calendar Days Before Date set by the Contractor for Receipt of Bids Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda that, if issued, will be mailed to the respective addresses furnished for such purposes. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addenda or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become a part of the Contract Documents. 4. CONSULTANTS As a matter of identification, the names of consultants employed by the Architect or Owner for various phases of the work are listed on the drawings and in the Project Manual. RDAI 2363.00 00205 -1 Bidders or material suppliers shall not communicate directly with any of the consultants without the permission of the Architect. All questions and requests for decisions and interpretations shall be directed to the Architect, who if he deems it advisable, will confer with his consultants regarding same. See Article 3 regarding Interpretations of Documents. 7T:111111 At the request of parties interested in submitting sub -bids on portions of the work, the Contractor may from time to time issue portions of the drawings and specifications as a convenience to said parties. The Architect disclaims any and all responsibility for errors or omissions made by parties using such partial information in compiling their proposals. 6. CHANGES AND SUBSTITUTIONS Items herein specified under manufacturers' names and catalog numbers are intended as a basis of quality and not as a closed specification unless noted otherwise. Items other than those specifically named in the specifications or as shown on the drawings will be considered provided request for approval of such items is received by the Architect in writing by; 12:00 Noon, Seven Calendar Days Before Date Set by the Contractor for Receipt of Bids Each request for substitution must be accompanied by complete catalog sheets and other pertinent data, which will make it possible to properly evaluate the items proposed for use. If, in the Architect's opinion the item or items proposed for use are equal to the items specified in design, quality, material and function, he will issue an Addendum listing all such items approved for use. Requests for approval received after the above time and date will not be considered. Requests for substitution of mechanical and electrical items may be sent directly to respective consulting engineers with copy to the Architect. Bidders shall base their bid upon the use of any of the items specifically named in the specifications or on the drawings, or as approved in an Addendum issued by the Architect. Changes or substitutions will not be considered after the award of the contract except those that will result in a better job, a savings to the Owner, or both. Proposals shall be submitted by subcontractors and suppliers on forms designated by the General Contractor. Reference this Project Manual and accompanying drawings and submit bid proposal as follows: a. Per drawings and specifications, itemize costs by each specification section. Show total costs (taxes, freight, etc.) b. List any specification item exclusion separately RDAI 2363.00 00205 -2 C. Note all addenda included in bid. d. Indicate the number of working days required to complete bid work. If work is phased, provide time schedule for each phase of work. (i.e. electrical - electrical rough -in and electrical trim work would be different phases of work.) Return drawings and Project Manual with bid to the General Contractor not later than date requested. Any bid returned to the General Contractor incomplete including any and all information herein requested, will be rejected upon such determination by the Project Manager. If the party bidding is an incorporated body, the proposal shall be signed by the, president and secretary or a duly authorized agent and be accompanied by the corporation seal. If not a corporation, all interested bidders must sign the proposal. The proposal form and all attached documents together with any required proposal guaranty, shall be placed in a sealed envelope marked for identification and delivered to the place indicated by the Contractor prior to the date and hour stipulated. 8. SALES AND USE TAXES Bidders shall include all applicable sales and use taxes. PLANS FOR REFERENCE Complete sets of plans and specifications for all portions of the work may be examined by Contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers at the offices of the General Contractor and /or Architect. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO SUBCONTRACT BIDDERS RDAI 2363.00 00205 -3 DOCUMENT 00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 1.01 SITE SURVEY AND SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION Each Bidder shall be fully familiar with the following documents that have been prepared for the Owner by its separate consultants. A. Subsurface Investigation (Geotechnical Report): Preliminary Geotechnical Study Proposed Mountain View Development Apollo Park 442 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado Hepworth Pawlak Geotechnical Glenwood Springs, Colorado Job No. 0297 May 25, 2006 Supplemental Geotechnical Study Proposed Mountain View Development Apollo Park 442 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado Hepworth Pawlak Geotechnical Glenwood Springs, Colorado Job No. 106 0297 July 24, 2006 C. The above documents will be available for examination at the offices of the General Contractor and Architect. In preparing his bid, each Bidder shall consider and evaluate data contained in the above documents as well as the drawings and Project Manual prepared by the Architect. D. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. The data contained in the above listed documents is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect does not guarantee its accuracy or completeness. END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS C t s U DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA Document A201 -1997, issued by the American Institute of Architects, is hereby made a part of this Project Manual to the same extent as if written herein in full. 2. Copies of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction are on file and may be referred to at the office of the Architect or may by purchased at a nominal charge from any dealer in architect supplies. I0 1 2 0 0019 06149I RDAI 2363.00 00700 -1 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", AIA Document A201 -1997, Fifteenth'Edition.. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, Subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. All divisions of the Specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. To the extent, if at all, that any provision of the General or Supplementary Conditions shall conflict with the agreement between the Owner and General Contractor, the terms of the Owner /Contractor Agreement shall govern. SC.2 MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.1 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS, 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Add the following to 1.2.1: Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, Specifications, and Drawings, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. The precedence of the Construction Documents is in the following sequence: 1 Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the original construction documents. .2 Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or on the Drawings, the Architect shall decide which stipulation will provide the best installation and his decision shall be final. .3 Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall have precedence over the Drawings. .4 In the Drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of a larger scale over those of a smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. 2.2 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following: 3.4.4 Bidders shall base their bid upon the use of any of the items specifically named in the Specifications or on the Drawings, or as approved in an Addendum issued by the Architect. No changes or substitutions will be considered after the award of the contract except those that will result in a better job, a savings to the Owner, or both. RDAI 2363.00 00800 -1 2.3 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Add the following: Building permits shall be obtained by the General Contractor. Electrical and mechanical permits shall be obtained by the mechanical and electrical subcontractors. The mechanical contractors will pay for any required sewer, water and gas tap fees. The Owner will pay for plant investment fees and connection charges based on the cost of mains serving the site. The Contractor shall call for all inspections required by the local building inspection authority. Assessments against the property are the obligation of the Owner and will be paid by the Owner as necessary to assure issuance of permits specified above. This includes sewer and water charges for capital improvements and line extensions. 2.4 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add the following: The schedule shall indicate the start and completion of each of the elements on the Schedule of Values. The schedule shall indicate the major dependencies among elements on the schedule. The completion time shall be as specified in the Agreement. The schedule shall be revised when the completion time is revised by change order. See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures. 2.5 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE See Specifications, Division 1, for record documents requirements. 2.6 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures. 2.7 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING See Specifications, Division 1, for additional requirements. 2.8 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.15 CLEANING UP See Specifications, Division 1, for additional requirements. 2.9 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT, 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Change "21 days" to read "ten days ". RDAI 2363.00 00800 -2 2.10 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT, 4.3.7 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME 4.3.7.2 Delete and substitute the following: 4.3.7.2 Extension of the Contract completion time will be made for delays due to weather conditions only when such conditions are more severe and extended than those reflected by the ten year average for the month as evidenced by the Climatological Data, U.S. Department of Commerce, for the Project area and only if a request for such an extension of time is received within ten (10) days of the first date of delay. It is understood that delays due to weather conditions will be allowed on a tentative basis only and that a final decision by the Architect will be reserved until the Project is substantially completed. In allowing delays for weather, the Architect will be entitled to consider weather conditions prevailing throughout the entire contract period. Extensions of time due to weather or other allowable reasons will be granted on the basis of 1.4 calendar days for every working day lost with each separate extension figured to the nearest whole calendar day. No more than 30 calendar days extension for weather will be allowed during the total construction period. Extensions for other reasons allowed by the General Conditions shall not be limited. 2.11 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK, 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.2 Change the word "may" to "shall ". 2.12 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK, 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.3 Delete and substitute the following: 7.3.3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a construction change directive shall be determined in one of the following ways: I By unit prices named in the bid or subsequently agreed upon. Unit prices shall include all Contractor's costs, including materials, labor, supervision, taxes, insurance, bond overhead and profit, and shall be applied directly to the quantities or the differences in quantities for which unit prices are requested. .2 By reasonable estimated cost of: a. Labor, including foremen (labor costs shall be direct costs) b. Social Security and old age and unemployment contributions c. Materials entering permanently into the Work (including taxes) d. The ownership or rental cost of construction plant and equipment during the time of use on the extra work. .3 The Contractor may include a sum up to 15% of the total of the foregoing items as compensation to cover the cost of supervision, overhead, bond, insurance, profit and any other general expenses; subcontractor and second level subcontractors may include a sum up to 10% for such expenses. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the allowance for mark -up shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any. RDAI 2363.00 00800 -3 .4 The Contractor's proposal shall include an itemized breakdown showing quantities, unit costs, hours and rates of labor, and any other costs in such detail as may be required to allow the reasonableness of costs to be established. Similar cost information covering subcontractor's work shall be included as part of the Contractor's proposal. Minimum charges for "handling" will not be acceptable. Request for quotations shall be returned to the Architect within ten (10) calendar days of receipt by the Contractor. 2.13 ARTICLE 8 - TIME, 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add the following Subparagraphs: 8.2.4 The Contractor must agree to commence work within seven (7) days following receipt of a written "Notice to Proceed ". 8.2.5 Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence and that the Owner will suffer financial loss and substantial damages if the Work is not completed within the time stated in the Agreement, such time commencing from the Notice to Proceed, plus any extensions thereof allowed by Change Order. 2.14 ARTICLE 8 - TIME, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 Delete the words "or other causes beyond the Contractor's control ". 2.15 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Add the following: The Schedule of Values shall be prepared in such a manner that each major item of subcontract work is shown as a single line item on AIA Document G703, Application and Certificate for Payment, Continuation sheet. As a guide, each section of the Project Manual should be shown as a single line item. 2.16 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Change to read as follows: 9.3.1 On or before the fifth day of etch month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for all work completed through the last day of the previous month. Application for Payment shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require and reflecting retainage as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The form of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. 9.3.2 Add the following: RDAI 2363.00 00800 -4 In order to facilitate and better assure prompt deliveries of materials, the Owner will advance payment to the Contractor for the full value of all materials, less the contract retained percentage safely stored within the county where the Project is located for delivery as needed to the site of the Work. Such stored materials must be properly tagged as to material and job identification, must be available for inspection by the Architect, and such requests for payment must be accompanied by documentary evidence as to quantity and value of materials. Add the following Subparagraph: 9.3.4 With each application for payment, the Contractor shall submit monthly Progress Charts comparing the "work in place' progress to the Progress Schedule. 2.17 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 Add the following: .8 Failure of the Contractor to submit Progress Charts in comparison to Progress Schedule with application for payment. .9 Failure to comply with any laws, ordinances, regulations or orders of any public authority governing the performance of the Work. The Owner shall make monthly progress payments as described in 9.6 until the scheduled (including time extensions made by change order) time for substantial completion. If the Project is not substantially complete at this time, the Owner will not make further progress payments until the Project is substantially complete. 2.18 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 Change to Read: 9.6.1 Provided the Architect has issued a certificate on or before the 12th day of the month, the Owner shall make payment on or before the 25th day of the month. Until final payment, the Owner will pay 90% of the amount due the Contractor on account of each line item of each progress payment. If the manner of completion of the Work and its progress are and remain satisfactory to the Architect, and in the absence of other good and sufficient reasons, for work category shown to be 50% or more complete in the application for payment, the Owner, may, without reduction of previous retainage, certify any remaining progress payments for each line item to be paid in full. The full contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect or for other good and sufficient reasons. 2.19 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Add the following: RDAI 2363.00 00800 -5 ...all major systems are operational and all safety features are completed. 2.20 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 Change to read as follows: 9.9.1 The Contractor agrees to the use and occupancy of a portion or unit of the Project before formal acceptance by the Owner under the following conditions: 1 A Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be prepared and executed as provided in Paragraph 9.1 of the accompanying General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, except that when, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor is chargeable with unwarranted delay in completing Work or other contract requirements, the signature of the Contractor will not be required. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be accompanied by a written endorsement of the Contractor's insurance carrier and surety permitting occupancy by the Owner during the remaining period of Project Work. .2 Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed by the Contractor as being acceptance of that part of the Project to be occupied. .3 The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of the Project resulting from the Owner's occupancy. .4 Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing claims in behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other. Use and occupancy by the Owner prior to Project acceptance does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to maintain all insurance and bonds required of the Contractor under the Contract until the Project is completed and accepted by the Owner. 2.21 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Add the following: If the Work shall be completed, but final completion thereof shall be prevented through delay or correction of minor defects or unavailability of materials, or other causes beyond the control of the Contractor, the Owner at his discretion may release to the Contractor such amounts as may be in excess of three times the cost of completing the unfinished work or the cost of correcting the defective work. 9.10.2 Add the following: 6) all guarantees, warranties and certificates, 7) operating and maintenance manuals, 8) identification lists of materials and equipment, 9) Inspection Certificates and 10) record documents; and the Contractor has demonstrated to the Owner the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment. 9.10.3 Delete. See revised Subparagraph 9.10.1. 2.22 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.2 Delete and substitute the following: RDAI 2363.00 00800 -6 11.1.2 The Contractor shall obtain and maintain throughout the life of the Project, the following insurance: .1 Workmen's Compensation: Amounts and coverage as required by law. .2 Comprehensive General Liability (to include complete operation): a) Bodily Injury: $1 million single limit. b) Property Damage: $1 million single limit. .3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability (including owned, nonowned and hired vehicles); a) Bodily Injury: $1 million single limit. b) Property Damage: $1 million single limit. .4 Excess Liability (Umbrella coverage): $2 million 11.1.4 Add the following: Certificates of Insurance shall include the statement that the hold harmless clause as required under General Conditions Article 3.18 is included in the policy. 2.23 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4. 10 and substitute the following: 11.4.1 The Owner shall procure and maintain at his own expense, until completion of all work and acceptance thereof, a builder's risk insurance policy insuring against all risks of physical loss or damage" as the term is commonly construed in the insurance industry, insuring the entire Project against such physical loss or damage. If other special insurance not provided for herein is desired by the Contractor, the Contractor shall purchase such insurance at his expense. 11.4.2 Such insurance shall be written on a "Completed Value" form in an amount not less than the final completed value of the Project; less cost of site preparation (including fences necessary to secure work area) and excavation, foundations below the lowest basement floor, underground pipes and wiring, sidewalks, curbs and gutters: and shall name as insured 4he Owner and Contractor. It shall be understood that subcontractors and second level subcontractors are insured as to their interests in the partially completed Project. 11.4.3 Any insured loss is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insured, as their interest may appear. 11.4.4 The insurance policy shall provide for necessary access to the Project by Owner as follows: "Permission is hereby granted for the Owner to occupy such portion of the premises completed or suitable for occupancy prior to final acceptance of the entire Project, any provision of the policy to the contrary notwithstanding." 11.4.5 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages, caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under this Paragraph 11.3 except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as Trustee. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by subcontractors and sub - subcontractors. RDAI 2363.00 00800 -7 11.4.6 The following are specific exclusions: This insurance does not cover glass breakage, any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, k staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the Work, or any temporary structures or trailers used by the Contractor or any subcontractor or material supplier. 11.4.7 The General Contractor shall pay the deductible amount when making a claim against the property insurance policy. Deductible shall not exceed $1,000. 2.24 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 Delete and substitute the following: 11.5.1 Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner and General Contractor, the General Contractor shall furnish prior to beginning work, a performance bond in the amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of this Contract and also a labor and material payment bond in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100 %) of the Contract amount as security for the payment to all persons performing labor on the Project under this Contract and furnishing all materials in connection with this contract. The bonds shall be issued by a surety licensed to contract business in the state of Colorado and approved by the Owner. 2.25 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS, 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 Delete and substitute the following: 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the state of Colorado. 2.26 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS, 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Add the following: The Contractor shall not use any material or equipment represented by samples found to be unacceptable. See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures and cost of testing. SC.3 ADDITION TO ARTICLES OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 3.1 ARTICLE 15 - MEASUREMENTS Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the Project and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings. 3.2 ARTICLE 16 - LEGAL ACTIONS As a condition precedent to and as additional consideration for the award of any contract or subcontract pursuant to these Specifications, the Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, engineers, and other.parfies to the performance of the Work R DAI 2363.00 00800 -8 required by these Specifications, do agree that in the event any party institute a suit against any party because of any alleged failure to perform properly hereunder, or any alleged error, omission, breach of warranty, negligence or mere malpractice hereunder; and if such suit is not successfully prosecuted to a judgment in favor of the party plaintiff, or if it is dismissed, or if a judgment is rendered for any defendant or defendants, the party instituting the suit hereby agrees to pay in full all actual costs of defense, including but not limited to attorney fees, expert witness fees, costs of investigations in preparation for trial, professional time expended by principals and employees of the prevailing party and that the same shall be taxed as cost in said action and judgment entered thereon. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS RDAI 2363.00 00800 -9 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01100 SUMMARY A. Division 1 - General Requirements govern work under all divisions of specifications. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA A. Drawings: See index on drawings. B. Project Manual: Mountain View Residences on Gore Creek, Vail, Colorado, dated November 1; 2006. C. Addenda: All Addenda issued prior to bidding. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Failure to Visit Site: Will not relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and specifications without additional cost to Owner. 1.04 CONTRACTS A. Single Contract: All work under this contract will be executed under one prime contract between Owner and General Contractor. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Operations of Contractor: Limited to areas where work is indicated. 1.06 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate work of various sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Equipment: Verify that characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. 1. Electrical Requirements: a. Comply with NEC. b. Provide UL listed and labeled products where applicable. C. Spaces: Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. RDAI 2363.00 01 100-1 D. Finished Areas: In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01100 -2 SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES A. Site Mobilization Conference: Meeting will be scheduled by Architect at site immediately prior to Contractor move -in. Representatives of Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors, Geotechnical Engineer, Owner, Architect and Architect's Consultants will be present. Job site procedures to include following items will be discussed: 1. Procedures for maintaining project record documents. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls. 4. Temporary utilities. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Materials testing. 7. Services of the Geotechnical Engineer. 8. Requirements of start-up trades. 9. Building layout. 10. Communications with Architect's consultants. 11. Access to and use of site in relation to continued use of existing facilities. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Meetings: Contractor will schedule regular periodic meetings at Contractor's job site field office. Representatives of Owner and Architect will be invited to attend. Also invited as appropriate to items under discussion, will be selected subcontractors and suppliers and Architect's consultants. Following items will be discussed: 1. Review of work progress since previous meetings. 2. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 3. Problems that impede construction schedule. 4. Review of off -site fabrication, delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to construction schedule. 7. Plan progress, schedule during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of schedules. 9. Maintenance of quality standards. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Review proposed changes for effect on other trades, construction schedule and completion date. 12. Coordination of separate contracts. 13. Other-business as required. B. Agenda and Minutes: Contractor shall establish agenda, subject to Owner and Architect review, and keep and distribute minutes of progress meetings and lists of those present and others as directed. 1. Contractor: Advise Architect at least 24 hours in advance of meeting regarding items added to agenda. RDAI 2363.00 01312 -1 C. Persons Representing Contractor at Meetings: Have authority to commit Contractor to solutions agreed upon in meetings. To maximum extent possible, assign same person or persons to represent Contractor at meetings throughout progress of work. D. Coordination Meetings: Progress meetings shall in no way be considered substitute for Contractor /subcontractor coordination meetings. END OF SECTION R DAI 2363.00 01312 -2 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. List of Subcontractors: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. General Conditions. B. Products List: 1. Section 01 600 Product Requirements C. Progress Schedule: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. D. Schedule of Values: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. E. Performance Bond /Labor and Material Payment Bond: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. General and Supplementary Conditions. F. Insurance Certificates: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. G. Applications for Payment: 1. General Conditions. H. Project Record Documents: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals I. Warranties: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. J. Final Paperwork: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. K. Contractor's Quality Control System: 1. Section 01450 Quality Control. 1.02 GENERAL A. Submittals: Made early enough to account for processing described below and reasonable period for review by Architect and Engineers. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Schedule: In form of chart and indicate start and completion of each of elements on Schedule of Values. 1. Completion Time: As specified.in Agreement. Revise schedule when completion time is revised by change order. RDAI 2363.00 01330 -1 B. Schedule Submittal: Within ten days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of preliminary construction schedule. 1. Within 10 days after receipt of review comments on preliminary schedule, submit one reproducible and four prints of construction schedule. 2. With each monthly application for payment, submit four prints of updated construction schedule indicating actual work progress in comparison to scheduled progress. C. Estimated Payments: Prepare and submit estimate of partial payments as reflected by estimated work progress with submittal of construction schedule. D. Monthly Reports: 1. With each monthly application for payment, submit itemized report of delivery status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and material, including shop drawings and status of shop and field fabricated work. 2. If completion of any part of work or delivery of materials is behind construction schedule, submit plan for bringing work up to schedule. 3. Owner shall have right to withhold progress payments for work if Contractor fails to update and submit progress schedule and reports as specified. E. Contractor's Responsibility: Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be usurpation of Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of Contract Documents. 1.04 SUBMITTALS LIST, SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. Submittal: Within 30 days after award of contract, and before any items are submitted for review, submit to Architect two copies of submittal list and schedule. B. Schedule: Compile complete schedule of all submittals anticipated to be made during progress of work. 1. Include list of each type of item for which Contractor's drawings, shop drawings, product data, Certificates of Compliance, samples, warranties or other types of submittals are required. 2. On acceptance by Architect, Contractor shall adhere to schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted. C. Code Designation: On schedule, designate - each item with number code utilizing specification section five digit numbers. 1. Each Submittal: Marked with same code designation. D. Coordination: Coordinate schedule with subcontractors and materials suppliers. E. Revisions: Revise and update schedule on monthly basis as necessary to reflect conditions and sequences. Promptly submit any revised schedules to Architect for review. Transmittals: Include transmittal letter with each submittal, identify item by above code designation and reference to specification section. Use separate transmittal for each submittal. I . Each Submittal: Have chronological submittal number. RDAI 2363.00 01330-2 2. Resubmittals: Have original submittal number and letter in alphabetical order for each resubmitta. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Submittals: Broken down into parts so that individual parts can be resubmitted without confusion. G. Deviations: Clearly mark and note any deviations from Contract Documents in submittals. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Make particular note of field- measured dimensions, as -built conditions, and conditions requiring special coordination with other contractors and requirements of activities of Owner. B. Subcontractor: Submit one reproducible tracing and two prints per shop drawing sheet and specified number of samples to Contractor. C. Contractor: 1. Review shop drawings for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with Contract Documents. Make notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and prints. 2. Stamp with Contractor's stamp /date. Signature of individual who reviewed shop drawings is required below Contractor's stamp. 3. Print as required for Contractor's record. 4. Send reproducible tracings and three prints of each to Architect. 5. Shop drawings not stamped and signed by Contractor will be returned. D. Architect: 1. Check drawings by making notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and prints, stamp "No Exceptions Taken ", "Revise and Resubmit ", "Rejected ", etc. as required. 2. In event that shop drawings require consultant's check, route reproducible and print through consultant and back to Architect as necessary. Consultant will retain one set of prints. 3. Retain one set of prints for record and transmit one set to Owner if required. 4. Return marked reproducibles to Contractor. E. Contractor: 1. Send reproducible tracings to subcontractor. Subcontractor: 1. Print necessary copies for record, distribution, etc. G. Resubmittal: In event shop drawings have to be resubmitted to Architect, original reproducible tracings and prints shall be returned directly to Contractor. Subcontractor shall make his corrections and re -route new reproducible tracings and prints as outlined above. H. References: Reference shop drawings to applicable drawings and specification sections to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. RDAI 2363.00 01330 -3 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Subcontractor: Submit six copies of brochure material and any required samples. B. Routing: Routing will be as indicated above for shop drawings with Architect and Engineer retaining three copies for file and returning three copies to Contractor for his file and distribution to subcontractor as applicable. C. Reference: Reference product data to applicable drawings and specification sections to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. D. When contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to submittal, clearly indicate which portion of contents is being submitted for review. 1.07 JOB SITE DOCUMENTS A. Documents: Keep complete set of accepted shop drawings or product data at jobsite. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field Measurements: Responsibility of Contractor. 1.09 SAMPLES A. Checklist: Architect will provide Contractor with checklist indicating materials where color, texture or finish is subject to selection by Architect. Certain other samples may also be requested for use by Architect in preparation of color and material sample presen- tations for Owner. Submittal: Promptly after receipt of checklist, assemble and deliver to Architect complete collection of required samples. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in quantity that is required to be returned plus one that will be retained by Architect. C. Samples: Bear tag or label providing following information: 1. Project name and location. 2. Manufacturer, supplier. 3. Name, finish, and composition of material. 4. Location of where material is to be used. 5. Specification section number. 6. Labels: Large enough for acceptance stamp. D. Selection: Upon receipt of complete collection of samples, Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make selections and prepare and deliver to Contractor schedule covering items subject to selection. Architect reserves right not to make individual determination or selections until all samples of all materials are submitted. 1.10 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE A. Certificates: 1. Where Certificates of Compliance are specified, show on each certification name and location of work, name and address of Contractor, quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate applies, and name of manufacturer. 2. Certification: In form of letter or company standard forms. RDAI 2363.00 01330 -4 3. Certificates: Signed by officer of manufacturer. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: Show date of testing, specified requirements for which testing was performed, and results of tests. END OF SECTION d .. RDAI 2363.00 01330 -5 SECTION 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PERMITS AND FEES A. See General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Compliance: All contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect at time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to following: Applicable local codes and ordinances International Building Code, 2003 Edition International Mechanical Code, 2003 Edition International Plumbing Code, 2003 Edition International Fire Code, 2003 Edition International Energy conservation Code, 2003 Edition Governing fire department requirements Utility company requirements State Department of Labor Requirements State Department of Health Requirements National Fire Protection Association Standards State and Federal Safety and Health Laws NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2002 Edition Americans with Disabilities Act /Accessibility Standards B. Discrepancies: If discrepancies occur between Contract Documents, local codes, local utility requirements, etc., most stringent requirements shall apply. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01410 -1 SECTION 01420 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS REFERENCES A. Drawing or Schedule Abbreviations: As noted on Drawings or schedules. 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Reference in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized authorities and other institutions include following organizations that are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations or acronyms: AA Aluminum Association AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM ASTM International AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWC American Wood Council AWS American Welding Society BIA Brick Industry Association CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. CRA California Redwood Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council MIA Marble Institute of America MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority RDAI 2363.00 01420 -1 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association NPVLMA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturer's Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PTI Post - Tensioning Institute RTI Roof Tile Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPC Southern Pine Council SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SWI Steel Window Institute TCA Tile Council of America TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association TPI Truss Plate Institute UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USTC&TBA United States Tennis Court and Track Builders Association WCLA West Coast Lumbermen's Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumberman Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Association B. Other Abbreviations and Acronyms: ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines AESS Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel CMU Concrete Masonry Unit CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer FS Federal Specification HDPE High Density Polyethylene HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning IBC International Building Code IEQ Indoor Environmental Quality LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design MDF Medium Density Fiberboard MIL Military Specification NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA) OSB Oriented Strand Board PS Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) SIP Structural Insulated Panel SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) RDAI 2363.00 01420 -2 PVC Polyvinyl Chloride UBC Uniform Building Code VOC Volatile Organic Content 1.03 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION A. These Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. 1. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall ", "in conformity therewith ", "shall be ", "as noted on the Drawings ", "a ", "the ", are intentional. 2. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference. 3. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. 4. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" shall mean supply and install. 1.05 STANDARDS REFERENCED BY SPECIFICATIONS A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or federal standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more stringent requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of Architect's consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Effective Date: Version of standard referenced shall be that current and in effect as of date of issue of Project Manual, except when specific date is specified or when standard is part of applicable code which includes edition date, in which case the governing version shall be established as follows: 1. Date of standard adopted or referenced by code shall govern, unless a later version is referenced by date in the Specifications, in which case the more current version shall govern. 2. For standards not adopted or referenced by code but referenced by date in the Specifications, the version referenced in the Specifications shall govern over a later version adopted by an association or trade group and in effect as of the date of issue of the Project Manual. C. Copies: When required by individual sections, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work governed by reference standard. 1. ASTM International Standards: For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or contact ASTM Customer Service at serviceCastm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM Standards volume information, refer to the standard's Document Summary page on the ASTM website. RDAI 2363.00 01420 -3 1.02 UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY A. Where UL design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes 1 and 2, latest edition, in addition to requirements of applicable specification sections. B. Maintain copy of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes 1 and 2, latest edition, on site during all work on UL classified systems. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01 420 -4 SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Cost of Testing: General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 TESTING - GENERAL A. Contractor: Provide equipment and facilities as required, subject to Architect's review, for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. 1. Do not use materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have been made and materials or equipment found to be acceptable. 2. Do not incorporate any product into work which becomes unfit for use after acceptance thereof. B. Testing: Materials or equipment proposed for use may be tested at any time during their preparation or use. Furnish required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of placing of orders to permit testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at site of work. C. Tests: Made by accredited testing laboratory selected by Owner. Except as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of materials and laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with latest standards and tentative methods of ASTM. 1. Specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is included under applicable sections of specifications. 2. Any modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures included for specific materials under their respective sections in specifications shall take precedence over these procedures. 1.03 TESTS PAID FOR BY OWNER A. Control Tests of Fill and Backfill: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 02300 Earthwork. Control Test of Asphalt Paving Base and Finish Courses: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. C. Control Tests of Concrete Work: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. D. Control Tests of Masonry Mortar and Grout: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Sections 04060 Mortar, 04070 Masonry Grout and 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. E. Control Tests of Welding: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 05120 Structural Steel; also the following sections: 1. 05310 Steel Deck. 2. 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. RDAI 2363.00 01450 -1 1.04 OTHER TESTING A. Following Testing: Performed at expense of installing contractor: 1. Other Tests: Any other tests required by Contract Documents not listed in article above. 2. Any additional tests required because of any tests that fail subject to following conditions: a. Quantity and Nature of Tests: Determined by Architect. b. Tests: Taken in presence of Architect. c. Proof of Noncompliance: Contractor liable for corrective action that Architect feels is required including complete removal and replacement of defective material. 3. Material Substitution: Any tests of material or equipment offered as substitute for specified item on which test may be required in order to prove its compliance with specifications. B. Contractor: May have tests performed on material and equipment for his own information and job control so long as Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials. 1.05 TEST REPORTS A. Reports of tests made by testing laboratories shall be distributed by testing laboratory as follows: 1 Copy - Contractor 1 Copy - Applicable Supplier or Subcontractor 1 Copy - Owner 1 Copy - Applicable Engineer 1 Copy - Architect Other Copies - As Directed 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Quality Control: Establish system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractors, to ensure conformance to Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification. 1. Control System: a. Establish for all construction except where Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories and engineers employed by Owner. b. Specifically include all testing required by various sections of Specifications. B. Quality Control System: Means by which Contractor assures himself that construction complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations and keyed to proposed construction schedule. C. Records: Maintain correct records on appropriate form for all inspections and tests performed, instructions received from Architect and actions taken as result of those instructions. 1. Records: Include evidence that required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. RDAI 2363.00 01450 -2 2. Document inspections and tests as required by each section of Specifications. 1.07 SPECIAL INSPECTION A. Regulatory Requirements: If required by the Building Official, special inspections will be provided in accordance with Section 1704 of the 2001 IBC. B. Special inspection services will be paid by Owner. C. Special Inspector: Qualified person acceptable to Building Official with jurisdiction over this project to inspect particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection... D. Special Inspection Reports: 1. Distribution: a. Building official: One b. Architect: One c. Structural Engineer: One d. Contractor: One 2. Final Report: Special Inspector will submit and distribute signed report stating whether the Work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved drawings and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the IBC as adopted by the local building code jurisdiction. Work To Be Inspected By Special Inspector: See Divisions 2 through 16 specific requirements. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01450 -3 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. General: 1. General Contractor: a. Provide for temporary electrical service to site including installation of meter. b. Remove temporary service to site upon completion of work. c. Pay for electricity used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion. 2. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide temporary wiring, outlets, lights, etc. from load side of meter as required for construction power and lighting during construction period. b. Remove temporary service and distribution system from load side of meter and distribution upon completion of work. 3. Service and Distribution System: 120/208 volt, 1 phase, 3 wire. a. Properly ground in accordance with NEC. b. Provide ground fault interrupters as required by code. Temporary Power Distribution: 1. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide, install, and maintain temporary overhead wiring to building and temporary loop providing temporary power and lighting service as specified. b. Provide minimum of one double duplex 120V outlet for every 100 lineal feet Of temporary loop. 2. Each Contractor: a. Provide extension cords necessary to convey electricity from temporary loop outlets to locations of work. b. Provide special power required for welders or other special equipment. 3. Distribution equipment and wiring devices for temporary power and lighting need not be new, however, installation shall conform to safe general practice as required by OSHA. C. Temporary Lighting: 1. Division 16 Contractor: Provide one light for every interior room regardless of square footage area except closets and pipe chases. In larger rooms, provide one light for every 750 sq. ft. 2. Each Contractor: Provide plug -in portable lights as required for task lighting. D. Use of Permanent Systems: 1. After work is completed to extent that permanent electric service into building is installed and permanent outlets are available, permanent system may be used as necessary for power and light. 2. Permanent branch circuit wiring may be used to supply pigtail lights if protected by properly sized circuit breaker or fuse. Do not use permanent receptacles for construction power. 3. Each Contractor: a. Be responsible for damage to permanent wiring or fixtures as result of temporary use. b. Replace receptacles and device plates showing. wear or abuse. RDAI 2363.00 01 500 -1 4. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide lamps necessary to temporarily light work in permanently installed fixtures. b. Clean permanently installed light fixtures that are used for temporary lighting during construction using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. c. Remove lamps used temporarily in permanent fixtures and replace with new lamps at completion of work. 1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat necessary for execution of work. Install, maintain and operate temporary heating apparatus in manner to facilitate work, so work can continue and so finished work will not be damaged. Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures necessary for holding temporary heat for masonry and concrete work and for thawing frozen ground. C. Use of Permanent System: 1. After building is entirely permanently enclosed, glazing of exterior openings completed, permanent or temporary doors on exterior openings and permanent heating system installed and capable of being adequately controlled, permanent heating system may be used to provide heat for building. 2. Division 15 Contractor: a. In using permanent heating system, assume complete responsibility for its proper operation and for any damage that may occur to heating apparatus or any phase of work except such wear and tear that would ordinarily result from normal usage. b. At completion and before work is accepted by Owner, clean air vents and coils, clean cleanable filters and replace replacement air filters. 3. General Contractor: Pay for gas and electricity used in connection with operation of permanent system up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion. 4. General Contractor and Division 15 Contractor: If permanent heating system is used during construction, remain responsible for full mechanical warranty from date of Notice of Substantial Completion. 1.03 TEMPORARY WATER A. Temporary Water: Provide as required for execution of work. 1. Provide service, temporary connections; plumbing, piping, etc. necessary to convey same to places needed. 2. Pay for water used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion. . 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain, in neat and sanitary condition, adequate chemical toilet facilities for use of employees engaged on work, in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances. 1. Toilets in existing buildings shall not be used. R D A 1 2363.00 01500 -2 1.05 FIELD OFFICE AND OTHER TEMPORARY STRUCTURES Y A. Feld Office: Provide and maintain suitable temporary field office. 1. Telephone Service: Install telephone in field office. Pay for installation, maintenance, removal and other charges for use of telephone. 2. Make office and telephone available for use by Owner and Architect. B. Temporary Structures: Provide temporary structures and storage areas as required. 1. Remove offices and other temporary structures from site upon completion of work. 2. Locate on site in orderly manner as determined by Contractor. 1.06 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for protection of public and general protection of workmen on project. 1. Provide warning signs against hazards created by such items as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, window openings, stairways and falling materials. a. Danger lights: Keep lighted each night from sundown to sunrise. 2. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers and active fire hydrants where required. Maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction. 3. Provide temporary walks, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and signals, etc. required for work by applicable safety laws and building codes. 4. Maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout term of work. Remove at completion of work. Repair and replace work damaged by temporary protective facilities. B. Each Subcontractor: 1. If in performance of his subcontract, it becomes necessary, convenient or advisable to remove, replace or interfere with any safety devices or controls installed by Contractor or another subcontractor; subcontractor shall replace or restore such devices at his expense. 2. In event such safety devices or controls are not so replaced or restored, subcontractor shall reimburse Contractor for doing so for subcontractor's account, or by deduct change order to his subcontract. 1.07 ELEVATORS A. Elevators: Not be used by trades other than elevator installer without written permission of Architect. 1. in event permission is given, trade using elevator shall assume full responsibility for protection of equipment, cars, doors and frames, including refinishing as may be required, and shall pay elevator installer his standard rates for servicing elevator during period of such temporary use. 2. In addition, user agrees to sign elevator installer temporary acceptance form and be bound by terms and conditions thereof. 3. Usage of any elevator shall not affect any conditions of warranty or warranty period for elevators as specified. 1.08 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS A. Scaffolding: Provide as necessary for work. RDA[ 2363.00 01500 -3 B. Runways, Guard Rails, Platforms and Similar Temporary Construction: Provide and maintain for safe performance of contract. 1. Provide facilities of type and arrangement as required for their specific use, substantially constructed, strongly supported, and well secured. 2. Comply with applicable safety laws and codes. 1.09 CLOSURES A. Temporary Closures: Erect over openings when weather conditions render such action necessary for proper installation of work. 1.10 PROTECTION FOR WORK IN PLACE A. Work in Place: When subject to injury because of operations being carried on adjacent, cover, board up, or substantially enclose with adequate protection. 1. Block and board heads, jambs and sills of permanent openings used as thoroughfares for introduction of work and materials. 2. Construct forms of protection in manner that, upon completion, entire work will be delivered to Owner in undamaged condition. [ 1� I 1 t K �P► f► 3 f 3 1 Z� C� P► r�i T A. Construction Fence: Provide as required for security and protection of the public. 1. Fence: 6-0" high chain link fencing with steel posts 8' -0" o.c. 2. Gates: Provide where indicated and required. Keep gates closed and locked after working hours. 3. At completion of exterior work (except site development work), remove fences from the site. Patch asphalt damaged by fence posts after removal. 4. See Section 01100 regarding restrictions on use of site. 1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Sign: Furnish and install painted project identification sign consisting of 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood with exterior glue on 2x and 4x supporting structure. 1. Exact Design, Text and Colors: Provided by Architect, including name of building and Owner, any emblem selected by Owner, Architect's name, names of Architect's principal consultants, Contractor's name, and names of firms executing principal parts of the work. 2. Place in location directed by Architect and maintain for duration of project. 1.13 ACCESS A. Limit access to necessary routes to perform the work. 1.14 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Noise: Minimize noise near residential areas. Properly muffle equipment. Do not operate noisy equipment after hours. C. Dust: Control when construction procedures result in dust that becomes nuisance to Owner, private property or traffic. RDAI 2363.00 01500-4 D. Water: Control flow of water at site to prevent damage to Owner's private and public facilities. E. Debris: Continually police work to prevent collection and scattering of debris uncovered, loosened, or caused by prosecution of work. F. Pollution: Take precautions to prevent spilling and littering of water polluting substances. Do not dump any foreign materials into sewer and storm sewer collection systems. 1. Burning of debris or any other air polluting methods or equipment not allowed. G. Erosion: Provide facilities necessary to prevent erosive damage to Owner's property and to adjacent properties. 1.15 CLEAN UP A. General: Maintain project and site in clean and orderly condition. Periodically clean interior areas. Regularly remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site. B. Each Subcontractor: Cleanup work on daily basis. Failure to clean up will result in cleanup by others with such costs being backcharged to Subcontractor by deduct change order to his subcontract. C. Interior Areas: Clean prior to start of finish work and continue cleaning as required. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to newly coated surfaces. D. Final Cleaning: See Section 01741. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01500 -5 SECTION 01569 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain. 2. Protection of other existing plants indicated to remain. B. Related Sections: 1. Site Grading: Section 02200 Earthwork - Civil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Barricades: Contractor's option as appropriate to serve required purpose and accepted by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. General: Preserve and protect existing trees and plants at site that are designated to remain, and those adjacent to site. B. Barriers: Provide temporary barriers to height of six feet, around each, or around each group, of trees and plants at drip line. C. Trimming: Consult with Architect, and trim agreed on roots and branches that interfere with construction. 1. Employ qualified tree surgeon to remove, and to treat cuts. 2. Trim under Architect's direction. 3. - Do not cut roots greater than 1" in diameter without advance notice to Architect. 4. Cut close to boles in manner that tree will present balanced appearance. 5. Treat scars resulting from removal of branches over 1" in diameter with heavy coat of approved tree paint. D. Root Systems: Maintain natural cover of turf around root systems. Replace turf if necessary. E. Stockpiles: Place stockpiles of topsoil and other excavated material so that they will not slough off onto root systems of existing trees. F. Contaminates: Dispose of solvents, oils and other materials that may be harmful to plant life in containers and remove from site. Remove and replace contaminated soil with good soil at completion of work. RDAI 2363.00 01569 -1 G. Areas Under Trees: Within drip line of existing trees to remain: 1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Do not store materials or products. 3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. 5. Do not leave diesel or gasoline equipment running. H. Protection: Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling and subsequent construction operations, to prevent damage to plant materials. Protect against breaking and skinning of roots and skinning and bruising of bark. 3.02 WATERING A. Trees: Water at least every 14 days during construction period by forming suitable dikes and /or soaking devices at drip line and applying approximately 6" of water each time. Water frequency during winter rain season may be reduced upon acceptance of Architect. 3.03 TREE REMOVAL A. General: Remove trees indicated. Architect will tag trees to be removed. B. Removal: Include new and old stumps of trees and their roots. Fell trees in manner not to injure standing trees, plants and other improvements to remain. If impossible to remove roots, grind stumps to 6" below finish grade. 3.04 REPLACEMENT A. General: Be responsible for care and preservation of existing trees and other plant material that are indicated to remain. B. Replace, or suitably repair, trees and plants designed to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. 1. Architect will determine repair and replacement requirements. 2. For trees impossible to replace, Architect will place value on units based on latest edition of "Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants" prepared by Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01 569 -2 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Products: Include material, equipment and systems. 1•.•- Comply with specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. a. Components of Specified UL Design Assemblies: Products supplied shall be limited to products listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. Components Supplied in Quantity within a Specification Section: Same and interchangeable. 3. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transportation: Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry. B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. C. Inspection: Inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Each Subcontractor: Be responsible for hoisting and stocking of his materials and equipment on site. 1. Material Stocked on Floors: Palletized or packaged in appropriate containers on floor -by -floor basis. 2. Material Stocking: Coordinated with Contractor's superintendent. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturers recommendations. 1. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. B. Exterior Storage Protection: 1. Fabricated Products: Place on sloped supports above ground. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. RDAI 2363.00 01600 -1 C. Inspection: Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under recommended conditions. 1.05 INSTALLATION A. Pre - Installation Conferences: Hold pre - installation meeting at site before installation of each unit of work that requires coordination with other units of work. Installer and manufacturer's representatives of particular work and affected work shall attend. 1. Notify Architect of meeting time. 2. Discuss coordination of work with other work including shop drawings, product data, possible conflicts, compatibility concerns, acceptability of substrates, protection, etc. 3. Record significant discussions at each meeting, agreements, disagreements and final plan of action. Distribute record to those in attendance and to Architect. 4. Do not proceed with unit of work until pre - installation meeting is successfully concluded with agreed upon plan of action. B. Inspection of Substrates: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work and conditions under which work is to be performed. 1. Installer: Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to satisfaction of installer. C. Manufachiier's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements specified or indicated. 1. Notify Architect of any conflicts between manufacturer's instructions or recommendations and requirements specified or indicated. D. Attachment: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work. 1. Secure work true to line and level, and within specified tolerances, or if not specified, industry recognized tolerances. 2. Allow for expansion and building movement. 3. Exposed Joints: a. Provide uniform joint width. b. Arrange joints to obtain best visual effect. c. Refer questionable visual- effect choices to Architect for final decision. E. Measurements and Dimensions: Recheck as integral step of starting each installation. Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of work under conditions to ensure best possible results in coordination with entire project. 1. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 2. Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests to minimize necessity of uncovering work for those purposes. G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard - mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Architect for final decision. RDAI 2363.00 01600 -2 1.06 PRODUCTS LIST k' A. Submittal: Within 30 days after Notice of Award, transmit three copies of list of major products that are proposed for installation, including name of manufacturer. 1. Tabulate products by specifications section number, title, and article number. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. B. Architect: Will promptly reply in writing whether there is reasonable objection to listed items. Failure to object to listed item shall not constitute waiver of requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 PRODUCTS OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Substitution Paragraph: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications. Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications for specified product. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications for specified product. D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option, no substitution allowed. 1.08 LIMITATION ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding Period: Instructions to Bidders specifies times for submitting requests for substitutions. Submit requests to Architect allowing adequate time for review prior to bid and in compliance with requirements of this section. B. After Bidding Period: Requests for substitutions of products after date of Owner - Contractor Agreement will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. C. Substitutions: 1. Will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 2. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance. 3. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted provide specified product. 4. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions. RDAI 2363.00 01600 -3 1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submittal: Submit two copies of each request. Submit separate request for each substitution. 1. Identify products by specifications section and article numbers. 2. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of products, and model or catalog number. 3. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. B. Documentation: Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01330. 2. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variation, and reference to specification section and article numbers. 3. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and specified product. 4. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 5. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products. 6. Reference UL Fire Resistance Directory design number if applicable. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION A. Request for Substitution: Representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product: 1. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 2. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 3. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution that may later become apparent. B. Replacement: If substituted products do not meet or exceed above requirements, whether before, during, or after incorporated into work, Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, replace substituted products with products originally specified. 1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Architect: Will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. 1. If accepted by Architect, products proposed for substitution will be accepted subject to modifications by manufacturer, if necessary, to meet detailed requirements of drawings and specifications. 2. Architect will not make exhaustive attempt to determine that products proposed for substitution are equal to, or can be modified in order to be equal to specified products. B. Architect's Acceptance: 1. During Bidding Period: Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda. Acceptances of substitutions during bid period are conditional upon further investigation after award of contract. 2. After Award of Contract: Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. R DA 1 2363.00 0 1600 -4 C. For Accepted Products: Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples in accordance with Section 01330. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01600 -5 SECTION 01722 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Field engineering services required for proper execution and completion of work under this contract. B. Related Sections: 1. Record Documents: Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. 1.02 SITE SURVEY A. Survey: Prepared for Owner by its separate consultant. 1. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not part of Contract Documents. 2. Data contained in survey is believed to be reliable; however, Architect does not guarantee its accuracy or completeness. 3. Three sets of site survey will be provided to Contractor for its use on this project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of surveyor or professional engineer to be employed by Contractor to Architect for acceptance before beginning work at site. 2. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or engineer shall maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. 3. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of work, submit certificate to Architect signed by surveyor or engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance with Contract Documents. Note any items of non - conformance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Employ land surveyor or professional engineer registered in state of Colorado and acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Surveyor or Engineer: Responsible for location of building and major site elements; establishment of building horizontal and vertical controls; installation of control stakes as required; and final certification that finish grading has been completed within tolerances specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. RDAI 2363.00 01722 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Points: Architect will identify existing control points and property line stakes indicated on drawings and site survey. Immediately upon entering project, locate and maintain benchmarks and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any errors or inconsistencies to Architect before commencing work. B. Permanent Bench Marks: Surveyor or engineer shall establish minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points. C. Batter Boards and Levels: Surveyor or engineer shall stake out building and provide and rigidly set batter boards. 1. Contractor: Remain responsible. for their maintenance and accuracy. 2. From permanent benchmarks surveyor or engineer shall ascertain grades and levels to building as needed. D. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve monuments, benchmarks, property markers, reference points, and stakes. 1. In case of his destruction of these, the Contractor shall be charged with expense of replacement and shall be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. 2. Protect permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or disturbed until properly referenced for relocation. 3. Furnish materials and assistance for proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks. E. Layout and Control by Surveyor or Engineer: 1. Building: Establish building horizontal and vertical controls by instrumentation. 2. Site: Establish lines, levels and locations by instrumentation. Set control stakes for finish grading. Reset stakes as required during progress of work. F. Completion: Upon completion of work, surveyor or engineer shall survey site to verify that locations and elevations required by Contract Documents have been achieved within specified tolerances. G. Each Subcontractor: Provide complete engineering layout for work to be performed under his subcontract, including grades, elevations, and all other engineering required to perform his scope of work. 1. General Contractor: Provide building horizontal controls and elevation controls. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01722 -2 SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: All cutting, fitting and patching including related excavation and backfill, required to complete work and to: 1. Make its parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents:- 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non - structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. B. Related Requirements: 1. Excavation and Backfill: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notification of Architect: Notify Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of project. 3. Integrity of effectiveness of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight- exposed elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: 1. Examine existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of products or performance of work. B. Notification: Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect. Do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions. RDAI 2363.00 01732 -1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value and integrity of affected portion of work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. 1. Provide protection from elements for that portion of project that may be exposed by cutting and patching work. 2. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Provide openings in construction that are required for later work. 1. Various Contractors: Be responsible to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed information for openings. 2. In event of failure to supply this advance information, required cutting shall be done only after concurrence of Architect and at expense of negligent party. B. Cutting: 1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repairs. 2. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. Comply with Section 02300. 3. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: a. Weather- exposed or moisture - resistant elements. b. Sight- exposed finished surfaces. 4. Cut asphalt, concrete or masonry using masonry saw or core drill as applicable. Pneumatic tools will not be allowed unless accepted by Architect. C. Fitting: Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. D. Patching: Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material penetrates or passes through fire - resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with cement grout, plaster, or fire - resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor. E. Finishing: Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. 1. - Work: Accomplish with mechanics skilled in finish trade. 2. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01732 -2 SECTION 01741 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS FINAL CLEANING A. Clean -up during construction: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 CLEANERS A. Cleaners: Professional cleaners with exception of clean up of site and cleaning specifically assigned to installers and applicators under various sections of Specifications. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, carefully and thoroughly clean all surfaces on exterior: concrete, metal, etc. B. Glass: Carefully and thoroughly clean both sides of glass and leave absolutely clean and free from paint, labels, grease, dirt, etc. 1. Cleaners: Professional window cleaners. C. Hardware: Clean and polish hardware and leave clean and free from-paint, grease, dirt, etc. D. Plumbing: Clean and polish plumbing fixtures, fittings and exposed plated piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove labels. E. Electrical: Clean and polish electric fixtures, including glassware, switchplates, etc., and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean items of equipment, mechanical, electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc. G. Floors: 1. Resilient Floor Coverings: Mop with warm water and mild detergent as recommended by manufacturer of flooring, then thoroughly machine buff. 2. Carpeting: Vacuum and clean. Remove all spots as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Concrete Floors: Damp mop or scrub concrete floors as required. 4. Floors: Leave them thoroughly clean when building is turned over to Owner. H. Tile: Remove grout haze, observing the manufacturer's recommendations. Rinse the work thoroughly with clean water. 1.04 COMPLETION A. Entire Work Inside and Out: First -class clean condition upon completion before being accepted by Owner. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 01741 -1 SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.01 FINAL SITE REVIEW A. Procedures: Following project closeout procedure defines responsibilities of Contractor, Owner and Architect in closing project: Step 1 Contractor advises Architect in writing that he has reached "Substantial Completion" and provides list of items to be completed or corrected. Closeout may be conducted by areas or portions of work if requested by Owner. Step 2 Architect inspects work to determine if it is substantially complete, and issues Certificate of Substantial Completion plus 'Punch List" of items to be completed or corrected. Step 3 Contractor completes and /or corrects all punch list items and notifies Architect in writing that his work is ready for final inspection. At this time, final application for payment is submitted. Step 4 Architect makes final inspection. When work is found to be acceptable under Contract Documents, and contract fully performed, Architect will issue final Certificate for Payment. END OF SECTION ti RDAI 2363.00 01770 -1 SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Project Site Record Documents: Maintain at project site one record copy of following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Accepted Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 5. Change Orders 6. Other Modifications to Contract 7. Field Test Records B. Record Documents: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. C. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document ". 1. Mark information with contrasting color using ink. 2. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Drawings: Record following information on drawings: 1. Depth of foundation elements. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. E. Specifications: Record following information on specifications: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of products and items of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. F. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above. G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect with transmittal letter containing date, project title and number, Contractor's name and address, title and number of each record document, and certification that each document is complete and accurate. Submittal shall be signed by Contractor. 1.02 FINAL PAPERWORK A. Final Paperwork: Prior to release of final payment, Contractor shall deliver following items to Architect: 1. Inspection Certificates, as applicable. 2. Contractor's Warranty of Materials and Workmanship. 3. Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists, as specified. RDAI 2363.00 01780 -1 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. All Guaranties, Warranties and Submittals, as specified. Receipts for Extra Materials Delivered to the Owner. Miscellaneous Keys, Switches, Etc. Final Application for Payment. Consent of Surety (if any) to Final Payment. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA Form G- 706A). Project Record Documents The above items are described in following articles or applicable sections of the specifications. 1.03 INSPECTION CERTIFICATES Each subcontractor shall, upon completion of the work, secure in triplicate, certificates from any state or local governing bodies having jurisdiction in dictating that the work is in strict accordance with the applicable codes and deliver same to the Contractor for transmittal to the Owner. 1.04 WARRANTIES A. One Year Correction Period: Remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear in work within a period of one year from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. B. Warranty: Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect, in duplicate, a written warranty based on the provisions of the Contract Documents properly signed and notarized. 1. Warranty shall be addressed to the Owner. 2. Provide separate written warranties from mechanical and electrical subcontractors. C. Subcontractor Warranties: Include labor and materials signed by manufacturer or subcontractor as case may be and countersigned by subcontractor. 1. Address warranty to Owner. 2. Deliver to Architect upon completion of project and before or with submission of request for final payment. D. Extended Warranties: Deliver in duplicate extended warranties as specified and dated from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and signed by subcontractors and manufacturers. E. Manufacturer Warranties: Deliver in duplicate manufacturer's warranties as specified and dated from date of Notice of Substantial Completion signed by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's Warranties: Supplement and not replace implied and express warranties provided for by Uniform Commercial Code. Any statements in manufacturer's warranties denying or limiting responsibility for such implied and express warranties shall be void. � RDAI 2363.00 01 780 -2 1.05 MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES AND WRENCHES A. Submittal: At completion of project, account for all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware, keys for electric switches, electrical panels, etc. and turn over to Contractor for transmittal to Owner. 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Equipment Manuals: Upon completion of work, submit three typed and bound copies of operating and maintenance manual or manuals. 8 x 11" in size, to Architect for his acceptance. 1. Manual: Have index with tab dividers for each major equipment section to ' facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment. 2. Identify data within each section with identification numbers as they appear on drawings and by specification section and article number. Data: Include as minimum following data: 1. Alphabetical list of all system components, with name, address and 24 -hour phone number of company responsible for servicing each item during first year of operation. 2. Operating instructions for complete system including: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. b. Major start, operation and shutdown procedure. 3. Maintenance instructions including: a. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. b. Necessary cleaning, replacement and adjustment schedule. 4. Manufacturer's product data on each piece of equipment including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and specifications. c. Parts lists. d. Complete wiring diagrams (as- built). e. Marked or changed prints locating all concealed parts and all variation from original system design. 5. Schematic diagram showing component parts of system. 6. Simplified system description and preventative maintenance program. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: See following sections for equipment requiring operating and maintenance data manuals: '1. Irrigation System. 2. Seeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Exterior Plants. 5. Sectional Overhead Doors. 6. Door Hardware: Section 08710. 7. Carpet: Section 09680 and 09685. 8. Swimming Pool: Section 13157. 9. Elevators: Sections 14240. 10. Mechanical: Division 15. 11. Electrical: Division 16. RDAI 2363.00 01780 -3 See above sections for specific requirements of operating and maintenance data for each group of equipment. i RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 01780-4 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings, foundations, fences, signs, structures, pavements, traffic control devices, utilities, and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02200 2. Slope Protection & Erosion Control: 02370 1.02 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect all vegetation, utilities, structures, and other facilities to remain, from damage in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. PART 2 PRODUCTS None. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 PAVEMENTS, CURBS, GUTTER, FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs, gutter, and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed, saw edges to remain in place on a straight line with vertical face. 2.02 BRIDGES, SEWERS, CULVERTS, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic, drainage, or irrigation requirements. B. For structures removed down to natural stream bottom, remove those parts outside stream to P below ground. Remove all portions within limits of new construction as necessary to accommodate new work. C. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. RDAI 2363.00 02110-1 2.03 STRUCTURES Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. 2.04 UTILITIES Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing lines to remain. Coordinate all work with the respective utility company. 2.05 DISPOSAL Deposit all removed material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 2.06 RESTORATION After removal of obstruction, fill and compact to finished grade in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 02130 y RDAI 2363.00 02110-2 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK - CIVIL PART 1 GENERAL 1.02 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Extent of earthwork as indicated on Drawings. 2. Removal, stockpiling, and placement of topsoil. 3. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements. 4. Disposal of materials removed. 5. Structural fills for building slabs. B. Related Work: 1. Slope Protection and Erosion Control Section 2370 2. Site Clearing: Site Clearing 02110 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prior to construction, meet with a representative of the Soils Engineer and the Contractor to discuss site preparation, grading specifications, equipment to be used, and any unusual soil conditions or special requirements. B. Permits: Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) C. Testing and Inspection: A testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection services for quality control during earthwork operation shall be employed by the Contractor. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate line and grade of existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Notify engineer if conflicts exist with the proposed work and exiting utility lines. B. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as a part of this work and post with warning lights and signage. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, freezing, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 DEFINITIONS A. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on -site or similar non - organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6 ". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation, hauling, and placement may be considered as suitable material. Rock fill material which consists predominantly of cobbles or boulder -sized pieces of blasted or broken rock with maximum size of 2'. B. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, organic silt, topsoil, frozen materials, trees, stumps, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste, sludge or landfill materials, or other undesirable materials. RDAI 2363.00 02200-1 C. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D -9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered unclassified excavation. D. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. E. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits, and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. F. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be approved by the Engineer. G. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic -tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled for use after grading has been completed. The stockpile areas shall be designated by the Owner. B. Excess topsoil shall be disposed of on site in an area designated by the Owner. C. Topsoil shall be placed to a depth of 6 inches in all areas designated to be revegetated. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated on the drawings, regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Soils Engineer. Unauthorized excavation shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Additional Excavation: If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace material as directed by the Soils Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material and its' replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. D. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and rules and regulations. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. RDAI 2363.00 02200-2 E. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bearings, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, and discharge lines as necessary remove water from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage facilities outside excavation limits to prevent runoff from entering excavations. 3. Notify Engineer and Owner immediately if groundwater is encountered. Contractor is responsible for obtaining construction dewatering permits. F. Material Storage: Stockpile excavated materials until required for backfill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. G. Excavation for structural fill shall be within the project limits or in approved borrow areas. H. All excavations shall comply with OSHA rules and regulations. 3.03 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each classification listed below B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soils to not less than the following percentages of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D- 1557. 1. Paved Areas: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each lift of backfill material to a minimum of 95% maximum density. 2. Landscaped or Revegetated Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each lift of backfill material to a minimum of 90% maximum density. 3. Walkways and sidewalks: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each lift of backfill material to a minimum of 95% maximum density. 4. Building floorslabs; 95 %, Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each lift of backfill material to a minimum of 95% maximum density. 5. Structural Fill: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each lift of backfill material to a minimum of 100% maximum density C. Moisture Control: Soils shall be placed with moisture content of 2% plus or minus 1/2% of optimum moisture. Where subgrade or a layer of soil material must be conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of material to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. RDAI 2363.00 02200-3 2. Soil material that has been removed because the moisture content is too high may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earthfill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses, continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. When directed by Engineer, remove excess moisture in bridging across streams, ponds, and swampy ground. Place embankment in layers not greater than 18" which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. Occasional cobble and boulder -sized pieces of excavated rocks with sizes from 6" to 2', may be placed in earth fill as approved by Soils Engineer. Space large rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one -half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be keyed in to existing slopes and material removed for the benching shall be excavated and recompacted along with the new embankment material at the Contractor's expense. C. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifiying, or stepping a minimum of 6" to ensure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications D. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankment. E. During construction maintain work area in such condition that it will be well - drained at all times, including at the end of the construction day. 3.05 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform slope between points where elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Adjacent to Structures: Grade areas adjacent to buildings and other structures to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Compaction: After grading, compact surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each classification. 3.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing During Construction: Allow Soils Engineer to inspect subgrades and fill layers as required. 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, or ASTM D 2922, as applicable. When ASTM D 2922 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted using only ASTM D 1556. Soils Engineer to determine testing procedure and interval. 2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab. In each layer RDAI 2363.00 02200-4 of compacted fill, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab. B. If in the opinion of the Soils Engineer, Engineer, or Owner, based on test results and inspections, subgrade or fills are placed below specified density, the Contractor shall provide additional compaction, replacement, and testing as required to meet minimum densities. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion. Repair and re- establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. C. Where settling is measurable or observed at embankments or excavations during the warranty period, add backfill material and compact. Restore appearance, quality and appearance of surface to match adjacent work. Revegetate and repair any disturbed pavement or irrigation systems. 3.08 BORROW Provide test pit if required by Soils Engineer to evaluate acceptability an4 limits of borrow source at Contractor's expense. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from the borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. Strip all borrow areas of sod, topsoil, and unsuitable materials. Provide adequate erosion control during borrow area use. Restore borrow area, grade, reshape, and revegetate following use. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Deposit all surplus or unsuitable materials in such places designated on drawings or as approved by Owner. Grade and shape disposal site. Place topsoil and revegetate as required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02200 RDAI 2363.00 02200-5 SECTION 02240 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY DEWATERING A. Section Includes: 1. Design and installation of dewatering system to protect excavation from ground water and to allow construction of foundations and waterproofing in dry conditions. B. Related Sections: 1. Excavation: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Excavation Support System: Section 02260 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Dewatering Contractor shall be solely responsible for design and installation of a dewatering system capable of allowing construction of all work located inside the excavation support system in dry conditions. 1. Dewatering system shall consist of a series of well points located outside the excavation support system. 2. Comply with requirements of soil and foundation investigation. 3. Dewatering system must be compatible with construction procedures and acceptable to the structural engineer, geotechnical engineer and general contractor. Maintenance: After installation, the dewatering system shall be continuously maintained by the dewatering contractor until completion of foundations, subdrainage, waterproofing and backfill. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering Plan: Dewatering contractor shall submit a plan indicating proposed locations of well points, submersible pumps and points of proposed discharge, alternate well point locations if additional well points become necessary and electrical service. Dewatering plan shall be approved by the Owner, Architect and structural engineer before drilling begins. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory - Requirements: Dewatering contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Test Holes: A series of test holes have been made for Owner by his separate consultant. See Document 00300 Information Available to Bidders. Log and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site. RDAI 2363.00 02240 -1 B. Existing Utilities: Locate all existing utilities prior to drilling. Dewatering contractor shall pay for any damage to utilities caused by drilling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Dewatering System: Provide all necessary materials for installation and complete operation of dewatering system. Provide spare pumps, hoses, etc. as required. All pumps shall be new at time of installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions to determine dewatering requirements. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Take all necessary precautions and make provisions to protect adjacent existing improvements from damage from dewatering operations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Design and install systems as required. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make periodic inspections and verify that the system is maintaining a dry excavation. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 02240 -2 SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION IJ k' We] ;VJ:D M 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design and installation of shoring and underpinning systems to protect excavation perimeter from movement or collapse. 2. Protection of adjacent buildings and improvements from movement, settlement or collapse. B. Related Sections: 1. Excavation: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 3. Dewatering: Section 02240. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Contractor shall be solely responsible for design of shoring and underpinning system as required to resist lateral earth pressures and surcharges due to traffic, storage of materials, adjacent structures and all other loads imposed on adjacent soil during the construction period. Comply with requirements of soil and foundation investigation. Type of system used must be compatible with construction procedures and structural details and acceptable to the Structural Engineer and General Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Obtain permits and permission of adjacent property owners as required. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Investigate to determine the location of adjacent existing underground improvements. B. Subsurface Investigation: A subsurface investigation report has been prepared for the Owner. See Section 00300 Information Available for Bidders. C. Survey: A site survey has been prepared for the Owner. A copy of this survey may be obtained from the General Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Excavation Support System: Provide piles, piers, waters, lagging, sheeting, anchors and structures as required. RDA[ 2363.00 02260 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions to determine shoring and underpinning requirements. Examine existing adjacent improvements to determine their condition before starting work. Record their condition by written report, survey and photographs as required. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Take all necessary precautions and make provisions to protect adjacent existing improvements from damage from shoring, underpinning and excavation operations., 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Design and install systems as required. B. Make proper allowances for building structure and improvements including waterproofing, dampproofing and foundation drainage systems. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make periodic inspections and surveys of existing adjacent improvements. Keep accurate records of movements or changes in their condition. 3.05 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT A. Repair any damage or replace damaged existing adjacent improvements. 3.06 REMOVAL A. Remove shoring and underpinning systems as required after permanent structure is in place. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 02260 -2 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK - STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building Excavation and Backfill 2. Site Grading 3. Under Slab Gravel B. Related Sections: 1. Soil Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 2. Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 3. Mechanical Excavation: Division 15 Mechanical. 4. Electrical Excavation: Division 16 Electrical. 5. Subdrainage: Section 02620. 6. Dewatering: Section 02240. 7. Excavation Support and Protection: Section 02260. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with following: 1. Excavation: Colorado Division of Labor Rules and Regulations. 2. Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: Test reports of soils testing during construction specified under Field Quality Control will be distributed by the testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450 Quality Control. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Testing Agency: Soil testing during construction will be conducted by acceptable testing laboratory. See Section 01450 Quality Control. B. Geotechnical Engineer: Materials and operations under this section shall be executed under observation of Geotechnical Engineer employed by Owner who will place qualified personnel on site during earthwork operations as necessary. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Test Holes: A series of test holes have been made for Owner by its separate consultant. See Document 00300 Information Available to Bidders. Log and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site. RDAI 2363.00 02300 -1 B. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during work until they have been examined by Owner. 1. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove affected sections without extra cost. 2. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. I1��7• ::: � �>v A. Fill and Backfill: Correct settlement in backfill, fill, or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within one year correction period. Restore any structures damaged by settlement to their original condition at no cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Material: On -site excavated or imported granular material free of rubble or debris and approved by Geotechnical Engineer. Granular wall backfill shall contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 sieve with a minimum size of 6 inches.. 2.02 UNDER -SLAB GRAVEL A. Gravel: Imported minus 2" aggregate approved by the Geotechnical Engineer with less than 50% passing the No. 4 sieve and less than 2% passing the No. 200 sieve with a maximum size of 6 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Visit: Visit and inspect site and take into consideration known or reasonably inferable conditions affecting work. Failure to visit site will not relieve Contractor of furnishing materials or performing work required. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Engineering: See Section 01722 Field Engineering for bench marks, monuments, batter boards, reference points and layout and checking of the work. B. Protection: 1. Maintain soil under foundations and slabs at natural moisture content. 2. Provide and maintain slopes, crowns and ditches in excavation to insure satisfactory surface drainage at all times. Provide temporary drainage facilities to prevent water from draining into excavations. When work is completed, restore temporary ditches or cuts to original grade or finish grade as indicated. 3. Bailing or Pumping: Immediately pump or bail out water found in excavations, whether rain or seepage. Keep excavations free from water at all times. Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control flow, drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of work under this section to avoid damage to work. RDAI 2363.00 02300 -2 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: All spread footings shall rest on natural granular soil or new structural fill. Over - Excavation: 1. Under Footings and Interior Slabs -on- Grades, silt and clay soils and any loose or disturbed soils. Confer with Geotechnical Engineer and comply with his recommendations when excavating adjacent to existing building foundations. 2. Structural Fill: Where required, replace over - excavated areas with structural fill as specified in Articles 3.04 and 3.05. C. Footing and Area Excavations: Excavate site as required for walls, foundations, piers, area pits, etc. to depths indicated on drawings. 1. Trenches: Bottoms of full width required. If through error, trenches are carried deeper than required, fill excess depth with compacted fill as directed at Contractor's expense. 2. If debris, soft spots or loose or excessively moist areas are found at bottom of any excavation, immediately report condition to Geotechnical Engineer who will determine if corrective work is necessary. D. Unclassified Excavation: 1. All excavation is considered as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra will be allowed. E. Cobbles and Boulders: Where cobbles or boulders are uncovered during excavation and at footing elevation they shall be immediately reported to the Geotechnical Engineer to direct their removal. Cobbles or boulders shall be carefully removed to prevent disturbance of adjacent soils and the resulting depressions shall be filled with compacted earth fill. Stockpile boulders 12" in diameter and larger for future landscape use in on -site location as directed. Store suitable backfill material as space is available. Remove all other excavated material from the site. 3.04 PREPARATION OF NATURAL GROUND A. General: Remove topsoil and vegetation before beginning preparation of natural ground. Remove frozen or muddy ground in fill areas. B. Fills Made on Hillsides or Slopes: Plow or scarify slope of the original ground upon which the fill is to be placed to a minimum depth of 6 ". Where slope ratio of original ground is steeper than 5 horizontal to 1 vertical, the bank shall be stepped or benched. C. Preparation: Mix and blend the plowed or scarified surface with a disc or grader blade so the surface will be free of large clods or rocks, ruts, hummocks or other uneven features which would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. D. Scarification and Compaction: 1. Natural Ground Under Interior Floor Slabs: Scarify to a minimum depth of 6" and recompact at near optimum moisture content to at least 95% of its Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698. RDAI 2363.00 02300 -3 2. Natural Ground Under Exterior Slabs, Sidewalks and Paving: Scarify to a minimum depth of 6" and compact at near optimum moisture content to at least 95% of its Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698. 3. Natural Ground Under Over -Lot Fill Areas: Scarify to a minimum depth of 6 inches and compact at a moisture content at or slightly in excess of the optimum to at least 90% of its Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698. 3.05 FILLING AND COMPACTION A. General: Fill and compact to levels required to complete the work indicated. Filling may require soil material in excess of quantity of suitable material available from required grading and excavations even though not indicated on the drawings. Such material shall be imported at earthwork contractor's expense. B. Placing Fill: Distribute material to avoid formation of lenses or layers of material differing substantially from surrounding material. Deliver material at uniform rate to permit satisfactory procedure to result in uniformly compacted fill. 1. Avoid unnecessary concentration of travel causing ruts and uneven compaction. Regrade and compact ruts and hollows more than 6" deep before compacting. 2. Spread fill material in horizontal layers no greater than 8" thick. C. Backfilling: Fill and compact temporary holes and excavation around interior walls, grade beams, piers, trenches, on inside of building and excavation around exterior foundation walls. 1. Backfill in even lifts on both sides of foundation walls to prevent excessive pressure on one side. Brace unsupported foundation walls, grade beams, and piers thoroughly before backfilling and leave bracing in place until supporting floors are in place. 2. Obtain permission before backfilling. 3. Debris, construction materials, expansible clay, or large chunks of earth are not allowed in backfill. 4. Backfill and mechanically compact as indicated below. Puddling not allowed. D. Compaction of Cohesionless Materials: When compacting material such as sands and gravels, deposit materials in layers and compact by surface or internal vibrators, smooth or pneumatic rollers, hand or power tampers, or by other means approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Thickness of horizontal layers after deposition shall be not more than 6" if compaction is performed by tractor treads, surface vibrators or similar equipment. If compaction is performed by internal vibrators, thickness of horizontal layers after compaction shall be not more than penetrating length of vibrator head. 2. Ponding or water flooding not allowed. Compaction Requirements: Compact each layer by methods acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer to minimum of the following Standard Proctor Densities as determined by ASTM D698: 1. Fill under footings 100% 2. Backfill against sides of footings 95% 3. Fill under interior floor slabs 95% 4. Interior utility trench backfill 95% 5. Fill under exterior slabs and sidewalks 95% 6. Fill under asphalt or concrete paving 95% 7. Foundation backfill under paving and slabs on grade 95% to 98% RDAI 2363.00 02300 -4 8. Other foundation backfill 90% 9. Exterior utility trench backfill under slabs sidewalks and paving 95% 10 Other exterior utility trench backfill 90% 11. Overlot fill 90% Compact mechanical and electrical trenches excavated by utility companies as specified for utility trenches. 3.06 EXCESS OR UNUSABLE MATERIAL A. Excess Material: Remove from site. 3.07 DAMAGED EARTH A. Earth that has been rendered unfit to receive planting due to concrete water, mortar or lime water dumped on it shall not be used in areas to receive plantings. 3.08 UNDER SLAB GRAVEL A. Fill entire area beneath floor slabs on grade with 4" thickness of roller compacted gravel. Screed to provide uniform true sub -base for bottom of slab. 3.09 FINISH GRADING A. General: Cut and fill all areas to elevations and tolerances specified. Leave graded surface clean, free from rubbish and large clods and reasonably smooth. B. Subgrade Under Building: Finish grade to smooth, even, well compacted surface at densities specified under Article 3.05 to elevations indicated. 1. Slab on Grade Subgrade Tolerance: ( +) 0.02' (1 /4 "). C. Subgrade Under Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter: Finish grade to bearing surface as required. Tolerance: ( ±) 0.04' (1 /2 "). D. Subgrade Under Asphalt Paving: Finish grade to bottom of full depth asphalt or aggregate base course. Tolerance: ( +) 0.04' (1 /2 "). ' E. Subgrade Under Concrete Paving: Finish grade to bearing surface as required. Tolerance: ( +) 0.04' (1 /2 "). F. Subgrade Under All Other Areas: Finish grade to 6" below grades indicated as sodded and to grades indicated in all other areas. Tolerance: ( ±) 0.1' (1- 1 /4 "). 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Placement Method: Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer's approval of method of placing and compacting before starting compacted fill or backfill placement. B. Compaction: Obtain written approval of the completed compacted fill and backfill from the Geotechnical Engineer who will have sufficient tests made to assure compliance with these specifications. If, because of unsatisfactory test results it is necessary to retesf.after corrective works cost of tests other than initial tests shall be paid by Contractor. RDAI 2363.00 02300 -5 C. Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2922 or ASTM D2167. See Section 01450 Quality Control. D. Feld Engineering: See Section 01722 Field Engineering. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 02300 -6 SECTION 02370 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, grading, and installation of riprap, silt fence, filter material, jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, all necessary appurtenances, and maintenance of existing erosion control measures. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110 2. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430 3. Earthwork: Section 02200 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure ( %) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (lbs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40 -80 US Sieve CW -02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability ( %) 90 ASTM -G -26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than . 1.00 per linear foot. - C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14 -1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. RDAI 2363.00 02370- 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1 %. Discharge on existing vegetated slope alternately to avoid erosion. 3.02 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or bailing wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.07 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.08 FILTER BERMS /SEDIMENT POND Field construct berms as directed by Engineer. Place washed 1" to 1 -1/2" aggregate with 2' top and 3:1 side slopes extending to bottom of channel. Berm to retain sediments by retarding and filtering runoff. Place sand on face of berm for future replacement of filter material. Construct in accordance with drawings. 3.09 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. 3.10 MAINTENANCE Maintain, repair, and supplement all slope protection and erosion control measures as stated in all applicable permits and as directed by the Owner. END SECTION 02370 RDAI 2363.00 02370-2 SECTION 02430 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPES, AND FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, irrigation ditches, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3 /4 cubic yard bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. Boulders, large rocks, and chunks of concrete three cubic yards or larger, considered rock excavation. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: 1'. Construction Dewatering 2. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Culvert Pipe - High Density Polyethylene Pipe — smooth interior, ADS -N 12 with N -12 Prolink ST couplers or approved equal, ASTM F477, ASSHTO M252 and M294. RDAI 2363.00 02430-1 RDAI 2363.00 02430-2 B. Irrigation Pipe — High Density Polyethylene Pipe — smooth interior, ADS -N12 with N -12 Prolink WT couplers or approved equal, ASTM D3212, ASSHTO M252 and M294. 2.02 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings, ASTM C478 and C789, wall `B ", wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.03 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM — C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non - rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. D. Manhole Steps: Two non -skid grooves in the surface and capable of carrying load of 1000 lbs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 2.04 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP - Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. A. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. B. Carbon -Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. C. DuctileIron Castings: AASHTO A536. D. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing, where specified, AASHTO M111. 2.05 BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert — Class 6 Aggregate Base Course. 2.06 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contain lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oils, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. RDAI 2363.00 02430-2 2.07 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: Proportions: Cement 5 -1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 1 /4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5 % -7% B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete no plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: No blasting is allowed. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces of fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 PIPE BEDDING A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place form minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. RDAI 2363.00 02430-3 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. High Density Polyethylene Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 85% AASHTO T99 and continue to F over top of pipe. 3.05 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts - shall be smooth and clean with no obstruction, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six — two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING CULVERT Make connections to existing culvert in similar manner as new culvert. Cut existing culvert as necessary to set new manhole and attain watertight seal. Place expandable waterstop around portion of existing culvert inserted into new manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.07 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. RDAI 2363.00 02430-4 3.08 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3 /4 " road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 95% AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter. 3.09 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Contractor will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches within limits of pavement, shoulders, or back of curbs: Predominately of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Predominately onsite suitable material. Place in loose lifts up to a maximum of 12 ". Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.10 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast -in place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1 /4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast -in place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C. Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Sawcut to full depth of asphalt. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" of undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to RDAI 2363.00 02430-5 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with Town of Vail requirements. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste materials in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 02430 RDAI 2363.00 02430-6 SECTION 02510 WATER SYSTEM PARTI- GENERAL 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, vaults, service lines, curb stops, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork Section 02200 2. Slope Protection and Erosion Control: Section 02370 C. Definitions: 1: Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specification: All work shall conform to the Eagle River Water & Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Water Mains 2006. Complete installation must be acceptable to the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District inspections are required. Any conflicts will be resolved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Water Mains 2006. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for gradation for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, hydrostatic testing, and disinfection tests C. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. D. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and/or there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Refer to Eagle River Water & Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Water Mains 2006 RDAI 2363.00 02510- 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION Refer to Eagle River Water & Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Water Mains 2006 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Owner. Deposit all waste material to designated waste areas. Complete topsoil and reseeding of disturbed areas if required. Where disposal site is not designated, remove and dispose of all waste off site. END OF SECTION 02510 RDAI 2363.00 02510-2 SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART IGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, bypass pumping, and installation and rehabilitation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains, televising of completed work and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: Earthwork Section 02200 Slope Protection and Erosion Control: Section 02370 C. Definitions: Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with' /4 cubic yard bucket curling force and stick crowd force bf 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. Boulders, large rocks, and chunks of concrete three cubic yards or larger, considered rock excavation. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specification: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District specification. Complete installation must be acceptable to the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District inspections are required. Any conflicts will be resolved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for conventional pipe, cured in place pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART PRODUCTS Refer to Eagle River Water & Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Sewer Mains 2006 RDAI 2363.00 02530-1 PART 3 EXECUTION Refer to Eagle River Water & Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Sewer Mains 2006 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Ownerr. Deposit all waste materials in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 02530 RDAI 2363.00 02530-2 SECTION 02570 TELEPHONE, CABLE TELEVISION, AND ELECTRIC SYSTEMS PART I GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric companies. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with % cubic yard bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 lbs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. Boulders and large rocks one cubic yard or larger, are considered rock excavation. D. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company, and the electric company. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 2 " -8 ", Schedule 40 PVC. RDAI 2363.00 02570-1 2.02 VAULTS- ELECTRIC All switchgear, transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy Association, Inc. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material - %" screened rock. B. On -site 1 -1/2" minus well graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on -site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C -150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5 -1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate — 43% Water — 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3 /4 " 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5 -7% B. Job -Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. RDAI 2363.00 02570-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appuertances shall be transported, handled, stored, and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer, and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenanes being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such suitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping form trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. ' Water flowing in trench bottom: Install in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe '/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at contractors expense. RDAI 2363.00 02570-3 B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt form entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING Pull string shall be placed in all conduit to facilitate placing cable. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycombs, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by the Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use' /4" screened rock or on -site screened material (if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than 18" in diameter. Carefully lower boulders larger than 12" in 'diameter into trench until backfill is 4' over top of pipe. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Contractor will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedures until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. RDAI 2363.00 02570-4 B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Predominantly of rock 18" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate ompaction prior to placing additional lifts. Trenches outside road right -of -way: Compact to 90% AASHTO T99. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Sawcut to full depth of existing pavement. Remove and dispose of existing surface and unsuitable base course. Leave 6" of undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt'to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate with vibrators. Street cuts and pavement replacement must conform to Town of Vail requirements. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of sight, is required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02570 RDAI 2363.00 02570-5 SECTION 02732 ROADWAY BASE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade after utility contractors have completed installation of all utilities, and furnish and place one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. All work shall be in accordance with Town of Vail requirements, Standards and Specifications. B. Related Work: 1. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430 2. Water System: Section 02510 3. Sanitary Sewer System 02530 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis —ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion — ASTM C 131 3. Liquid Limit — AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves — AASHTO T99 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 1 Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 4" 100 - - 3" 100 95 -100 - - 2" 95 -100 - 100 - 1 -1/2" - 90 -100 - 1" - - 100 3 /4 " - 50 -90 - 'No.4 30 -65 - 30 -50 30 -70 No. 8 - - - No. 200 3 -15 3 -15 3 -12 3 -15 Liquid Limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. Class 6 100 30 -65 25 -55 3 -12 RDAI 2363.00 02732- 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95% ASTM -698 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogenous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6 ", construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 ". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% ASTM -698. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum. END OF SECTION 02732 RDAI 2363.00 02732-2 SECTION 02741 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot -mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross - sections shown on the drawings. All work shall conform to Town of Vail requirements, Standards and Specifications. B. Related Work: 1. Roadway Base: Section Q2732 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Contractor will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If Requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: I . Aggregate — AASHTO T96 2. Tar — AASHTO M52 Grade RTC B -5, M 118. 3. Liquid Asphalt — AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt — AASHTO M140 5. Compaction — AASHTO T230 6. Stability and Flow — AASHTO T245 C. Job Mix Formula: Provide Engineer proposed mix design based upon aggregates to be used. 1. Submit design mix to Engineer for approval along with Marshall series performed by an independent laboratory. 2. Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 lb. minimum 3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 inch 4. Air Voids percentage per ASTM D 1559: 3 to 5 percent RDAI 2363.00 02741 - 1 5. Use an anti- stripping additive form the approved list of additives in Chapter 400 of the Colorado Department of Highways Field Materials Manual Minimum Asphalt content: 5.8% 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport mixtures form mixing plant in trucks having tight, clean, non - sticking compartments. When transporting, provide covers to protect from weather and prevent loss of heat when temperature is below 50 degrees F. During temperatures below 50 degrees F on long distance deliveries, provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place asphaltic concrete on wet surfaces, or when temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless agreed to by Engineer: B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96. Sizes #8 and larger, tolerances + 8 %; #30 + 3 %; where 100% passing, no tolerance. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading G C CX F 1 -1/2" 100 - - - 1" 90 -100 100 - 100 3 /." 63 -85 90 -100 100 - ''/2 46 -78 70 -89 90 -100 - 3/8" - 60 -88 74 -89 - #4 22 -54 44 -72 50 -78 - #8 13 -47 30 -62 32 -64 45 -85 #30 4 -26 12 -38 12 -38 - #200 1 -7 3 -7 3 -7 7 -13 Use Grading CX for this project in accordance with Town of Vail specifications. RDAI 2363.00 02741 - 2 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT AASHTO M226, Penetration Grade 85 -100. Use AC -10 for all paving. 2.03 TACK COAT One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 2.04 MIX DESIGN A. Determine design mix based upon aggregates to be used. 1: Submit design mix to engineer for approval along with Marshall series performed by an independent laboratory. 2. Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 Ib. minimum 3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 in. 4. Air voids percentage per ASTM D1559: 3 to 5% 5. Use an anti - stripping additive form the approved lists of additives in Chapter 400 of the Colorado Department of Highways Field Materials Manual. 6. Minimum Asphalt content: 5.8% B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.06 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various -sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat -dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2 %. Deliver dry aggregate mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture. D. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature — viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. E. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with job -mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 90 -95% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. RDAI 2363.00 02741 -3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. If time lapse from fmal shaping to placement is longer than 24 hours, reshape, wet and compact surface, or apply prime coat. When prime coat is used, apply at rate of 0.3 gallons per square yard as soon as practicable after surface has been prepared and is sufficiently dry. Calibrate distributor and furnish calibration to Engineer. Adjust spray nozzles and spray bar to provide uniform distribution of prime coat. Cease immediately upon clogging or interference of any nozzle and correct before distribution is resumed. Protect adjacent surfaces from prime coat material. Remove prime oat from adjacent surfaces. Return to same condition prior to work beginning. Maintain prime coat and/or base course surface until covered by asphaltic concrete. Where prime coat has been applied for 48 hours, and has not dried sufficiently, materials may be blotted.with aggregate in manner agreed to by Engineer. Clean any damaged area of all loose material, and repair base course to satisfaction of Engineer. Reapply prime coat. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with leveling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surface at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to '/4 below final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on an emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Place at temperatures of not less than 280 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self - powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for leveling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screeds shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing, shaving or gouging surface, to depth and cross - section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Pavers shall be capable of placing courses in thickness' from %z" to 4" and from widths of 8' to 15'. Extensions and cut -off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6 ". B. Strike fmish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free form hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be ' / 4 " above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. RDAI 2363.00 02741-4 C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day's work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints overlapping screed 1" on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2" on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately l" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8" for width of 6 ", after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place leveling courses within 1 /2" of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed ' /d'. Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide one pneumatic -tired and one steel -wheel roller to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers Steel -wheel rollers self - propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic -tired rollers self - propelled, developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish on e complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperatures must not be below 150 degrees F. RDAI 2363.00 02741 -5 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return / roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic -tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. D. Compact to minimum of 95% Marshall Design method data submitted, or from field samples taken by the Engineer, and prepared in accordance with ASTM D1550. Re- compact asphaltic concrete not conforming to density standards to these specifications. Cut out compaction test plugs as directed by Engineer. Contractor shall cut test plugs, fill, and repair test holes at his expense. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION 02741 RDAI 2363.00 02741 -6 SECTION 02776 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete Sidewalks. 2. Concrete porches. 3. Concrete steps. B. Related Sections: 1. Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 2. Finish Grading: Section 02300 Earthwork. 3. Asphalt Driveways: Separate contract. 4. Quality Control: Section 01450. 5. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 6. Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 7. Concrete: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 8. Concrete Testing: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Work: Follow ACI 301. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Mix Designs: Prior to pouring any concrete, submit concrete mixes for approval in accordance with Section 01330. Separate mix designs shall be submitted for each type of concrete to be used in the Project. Submittals shall include all information used in designing the mixes. See Section 03300 for design procedures. 2. Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests or core tests specified under Section 03300 Field Quality Control shall be distributed by the testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450 Quality Control. 3. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the Contractor listing the time and date of placement of all concrete. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect for examination at any time. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. 'Comply with Design standards of applicable local codes and ordinances. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1 -1/2 hours after the mixing water has been added. B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix. 2. If extra water is required before depositing concrete, the General Contractor's Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize the addition of water. RDAI 2363.00 02776-1 3. Additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the truck ticket and signed by the person responsible. 4. When extra water is added to the concrete, mix thoroughly for 40 revolution of the drum or 3 -1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or when the mean daily temperatures are below 40 F follow recommendations of ACI 306. Maintain concrete temperature at a minimum of 50 F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. The concrete may not contain calcium chloride. Maintain forms in place for a minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete, subject to approval of the Architect. Place no concrete without approval of the Architect on days when the temperature at 9:00 AM is below 30 F until, in the opinion of the Architect, the Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all the necessary equipment to prevent the concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 605. The optimum temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85 F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. When the air temperatures are expected to exceed 90 F the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Architect on the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing and curing of concrete. Pozzolith Retarder, as manufactured by Master Builders Company, Cleveland, Ohio or approved equal may be used upon approval of the Architect. The use of continuous fog sprays may be required by the Architect for 24 hours especially in times of low humidity. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: use ready mixed concrete conforming with ASTM C94. No on job mixed concrete will be allowed. B. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II or Type II modified. C. Aggregates: Natural sand and coarse aggregates gravel or crushed stone, conforming to ASTM C33. Maximum coarse aggregate size shall be determined by the thickness of slabs, finish required, and spacing of reinforcement. D. Air Entraining Agent: Conform to ASTM C260. E. Admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494. F. Color: Davis Color 677. 4 of Davis Color pigment 677 Kailua per sack of cement. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Curing Compound- Vertical Surfaces: Conform to ASTM C309. RDAI 2363.00 02776-2 SECTION 02780 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVING PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide interlocking concrete unit paving as shown and as specified. The work includes: 1. Interlocking concrete unit paving over a concrete base course. 2. Interlocking concrete unit paving over a compacted base course. 3. Base and bedding. B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork - Section 02220 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards: 1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). "Specification for Concrete Interlocking Paving Stone." 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 3. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials, (AASHTO). B. Installation: Performed only by skilled workmen with satisfactory record of performance on completed projects of comparable size and quality. C. Sample panel: Before starting interlocking concrete unit paving, provide a sample panel using materials, patterns, and joints indicated for project work. Build panel at the site of full thickness and approximately five foot by five foot. Provide the range of color, texture, and workmanship proposed for the work. Correct and rebuild sample panel until Owner's and Architect's acceptance of the work. Retain panel during construction as a standard for completed paving work. The approved sample panel may be a portion of the work and remain in place. Location as directed by the Architect. D. Do not change source of interlocking concrete unit pavers during the course of the work. E. Testing data of product to verify conformance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for interlocking concrete paver units. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that paver units comply with specified material and physical requirements. C. Submit material certificates for base and bedding materials. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect paving units from damage, chipping, and soiling during delivery and storage. Store off the ground on pallets or wood platforms. Interlocking Concrete Unit Paving 02780 -1 Mountain View 06110 B. Store loose granular materials in a well- drained area on a solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign materials. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Review installation procedures and coordinate paving work with other work affected by the interlocking concrete unit paving work. Coordinate with snowmelt system installation. B. Cold Weather: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not build on frozen work or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade. Remove and replace paving damaged by frost or freezing. C. Protect partially completed paving against weather damage when work is not in progress. D. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and public safety. E. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, or staining during paving operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Paver unit materials and fabrication shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C936 Standard Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units, 1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33. 3. Compressive strength: Minimum 8,000 psi at time of delivery. 4. Absorption: Maximum 5 %. 5. Freeze -thaw test: ASTM C67, no breakage and maximum 1% loss in dry weight after 50 cycles. 6. Abrasion resistance: ASTM C418, maximum volume loss 15 cu. cm. per 50 cu. cm. Average thickness loss 3 mm. 7. Dimension tolerances: Length maximum 1/16" (1.5 mm), height maximum 1/8" (3 mm) from standard dimension. 8. Provide only sound units free of defects that would interfere with proper placing of units or impair strength or permanence of construction. Minor cracks and minor chipping incidental to methods of manufacture, handling in shipment, and delivery will be acceptable subject to Architect's review and acceptance. Excessive cracks and chipping, as determined by the Architect, will be rejected as not complying with specification requirements. 9. Provide test reports certifying materials and physical requirements compliance. Tests shall have been conducted not more than 12 months prior to manufacture. B. Paver Units: 1. 'Supplier: Pavestone Co., 9401 E. 96` Avenue, Henderson, CO 80640, 303 - 287 -3700. 2. Paver style a. Plaza Stone I, I1 and Giant, 60 mm thickness 3. Color a. Seventy Percent (70 %) Winter Blend, Thirty Percent (30 %) Three Tone Brown. 4. Submit styles and colors to Architect for approval prior to beginning installation. 5. Refer to Construction Details for further information. on the patterns and layout. C. Base Course Materials: Gravel for sub -base shall be clean, and free from deleterious material. Gravel shall be 3/4" top size crusher run with fines, dense graded aggregate, or similar material and graded to the following limits: Interlocking Concrete Unit Paving 02780 -2 Mountain View 06110 Sieve Size I " 3/4 " 3/8 " No. 4 No. 10 No. 40 No. 200 % Passing 100 70-100 50 -80 35 -65 25 -50 15-30 5 -12 D. Sand bedding and leveling material: Clean, washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C33. Under no circumstances shall masonry mortar sand be used. E. Joint fill: Clean, washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C33. F. Edge Restraint: Where no building, curb or pavement forms an edge, edge restraint shall be 1/8" x 4" steel edging manufactured by Ryerson or approved equal. Include all staking materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execution and installation of pavers shall conform with NCMA Tek 87A Standards. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start concrete unit paving work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Do not use paving units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other visible defects. B. Cut paving units with block splitter or motor - driven saw equipment designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Where cutting is required, use the largest size units possible. Avoid the use of small pieces .of pavers or large joint spaces. C. Install edging at indicated areas to provide suitable restraint for paving edges not contained by adjacent paving materials. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BASE MATERIALS A. Base course: 1. 'Obtain Owner's Representative's review and acceptance of subgrade before placing of base course materials. 2. Spread base course materials in layers which when compacted will not exceed 4" lifts, total compacted depth as scheduled. (see details). 3. Compact base course to 95% (ASTM D1557) 4. Minimum R -value of 60 for all base course materials. 5. Screed, level, and shape base course surface to required grade with an allowable local tolerance of 6. Coordinate with installation of snowmelt system. Protect snowmelt system from damage during paver installation process. Interlocking Concrete Unit Paving 02780 -3 Mountain View 06110 B. Bedding and leveling course: 1. Obtain Architect's review and acceptance of finished base course before placing bedding and leveling course materials. 2. Coordinate with installation of snowmelt piping. Refer to mechanical drawings and specifications. 3. Spread sand bedding and leveling course materials evenly over the entire area to be paved, screed to a level that will provide the depth required to meet finish grade but providing a minimum of I" thickness when the paving stones have been placed and vibrated. C. Protect bedding and leveling course from damage until installation of paver units. Do not precompact bedding and leveling course. 3.05 INSTALLATION: INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS A. Lay paver units in patterns indicated within this section, and as detailed on the drawings. B. Fill gaps at the edge of the paved surface with standard edge pieces or with paver units cut to fit. Provide cut units with straight even cut surfaces, free from cracks or chips. C. Vibrate units to their final level with 3 or more passes of a vibrating plate compactor. D. After first vibration, brush sand over the surface and vibrate into the joints with additional passes of the plate vibrator. Completely fill joints. E. After final vibrating the surface shall be true to grade and shall not vary by more than 1/4" when tested with a 10' -0" straightedge at My location on the surface. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Restrict traffic from paving surfaces during setting of units and until completion of installation. B. Protect paving from damage until final acceptance. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove and replace paving which is broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged. Provide new matching units, install as specified and to eliminate evidence to replacement. B. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from interlocking concrete unit paving operations. END OF SECTION Interlocking Concrete Unit Paving 02780 -4 Mountain View 06110 SECTION 02815 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with landscape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials, refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, backflow preventer assembly, valves, fittings, heads, flow sensor, controller and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Testing of Irrigation System(s). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this Project, submit if requested by Consultant and/or Owner, prior to contract award the following: I. List of 5 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. C. Owner. Irrigation System 02815 -1 Mountain View 06110 d. Brief description of work and project budget. i - e. Reference contact name & telephone number 4 B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper and/or ductile iron piping, backflow preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre - Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Materials List - Submit four copies of a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. B. Record Drawings (As- Builts): r At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd 2004 files of original irrigation design from Owner. At the end of every day, revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. Irrigation system record/as -built field prints shall be brought up -to -date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly record drawings. Indicate non - pressure piping changes on record drawings. Upon completion of Project, submit for review, prior to final acceptance, final set of irrigation systems record drawings plotted on mylar, and a compact disk containing Autocadd files of record drawings. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing). C. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains f. Drip line blow -out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire splices i. Water meter Irrigation System 02815 -2 Mountain View 06110 k. Locations of all unused/spare sleeving including diameter, quantity and depth of sleeve(s). 1. Flow sensor m. Master valve 2. Owner's Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until Record Drawings are updated. 3. Contractor shall provide two bond copies of completed, approved record drawings and CD containing Autocadd file(s) of record drawings(s). C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller /watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. Controller Charts a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as- built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as- built" system, showing area covered by that controller. C. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20 -mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system. D. Manufacturer Warranties — Contractor shall provide Owner with two copies of written manufacturer warranties that exceed one year as published by each equipment and material manufacturer for products installed on Project. Manufacturer warranty information shall be provided for controller(s), all valves, piping, heads, backflow preventer(s), enclosures and valve boxes. E. Operating. instructions and manufacturer warranty information shall be contained within 1 inch, three ring binder (one binder per set). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items Irrigation System 02815 -3 Mountain View 06110 shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots as root damage is incurred by trenching operations. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. 1.08 WARRANTY /GUARANTY: - Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired by Contractor at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property. B. Expenses due to vandalism prior to substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.09 MAINTENANCE: A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. 2. 3. One six foot valve key for operation of gate valves. Two keys for each automatic controller. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling Irrigation System 02815 -4 Mountain View 06110 valve installed. 4. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. 5. One controller operations manual for each controller installed. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust and/or repair system accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type "k" Copper. 2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) — Schedule 40 PVC Solvent Weld 3. Non - pressure Lines — 80 PSI NSF polyethylene — I" minimum diameter. 4. PVC Sleeving — Schedule 40 PVC Solvent Weld. 5. Drip Tubing — Rain Bird XBS Black Stripe Tubing with 0.705 inches outside diameter and 0.615 inches inside diameter. 6. Emitter Tubing - As recommended by emitter manufacturer. 7. Dripperline — Netafun Techline CV pressure compensating drip line with integral molded emitter and integral emitter check valve. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe - Type K, rigid, hard tempered. 2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125 —F and liquids at 1145 —F. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. a. Teflon Tape — All brass male threaded fittings and nipples shall receive wrapping of Teflon tape applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125 -pound class. D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454 -B, Type 1, Grade 1. Irrigation System 02815 -5 Mountain View 06110 a. Fittings - Standard Wright, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC; complying with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454 -B. 1) Threads - Injection molded type (where required). 2) Tees and ells - Side gated. b. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. C. Thread Sealant — All PVC male threaded fittings and nipples, excluding marlex fittings, shall receive non - hardening thread sealant/paste containing no petroleum distillates applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer's recommendations (Spears 75 Blue or equal). d. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. 3. Flexible Plastic Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D2239, with a hydrostatic design stress of 630 psi and designated as PE 2306. a. Fittings — Insert type manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609; PVC Type I cell classification 12454 -B. b. Clamps - All stainless steel worm gear screw clamps (Pinch -type clamps are not acceptable). Use 2 clamps per joint on 1 -1/2 inch and 2 inch fittings. E. Drip Irrigation Systems: 1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. 2. Fittings - Type and diameter recommended by tubing manufacturer. 3. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings. a. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 150 mesh nylon screen. b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non- corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. C. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction, non - adjustable pressure setting of 40 PSI, as detailed. 4. Emitters - Single port, pressure compensating, press on type by Rain Bird (XB series). 5. Fittings — Dripperline connections shall be completed via Netafun TL series insert-type fittings. Clamps are not required. F. Gate Valves: 1. Gate Valves - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and non - rising stem with cross - type operating handle (NIBCO T- 113 -K). G. Quick Coupling Valves - Brass two -piece body designed for working pressure of 150 PSI; operable with quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with locking rubber cover. H. Valve Boxes: 1. Gate Valves, Quick Coupling Valves, Drain Valves, Drip Line Blow -out Stubs, and Wire Splice or Stub Box -Carson Brooks #910 -10 or Rain Bird VB- IORND. 6" round valve boxes are not acceptable 2. 1 inch through 2 inch Control Valves - Carson Brooks #1419 -12 or Rain Bird VB -STD box as detailed. 3. Drip Valve Assemblies, Flow Sensors, 1 inch through 2 inch Master Valves - Carson Brooks #1220 -12 or Rain Bird VB -JM13 box as detailed. 4. All 10" round, standard rectangular and jumbo rectangular valve boxes installed on project shall be manufactured by one company. Mixing of these valve boxes from multiple manufacturer's is not acceptable. Irrigation System 02815 -6 Mountain View 06110 I. Electrical Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage: a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14, direct burial, single conductor, solid copper wire b. Electrical Common Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14, direct burial, single conductor, solid copper wire C. Wire Colors: 1) Control Wires - Red. 2) Common Wires - White. 3) Master Valve Wires - Blue. 4) Spare Control Wires - Black. 5) Spare Common Wires - Yellow. d. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Consultant. e. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBY direct bury splice. f. Flow Sensor Data Cable — Rain Mater EV- CAB -SEN or approved equal with 3M Gel -type connections installed within Preformed Super Serviseal Splice Kit. 2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. J. Automatic Controller - Size and type shown on Drawings; mounted as detailed. K. Electric Control Valves - Size and type shown on Drawings having manual flow adjustment and manual operational nut with internal bleed. L. Sprinkler Heads - As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings - with fittings and nipples of equal diameter as riser inlet in sprinkler body. M. Backflow Preventer - Size and type indicated on Drawings; Brass with 150 psi working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS, LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor's expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that vary from the conditions shown on the Irrigation Construction Documents. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the change in field conditions. 3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION - Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site, prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing, to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, design costs and plant replacement costs. 3.03 INSPECTION: - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not Irrigation System 02815 -7 Mountain View 06110 proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irrigation installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation. 3.04 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and approved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be prepared. Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. 2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by +/- 10% of the spacing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of variances exceeding 10 %, Contractor assumes full responsibility for the costs associated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner. 3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Consultant has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D 1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (12 inches minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 4 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 6 inches. C. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of horizontal clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. Vertical "stacking" of multiple runs of irrigation piping within common trench is not acceptable. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Service Line (From water tap to connection to backflow prevention device) - 84 inches from top of pipe. b. Pressure Supply Piping (Mainline) - 18 inches from top of pipe. C. PVC Sleeving — Road/Street/Drive — 24 inches minimum/28 inches maximum depth of cover as measured from top of sleeve to bottom of - road surfacing material. Pedestrian walks — Depth shall equal depth of piping and/or wiring to be contained within sleeving as indicated on plan as measured from top of sleeving to top of path/walk. Irrigation System 02815 -8 Mountain View 06110 d. Non - pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. e. Non - pressure Piping (pop -up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. f. Control Wiring/Flow Sensor Data Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a separate trench containing no mainline piping. g. Dripperline & Drip Tubing - Bed Areas — On- surface installation per details. Turf & seed areas — 12 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 4. Vibratory Plow — Not an acceptable method of installation for irrigation piping and/or wiring. 3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Consultant shall review and approve deviations prior to installation. A. Service Line Piping (copper or ductile iron piping from water meter to connection to backflow prevention device) - When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. 1. Copper piping — Installation shall match specifications for copper service line as requ by water department/water provider associated with project. B. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40 degree Fahrenheit. Install manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. Installation of multiple runs of piping in common (joint) trench is not permissible. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Flexible Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe - Lay pipe and assemble fittings following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for micro - tubing barbed fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow -out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. 4. Flushing - After tubing, barbed fittings and micro - tubing is place and connected, but prior to installation of emitters, thoroughly flush drip tubing under full head of water pressure through blow - out/flush -out stubs installed at ends of lines. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through all blow -outs. D. Control Wiring: Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle and tape all 24 volt irrigation wires with electrical tape at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. Irrigation wiring installed above /over pressure supply line is not acceptable. Irrigation System 02815 -9 Mountain View 06110 C. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by coiling wire bundle and lay formed coil in trench prior to backfilling. d. Provide continuous loop of all spare "maintenance" wires (see below) within every valve box containing electric control valve or drip valve assembly (See item (h) below). Construct loop within valve box by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. e. Make all splices and electric control valve connections using 3M Company DBY waterproof wire splice connector kits. f. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. g. Install one control wire for each control valve. h. Maintenance Spare Wires - Install two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from irrigation controller to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. This requirement is in addition to spare wire notes indicated on irrigation plan(s). 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller and/or Pumps: a. Provide electric power and connection(s) to automatic controllers and irrigation pumping system(s). b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician. E. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed and where shown on Drawings. 2. Connect electric control valve wiring to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings. 3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation. 4: Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod or grounding plate as detailed unless indicated otherwise on details. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. 6. All control wiring shall be neatly organized and bundled from terminal strip connection to entrance to 24 volt wire conduit(s) exiting controller cabinet/pedestal. Utilize plastic, locking electrical ties at 12 inches o.c. within controller cabinets, pedestal and/or enclosures.. 7. Exposed, bare ends of copper wiring connected to terminal strips shall not exceed 3/8" except where longer exposed length is required to complete connection. 8. Use of 18 ga. multi -strand cable within controller cabinet/pedestal is not permitted. 9. All 24 volt wiring within controller enclosure /pedestal/cabinet shall be permanently identified via labeling indicating station number, spare wire, flow sensor wire, master valve wire, etc. F. Electric Control Valves - Install cross -handle four inches below finished grade where shown on Drawings as detailed. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. When installed adjacent to curbing and walks, allow 24 inches between valve box and walk/curb. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box with box centered over valve assembly. Install individual valve box flush with grade. G. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing joint assemblies as indicated on construction details; plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. H. Drip Valve Assemblies - Install drip valve assembly as detailed. Irrigation System 02815 -10 Mountain View 06110 I. Drip Emitters - Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly downstream of backflow prevention device as detailed, In addition, install manual drain valve(s) at low point in pressure mainline(s) as dictated by field conditions. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve as detailed. K. Valve Boxes: I. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed as detailed. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for master valve and flow sensor. Install gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. L. Gate Valves - Install where shown on Drawings as detailed. M. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re- staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assemblies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or adjustments without additional cost to the Owner. N. Backflow Prevention Device - Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings. O. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Consultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk - through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is unacceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Opeh excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155 -7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20' -0" of building or foundation walls. P. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 24 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non - pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe). 3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance Irrigation System 02815 -11 Mountain View 06110 with ASTM D155 -7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. Q. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. Pressure testing of pressure supply line utilizing compressed air is not acceptable. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period. ' 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk - Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk - through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and fully operational prior to scheduling of walk - through. This shall include all control valves capable of being operated via irrigation controller. 3. Electrically operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk - through and additionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Consultant shall generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all'inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk - through, expose all drip emitters under operation for observation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk - through if necessary. 7. Supply Consultant with one set of full -size prints not original drawings of completed contractor - prepared irrigation as -built field drawings prior to start of substantial completion walk - through. D. Walk - Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk - through. 2. Show evidence -to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk - through is scheduled. 3. Electrically operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk - through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Irrigation System 02815 -12 Mountain View 06110 Consultant. y _ _ 5. If after request to Consultant for walk - through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Consultant finds items during walk - through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk - through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk - throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further walk - throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. 3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine- tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break -up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7% A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation' practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off -site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash, debris and excess soil generated by installation of irrigation system. END OF SECTION Irrigation System 02815 -13 Mountain View 06110 SECTION 02920 SOIL PREPARATION PARTIGENERAL 1.01 SPECIFICATIONS A. Work Included: 1. Preparation of all areas to be seeded or sodded. 2. Preparation of shrub, groundcover and perennial beds. 3. Finish grading of all landscaped areas. B. Related Work in Other Sections: I . Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 2. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Groundcovers - Section 02950 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The extent of underground utilities is not known. Known underground and surface utility lines indicated on the drawings are for information only. The contractor is responsible for verifying all utility locations prior to commencing. B. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by soil preparation operations. Cost of repair at Contractor's expense. C. Promptly notify the Landscape Architect of unexpected sub - surface conditions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit certificates of inspection required by law for transportation with invoice. File copies of certificates after acceptance of material. B. Inspection by governmental officials at point of origin does not preclude rejection of materials at project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Product Data: Prior to delivery to site, submit following items: 1. Topsoil Analysis: The Contractor shall be required to obtain through an independent soil testing laboratory, an analysis of the stock piled topsoil which will recommend the actual amendments required and the specific mixtures and quantities. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Labeling: Furnish standard products in unopened manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. B. Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. Soil Preparation 02920 -1 Mountain View 06110 1.06 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A. Sampling: Samples of materials may be taken and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples as requested. B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. 1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Acceptance: Work will not be accepted until satisfactory completion of all soil preparation work. B. Notification: Give notification of completion of soil preparation prior to proceeding with planting operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil is stockpiled on -site in sufficient quantities to complete the work. Spread topsoil until depleted. Obtain independent soils test which will recommend amendments required to meet the following qualifications. Amend topsoil per soils laboratory recommendations. 1. Composition: Use as a planting medium only fertile, friable, well- drained soil, of uniform quality, free of stones over 1 in. diameter, sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete and other deleterious materials, with an acidity range of between pH 5.5 and 7.0. 2.02 ON -GRADE SOIL MIXES A. Backfill for trees and shrubs, perennials and annuals. 2/3 site topsoil 1/3 Organic Amendment 2.03 ORGANIC AMENDMENTS A. Contractor may chose one of the products listed. 1. Aged, ground manure free of sticks, stones or other debiris. 2. Premium 3 Compost: As supplied by A -1 Organics, 16350 Weld County Rd. 76, Eaton CO, Phone (303) 454 -3492. 2.04 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS A. A commercial fertilizer of composition based on deficiencies revealed by soil laboratory analysis for Nitrogen- phosphorous and potash. Adjustment in pH shall be made to bring soil acidity to between 5.5 and 7.0. Fertilizer mix shall be a granular, non - burning product composed of not less than 50% organic, slow activity fertilizer. Analysis of N -P -K content shall be professionally guaranteed by laboratory analysis. B. Seeded Areas: Biosol manufactured by Rocky Mountain Bio Products (888) 696 -8960. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SOIL PREPARATION Soil Preparation 02920 -2 Mountain View 06110 A. General: Moisture Content: Do not work soil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Apply water, if necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for tilling and planting. Maintain within 2 percent above or below optimum moisture content at all times during the work. B. Bed Preparation for Sod and Shrub bed areas as follows: 1. Upon completion and approval by Landscape Architect of finish sub -grade evenly spread topsoil over the area to be planted to the minimum depths indicated below and mix thoroughly into the soil surface by means of a rototiller or agricultural ripper with tines spaced at no greater than 18 inches. a. Sod: 4" depth topsoil. b. Shrub beds: 6" depth topsoil. 2. Remove all rubble, stones, and extraneous material over 1 1/2 inches in diameter from site. 3. Do not place topsoil under muddy or frozen conditions. 4. After approval by the Landscape Architect of this operation, the fertilizer and/or organic amendment shall be spread at the following rates: a. Organic Amendment: 4 cubic yards /1,000 S.F. 5. After spreading the soil amendments, the area shall be rototilled to a depth of six (6) inches and in a direction perpendicular to the first rototilling operation. 6. Limit area of preparation to areas which are ready to be planted immediately. C. Bed Preparation for Seed: I . Till the soil surface by means of a rototiller or agricultural ripper with tines spaced at no greater than 18 inches. 2. Remove all rubble, stones, and extraneous material over 1 1/2 inches in diameter from site. 3. After approval by the Landscape Architect of this operation, the fertilizer and/or organic amendment shall be spread at the following rates: a. Fertilizer: Biosol at 1,300 lbs. acre. 4. After spreading the soil amendments, the area shall be rototilled to a depth of six (6) inches and in a direction perpendicular to the first rototilling operation. 5. Limit area of preparation to areas which are ready to be planted immediately. D. Bed Preparation for Perennial and Groundcover beds as follows: After review by the Owner's Representative of the subgrade, the fertilizer and/or organic amendment shall be spread at the following rates: a. Topsoil: 8" depth. b. Organic Amendment: 4 cubic yards /1,000 S.F. C. Fertilizer: Per soils lab recommendations. After spreading the soil amendments, the area shall be rototilled a minimum of two times in opposite directions to a depth of six (6) inches. Ripping is not acceptable. Limit area of preparation to areas which are ready to be planted immediately. 3.02 FINISH GRADING A. General: Soil Preparation 02920 -3 Mountain View 06110 1. Grade smooth all seeding, sodding and planting areas after weeding, soil preparation, and soil ` conditioning have been completed and soil has been thoroughly water settled. Remove all stones or debris over 1 inch in diameter. 2. Provide finished surface grades parallel to subgrade surfaces. Provide uniform levels and slopes. Finish grades shall be smooth, even and on a uniform plane with no abrupt changes of surface. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given, or between points established by walks, or paving. 3. Provide all grades for natural runoff of water without low spots or pockets. Accurately set flow line grades at 2 percent minimum gradient unless otherwise noted in Drawings. Perform drainage test with irrigation system. 4. Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural- appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes. B. Grades 1. Tolerance: All planting areas, including lawn areas, shall be true to grade within I inch when tested in any direction within 10 ft. straightedge. 2. Coordinate finish grades to the following depths below design finished grade: Adjacent to Curbs & Other Hard Surfaces a. Seeded areas 1/2" b. Sodded areas 1 C. Mulched shrub bed 3" 3.03 DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS A. Surface Drainage 1. Discrepancies: Provide positive surface drainage of planted areas. Submit in writing all discrepancies in the Drawings or Specifications, or prior work done by others, which Contractor feels precludes establishing proper drainage. 2. Correction: Include description of work required for correction or relief of said condition. B. Detrimental Drainage, Soils and Obstructions: 1. Notification: Submit in writing all soils or drainage conditions considered detrimental to growth of plant materials. State condition and submit proposal and cost estimate for correcting condition. 2. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction before proceeding with work. 3. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are encountered in the performance of work under this section, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6 in. below the required soil depth. 3.04 CLEAN -UP A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. B. Clean -up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION Soil Preparation 02920 -4 Mountain View 06110 SECTION 02930 LAWNS AND GRASSES PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this section. B. Work included in this section includes but is not limited to the following items: 1. Sodding 2. Seeding of grasses. 3. Establishment, maintenance and guarantee of all new sodded/seeded areas. 4. Wildflower sod. C. Related Work in Other Sections: I . Sprinkler Irrigation - Section 02810 2. Soil Preparation - Section 02920 3. Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcovers - Section 02950 4. Landscape Maintenance - Section 02970 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certificates of Inspection: Submit as required by law for transportation of each shipment of seed along with invoice. Submit copies of certificates after acceptance of material. B. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection at project site. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Work notification: Notify Owner's authorized representative at least seven (7) working days prior to start of sod/sodding operations. B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by seeding/sodding operations. C. Perform seeding/sodding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed. D. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as required. E. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit seed vendor's certification for required grass seed mixture, indicating percentage by weight, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass species. B. Submit the following material samples: 1. Seed C. Submit the following materials certification: Lawns and Grasses 02930 -1 Mountain View 06110 I . Fertilizer(s, alysis 2. Hydromulch 1.05 WORK SCHEDULE: Proceed with the work as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Seed: 1. Delivery: Furnish standard seed in unopened manufacturer's standard containers bearing original certification labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Storage: Store seed with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. 1.07 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A. Samples: Samples of materials may be taken and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples upon request. B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications. 1.08 MAINTENANCE PERIOD AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE: See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance. 1.09 WARRANTY PERIOD A. Time Period: Warrant that all lawns and grasses shall be in a healthy and flourishing condition of active growth one year from date of Final Acceptance. B. Appearance During Warranty: Lawns and grass shall be free of dead or dying patches, and all areas shall show foliage of a normal density, size and color. C. Delays: All delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty Period correspondingly. D. Exceptions: Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc., during Warranty Period. Report such conditions in writing, 1.10 REPLACEMENTS A. Unacceptable Workmanship: Areas exhibiting conditions which are determined as unacceptable workmanship shall be repaired and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Replacements: Replace, without cost to Owner, and as soon as weather conditions permit, all areas not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as directed during and at the end of Warranty Period. C. Matching: Closely match all replacement seed with adjacent areas of lawn or grass. Apply all requirements of this Specification to all replacements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED A. Seed: Fresh, clean, and new crop seed mixture. Mixed by an approved method. Lawns and Grasses 02930 -2 Mountain View 06110 2. All seed shat furnished in bags or containers clearly labeler chow the name and address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, the percent of weed seed content and the guaranteed percentage of purity and germination. All brands furnished shall be free from such noxious seeds as Russian or Canadian Thistle, European Bindweed, Johnson Grass and Leafy Spurge. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable. 3. Seed and seed labels shall conform to all current State and Federal regulations and will be subject to the testing provisions of the Association of Official Seed Analysis. Submit seed labels to Landscape Architect for approval prior to seeding. Q C. 2.02 SOD A. Native Grass Seed Mix (Non- Irrigated) Type Varie Percent Blue wild rye Elkton 7.5% Idaho Fescue Native 5.0% Slender Wheat Native 15.0% Tufted Hairgrass Shadow 2.5% Mountain Brome Native 20.0% Sheep Fescue VNS 20.0% Stream bank wheat Sodar 15.0% Alpine Bluegrass Native 5.0% Big Blue grass Sherman 5.0% Canby Bluegrass Canbar 5.0% Seeding Rate: 4 to 5 lbs per 1000 s.f. Irrigated Grass Seed Mix Type Varie Percent Kentucky Bluegrass Freedom 25% Creeping Red Fescue Shademaster 25% Perennial Ryegrass SR4000 10% Chewings Fescue Shadow 25% Hard Fescue SR3000 15% Seeding Rate: 4 to 5 lbs per 1000 s.f. Bluegrass Sod Shall be Colorado grown, 100% certified Kentucky Bluegrass of three (3) improved varieties approved by the Landscape Architect, complying with applicable Colorado and Federal regulations, having a healthy root system, regularly fertilized, watered, mowed, sprayed, and free from objectionable weeds and/or grasses. 10 Sod quality 1. Sod containing Common Bermudagrass, Quackgrass, Johnsongrass, Poison Ivy, Nudsedge, Nimblewiil, Canada Thistle, Timothy, Bentgrass, Wild Garlic, Ground Ivy, Perennial Sorrell, or Bromegrass weeds will not be acceptable. 2. Sod strip shall have from 518" minimum to 1" maximum thickness of soil adhering to root system, cut in strips 18" maximum width by 24" minimum length. 3. Sod which has dried out, or sod with adhering soil which breaks, tears, or crumbles will not be accepted. 3. Sod cut for more than forty-eight (48) hours will not be accepted. Sod rolls shall be kept moist, protected from sun, heat, or wind, and properly protected in transport. Lawns and Grasses 02930 -3 Mountain View 06110 2.03 WILDFLOWER SOD A. Wildflower Sod: Mountain Mix by Ward Lake Sales Co., Inc. (303) 7324200. 2.04 ORGANIC AMENDMENTS: See Section 02920 — Soil Preparation 2.05 HYDROMULCH A. Conwed Fibers Hydromulch 1000 manufactured by PROFILE Products LLC, 750 Lake Cook Road, Suite 440, Buffalo Grove, IL 60089, 800 - 366 -1180 (Fax 847 - 215 -0577) (or approved equal). B. Wood Fiber Mulch: Conwed Fibers HydroMulch 1000 w /SlikShot fiber by PROFILE Products LLC with the following characteristics: 1. Materials: 99% wood fiber, dark green marker dye, I% Polyacrylamide based soil flocculating agent (PAM). 2. pH Range: 4.8 + -2. 3. Moisture Content: 12 + -3 percent maximum. 4. Organic Content: 99.2 % + -.4. 5. Ash Content: .8%+-.4. 6. Water Holding Capacity: 12000 percent minimum. 7. Packaging: 50 pound UV resistant bags, with UV resistant pallet cover. 2.06 FERTILIZER A. After seeding operations and grasses have been establish ( see maintenance requirements) irrigated areas shall be fertilized with a commercial brand granular non - burning fertilizer composed of not less than 50% slow release organic material of high quality with a compound equivalent to 20 -10 -10 (NPK). B. Furnish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. C. Each batch of fertilizer shall be delivered with the manufacturer's statement of analysis. The statement of analysis shall be submitted to and approved by the Construction Manager prior to application. 2.07 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC A. Erosion Control Blanket 1. Curlex 1 manufactured by American Ekcelsior Company ( www.curlex.com) or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Areas to Receive Seed and Sod/Plugs: All areas as delineated on the Drawings. B. Scheduling: 1. Seeding and Sodding: Perform on a section by section basis, upon approval of Landscape Architect, and immediately after finish grading and irrigation installation except for seasonal limitations. 2. Embankments and Slopes: Complete in a continuous manner. 3.02 SODDING Lawns and Grasses 02930 -4 Mountain View 06110 A. Verify that soil preparation has been performed. B. The soil shall be firmed and compacted to 85% modified Proctor density in all lawn or unpaved areas. C. Dampen dry soil prior to sodding. D. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to sodding. E. Sodding Installation: I . Lay sod within forty-eight (48) hours from the time of cutting. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. 2. Sod shall be laid on a firm, pre- moistened bed with tight joints so that no voids occur under or between strips. Sod shall be watered, tamped, and rolled immediately after sodding operations are completed. 3. In the event that sod dries or shrinks, a mixture of screened topsoil and bluegrass seed shall be brushed into the cracks and tamped flush. Excessively shrunk sod (over '/<" shrinkage) shall be re -laid. 4. Install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to and tightly against previously installed row. 5. Slopes of 3:1 or Greater: Lay sod with staggered joints secured by pegs driven through sod into soil until pegs are flush with turf. Space pegs 18 in. on center. Pegs to be I in. square x 56 in. pine or 5 in. lengths of lath. 6. Fertilize immediately after bluegrass sodding operations are complete with a 20 -10 -10 (NPK) applied at a rate of four (4) pounds per 1000 square feet. 7. Water daily to maintain adequate soil moisture for proper root growth. Continue daily watering for not less than five (5) days. Thereafter, apply water as required until acceptance. 3.03 SOIL PREPARATION (Refer to Section 02920 - Soil Preparation) A. Verification: 1. Stones, Weeds, Debris: Verify that all areas to receive seeding and sodding are clear of stones larger than 1 in. diameter, weeds, debris and other extraneous materials. 2. Grades: Verify that grades are within 1 in. plus or minus of the required finished grades. Report all variations in writing. B. Soil Moisture: 1. Excessive Moisture: Do not commence work of this section when soil moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. 2. •Inadequate Moisture: Apply water, as necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for planting. 3.04 SEEDING A. Seeding Dates: Seed immediately after preparation of bed. Spring seeding between April I and June 1 and fall seeding between August 15 and October 15 or at such other terms acceptable to the Landscape Architect. B. Seed indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations. C. Seeding: Lawns and Grasses 02930 -5 Mountain View 06110 Seeding shall be hand broadcast uniformly. Rake into a depth of 1/4" and roll immediately following seeding. Sow not less than the quantity of the seed specified. Within 24 hours after seeding, the Contractor shall apply hay mulch uniformly and crimp into the soil at a rate of two (2) tons per acre. Contractor's Option: With approval of the LA and the Owner apply a Hydromulch in lieu of hay mulching. 3.05 HYDROMULCH A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Use approved hydro- spraying machines. Do not exceed maximum slope length of 25 feet when slope gradients are steeper than 4 to 1. Install materials at the following rate: B. Hydro - Seeding: Add 30 to 50 pounds of Conwed Fibers HydroMulch 1000 fiber per 100 gallons of Water when hydroseeding; confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. 1. Mod to 4 to 1 Slope: 1500 pounds per acre 2. 3 to 1 Slope: 2000 pounds per acre. 3. 3:1 to 2:1 Slope: 2500 pounds per acre. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET A. Apply erosion control blanket immediately after seeding has been completed. Install per manufacturer's specifications on all slopes 3:1 or greater and in all areas indicated on the drawings. B. Install erosion control blanket in all drainage swales in seeded areas. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND ACCEPTANCE OF SEEDED AREAS A. Seed Establishment Period 1. Irrigated Area: That period necessary to achieve germination with no bare spots larger that one (1) foot square. The total number of bare spots larger that one (1) foot square shall not exceed 10% of the total seeded area for irrigated areas. 2. Non - Irrigated Area: For non - irrigated seed the total number of bare spots not greater that one (1) square foot shall not exceed 20% of the area. B. Initial Acceptance For Irrigated Seed Upon seed establishment, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager and Landscape Architect to review the work. If coverage and germination is acceptable, the Construction Manager shall notify the Contractor of Initial Acceptance. C. Maintenance: Shall begin immediately after Initial Acceptance and shall continue until Final Acceptance. (See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance) D. Maintenance Requirement: Maintain seeded areas, including watering for irrigated seed areas, spot weeding, mowing, applications of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides, and reseeding to achieve the requirements of item 3.06 B above and establish a uniform stand of grass free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects. 1. Watering: For irrigated seed areas, the Contractor shall be responsible for watering seeded areas twice a day for a period of two weeks, or until seedlings are established: Apply only the amount of water necessary to establish and maintain seeded areas in healthy conditions. Reduce amount of water applied after seed is established. Avoid standing water, surface wash or erosion from over - watering. 2. Protection: Lawns and Grasses 02930 -6 Mountain View 06110 a. ProN suitable signs erected at important points, not' g the public to keep off. Provide barricades as needed. b. Repair: Re -seed areas that have been washed out or are eroded or do not meet coverage requirements per square foot as stated in paragraph 3.05 B above. 3.08 CLEAN -UP A. General: Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. Keep all paved areas clean during planting operations. B. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION Lawns and Grasses 02930 -7 Mountain View 06110 SECTION 02950 TREES, SHRUBS, VINES, GROUNDCOVERS AND PERENNIALS PART IGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B. Work Included: Provide planting of trees, shrubs, vines, groundcover and perennials, complete, as shown and as specified. C. Related Work in Other Sections: 1. Irrigation - Section 02810 2. Soil Preparation - Section 02920 3. Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 4. Landscape Maintenance - Section 02970 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certificates I . Submit certificates of inspection required by law for transportation of each shipment of plants along with invoice. 2. File copies of certificates after acceptance of material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at project site. B. Applicable Standards: Apply standards for plant materials as described in the following: 1. "American Standard for Nursery Stock," 1980 Edition, American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. 2. Hortus III - 1976 Edition, Bailey Horatorium, Cornell University. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. All collected plant material (specifically large trees) shall come from sites similar to the locations they are being installed in on this site, with special regards to gradient of slope and exposure of slope. B. Planting work shall be done under the direct supervision of a qualified superintendent working on the site with experienced laborers familiar with planting procedures. C. The Owner shall provide a specific area in which the Contractor shall store his materials. This in no way waives the Contractor's responsibility to protect his materials and equipment from damage, theft or vandalism. D. The Owner may schedule a pre - construction conference with Landscape Architect and Contractor at least 7 days before beginning work under this Section. Purpose of this conference is to review questions Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -1 Mountain View 06110 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit prior to delivery to site. Attach product name, address of manufacturer and/or supplier to each sample. 1. Tree and Shrub Planting Fertilizer: One ounce. 2. Mulch: One (1) pint. 1.05 WORK SCHEDULE A. Proceed with the work as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work. 1.06 SELECTION, TAGGING AND ORDERING OF PLANT MATERIAL A. Review: Request for review of plant materials and quantity at nursery prior to shipment to site. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available. Contractor shall accompany Landscape Architect to all review(s) of plant materials at the nursery. Landscape Architect will review and tag plants at place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specifications. B. Distant Material: Submit photographs with a person adjacent to plants for preliminary review. Such review shall not impair the right of review and rejection during progress of the work. C. Unavailable Material: If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Substantiate such proof in writing no later than 30 days after award of contract. D. Special Conditions: The above provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Labeling: Fumish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels legibly showing quantity, analysis, genus /species and name of manufacturer /grower. Labeling need not apply to collected material, however contractor shall warrant that plant material is true to species specified. B. Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product. C. Handling: Do not lift or handle container plants by tops, stems or trunks at any time. Do not bind or handle plants with wire or rope at any time. D. Anti- Desiccant: At Contractor's option, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf immediately before transporting with anti - desiccant. Apply an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs and foliage. 1.08 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS A. Sampling: Right is reserved to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples upon request. B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor's expense. Pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications. 1.09 MAINTENANCE PERIOD AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE: See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -2 Mountain View 06110 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee: 1. Correct Species: Warrant that all plant materials are true to species and variety. 2. Vigor: Warrant that all trees, shrubs and vines planted under this Contract will be healthy and in flourishing condition of active growth one year from date of Final Acceptance. Similarly warrant perennials and groundcovers for one full growing season after the date of Final Acceptance. B. Delays: All delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Guarantee Period correspondingly. C. Condition of Plants: Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, with all foliage of a normal density, size and color. D. Replacements: As soon as weather conditions permit, replace, without cost to Owner all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by Landscape Architect during and at the end of Guarantee Period. E. Exclusions: Contractor shall not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by Owner, vandalism, etc., during Guarantee Period. Report such conditions. 1.11 REPLACEMENTS A. For a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of all work and at no additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor is to replace any new or transplanted plant material that is dead, or that is, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, in unhealthy or unsightly condition, or that has lost their natural shape due to dead branches or excessive pruning of dead branches, or that has been damaged beyond repair due to inadequate maintenance and/or protection from animal damage or the natural elements. B. Failed Materials: Closely match replacements to adjacent specimens of the same species. Apply all requirements of this Specification to all replacements. - Contractor shall be held responsible for a maximum of two (2) replacements for each failed tree, shrub and vine, and same area of groundcover planting after final acceptance during Guarantee Period. C. Incorrect Materials: During Guarantee Period, replace at no cost to Owner all plants revealed as being untrue to name. Provide replacements of a size and quantity to match the planted materials at the time the mistake is discovered. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS A. General: Verify that all container stock has been grown in the containers in which delivered for at least two (2) months, but not over two (2) years. Do not install container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from container. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -3 Mountain View 06110 1. Growing Conditions: Plants shall be nursery-grown in accordance with good horticultural practices under climatic conditions similar to those of project for at least two years unless otherwise specifically authorized. 2. Collected Plant Material: All plant material which, due to size or quantity, cannot be nursery grown, may be collected. Contractor and Landscape Architect shall review this plant material in its native state before collection as is reasonably practicable. Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject this same material once it reaches the site if in his opinion, it is not of the same quality as when it was initially reviewed. 3. Appearance: All plants shall be exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, and so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be superior in form for their species, with regard to number of branches, compactness and symmetry. Trees which have multiple leaders, unless specified, or damaged or crooked leaders, will be rejected. Trees having a main leader shall not have been headed back. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 3/4 in. which have not completely calloused, will be rejected. 4. Vigor: Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. They shall have healthy, well - developed root systems. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions which would prevent thriving growth. B. Condition of Root System: Samples must prove to be completely free of circling, kinked or girdling trunk surface and center roots and show no evidence of a pot -bound condition. If five (5) percent or more of the plants of each species are found to contain kinked, circling or girdling roots, all plants of that species will be rejected. C. Measurements: 1. General: Measure plants when branches are in their normal upright position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Take caliper measurement at a point on the trunk 6 in. above natural ground line for trees up to 4 in. in caliper and at a point 12 in. above the natural ground line for trees over 4 in. caliper. 2. Size Range: If a range of size is given, do not use plant materials less than the minimum size. Not less than 40 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. 3. Multi -Stem Trees: Multi -stem trees shall have a minimum of three main trunks. At least one of the trunks shall be as large as the maximum caliper size specified. For example a 3" caliper multi -stem tree shall have three trunks of which at least one is 3" caliper. 4. Substitutions: Substituted plants shall be true to species and variety and shall conform to measurements specified except that plants larger than specified may be used if accepted. Use of such plants are accepted, increase the ball of earth in proportion to the size of the plant. D. Field Drug Stock: Prior to digging of field grown plant materials, insure that all excess loose fill resulting from cultivation around stems and over roots be removed down to natural finish grade at crown of plant materials. During digging, verify that size of vernier shovel or other equipment is adequate to encompass the actively - growing root zone of all plants. Plants which, after digging, show mostly large fleshy roots and few fibrous roots will be rejected. E. Field Collected Aspen Trees: Aspen trees shall have at least one third of the top portion of the tree covered with lateral branching and leaves. Trees which are exceptionally tall without branching except at the very top portion of the tree shall be rejected. Refer to sections above regarding measurements, multi -stem trees and other conditions which apply to quality. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -4 Mountain View 06110 2.02 ORGANIC AMENDMENTS A. Refer to Soil Preparation Section 02920 2.03 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS A. Tree, Shrub and Vine Planting Fertilizer: Osmocote Slow Release formula as manufactured by Sierra Chemical Co., Milpitas, CA;; Tel. (408) 263 -8080, or accepted equal. B. Fertilizer for perennials shall be Diammonium Phosphate (18-46 -0). 2.04 STAKING MATERIAL A. Tree brace straps shall be provided at connection of guy or pole support wires to tree trunk. Straps shall be 12" x 1 -1/2" nylon/cotton weave with a 3/4" brass grommet at each end, as manufactured by Jeffco Enterprises, Inc. B. Staking poles shall be standard "T" six foot (6) high steel fence posts, dark green or approved color. C. Provide protective plastic caps on top of fence posts. 2.05 GUYING MATERIALS A. Anchor: Standard "T" steel fence posts, 12" long, dark green or approved color. B. Hardware: 1. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or dip - painted and weldless. 2. Cable Clamps: 1/3" Galvanized, size as required. 3. Plastic Guy Covers: 3/8 in. diameter x 3 ft. long white plastic tubing. Provide for all guyed installations. 4. Tree brace straps shall be 12" x 1 1/2" nylon/cotton weave with a 3/4" brass grommet at each end, as manufactured by Jeffco Enterprises, Inc. 2.06 WATER A. Clean, fresh and potable. B. Transport as required. 2.07 MULCHING MATERIAL A. Mulching: Second Harvest Brown available from Pioneer Stone (303) 279 4748 or approved equal. Submit sample for approval by Landscape Architect prior to installation. 2.08 ANTI - DESICCANT A. Anti- desiccants for retarding excessive loss of plant moisture and inhibiting wilt shall be sprayable, water insoluble vinyl - vinyledine complex which will produce a moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain (or snow). 2.09 TREE WRAP A. Tree wrapping material shall be first quality 4" wide, bituminous, impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, brown in color, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. 2.10 EDGER Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -5 Mountain View 06110 A. Edger shall be 1/8" x 4" high steel landscape edging by Ryerson or equal. Include all staking materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPLANT REVIEW A. General: Do not commence planting work prior to acceptance of soil preparation. B. Finish Grades: Finish grades for all planting areas shall have been established in another section. Verify that all grades are within 1 in. plus or minus of required finish grade and that all soil amendments have been installed as specified under Section on Soil Preparation. Fine rake prior to planting shrub, and ground cover areas and perennial areas. C. Notification: Submit written notification of all conditions inconsistent with specifications for soil preparation and mixing as described in Section 02920 - Soil Preparation. 3.02 DRAINAGE OF PLANTING AREAS A. Surface Drainage: Maintain positive surface drainage of planted areas as shown on grading plans B. Discrepancies: Submit in writing, all discrepancies in the Drawings or Specifications, obstructions on the site, or prior work done by others, which Contractor feels precludes maintaining proper drainage; include description of all work required for correction or relief of said discrepancies. C. Detrimental Drainage, Soils and Obstructions: 1. Testing: Test drainage of plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Give written notification of conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than twenty -four (24) hours. 2. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of poor drainage conditions before proceeding with work. 3. Obstructions: If rock, underground construction work, tree roots or other obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be used as directed. Where locations cannot be changed, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6 in. below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after acceptance. 3.03 LAYOUT AND EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS A. Layout and Staking: Lay out plants at locations shown on Drawings. Use 3 ft. lath, color -coded for each species of plant and material. Stake each tree and outline shrub and groundcover beds with lime or marker paint. DO NOT install irrigation heads prior to approval of bed layout. B. Review: Locations of plants will be checked in the field and will be adjusted to exact position before planting begins. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in the Landscape Architect's opinion, an insufficient quantity of plants is available. Contact Landscape Architect before planting begins. C. Containerized Plant Pits: Excavate container -grown and B &B tree, shrub, and vine pits to a minimum of twice the diameter of the ball or container. 3.04 EDGER A. General: Install edger prior to installation of adjacent sprinkler irrigation system. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -6 Mountain View 06110 B. Edger: Install edger true to line and grade as shown on the Drawings. 3.05 PLANTING OPERATIONS A. General: 1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. 2. Keep plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery in the shade, well - protected and well- watered. B. Handling and De- potting of Plant Materials: Avoid all damage to containers and rootballs. If rootball is cracked or broken during handling, plant will be rejected. Container Trees and Shrubs: Remove all containers prior to planting. Tip container to horizontal orientation and carefully remove shrub. Support rootball during installation to prevent cracking or shedding of soil. Burlapped Rootballs: Set plant in pit with burlap intact, remove top 1/3 of metal cage and burlap. C. Installation: 1. Excavate deep enough to accommodate the ball and three times the diameter of the rootball. Compact before setting of plants. 2. Positioning: Plants shall be set in center of pit, kept plumb and straight, and pit backfilled with mix. All B &B stock shall have binding twine and wire cut free from the ball and trunk after placement and removed from the top of the ball completely, folding back 1/3 of burlap wrapping. Container stock shall be removed form their containers prior to planting. 3. Backfilling: a. Backfill mix for tree pits shall be 2/3 on -site topsoil and 1/3 approved organic amendment, mixed thoroughly on site before planting, with no clods over 1" in size; placed and compacted to 6" minimum depth in bottom of plant pit. b. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly and saturate rootball, before installing remainder of the backfill mix to top of pit, eliminating all air pockets. C. Contractor shall distribute excess excavated planting pit material on -site or as directed by the Landscape Architect. 4. Staking and/or Guying: When required, stake or guy as outlined below. 5. Fertilizer: Place evenly distributed in plant pits when backfilled 2/3 according to the manufacturer's directions. D. Adjustment: Adjust plants so that after full settlement has occurred, the grade at the base of the plants is 2 in. above the adjacent planting finish grade. E. Watering Basin: Form saucer with 3 in. high berm centered around tree and shrub pits 12 in. wider than ball diameter. Do not form saucer around trees in lawn areas. F. Watering: Water all plants immediately after completion of planting operations with a deep watering device. Contractor shall provide watering requirements for the health and full development of all contractor - installed plant materials until final acceptance and as required during the guarantee period. G. Labels: Remove all nursery-type plant labels, wires and ties from plants. 3.06 STAKING AND GUYING Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -7 Mountain View 06110 A. General: 1. All plant materials shall remain plumb and straight for all given conditions from installation through the guarantee period. B. Staking: 1. All trees shall be staked and guyed as detailed. 2. Locate stakes in a line with trunk of tree, perpendicular to prevailing wind and as close to the main trunk as is practical, avoiding root injury. Drive stakes at least 24 in. into firm ground. 3. Wire support straps shall be placed around the trunk in a single loop. Run wire through grommets on support strap, tighten, and keep taut. C. Guying: 1. Guy trees at points of branching, with guys spaced equally around and outside perimeter of ball. 2. Guys: Provide one turnbuckle for each guy. Use 2 cable clamps at each cable connection. Place white plastic guy covers on all guys. 3.07 PRUNING: See Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance 3.08 MULCHING A. Install a 3 in. deep layer of mulch in all shrub beds and tree rings. Install a I inch deep layer in all perennial and ground cover beds 3.09 GROUNDCOVER PLANTING AND PERENNIALS A. Planting: Plant groundcover plants and perennials at optimum depth for proper growth. Avoid air pockets. Equally space triangularly, at distances called for in the Drawings. B. Fertilizers: Apply top -dress fertilizer at the rate of 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet immediately after planting. C. Watering: Water bed thoroughly after fertilizer application. Wash all fertilizer from leaves of plant materials. 3.10 CLEAN -UP A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. B. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers and Perennials 02950 -8 Mountain View 06110 SECTION 02970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section. B. Work Included: 1. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals needed to provide complete landscape and irrigation maintenance program to the Owner for thirty (30) days following date of Preliminary Acceptance. Maintenance items shall include all items constructed under this Contract. 2. Work specifically included for maintenance includes: a. Watering, pruning, weed control and replacement of mulch for trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and perennials. b. Mowing, edging, fertilization, watering and weed control within turf areas. C. Mowing, trimming, watering and weed control within dryland seed areas supplemented by irrigation. d. Winter watering as required. e. Monthly site inspection of potential insect, pest and disease problems. f. Weekly clean -up of trash, litter and debris. 3. Work which may be required under this Section, but which if required will be considered a claim for extra work (see General Conditions), include the following: a. Insect, pest and disease control. b. Plant replacement due to theft, vandalism, or accidental damage by others after final acceptance. (Supplemental unit prices will apply for one (1) year following final acceptance.) C. Related Work in Other Sections: I. Irrigation System - Section 02810 2. Soil Preparation - Section 02920 3. Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 4. Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcover- Section 02950 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Perform all work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by .authorities having jurisdiction over such work. 2. Provide for all inspections and permits required by Federal, State, or local authorities in furnishing, transporting, and installing of all agricultural chemicals. B. Applicable Standards: Workmanship and overall maintenance program shall conform to highest level of industry standards. C. Work Force: Experience: The landscape maintenance firm shall have a full time foreman assigned to the job for the duration of the contract. He shall have a minimum of four years experience in Landscape Maintenance 02970 -1 Mountain View 06110 landscape maintenance supervision with experience or training in entomology, pest control, soils, fertilizers and plant identification. 2. Labor Force: The landscape maintenance firm's labor force shall be thoroughly familiar and trained in the work to be accomplished and perform the task in a competent, efficient manner acceptable to the Owner. 3. Supervision: The foreman shall directly employ and supervise the work force at all times. Notify Owner of all changes in supervision. 4. Identification: Provide proper identification at all times for landscape maintenance firm's vehicles and labor force. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Visit: At beginning of maintenance period, visit and walk the site with the Owner's representative to clarify scope of work and understanding of existing project/site conditions. B. Documentation of Conditions: Document general condition of existing trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers, perennials and lawn recording all plant materials which are damaged or dying, if any. 1.04 SCHEDULING A. Perform all maintenance during hours mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. B. Work force shall be present at the project site at least once a week and as often as necessary to perform specified maintenance in accordance with the approved maintenance schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: All materials and equipment, unless otherwise indicated, shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Water: Clean, potable and fresh, furnished and paid for by the Owner. C. Fertilizers: 1. Tightly- compressed, slow - release and long- lasting complete fertilizer tablets bearing manufacturer's label of guaranteed analysis of chemicals present. 2. Balanced, once -a- season application.controlled- release fertilizers with a blend of coated pills which supply controlled- release nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium, and uncoated, rapidly soluble pills containing nitrogen and phosphorus. D. Herbicides, Insecticides, and Fungicides: Obtain best quality materials with original manufacturers' containers, properly labeled with guaranteed analysis. Use non - staining materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Duration: Continually maintain all landscaped areas after installation, during progress of work, and for a period of 30 days from the date of Preliminary Acceptance or until Final Acceptance. B. Protection: Protect all planting areas from damage of all kinds from beginning of work until Final Acceptance. Landscape Maintenance 02970 -2 Mountain View 06110 2. Maintenance includes temporary protection fences, barriers and signs as required for protection. C. Replacements: Immediately treat or replace all plants which become damaged or injured as a result of Contractor's operations or negligence, as directed by Landscape Architect at no additional cost to Owner. Replacement plants shall be of acceptable size, condition and variety. 3.02 THE 30 DAY MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. - Preliminary Acceptance: As soon as all plantings are completed per Contract Documents, hold a site visit to determine the condition of the work. Following the review, the Landscape Architect shall issue a preliminary punch list of work to be corrected and a letter of Preliminary Acceptance. B. Date of Review: Submit a written request at least five (5) working days prior to anticipated date of review. C. Beginning of the 30 Day Maintenance Period: The date on which the Landscape Architect issues a letter of Preliminary Acceptance to the Contractor. 3.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the end of the Maintenance Period, hold a Final Review. A Final Punch List will be prepared noting all corrective work to be completed prior to Final Acceptance. B. Submit a written request to Landscape Architect for review for Final Acceptance at least five (5) working days prior to anticipated Final Review date. C. Corrective Work 1. Work requiring corrective action or replacement shall be performed within ten (10) calendar days after the Final Review. 2. Perform corrective work and materials replacement in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 3. After corrective_ work is completed, the Contractor shall again request a Final Review for Final Acceptance as outlined above. 4. Continue maintenance "of all landscaped areas until such time as all corrective measures have been completed and accepted. D. Conditions for Acceptance of Work at End of Maintenance Period: 1. Each plant shall be alive and thriving, showing signs of growth and no signs of stress, disease, or any other weakness. 2. All plants not meeting these conditions shall be replaced and 30 Day Maintenance Period -commenced for such plants. E. Final Acceptance Date: The date on which the Landscape Architect issues a Letter of Final Acceptance. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance of the work. 3.04 TREES, SHRUBS AND VINES A. Watering Basins: 1. Maintain all watering basins around plants so that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through major root zones. Landscape Maintenance 02970 -3 Mountain View 06110 2. For supplemental hand watering of watering basins, use a water wand to break the water force. Do not permit crown roots to become exposed to air through dislodging of soil and mulch. 3. Maintain originally called for depth of mulch to reduce evaporation and frequency of watering. B. Resetting: Reset plants to proper grades or upright position. C. Weed Control: 1. All areas between plants, including watering basins, shall be weed free. 2. Use only recommended and legally approved herbicides to control weed growth. 3. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots and breaks the seal of pre- emergent herbicides. D. Pruning: 1. Prune damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards at any time of year as required. 2. Make all cuts clean and close to the trunk, without cutting into the branch collar. "Stubbing" will not be permitted. Cut smaller branches flush with trunk or lateral branch. Make larger cuts (I in. in diameter or larger) parallel to shoulder rings, with the top edge of the cut at the trunk or lateral branch. 3. Do not prune or clip shrubs into balled or boxed forms unless specifically called for by design. E. Staking and Guying of Trees 1. Inspect stakes and guys at least once a month to check for rubbing that causes bark wounds. 2. Conform to the recommended procedures of staking and guying as outlined in Section 02950 - Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers, and Perennials. F. Maintenance of Existing Trees to Remain: 1. General: Conform to all applicable paragraphs regarding pruning, watering, spraying and fertilizing of new plant materials as specified in this section. 2. Be alert to symptoms of construction damage to root systems of existing trees as evidenced by wilting, unseasonal or early flowering or loss of leaves, and insect or disease infestation due to declining vigor. 3. Give notification in writing of all evidence of declining tree vigor immediately upon discerning the problem. Take appropriate interim measures to mitigate the severity of the problem as specified in this section. 4. Submit written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of all conditions before proceeding with permanent correction work. 3.05 GROUNDCOVERS A. Watering: 1. Check for moisture penetration throughout the root zone at least twice a month. 2. Water as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth of groundcovers. B. Weed Control: 1. Control weeds through proper cultural practices including cultivation, hand removal and hoeing, being careful to avoid damage to plant material. 2. Proceed with application of pre- emergent herbicides and selective systemic herbicides only at the approval of the Owner's Representative. 3.06 LAWNS Landscape Maintenance 02970 -4 Mountain View 06110 A. Watering: 1. Water lawns at such frequency as weather conditions require, to replenish soil moisture to 6 in. below root zone. 2. Provide a total of 1 -1/2 in. of water weekly during hot summer weather, in three (3) applications per week. 3. Water at night if irrigation system is electrically controlled. Otherwise, watering shall be done during early mornings. B. Weed Control: 1. Control weeds through proper cultural practices including cultivation, hand removal and hoeing, being careful to avoid damage to plant material. 2. Proceed with application of herbicides only at the approval of the Owner's Representative. C. Mowing and Edging: 1. Mow lawns when they reach (3 in.) high. 2. Trim edges at least twice a month or as needed for neat appearance. Remove clippings. D. Reseeding of Lawn Areas: Match existing seed mix of adjacent areas. E. Top Dress Fertilizer: See Section 02930 - Lawns and Grasses. 3.07 ANNUALS AND PERENNIALS A. Watering: 1. Species, size of plants, container sizes and orientation shall dictate frequency of watering. B. Weed Control: All planters with annuals and perennials shall be weed -free at all times. Control through proper cultural practices. C. Pruning: 1. Limit pruning to removal of damaged or dead twigs and foliage. 2. Remove spent flowers on a weekly basis. 3.08 INSECTS, PESTS, AND DISEASE CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect all plant materials for signs of stress, damage and potential trouble from the following: 1. Presence of insects, moles, gophers, ground squirrels, snails and slugs in planting areas. 2. Discolored or blotching leaves or needles. 3. 'Unusually light green or yellowish green color inconsistent with normal green color of leaves. B. Personnel: Perform spraying for insect, pest and disease control only by licensed, qualified, trained personnel. C. Application: Spray with extreme care to avoid all hazards to any person or pet in the area or adjacent areas. 3.09 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A.. General: Landscape Maintenance 02970 -5 Mountain View 06110 1. Repair without charge to Owner all damages to system caused by Contractor's operations. Perform all repairs within (1) watering period. 2. Report promptly to Owner all accidental damage not resulting from Contractor's negligence or operations. 3. Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements. 4. Twice a month, use a probe or other acceptable tool to check the rootball moisture of representative plants as well as the surrounding soil. B. Cleaning and Monitoring the System: I . Continually monitor the irrigation systems to verify that they are functioning properly as designed. Make program adjustments required by changing field conditions. 2. Prevent spraying on windows, building walls, tennis courts by balancing the throttle control on the remote control valves and the adjustments screws on the sprinkler heads. Do not allow water to atomize and drift. 3.10 REPLACEMENTS OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Specific Requirements: Refer to the following sections. Lawns and Grasses - Section 02930 Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Groundcover - Section 02950 END OF SECTION Landscape Maintenance 02970 -6 Mountain View 06110 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete. 2. Formwork accessories. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Cast -in Items such as Angles, Plates, Pipe Rail Sleeves, Anchor Bolts. Etc.: Supplied under Sections 05120 and 05500. 2. Cast -In Items for Precast Concrete Attachment: Supplied under Section 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete. C. Related Requirements: 1. Mechanical and Electrical Blockouts: Divisions 15 and 16. D. Related Sections: 1. Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 2. Exterior Concrete: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement and Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 3. Steel Reinforcement and Accessories: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 4. Concrete and Flatwork Screeds: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 5. Steel Embedments, Anchor Bolts and Drilled -in Anchors: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 6. Steel Form Deck and Accessories: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. 1. ACI 117 -90 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 -99 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 303.1 -97 - Standard Specification for Architectural Concrete. 4. ACI 318 -02 - Building Code .Requirements for Structural Concrete, Chapter 6. 5. Embedment Tolerances: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 7, 2000 edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Safety: Assume responsibility for safety of formwork and provide necessary design, construction, materials and maintenance to produce required concrete work safely. B. Vertical Formwork: Design formwork to withstand pressure resulting from placement and vibration of fresh concrete and to maintain specified tolerances. RDA! 2363.00 03100 -1 C. Horizontal Formwork: 1. Design formwork to support dead load weight of fresh concrete and construction live load of 50 psf and to maintain specified tolerances. 2. Design formwork to have sufficient camber to maintain tolerances specified. Provide camber sufficient to compensate for weight of fresh concrete. 3. Comply with additional requirements indicated on Structural Drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Form Coatings: Comply with EPA Architectural Coatings Rule, including VOC content limit. B. Pre - Installation Conference: Attend conference. See Section 03300. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Formwork for Exposed Architectural Concrete: Protect HDO forming material from exposure to sunlight between uses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS A. Form - Facing Materials: 1. Footings and other non - exposed concrete: Plywood, steel or dressed lumber. 2. Exposed Walls: One of the following: a. New APA B -B Plyform Class 1 Ext, 4'x 8' sheets b. Tempered concrete - form -grade hardboard. B. Chamfer Strips: Chamfer Strips: 3/4" 45° job cut wood or 3/4" 45 PVC for unexposed surfaces. Use PVC for exposed surfaces. - 2.02 FORM COATINGS A. Form Release Agent: Non - staining and VOC compliant. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Contractor's option, among products meeting specification requirements. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Adjustable in length to permit tightening of forms and of type to leave no metal closer than one inch of surface nor holes or depressions larger than 7/8" in diameter. B. Clamps, Brackets, Braces, Washers, Wedges, Walers, Etc.: Contractor's option. C. Shoring System: Contractor's option. 2.04 SLAB JOINT FORMS AND ACCESSORIES A. Slab Edge and Expansion Joint Premolded Filler: Bituminous fiber type complying with ASTM D 1751. Thickness as indicated by full depth of slab. RDAl2363.00 03100 -2 B. Slab Construction and Control Joint Forms: Dayton /Richmond G -33 Screed Key Joint or approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Provide G -35 Plastic Cap Strip strippable vinyl insert at joints to receive sealant specified in Section 07920. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Foundation Bearing Surfaces: Inspected and approved by Geotechnical Engineer prior to start of formwork. B. Formwork: Provide ample notice to Architect to allow for review of formwork surfaces that will provide finish surface of exposed concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Layout: See Section 01722. B. Subgrade Under Slabs and Footings: Fine grade to smooth, level surface prior to installation of forms. 3.03 ERECTION A. Construction and Erection: ACI 301. 1. Lap Forming: Not allowed. 2. Provide forms conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members indicated on Drawings, substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 3. Properly brace or tie to maintain position, shape and lateral stability. 4. Clearly mark top surface of concrete on form walls. Set elevations and verify formwork locations and alignment using surveying instruments in accordance with Section 01722. a. Make required adjustments prior to concrete placement. B. Tolerances: ACI 117. C. Footings: 1. Use of earth as form not allowed. 2. Formed Footings: a. Butt form material end to end. b. Close gaps greater than 3/4 inches between bottom of forms and soil surfaces at isolated over - excavated depressions. D. Walls and Grade Beams: 1. Use of earth as form not allowed. 2. Provide sufficient strength to carry construction operations and material dead loads without deflection or vibration. 3. Design forms to be capable of needed adjustments. Watch carefully as work proceeds and promptly correct faults. 4. Where finished concrete will remain exposed, space joints regularly and hold to minimum both horizontally and vertically. 5. Provide access panels in formwork for cleanout or placing as required. RDA[ 2363.00 03100 -3 E. Embeds: 1. Anchors, Inserts, Blockouts and Built -in Items: Securely fasten anchor bolts, inserts, form blockouts and other items built into concrete to formwork or hold in place with templates. Insertion into concrete after placement not allowed. a. Unless shown otherwise, anchor bolts shall be set perpendicular to the theoretical bearing surface. 2. Tolerances for Anchor Bolts and Other Embedded Items: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch center -to- center of any two bolts within an anchor bolt group where an anchor bolts group is defined as the set of anchor bolts which receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece. b. Plus or minus ' / 4 inch center -to- center of adjacent anchor bolt groups. c. Maximum allowable accumulation of inch per hundred feet along the established column line of multiple anchor bolt groups, but not to exceed a total of 1 inch, where the established column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as -built anchor bolt groups along line of columns. d. Plus or minus inch from the center of any anchor bolt group to the established column line through that group. e. The tolerances of above paragraphs apply to offset dimensions shown on the Drawings, measured parallel and perpendicular to the nearest established column line for individual columns shown on the Drawings to be offset from established column lines. f. Other embedded items or connection material supplied by others for embedment in concrete shall be set in accordance with the tolerance requirements of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. F. Chamfer Strips: Install strips at exposed outside corners. 1. Securely nail within forms using finish nails 2. Chamfer exposed vertical exterior corners of concrete 3/4" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate with work specified in Section 03300 for replacement of removed rustication strips prior to sandblasting. 3.04 JOINTS A. General: 1. Use construction joints at temporary stopping of concrete placement or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Submit locations of joints desired for construction to Architect for acceptance. 3. Leave joints in reinforced structural members rough and provide longitudinal or vertical keys as indicated at least 1 -1 /2" deep. B. Slabs on Metal Deck and Topping Slabs: Locate construction joints where accepted by Architect. Locate under partitions wherever possible. C. Slabs on Grade: 1. Locate construction joints and control joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Place joint forms in straight line flush with finished surface and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Wire bottom alignment . slots and bottom of key to metal support stakes. 4. Do not extend reinforcement through joint form unless so noted on Drawings. 5. Coordinate joint locations with scored joints where indicated on Drawings. RDAI 2363.00 03100 -4 6. Sawed joints maybe substituted for joint forms at contraction joints except at parking decks and at slabs with embedded snow melt system. a. Provide sawed joints 1/4 of slab thickness in depth. b. Cut alternate wires on welded wire fabric at sawed joint. c. Time joint sawing properly with setting of concrete. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. 7. Concrete Topping and Slabs to Remain Exposed: Control joints shall be tooled as indicated. Sawed joints not permitted without prior approval of Architect. D. Control Joints in Traffic Deck Topping Over Precast: 1. Before placing concrete topping, Ipace 6 -inch wide strip of asphalt- impregnated felt over each joint between precast concrete members over which a topping control joint will be installed. 2. Tool crack control joints in accordance with Section 03300. 3.05 FORM COATING A. Coat surface of formwork prior to each pour. B. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Apply coating prior to placing of reinforcement. D. Promptly remove excess coating material. E. Remove coatings of dust from contact surfaces of forms prior to depositing concrete. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Removal of Forms: Comply with ACI 301 and the following. Remove forms only in manner to insure safety of structure. 1. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the Work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided the concrete is sufficiently cured to be undamaged by form removal operations and provided that supplementary curing and protection is provided for the exposed concrete. a. Coordinate timing of form removal with curing requirements for concrete with architectural finishes specified in Section 03300. For exposed concrete with architectural finish, strip entire surface without break to ensure uniform curing. 2. Formwork supporting weight of concrete such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained 75.percent of design strength at 28 days, whichever is greatest. a. Form removal time may be altered if a reshoring program is used that is acceptable to the Architect and Structural Engineer. b. Potential compressive strength of cast -in -place concrete shall be determined by testing field -cured concrete specimens representative of the concrete location of members. 1) Field -cured concrete specimens (as requested by the Contractor for early form removal) shall be made and tested by the Owner's testing facility and paid for by the Contractor. RDAi 2363.00 03100 -5 3. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been designed and arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 4. See also Cold Weather requirements in Section 03300. 3.07 REUSE A. Clean form material suitable for reuse before erection. Form material will not be acceptable for reuse, if in opinion of the Architect, it will not produce finished surface required by these specifications or called for on Drawings. Reused forms not allowed for architectural concrete. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: See Section 01450 Quality Control. Special inspection is required for the following work under this Section: 1. Bolts secured in forms for embedment in cast -in -place concrete. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 03100 -6 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars for cast -in -place concrete. 2. Welded wire fabric for cast -in -place concrete. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric for exterior flatwork for Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Reinforcing steel for masonry for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Related Requirements: 1. Precast Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete. D. Related Sections: 1. Exterior Concrete: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement and Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 3. Concrete: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. 1. ACI 117 -90 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 -99 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 -99 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Parts 2 and 3. 4. ACI 503.1 -92 - Standard Specification for Bonding Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood, Brick and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi- Component Epoxy Adhesive. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. SP -66 (94) - ACI Detailing Manual. 2. MSP - Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 2001, .27th edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Indicate size, configuration, pertinent dimensions, number, exact position, and spacing of reinforcement and exact location of openings, framing, and special conditions affecting work. 2. All shop drawings shall be original drawings produced by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. RDAI 2363.00 032000 -1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Reinforcing Steel Suppliers: All reinforcing steel suppliers must meet the following qualifications in addition to any other requirements of the Project Manual. a. Business longevity under current business names of five years or more immediately prior to bidding this project. b. Previous experience showing successfully completed projects of similar size and complexity as this project involving fabrication of reinforcing steel. c. Any change of reinforcing steel fabricator required as a result of failure to meet the above requirements shall be made at not additional cost to the Owner. 2. Reinforcing Steel Installers: All reinforcing steel placing contracts must meet the following qualifications in addition to any other requirements of the Project Manual. a. Business longevity under current business names of five years or more immediately prior to bidding this Project. b. Previous experience showing successfully completed projects of similar size and complexity as this project involving placing of reinforcing steel. B. Pre - Installation Conference: Attend conference. See Section 03300. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Reinforcing Steel: Unload and store reinforcing steel to keep clean. Store on timber skids while awaiting use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. Conform to General Notes on Structural Drawings. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Furnish in sheets. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: No. 14 or No. 16 gauge, black, soft iron wire. B. Wire Bar Supports and Spacers: Comply with CRSI MSP. Provide rigid support and clearances required in footings, walls, columns and flatwork. 1. Supported on Soil: Class 3. Provide earth - bearing plates. C. Precast Concrete Bar Supports: Comply with CRSI MSP. 1. Locations: Use to support foundation mats, reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in slabs -on- grade, and bars supported on fiber voids only. 2. Types: Provide plain for single mats, doweled for double mats. 3. Sizes: a. Depth: Sized to provide exact clearances indicated. b. Width and Length: 2" minimum, 6" maximum. RDAI 2363.00 03200 -2 D. All-Plastic Bar Supports: Comply with CRSI MSP -1. Provide rigid support and clearances as indicated. Do not use where construction traffic over supported bar mats will be required. E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C881. Sika Corp. Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel or approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Reinforcement: Provide ample notice to Architect to allow for review of completed concrete reinforcement before placing concrete. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with general notes on Structural Drawings and ACI 318. B. Bending: 1. Bend reinforcement cold. 2. Provide full - length bars, accurately bent to details. 3. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete except as indicated on the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Architect. C. Placing: 1. Place reinforcement accurately and hold firmly in place before and during the placing of concrete. 2. Provide minimum concrete protective cover for reinforcement from the exterior face of members in accordance with ACI 318 and notes on Drawings. 3. Provide bar supports and spacers to place bars in the proper location and wire adequately at intersections to hold bars firmly in position while concrete is placed. 4. Project dowels adequately to provide Class B splice unless otherwise indicated. Wire bent dowels in place before pouring. 5. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117. D. Supports and Spacers: 1. Provide supports properly spaced and with sufficient strength to carry loads of reinforcing steel and deposited concrete without collapsing or allowing bars to sag. 2. Use support chairs or bolsters attached to formwork to support vertical curtains of wall reinforcement. Use material of proper size to provide specified cover for reinforcement. 3. Provide plastic coated or stainless steel protected bar supports and spacers where they will be in contact with concrete surfaces exposed to weather. 4. Do not use bar supports to support runways for concrete buggies or similar loads. 5. Brickbats or precast blocks used to support mats of bars only with acceptance of Structural Engineer. E. Lap Splicing: 1. Wherever it is necessary to splice reinforcement other than as indicated on Drawings, submit proposed splice locations to Architect for review and approval prior to construction. 2. Do not splice at points of maximum stress nor splice adjacent bars at same point. 3. Where spliced, lap continuous bars 50 diameters, but not less than 12 ", unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. RDAI 2363.00 03200 -3 3. Where spliced, provide class B lap splices in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Provide lap splice lengths as noted on the Structural Drawings. 3.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Lay welded wire fabric continuously, with edges and ends overlapping adjoining sheets minimum of one full mesh, plus 2 ", and not less than 6 ", tied and placed over all piping and conduit. B. Support fabric on bar supports at position indicated on Drawings. C. Where required, construct bulkheads at construction joints and screeds to place fabric in proper position. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Notify Architect and Structural Engineer at least 48 hours before reinforcing steel installation is ready for inspection. 2. Coordinate scheduling of placement of concrete under Section 03300 to allow sufficient time for Architect and Structural Engineer's observations of completed installation and for making any necessary adjustments to the reinforcing placement before delivery of concrete. 3. For walls above 4 feet in height, notify Structural Engineer in time to allow his observation of reinforcing before buttoning up of forms. B. Special Inspection: See Section 01450 Quality Control. Special Inspection is required for the following work under this Section. 1. Placement of reinforcing steel for concrete requiring special inspection. See Section 03300. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel. 3.05 CLEANING A. Reinforcement: Clean prior to placing concrete to remove oil, soil, ice or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 03200 -4 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed cast -in -place concrete. 2. Concrete flatwork. 3. Topping for steel deck. 4. Topping for precast deck. 5. Concrete for steel pan stairs. 6. Miscellaneous concrete. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Concrete for Sitework for Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Concrete for Vehicular Paving for Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Floor Mat Frame from Section 12481 Floor Mats. 2. Expansion Control Devices from Section 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. D. Related Requirements: 1. Quality Control and Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. E. Related Sections: 1. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Non -Shrink Grout: Section 03600 Grouts. 4. Ready -Mixed Grout for Masonry: Section 04070 Masonry Grout. 5. Structural Precast Concrete: Section 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete. 6. Steel Form Deck and Accessories: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 7. Parking Deck Sealer: Section 07185 Traffic Deck Sealant and Waterproofing System. 8. Hydronic Heating and Snow Melt System: Division 15 Mechanical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with following except as modified by supplementary requirements of this Project Specification. I . ACI 117 -90 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 -05 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 303.1 -97 - Standard Specification for Cast -In -Place Architectural Concrete. 4. ACI 306.1 -90 - Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308.1 -98 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 6. ACI 318 -[02] [051 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Parts 2 and 3. 7. ACI 503.2 -92 - Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi- Component Epoxy Adhesive. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -1 B. Guide References and Standard Practices: Comply with recommendations of the following except as otherwise specified in this Project Manual. 1. ACI 302.1 R -05 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 2. ACI 211.5R -01 - Guide for Submittal of Concrete Proportions. 3. ACI 305R -91 - Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 309R -96 - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 6. ASTM F710 -05 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. ASTM International Standard Specifications and Test Methods: 1. ASTM C94 -04a - Ready -Mixed Concrete. 2. ASTM C494 -99ae1 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. D. Field References: Keep at least one (1) copy of ACI 301 on site at all times. Other reference standards listed above shall be kept on site when directed by Architect or Engineer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review and Acceptance: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature for the following: a. Curing compounds. b. Sealers. 2. Concrete Mix Designs: Not less than two (2) weeks prior to placing any concrete, submit written reports and laboratory tests of each proposed concrete mix for each class of concrete for acceptance. a. Submit for acceptance in accordance with Product Data provisions of Section 01330 and ACI 211.5R. b. Concrete mix designs shall be proportioned by either the Field Experience Method or Laboratory Trial Batch Method in accordance with procedures in referenced ACI standards. c. The concrete mix designs shall conform to the requirements of this Specification and both ACI 301 and ACI 318. d. Mix designs prepared more than twelve (12) months prior to the date of submittal for review are not acceptable. e. Submit manufacturer's data and /or certifications verifying conformance of mix materials including admixtures with specified requirements. f. Include following: 1) Mix identification designation. 2) Statement of intended use for mix. 3) Mix proportions, including admixtures. 4) Wet and dry unit weight. 5) Entrained air content. 6) Design slump. 7) Design compressive strength. 8) Water /cementitious materials ratio 9) Aggregate Source 10) Strength qualification data. g. Strength Qualification Data: RDAI 2363.00 03300 -2 I ) Submit required average strength qualification data and documentation per ACI 301 4.2.3. 2) If trial batches are used to qualify average strength, mix design shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve average compression strength a minimum of 1200 psi greater than specified strength with slump within one inch of maximum permitted and air content within 0.5% of maximum allowable. 3) If field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data for each production facility that will supply concrete to Project, including copies of concrete testing agency's reports from which data was compiled. 4) Lightweight Concrete: Relate strength to cement content of the concrete mix: Do Ciot use water - cement ratio. h. Submit manufacturer's data and /or certifications documenting conformance of mix materials, including admixtures, with specified requirements. i. Identify each mix -by -mix identification letter indicated in Article 2.04 Concrete Mix Types. j. Submit separate mix designs indicating slump, air content and admixtures for all mixes designated to receive fibrous reinforcing. 3. Shop Drawings: Submit construction and control joint locations for acceptance. f� B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Installation /Application Instructions: See Section 01600. a. Submit for following products before beginning concrete floor slab installation: 1) Curing compounds. 2) Sealers. b. Copies: 1) Submit one copy for Architect's information. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Concrete flatwork installer shall have a minimum of two years experience on equivalent projects. 2. Parking Garage Flatwork Contractor Qualifications: Company specializing in placement and finishing of concrete flatwork with record of successful installations of high quality parking garage deck slabs. Flatwork installers requesting to bid this Project must be pre - qualified prior to bid date and are subject to prior approval by the Architect. B. Regulatory Requirements: All concrete curing compounds, sealers, evaporation control materials, hardeners, and other concrete treatment products shall be certified to be VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Pre - Installation Conference: Before submittal of mix designs, hold conference with General Contractor's superintendent, independent testing laboratory, concrete formwork installer, reinforcement installer, concrete supplier, concrete installer, pumping equipment operator, and manufacturer(s) representatives) in accordance with Section [01310] [01600]. Also notify Architect and Structural Engineer of meeting at least 10 days in advance. 1. Discuss all matters pertaining to proper forming, reinforcement placement, concrete supply, concrete placing, concrete testing and concrete curing. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -3 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to underslab vapor retarder installation, vapor emission control and preparation of slabs to receive finish flooring. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties, Architect and Structural Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. B. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Materials handling and batching shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM C94. 1. Hauling Time: Discharge concrete transmitted in truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1 -1 /2 hours after mixing water has been added. 2. Deliver concrete to site in exact proportions required by design mix. 3. Extra Water: Should extra water be required for workability before depositing concrete and water /cementitious material ratio of accepted mix design will not be exceeded thereby, General Contractor's superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. a. Additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. b. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 50 revolutions of drum before depositing. c. Water may be added at the site only once for each batch. 4. Return excess concrete to supplier. 5. Minimize water used to wash mixing and delivery equipment. C. Curing Compounds, Sealers and Other Chemical Products: 1. Delivery: Deliver products in original unopened manufacturer's containers with labels intact. 2. Storage: Comply with Manufacturer's printed instructions. Store in an interior, cool, dry place at above 45 degrees F. a. Material temperature shall be at least 50 degrees F before use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When for three successive days prior to concrete placement the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 °F or when the average outdoor temperature is expected to, drop below 40 °F on the day of concrete placement, preparation, protection and curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 306.1. b. Minimum temperature of concrete upon delivery shall conform to ACI 301 4.2.2.7. Concrete temperature at placement shall conform to minimum values of ACI 306.1 Table 3.2.1, and shall not exceed minimum values by more than 20 °F. c. Subject to acceptance of Architect, an accelerating admixture may be used. Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. Calcium chloride and other chloride -type accelerating admixtures will not be allowed. d. Subject to acceptance of Architect, Contractor may substitute cement for equal weight of fly ash in design mix. e. Comply with concrete protection temperature requirements of ACI 306.1. Record concrete temperatures during specified protection period at intervals not to exceed 16 hours and no less than twice during any 24 -hour period. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -4 f. Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building for at least one story above and one story below the floor being concreted to allow the floor to maintain temperatures between 50 and 70 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. Obtain one (1) temperature reading of air at floor level for each 600 square feet of floor area just prior to concreting, and provide additional heat should the measured temperature be less than 50 degrees F. Record and submit temperature readings for Architect and Structural Engineer review no later than 24 hours after concreting. g. Submittal of detailed procedures, means, and methods for production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather is not required. 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305R. b. Temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85 °F. c. When air temperatures on day of placement are expected to exceed 90 °F, mix ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well - crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water. d. Retarding Admixture may be used subject to acceptance of Architects Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. e. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. 3. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet, or snow. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor to damage the surface finish. 4. Acrylic Polymer Sealing: a. Cold Weather: Do not apply sealer when the temperature of the concrete is below 40 degrees F. b. Humidity: Do not apply sealer when the relative humidity is 80 percent or above. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Hydronic Heating and Snow Melt System Embedded in Concrete: Coordinate scheduling with Division 15 Mechanical work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials, General: Provide materials in accordance with ACI 301, 4.2.1 unless amended or superseded by requirements of this section or General Notes on Structural Drawings. Ready -mixed Concrete: ASTM C94. On -site mixed concrete not allowed. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1 /II. D. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. Pre - consumer (post - industrial) recycled coal fly ash byproduct of coal burning at electric utility plants. a. Allowable Fly Ash Replacement of Portland Cement in Concrete Mixes: See Article "PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES ". RDAI 2363.00 03300 -5 a. Required Fly Ash Proportion of Total Cementitious Materials in Concrete Mixes and Contribution to Recycled Content in Concrete: See Article "PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES ". E. Aggregate: 1. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone containing no deleterious substances that cause surface spalling. 3. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, obtained from same source throughout Project. F. Water: Potable. G. Chemical Admixtures: 1. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C260. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. One of the following: a. Euclid Eucon WR -75, WR -89, or WR -91. b. Master Builders Pozzolith 200. c. Master Builders Prokrete -N. d. Sika Plastocrete 161. e. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 3. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G. One of the following: a. Euclid Eucon 37 or 537. b. Sika Sikament 300. c. Master Builders - Rheobuild 1000. e. W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn. - Daracem 19. f. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 4. Non - Corrosive, Non - Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494. Type C or E, containing not more chloride ions than present in municipal drinking water and with long term test data from independent testing laboratory providing non - corrosive effect on reinforcing steel. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing more than 0.10 percent chloride ions or sodium thiocyanates not allowed. One of the following: a. Euclid Accelguard 80 or 90. b. W.R. Grace Daraset. c. Sika Plastocrete 161 FL. d. W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn. - DCI. e. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 5. Water- Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. One of the following: a. Euclid - Eucon Retarder 75 b. W.R. Grace Daratard -17 c. Sika Plastocrete 161 R d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 6. Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture: Calcium nitrite based. a. Master Builders, Inc. - Rheocrete CNI. b. W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn. - DCI -S. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. H. Integral Color: Provide color by Davis Colors, L.M. Scofield Co. or Solomon Colors. 1. Colors: As selected by Architect. a. Color for handicapped ramps shall be in conformance with City standards. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -6 2.02 CURING COMPOUNDS AND SEALERS A. Curing Compounds, Sealers, and Coatings: Water- based. 1. Toxicity /IEQ: Low VOC. B Curing Compound - Vertical Surfaces: ASTM C309. 1. Architectural Concrete Vertical Surfaces: Omit curing compound. Cure in accordance with Section 03364. C Curing Compound - Interior Slabs to Receive Foot Traffic Topping, Tile in Mortar Bed, Resilient Flooring, Terrazzo, Adhered Carpet, Paint, Coating, Resinous Flooring, Seamless Flooring, Concrete Stain or Chemical Hardener, and Concrete Roof Slabs: ASTM C309, Type I (ID), Class B, VOC- compliant, dissipating resin type: 1. Euclid Chemical Co. - Kurez DR VOX. 2. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Cure R. 3. Tamms Industries - Horncure WB 30. 4. US Spec - Maxcure Resin Clear. 5. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. D. Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior Slabs to Remain Exposed Without Stain, Interior Slabs to Receive Access Flooring or Carpet With Pad, and Exterior Concrete: ASTM C309, Type I and ASTM C1315, Class B. Minimum 30 percent solids content, maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per square centimeter (300 square feet per gallon coverage): 1. Degussa Construction Chemicals - Acryseal HS. 2. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Dress & Seal WB 30. 3. US Spec - CS -30 -1315. 4. W.R. Meadows - Sealtight Vocomp -30. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. E. Curing Compounds for Exterior Slabs and Sidewalks: Section 02776. 1. Curing Compound in Areas to Receive Cementitious Coating, Including Pool Deck and Balconies: Compatible with coating. See Sections 02776 and 09984. F. Curing Compound and Sealer for Integrally Colored Concrete: As recommended by concrete color manufacturer. G. Floor Sealer: Second coat of Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior Slabs to Remain Exposed as specified above Parking Garage Ramps and Decks: 1. Wet cure. Curing compound not acceptable. 2. Sealer for Parking Garage Ramps and Decks: 07185 Traffic Deck Sealant and Waterproofing System. 2.03 CONCRETE CLEANER AND STRIPPER A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Degussa Construction Chemicals - Citrus Degreaser and Cleaner. 2. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Citrex. 3. US Spec - Maxi - Concrete Cleaner. 4. W.R. Meadows - Sealtight Ultrite Degreaser. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -7 2.04 CURING BLANKETS AND COVERS A. Moisture - Retaining Cover: One of the following non - staining concrete curing papers, complying with ASTM C171 -03. 1. Fortifiber Orange Label Sisalkraft. 2. Accepted substitute. Absorptive Cover for Wet Curing: One of the following in accordance with ACI 308.1. 1. Burlap. 2. Cotton mats. 2.05 ADHESIVES AND BONDING COMPOUNDS A. Epoxy Adhesives for Use in All Structural Repairs: Two - component. 100% solids, 100% reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces and comply with ASTM C881. 1. Euclid Euco Epoxy 452 or 620. 2. Sika Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod or Armatec 1 10. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Where epoxy injection procedures are used, use low viscosity epoxy made by one of above manufacturers. B. Bonding Compound (Interior only): 1. Euclid Euco Weld 2. Larsen Products Weldcrete 3. Sika Sikabond 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Use only at areas not subject to moisture. C. Epoxy Joint Filler /Sealer: Two component, flexible, solvent -free, moisture insensitive compound with minimum ASTM D2240 Shore A hardness of 80 at 28 days. Use self - leveling formulation for floors. Use non -sag formulation for vertical and overhead joints. 1. Euclid Euco 700. 2. Sika Sikadur 51 NS /SL. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.06 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Reference Standards: ACI 301 Section 4, and ACI 318, Chapter 4 B. Design: Conform to General Notes on Structural Drawings. Proportion ingredients for mixes in accordance with ACI 301 4.2.2 and 4.2.3. 1. Should Contractor require special mix due to structural requirements, weather or materials, submit samples of cement and aggregate to be used to approved testing laboratory. Testing laboratory will make analysis of materials and design proper mix to be used. C. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Fly ash will be allowed as a cementitious component of any mix unless otherwise indicated under Concrete Mix Types. Fly ash shall not exceed 15 percent of total cementitious material by weight, nor limitations indicated in Schedule of Concrete Mixes. C. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Total cementitious materials in concrete mixes shall include fly ash, proportioned as a percentage by weight of total cementitious RDAI 2363.00 03300 -8 materials as indicated under Concrete Mix Types or in Schedule of Concrete Mixes on Drawings. D. _ Aggregate: Maximum coarse aggregate size as indicated under Concrete Mix Types. E. Admixtures: No admixtures will be allowed except as specified unless authorized by the Architect. All requests for approval or substitution must be made by the General Contractor and be accompanied by sufficient information and test data for evaluation. 1. All admixtures shall be chemically compatible with cementitious materials and all other admixtures used in the mix. 2. All admixtures shall be chloride free. No calcium chloride shall be added to concrete. 3. Air Entrainment: All concrete work that will be exposed to frost action in its final form shall contain an air - entraining agent. Other concrete work may also have an air - entraining agent at the option of the Contractor unless otherwise specified under Concrete Mix Types. 4. Water Reducing Admixture: Use where indicated in Schedule of Concrete Mixes and other locations at Contractor's option. 5. Non - Corrosive, Non - Chloride Accelerator: Use at all concrete slabs placed at air temperature below 50 degrees F. 6. Superplasticizer: Contractor's option at: a. All pumped concrete. b. Concrete with water /cement ratio below 0.50. 6. Concrete Placed by Pumping: Use high range water reducing admixture. Chloride Ions: Maximum water - soluble chloride ion concentration in all concrete mixes shall not exceed 0.15 percent by weight of cementitious materials[, except as follows]. 1. Concrete Over Metal Decks: Maximum 0.06 percent. G. Strengths: 4,000 psi unless otherwise indicated or scheduled. Provide minimum cement content of 470 lbs. per cubic yard unless otherwise indicated or scheduled. H. Water /Cementitious Material Ratio: Conform to ACI 301, 4.2.2, and ACI 318, Chapter 4, as modified herein and as scheduled in General Notes on Structural Drawings. Comply with strictest applicable requirement: 1. Concrete Placed by Pumping: 0.50 maximum. 2. Concrete Exposed to Freezing /Thawing in Service: 0.50 maximum. 3. Concrete with Design Strength of 3,000 psi or Greater: 0.60 maximum. 4. Concrete with Design Strength of 4,000 psi or Greater: 0.50 maximum. 5. Concrete Exposed to Weather or Freeze -Thaw Including Paving, Site Work and Exterior Slabs: Meet requirements of ACI 301 and 318 Tables 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 except that concrete shall have a water - cement ratio not exceeding 0.45. 6. Concrete Exposed to Deicers or Aggressive Chemicals Including Parking Slabs, Vehicular Ramps and Loading Docks: Concrete shall have a water cement ratio not exceeding 0.40. 7. Calculation of Water - cementitious Material Ratios: Water includes free surface moisture on aggregates and liquid admixture. Slump: Design concrete mixes to provide slumps indicated under Mix Types. 1. Concrete Containing High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Slump of 2 -3" upon arrival at site, maximum slump of 8" after addition of superplasticizer. 2. Other Concrete: Maximum 4 ". RDAI 2363.00 03300 -9 J. Concrete for Floors: Conform to ACI 301, Table 4.2.2.1 except as otherwise scheduled under Concrete Mix Types. Design mix so that, after curing, moisture content will not exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square foot over 24 hours using the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) quantitative testing method. See Section 03320. 2.07 MIXING A. Add aggregate and approximately two- thirds of required water to mixer first and mix minimum of 70 revolutions at mixing speed to ensure wetting of all aggregate particles, then add cement, air entraining agent and remaining water and mix minimum of 30 revolutions at mixing speed. B. Integral Color: Add integral color by weight directly into concrete mixer along with aggregate, cement, water and other mix ingredients. Color quantity shall be as recommended by manufacturer and same as used in accepted sample. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX TYPES A. Concrete Mixes: Comply with all requirements indicated by General Notes on Structural Drawings. Mix A - For Sidewalks, Concrete Paving and Other Exterior Concrete: 3500 psi minimum compressive strength at age of 28 days. Minimum of 564 pounds of total cementitious materials per cubic yard. Fly ash not allowed. Type 1 /II Cement. Type II Modified or Type V Cement. 3/4 Inch Maximum Aggregate Size. 6% + 1-1/2% Entrained Air. 4 Inches Maximum Slump. Water Reducing Agent: Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Integral Color: Add to mix for locations indicated in dosage recommended by color manufacturer and as used in accepted sample. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect shall be offered uninterrupted access to ready -mix batching plant while work is in progress. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Subgrade: Inspect subgrade to verify elevation and compaction requirements. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -10 C. Architect's Review: Provide minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect to allow him to review forms and reinforcement just before concrete is placed and to observe placing of concrete. D. Contractor's Review: Contractor shall inspect forms and reinforcing prior to concrete placement to assure accurate placement of embedded items. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended or superseded by this section or notes on Structural Drawings. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Do not begin concrete work until operations are complete enough to allow placement to be carried on as a continuous operation. B. Clean equipment for mixing and transporting the concrete. C. Formwork: Section 03100. 1. Clean forms of debris and ice. 2. Wet (except in freezing weather) and coat temporary forms as specified in Section 03100. If water accumulates in the forms, pump it out before concrete is deposited. D. Reinforcement: Section 03200. E. Clearly mark finish top surface of vertical members on the form walls. Protection: Cover masonry walls, glazing, and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to placing of slabs, sidewalks or floors above. 3.04 PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 301, Section 5. B. Placement: Place concrete in approximately uniform horizontal layers not over twelve inches in height. Piling up of concrete in forms or chuting in manner to separate aggregates will not be permitted. Do not drop concrete in free fall over 5 feet. C. Water: Prevent accumulations of water on surface of concrete due to water gain, segregation, or other causes, during placement or compacting. Make provision for removal of water as may accumulate so that concrete not be placed in such accumulation. D. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during and immediately after depositing by means of mechanical vibrators. Supplement by hand spading at corners and angles of forms, around embedded fixtures and in other difficult areas. 1. Mechanical Vibrator: Comply with ACI 301, Table 5.3.2.5. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. 3. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. 4. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -11 5. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. E. Finishing: Where tops of cast -in -place concrete walls will form finished surface, immediately finish concrete in form by skilled cement finisher. Walls or surfaces not finished to level subject to removal and replacement. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Construction Joints of Structural Members: ACI 301 5.3.2.6. Use polyvinyl acetate bonding compound, applied as recommended by manufacturer. - 1. Joints Subject to Moisture: Do not use bonding compound, use epoxy adhesive. 2. Use of other bonding methods such as surface retarder, Portland cement grout, or roughening of surface not allowed without written acceptance of Architect. 3.06 FLATWORK A. Screeds: Establish finish plane of horizontal surfaces by screeds, carefully aligned and securely set, spaced not over eight feet apart and installed at proper level or slope, prior to placing concrete. 1. Slabs on Metal Deck: Establish elevation control and screed from structural steel beams, compensating for beam and decking deflections during placement. Elevated slabs on metal deck shall be placed with top surface screeded flat and level. Nominal thickness of slabs indicated on Drawings shall be increased as required to offset deflection of decking and supporting members. Provide sufficient concrete quantity to allow for deflections while achieving flat slab surface. B. Floor Slab Tolerances: Level within maximum tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet except slope to drains as indicated. Comply with stricter tolerance requirements of floor finish manufacturers where applicable. C. Selection of Finishes: In accordance with ACI 301 5.3.4 except where colored concrete finishes are indicated. Finish surfaces sparingly with special tools, such as roller bugs, to force coarse aggregate slightly below surface. Jitterbug tampers not allowed without acceptance of Architect. Dusting of wearing surfaces with dry materials not allowed. D. Requirements for Slab Finish: Comply with requirements of various Sections for slab tolerances, finishes, curing, etc. Be responsible to repair or replace slabs as required and specified in those sections to meet requirements. 1. Slabs Indicated to Have Exposed and Sealed Concrete Finish: Floated finish in accordance with ACI 301, Paragraph 5.3.4.2b. 2. Slabs to Receive Floor Coverings or Tenant Finish: Troweled finish in accordance With ACI 301, Paragraph 5.3.4.2c. a. Hand trowel interior floor slabs. Machine troweling is not allowed. 3. Integrally Colored Concrete: After placement of concrete, float to a uniform surface. Do not begin finishing until bleedwater has left surface. Do not over - trowel. Dusting with cement and sprinkling or fogging with water not allowed. Provide acid etched finish to exposed surfaces. E. Control and Construction Joint Layout: Locate joints as indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise accepted by Architect. 1. Locate under partitions wherever possible. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -12 2. Center a control joint on each column line unless indicated otherwise. 3. Avoid creation of reentrant corners and panels with length greater than twice the width. 4. Coordinate joint locations with scored joints where indicated on Drawings. 5. Slabs on Grade: a. Panels: Not larger than 225 square feet nor longer than 15 feet in any direction. 6. Elevated Slabs, Slabs on Metal Deck and Topping Slabs: Locate control joints only where accepted by Architect. F. Slab Construction Joints: Section 03100. G. Confrol Joints: 1. Formed Control Joints: Section 03100. 2. Sawed Control Joints: a. Control joints shall be saw -cut full length as indicated on Drawings. a. Slabs to Be Covered by Finish Flooring: [Sawed joints may be substituted for joint forms] [Control joints shall be saw -cut full length as indicated on Drawings] [ except at slabs with.embedded hydronic heating system]. b. Provide sawed joints 1/4 of slab thickness in depth. c. Cut alternate wires on welded wire fabric at sawed joint. d. Time joint sawing properly with setting of concrete. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. 3. Tooled Control Joints: a. Slabs to Remain Exposed, Colored Concrete Slabs -on- Grade, Elevated Structural Concrete Slabs, Concrete Topping and Slabs with Embedded Hydronic Heating System: Control joints shall be tooled as indicated. Sawed joints not permitted without prior approval of Architect. b. Tooled Joint Size: ' / 2 inch wide by 1 inch unless indicated otherwise. 4. Control Joints in Traffic Deck Topping Over Precast: a. Preparation: Section 03100. b. Tool crack control joints with Goldblatt Groover #06 -314 or equivalent tool directly over the intersection of all precast members, including all tee flange joints, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Saw- cutting is not allowed. 1) Tooled Joint Size: ' / 2 inch wide by 1 inch unless indicated otherwise. Exterior Slabs: Installed under Section 02776. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Reference Standards: ACI 301 5.3.6 and ACI 308.1. B. Curing, General: Perform curing of concrete by moisture curing, by moisture- retaining cover curing, by curing compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. 2. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. 3. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. 4. The curing period shall be 7 days. 5. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -13 %, IT 6. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. C. Form Removal: Comply with Section 03100. Do not remove forms until times as specified. ! Remove carefully to not injure concrete surface. Protect edges and corners to prevent cracking, chipping or other damage and premature drying. 1. Use wooden wedges only for removing forms from exposed concrete with architectural finish. D. Vertical Surfaces: Clean surfaces of loose sand, mortar, debris and grout; spray lightly with water and coat with clear or translucent curing compound as soon as possible after removing forms. Apply curing compound same working day that forms are removed. E. Horizontal Surfaces: Perform curing of concrete by moisture curing, by moisture - retaining cover curing, by curing compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. Curing Compound Method: As soon as possible after placing concrete, coat exposed horizontal surfaces with curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and cover with white polyethylene sheeting of minimum of six mil nominal thickness. Give special attention to providing adequate curing of,slab edges. 1. General: Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. 2 Preparation of Freshly Placed Concrete: a. Allow all surface water to dissipate prior to application. b. Verify concrete to be free of oil, dirt, waxes and other foreign materials. 3. Apply in thin, even applications with low pressure airless sprayer or applicator. Do not dilute or puddle. 4. Apply in two uniform coats at manufacturer's recommended coverage rates, allowing 2 to 3 hours between coats. Apply in two applications at right angles to each other. a. Application Rate, Each Coat: Not less than 1 gallon per 200 square feet. 5. Provide polyethylene sheeting as wide as practical, edges lapped minimum of six inches, weighted to prevent blowing, and sealed to prevent loss of moisture. Keep sheeting in place a minimum of seven days. 6. Curing compound method not allowed on any surface where waterproofing, finish flooring or other material is to be bonded to concrete surface, unless sufficient time is allowed for dissipative type compound to fully dissipate, or unless curing compound membrane is to be completely removed mechanically. G. Wet Curing: Provide wet curing by keeping concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water, or by continuous water -fog spray, or by covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping it continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 1. Slabs to Receive Thin Set Ceramic Tile or Polyurethane Floor Sealer: Wet cure with wet burlap for at least seven days. Do not use curing compounds. 2. Slabs to Receive Chemical Hardener or Stain: Wet cure for at least seven days. Do not use curing compounds. a. Stained Concrete: Comply with Section 03364. b. Chemical Hardener: Comply with Section 03365. 3. Parking Garage Slabs -on -Grade and Topping Slabs: Wet cure for at least seven days. Do not use curing compounds. a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 RDAI 2363.00 03300 -14 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 4. Slabs to Remain Exposed: Wet curing with staining absorptive covers not allowed. H. Moisture Retaining Cover Curing Method: Cover concrete surfaces with specified moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. I. Concrete Pavements: See Section 02776. J. Waste Management During Wet Curing and Moisture Curing: Prevent water run -off. K. Protection: Protect concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping, and other damage during progress of the work, and leave in good condition upon completion. 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from weather damage. 2. Protect finished slabs from mortar leakage from placing of slabs above. 3. Protect finished slabs from weather damage. 4. Do not permit construction activities such as pipe cutting which could damage or stain concrete floor slabs. 5. Do not store materials on concrete floor slabs that could expose concrete to oil contamination. 3.08 TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES A. Reference Standard: ACI 301, 5.3.3. B. , Form Removal: Finish and cure concrete surfaces covered by formwork immediately after forms have been removed. Do not expose more surface area than can be finished and cured in one working day. C. Patching: 1. Patch voids, honeycombs or damaged areas in accordance with repair of surface defects above. 2. Add white cement to patching grout as required to match color of existing concrete where patches are exposed to view. 3. Patch tie holes where concrete is in contact with earth and where concrete is exposed. 4. Use specified bonding compound and epoxy adhesive. D. laitance: Remove deposits of laitance occurring on top of concrete surfaces as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent injury to concrete. Repair areas where laitance is removed as specified for patching. E. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Treat surfaces of concrete wall, slabs, beams, and columns, which are to be covered by subsequent work, as specified under Patching. Unpainted Exposed Concrete Surfaces: 1. Carefully protect from damage and soiling concrete surfaces, both interior and exterior, to remain exposed but unpainted. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -15 2. Patch where required as specified under Patching. Upon completion of work, reclean damaged or soiled surface as required to make clean, smooth and finished in every respect. G. Concrete Surfaces to Receive Paint or Other Coating, Concrete Surfaces to Remain Exposed in Parking Garage and Concrete Retaining Wall Surfaces to Remain Exposed or to Receive Finish Coating: Provide grout cleandown: 1. Remove fins and irregularities with dry carborundum stone from surfaces. 2. Repair defective areas as specified under Patching. 3. Thoroughly wet down surface and apply grout mixture with brushes or spray gun uniformly and completely filling air bubbles and holes. a. Grout Mixture: One part cement, 1 -1/2 parts fine sand, and 50:50 mixture of Euclid SBR Latex or equal and water to consistency of thick paint. 4. Immediately after applying slurry, float surfaces with cork or other suitable floats, scouring surfaces vigorously. 5. While slurry is still plastic, finish with sponge rubber float removing any dried material. There shall be noticeable film of slurry remaining after this rubbing. 6. Complete entire cleaning operation for any area same day it is started. Do not leave slurry on any surfaces overnight. 3.09 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 5.3.7. B. Inspection: Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. C. Repair: 1. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations. 2. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural finished concrete except upon express direction of Architect. 3. Patch holes and defects. D. Repair defects in structural concrete walls as follows: 1. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean thoroughly to remove loose concrete and dust. Apply thin coat of epoxy adhesive. Form and pour full with non - shrink grout prior to development of tack -free condition of epoxy adhesive. Strip forms after grout has hardened and provide specified finish. Moist cure and apply clear curing and sealing compound immediately after finishing. 2. Defects Greater Than 1/2 Inch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and apply epoxy adhesive. Place or dry pack using non - shrink grout prior to development of tack -free condition of epoxy adhesive. If dry pack consistency is required, use non - shrink grout damp pack formula. Provide specified finish and cure. 3. Defects Less Than 1/2 Inch Depth and All Tie Holes: a. For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5,000 psi or less: Chip and clean per 1, above. Dry pack, finish and cure per 1, above. 4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review of Architect. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -16 E. Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding or other methods acceptable to the Architect after concrete has cured a minimum of 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Where acceptable to the Architect, the specified underlayment compound, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, may be used. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" patching concrete and apply specified bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 5. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned surfaces and apply specified bonding compound. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3.10 FLOOR SLAB SEALING A. Sealing Slabs to Remain Exposed [ But Not Receiving Stain or Hardener]: [Includes garage slabs.] 1. Cure concrete floor slabs as specified above. 2. Prior to completion of Project, apply second coat of acrylic polymer curing and sealing compound to concrete floors not receiving other finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Preparation of Freshly Placed Concrete to Receive Acrylic Polymer Sealer: a. Allow all surface water to dissipate prior to application of sealer. b. Verify concrete to be free of oil, dirt, waxes and other foreign materials. 4. Preparation of Hardened Concrete to Receive Acrylic Polymer Sealer: a. Degrease and clean surfaces of all contaminates with concrete cleaner and stripper. b. Thoroughly rinse surface. Broom out all standing water. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for wetting and drying concrete prior to sealing. 5. Acrylic Polymer Sealer Application: a. Apply in thin, even applications with low pressure airless sprayer or applicator. Do not dilute or puddle. b. Apply in two uniform coats at manufacturer's recommended coverage rates, allowing 2 to 3 hours between coats. 6. Upon completion, provide surface clean without discoloration or traces of excess material. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -17 B. Floor Slabs to Receive Stain, Hardener, Coatings, or Finish Flooring: After curing and before beginning installation of finish flooring materials and floor coatings, concrete floor slabs to receive wood floor finishes, coatings, carpet, stain, chemical hardener or adhered flooring materials shall be cleaned of dirt debris; contaminants and other deleterious materials on slab surfaces. 1. Verify complete dissipation of curing compound membrane no later than two weeks prior to date scheduled for installation of finish flooring materials. 2. Promptly remove residual curing compound membrane, paint, oils and similar contaminants using shotblasting or other acceptable mechanical cleaning method, or by specified chemical cleaner and stripper in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Finishing and Sealing Slabs for Slabs Receiving Stain or Hardener: Comply with Section 03364, Section 03365 and Section 03368 as applicable. C. Parking Garage Ramps and Decks: Comply with Section [07010.][07185.] 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS A. Other Concrete Work: Furnish and install other concrete work indicated on Drawings, even though not specifically mentioned herein to complete work, including following: 1. Anchors: Install anchors furnished under other Sections in accordance with accepted shop drawings for structural and miscellaneous steel. 2. Equipment Bases: Furnish and install concrete bases for pumps, boilers, tanks, fans, transformers, floor mounted electrical equipment, etc. as indicated. Furnish and install concrete fill in inertia base frames provided under Division 15. Install anchor bolts and inserts in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Finish bases in workmanlike manner with troweled finish. Locate and size bases as determined by contractor furnishing equipment. 3. Supply concrete for signage, fencing, and bases of miscellaneous items indicated on Site Drawings. a. Supply concrete for fence post footings installed under Division 2 - Site Construction. b. Post - Mounted Signs: Coordinate with work specified in Section 02891 Post - Mounted Signs. c. Light Pole Bases: Form and pour light pole bases shown on Electrical Drawings. Coordinate with work specified in Division 16 Electrical. 4. Expansion Joint Covers: Block out for covers furnished under Section 05810. 5. Floor Mat Frames: Install frames furnished under Section 12481. 6. Supply concrete for bollards indicated on Site Drawings. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reference'Standard: ACI 301, 1.6 and 1.7. B. Contractor's Quality Control: The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. 1. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible and shall bear the cost of correcting concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including, but not limited to, strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete by RDA[ 2363.00 11319I8I93E: means acceptable to the Architect. The cost of extra work incurred by the Architect to approve corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Architect for examination at any time. D. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by an approved testing laboratory. See Section 01450. 1. Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests and core tests shall be distributed by independent testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450. Test reports will be reported, in writing, to Architect, Structural Engineer and Contractor on same day tests are made. Test reports shall be numbered identically to test specimen sets. Show all cylinders of a given set on one report. Submit and re- submit same report to show tests of subsequent cylinders of same set. Reports of compressive strength test shall include a minimum of the following. a. Name of concrete testing service. b. Project identification name and number. c. Test report (specimen set) number. d. Date of concrete placement. e. Copy of concrete batch ticket for specimen set. f. Concrete type and class. g. Location of concrete batch in structure. h. Design compressive strength in 28 days. i. Concrete mix proportions and materials. j. Compressive breaking strength of each cylinder of set. k. Unit weight of lightweight concrete. I. Type of break for both 7 day test and 28 day tests. m. Identification of lab and field cured cylinders. E. Test Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine concrete quality throughout Project; however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. F. Tests: Cooperate fully with those making tests. Following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at discretion of Architect: 1. Sample Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94 as indicated below. All tests shall be associated by reference to particular batch ticket. Sample concrete at point of placement. 2. Slump Tests: The General Contractor shall provide necessary equipment and shall make tests in conformity with ASTM C 143. The Contractor shall make one (1) test for each concrete load at point of discharge; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens; and as often as deemed necessary by the Contractor to maintain the required slump and adequate records. In addition, the Contractor shall make slump tests when directed by the Architect or Engineer. a. Tests shall be made by a person thoroughly familiar with requirements specified. b. Should slump exceed limits stated Concrete Mix Types in Part 2, batch shall be rejected. c. Keep accurate record of time, location in work and results of slump tests that shall be available for inspection by Owner and Architect. RDAI 2363.00 03300 -19 3. Concrete Temperature: Test each load at time of arrival. At point of discharge test hourly when temperature is 40 degrees F and above. Test each time a set of compression test specimens are made. 4. Control Tests: a. Control tests of concrete shall be made on every 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed and, in any case, minimum of once during each day's placement. Each test sample shall consist of six standard 6 inch test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. 1) When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yards, control test may be waived by Architect if, in his /her judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength and concrete quality is provided. 2) Where cold weather placing conditions occur, as defined in this Specification, two (2) additional standard cylinders are required for each complete set of test specimens. These two cylinders shall be field cured, at a location determined by the Testing Agency. Where field cured specimens are required, Contractor shall be responsible for storage, temperature control, and protection of specimens while at site. Testing Agency shall be responsible for handling and transportation of specimens. 3) Should Contractor desire control tests to facilitate early removal of forms. They shall be made in addition to those specified for control tests and shall be completely site - cured. Expense for making additional test cylinders, testing, curing and protection shall be Contractor's. 4) If the concrete load is redosed with superplasticizer after the required set of cylinders has been taken, then an additional set of cylinders shall be taken as required herein. This extra set shall not count against the regular number of required test cylinders and shall be paid for by the Contractor. b. Tests shall be made at time control tests are taken and so stated in reports to determine slump, air content, unit weight and temperature of concrete. 1) Air Content: ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete. ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete. One (1) for each of compressive strength test specimens. 2) Unit Weight: Determine unit weight of normal weight concrete in accordance with ASTM C138. Determine unit weight of lightweight concrete for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C567. c. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39. 1) Two cylinders shall be broken at end of seven days after placing, two cylinders shall be broken at end of 28 days after placing, and remaining cylinders shall be stored until their disposition is determined by Architect. 2) In general, remaining cylinders will be broken only when previous test reports indicated unsatisfactory results. Tests on remaining cylinders shall be at expense of the Contractor. 3) Where cold weather field cured specimens are required, transport and test one (1) specimen with companion laboratory cured specimen at seven (7) days and transport and test the remaining field cured specimen with companion laboratory cured specimens at twenty -eight (28) days. 4) Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed RDAI 2363.00 03300 -20 specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. d. Architect reserves right to stop future concrete work when seven or 28 day tests indicate unsatisfactory results until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to insure quality concrete in future work and corrections deemed necessary have been made. 5. Core Tests: a. If, at any time, concrete control test specimens show compressive strength of 28 days below required level, or if concrete has been frozen before it has taken final set, so severely that, in opinion of Architect, its strength has been adversely affected, Contractor shall, at his own expense, have sufficient core tests taken, number and location to be accepted by Architect on such portions of work as may have been affected to determine actual conditions of concrete. b. Securing, Preparing and Testing: ASTM C42. Should tests reveal that concrete does not meet requirements of this specification, Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace entire section involved or make corrections deemed necessary by Architect. G. Special Inspection: See Section 01450 Quality Control and General Notes on Structural Drawings. Special Inspection is required for the following work under this Section. 1. Placement of structural concrete with design strengths greater than 2500 psi. Slabs - on -grade not included. 2. See Section 03100 and Section 03200 for additional requirements. 3.13 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Floor Slabs to Remain Exposed: 1. Final Cleaning: Section 01741. A. Comply with applicable requirements of Sections 01500 and 01740. B. Waste Management: 1. Formwork: Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integrity of concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. 2. Mixing Equipment: Return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used to wash equipment. 3. Moisture Curing: Prevent water run -off. 4. Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete: a. Hardened, cured waste concrete may be crushed and reused as fill or as a base course for pavement. b. Hardened, cured waste concrete may be used as aggregate in concrete mix if approved by Architect and Engineer. END OF SECTION R DAI 2363.00 03300 -21 SECTION 03410 PLANT - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE z PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single and double tee units. 2. Beams and columns. 3. Spandrel beams. 4. Wall panels. 5. Accessories. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Steel shapes and anchors for connection of precast to supporting structural systems: See appropriate related sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Quality Control: Section 01450. 2. Concrete Topping and Concrete Support: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3. Non - Shrink Grout: Section 03600 Grouts. 4. Steel Support: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 5. Traffic Deck Coating, Water Repellent Sealer and Joint Sealers: Section 07185 Traffic Deck Sealant and Waterproofing System. 6. Joint Sealing: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the drawings or by the specifications. 1. Precast and Prestressed Concrete Members: ACI 318 -99 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. Production of Precast /Prestressed Units: PCI MNL 116 -99 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. 3. Welding: ANSI /AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel and ANSI /AWS D1.4 -98.- Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire Ratings: Comply with UL assemblies as appropriate and indicated. 2. Structural Design of Units: Responsibility of precast concrete contractor. Comply with specified structural design criteria and General Notes on Structural Drawings. B. Fireproofing of Gravity Load - Bearing Exposed Steel Connections: Responsibility of precast concrete contractor. Provide fire rating in accordance with the IBC. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Submit product data for all manufactured stock item accessories specified under this Section, including the following. a. Manufactured anchors and inserts. 2. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings: a. Include connection anchorage and insert details; dimensions; finishes; size and location of reinforcing steel, prestressing strands and inserts; lifting devices; and member identification marks. b. Identification Marks: Mark in concealed locations on members. 3. Design Calculations: Include calculations for each type, shape and span of structural precast concrete units indicated on the Drawings. a. Design of members shall include camber and deflection calculations. b. Indicate required concrete strength at stated ages or stages of construction. c. See General Notes on Structural Drawings for additional requirements. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1. Certificates: a. Submit written certification that fabricator is currently PCI certified. b. Submit welder qualification certificates to Architect upon request. 2. Test Reports: Make available to the Architect, upon request, records of concrete •-cylinder breaks for concrete used in the structural precast concrete products and mill tests of reinforcing and prestressing steel used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Structural design of precast units and all related supports and connections shall be under the direct supervision of a professional engineer registered in the State of Colorado and all calculations shall bear his seal and signature. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in design and manufacture of precast /prestressed concrete units. 1. Manufacturer's Plant: PCI certified for Group C4, Prestressed Draped Strand Structural Members. 2. Experience: Continuously manufactured precast /prestressed concrete in State of Colorado for five years. 3. Pre - Qualified Manufacturers: a. Rocky Mountain Prestress. b. Stresscon Corporation. c. Rinker Materials, Prestress Division, 2800 2 n d Street SW, Albuquerque, New Mexico 87102. d. Other manufacturers requesting to bid this Project must be pre - qualified prior to bid date and are subject to prior approval by the Architect and Owner. 1) Pre - Qualification Request Submittal: Not less than one week prior to bid date, submit a list of all current and most recent 10 completed and consecutive projects for which precast manufacturer has provided precast products. For each project, list the contractor, architect, structural engineer and their representatives, including telephone numbers, with whom quality and performance of the manufacturer can be verified. The omission of any project may result in the automatic RDAI 2363.00 03410 -2 rejection of the precast manufacturer to bid on this Project. Submit evidence of PCI certification and experience as required above. 2) Additional approved manufacturers, if any, will be listed by addendum. C. Erector Qualifications: Manufacturer or competent erection subcontractor of manufacturer specializing in erection of precast concrete. 1. Experience: Continuously erected precast /prestressed concrete in State of Colorado for five years. D. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the fabrications and installations indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery and Handling: Use care in transporting precast /prestressed units to jobsite. Handle members in manner to prevent excessive stresses, spalling, or cracking. C. Storage: 1. Store products utilizing good plant procedures and proper handling in manner to prevent damage. 2. Store all units off ground 3. Separate stacked members by battens across full width of each bearing print. 4. Stack so that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. 5. Do not use upper member of stacked tier as storage area for shorter member or heavy equipment. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Anchors for Precast: Deliver anchors for concrete and masonry work under Sections 03300 and 04810 in time for embedment as work progresses. Coordinate locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with standards referenced in ACI 318 and AISC specification for Structural-SteeI Buildings, 1989 Edition, and with General Notes on Structural Drawings. B. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM Cl 50, Type I or III. 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 or C330. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 5. Water- Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494. C. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing Bars Requiring Welding: ASTM A706. 2. Other Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615 or A706. 3. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -3 4. Prestressing Strand: Uncoated 7 -wire strand conforming to ASTM A416, Grade 250 or 270. 2.02 STEEL PLATES AND ANCHORS A. For Precast: Supply steel anchors, anchor plates and angles cast into cast -in -place concrete or built into masonry to receive precast members. B. In Precast: Supply and install steel or threaded inserts cast into precast, weld plates between sections of precast, and loose steel items needed for erection of precast. C. Materials: 1. Steel plates and shapes: ASTM A36 2. Bolts: ASTM A307 or A325 3. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D 1.1, Type B D. Finish: 1. Steel Plates, Anchors and Inserts: Uncoated unless otherwise indicated, clean of oil, grease, dirt, welding slag, and other foreign matter. 2. All loose and in- bedded precast connections to be non - staining. Exposed steel plates shall be primed and top- coated with a rust preventative paint by Tnemec or equal. 3. Coatings where indicated: a. Hot dipped galvanized: ASTM A153. b. Cadmium Coating: ASTM A165. 2.03 MANUFACTURED ANCHORS AND INSERTS A. Dovetail Slots: Provide continuous dovetail slots cast into precast, where masonry veneer covers precast wall panels. 1. Dovetail Slots: Accommodate one inch wide masonry anchors to be installed under Section 04810. 2. Install vertically 24" o.c. Coordinate with Section 04810. B. Slotted Inserts: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. JVI, Inc., 800/742 -8127; www.jvi - inc.com - PSA Slotted Inserts System. b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Splice Sleeves: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Splice Sleeve North America, Inc., 909/937-7161;www.splice.co.jp/e-home- NMB Splice Sleeve Systems. b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.04 GROUT A. Material: Comply with Section 03600. 2.05 ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS A. Material: Chloroprene or random oriented fiber reinforced, conforming to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, latest edition. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -4 B. Type, Size and Thickness: As required for specified loads and bearing conditions. 2.06 DESIGN OF STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS A. Design Precast and Prestressed Concrete: In accordance with ACI 318. B. Design Loads: Design units to support live and dead loads and lateral forces indicated on structural drawings and to accommodate anticipated loading due to handling and erection. Connections and supports for precast units shall be designed to accommodate 115% of the forces calculated from the design loadings. C. Prestress Force: Tensioning and releasing of stressing strand may be by either single or multiple strand procedures in accordance with ACI 318 and PCI MNL 116. D. Concrete Mix Design Criteria: Comply with requirements indicated on structural drawings and in accepted design calculations. 1. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days. 2. Exposed Concrete: 4-1/2% to 7-1/2% entrained air. 3. Maximum Water - Soluble Chloride Ion Content by Weight of Cement: 0.06 percent. 4. Concrete Exposed to Salt or Deicing Chemicals in Service: Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of Precast and Prestressed Units: In accordance with PCI MNL -116. B. Tee Unit Tolerances: Dimension as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate and furnish to following tolerances: 1. Length: Plus or minus 1 ", or 1/8" per 10 feet of length, whichever is less. 2. Cross - Sectional Dimensions: Plus or minus 1/4" 3. Flange Thickness (Thin sections): Plus 1/4" minus 1/8" 4. Position of Anchors and Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch of centerline locations indicated on Drawings. 5. Horizontal Alignment (Sweep): Length of sweep /360 or 3/4" maximum. Maximum of one inch gap between two adjacent members due to sweep. 6. End Squareness: 1/2" maximum. 7. Blockouts: One inch of centerline location indicated on Drawings. 8. Camber Deviation from Design: Plus or minus 1/4" per 10 feet of length; plus or minus 3/4 inches maximum. 9. Camber Differential Between Adjacent Members, After Installation: 1/4" per 10 feet of length, 3/4" maximum. C. Beam and- Column Tolerances: 1. Length: 20 feet or under: Plus or minus 1/4". Each additional 10 Feet: Plus or minus 1/8" per 10 feet, but not to exceed plus or minus 1 /2" maximum. 2. Cross - Sectional Dimensions: Less than 24 Inches: Plus or minus 1/4". 3. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/4". 4. Position. of Anchors and Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2" of centerline locations indicated on Drawings. 5. Bowing, Concave or Convex: Deviation from plane of any part of flat surface shall not exceed length of bow divided by 360 with maximum of 3/4" up to 30 feet. 6. Warpage after Installation: 1 /16" per foot of length from nearest adjacent corner. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -5 M 7. Angular Deviations of Plane of Side Mold: 1 /32" per 3" of depth or 1/ 16" total, whichever is greater. 8. Out of Square: 1/8" per six feet of length or 1/4" total, whichever is greater. 9. Tolerances on Any Dimension Not Specified Above: Numerically greater of 1/2" per 10 feet plus or minus, not to exceed 1/2". D. Finishes - Tees and Non - Exposed Beams (unless otherwise indicated): 1. Standard Underside: Resulting from casting against accepted forms using good industry practice in cleaning of. forms, design of concrete mix, placing, and curing. a. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. b. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb or structural defects not allowed. 2. Standard Top: Result of vibrating screed and additional hand finishing at projections. a. Normal color variations, minor indentations, due to required covering, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. b. Major imperfections, honeycomb, or structural defects not allowed. 3. Exposed Vertical Ends: Recess strands 3/4" minimum and provide sacked finish. Finishes - Other Precast: 1. Precast Columns, Wall Panels, Slab Panels, Exposed Underside of Stair Units, and Beams: Natural gray color with smooth, dense surface as produced by plastic form liner. a. Finish shall be suitable for field painting. Patching: Minor patching of tee units in plant by manufacturer will be acceptable provided structural adequacy of product and appearance is not impaired. Cosmetic patching of other members allowed only after Architect's acceptance of methods and workmen to be used. G. Openings: 1. Manufacturer: Provide for openings six inches or larger as indicated on drawings. Locate, furnish and install inserts and weld plates in compliance with information indicated on drawings. 2. Openings Smaller than Six Inches in Tee Units: Core - drilled or saw cut after erection by trade requiring them, subject to review and acceptance of manufacturer. 3. Openings in All Other Members: Cast at plant. H. Testing: Sample and test in accordance with manufacturer's standard procedure, subject to acceptance by Architect. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: A. Quality Control of Precast Concrete Products: Responsibility of manufacturer. B. Allow Architect access to manufacturing plant at all times during manufacture of precast /prestressed concrete products. Provide Architect with casting schedules when requested. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. Check location of embedded anchor bolts, plates, angles, etc. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 ERECTION A. Time of Erection: Do not erect precast units before supporting cast -in -place concrete and masonry has reached sufficient strength. General: Lift members by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided by fabricator. Provide temporary shoring and bracing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Alignment: Align members and level as required by accepted shop drawings and within allowable tolerances. Level out variations between adjacent members by jacking, loading, or other feasible method recommended by manufacturer and acceptable to Architect. Position members so cumulative dimensional errors do not occur. D. Welding: Use equipment and materials compatible to base material. Protect units from damage by field welding or cutting operations. E. Repair: 1. Tees Units and Non - Exposed Beams Damaged During Erection: May be repaired providing such damage does not impair structural adequacy or appearance. 2. Exposed Columns, Beams, Wall Spandrels, and Spandrel Panels: Cosmetic patching will be allowed only after Architect's acceptance of methods and workmen to be used. - Lift Anchors: Do not cut off lift anchors until acceptance of Architect is obtained. G. Grouting: Grout under bearing plates where indicated. Install and cure grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Grout horizontal joints between precast members and between precast members and cast -in -place concrete. H. Attachments: Subject to acceptance of Architect, precast products may be drilled or "shot" provided no contact is made with prestressing or reinforcing steel. Repair any spalling as specified in this section. Powder- driving anchors not allowed in lower half of tee stems. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. General: Erect precast concrete members in positions indicated on Drawings within following limits. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -7 B. Columns, Beams, and Spandrel Panels: 1. Face Width of Joints: Drawing dimension plus or minus 1/4". 2. Joint Taper: 1 /40" per foot of length with maximum length of tapering in one # direction of 10 feet, and not to exceed 3/8" over length of unit. 3. Step in Face: 1/4" maximum. 4. Jog in Alignment of Edge: 1/4" maximum. C. Tee Units: 1. Plan Location From Building Grid Datum Parallel to Axis of Tee: Plus or minus one inch. 2. Plan Location From Centerline of Supporting Beam on Wall: Plus or minus one inch. 3. Top Elevation From Nominal Top Elevation at Tee Ends: a. Tees to Receive`Concrete Topping: Plus or minus 3/4 inch. b. Untopped Floor Members: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. c. Untopped Roof Members: Plus or minus 3/4 inch. 4. Maximum Differential in Alignment of Tee Ends: One inch. 5. Joint Width: a. Tees up to 40 Feet in Length: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. b. Tees Between 41 Feet and 60 Feet in Length: Plus or minus 3/4 inch. c. Tees Greater than 60 Feet in Length: Plus or minus one inch. 6. Length of Bearing: a. In Direction of Tee Span: Plus or minus 3/4 inch. b. Width Perpendicular to Tee Span: Plus or minus 1/2 inch 7. Differential Top Elevation Between Adjacent Tees: 3/4 inch maximum. D. Wall Panels: 1. Plan Location From Structural Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Top Elevation From Nominal Top Elevation: a. Exposed Panels: Plus or minus 1/2 inch b. Non - Exposed Panels: Plus or minus 3/4 inch 3. Differential Top Elevation Between Adjacent Panels: a. Exposed Panels: 1/2 inch maximum b. Non - Exposed Panels: 3/4 inch maximum 4. Bearing Elevation From Nominal Bearing Elevation: Plus 114 inch, minus 1/2 inch. 5. Maximum Plumb Variation Over Height of Panel: One inch. 6. Maximum Plumb Differential in any 10 Feet of Panel Height: 1/4 inch 7. Maximum Differential in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/2 inch 8. Joint Width: Plus or minus 3/8 inch 9. Joint Taper: a. Over Length of Panel: 1/2 inch maximum b. Over 10 Foot Length: 3/8 inch maximum 10. Maximum Differential in Alignment of Matching Faces, Including Matching Faces of Adjacent Non - Precast Construction: a. Exposed Faces: 3/8 inch maximum b. Non - Exposed Faces: 1/2 inch maximum 11. Differential Bowing Between Adjacent Wall Panels at Erection: 1/2 inch maximum. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Sections 01450 and 05120. B. Testing Agency: Will visually inspect that precast concrete units have been properly installed. RDAI 2363.00 03410 -8 Inspection: Include testing of welded joints. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces as necessary to remove dirt and stains which may be on surfaces after erection. B. Clean precast units after installation procedures are completed. Wash and rinse exposed surfaces in accordance with precast manufacturer's recommendations. C. Remove weld stains. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 03410 -9 SECTION 03600 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: GROUTS 1. Shrink - resistant, cementitious, non - metallic grout under steel column base plates and steel joist and beam bearing plates. 2. Shrink - resistant cementitious, non - metallic grout under precast concrete wall panels and columns. 3. Shrink - resistant grout elsewhere as indicated. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Foundations and Concrete Curing: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Steel Framing and Base Plates: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 3. Grouting of Precast Concrete: Section 03410 Plant- Precast Structural Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM C1107 -99 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non- Shrink). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and installation instructions for each grout product to be installed under this Section in accordance with Section 01330. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Delivery: Deliver palletized in original sound, dry, unopened containers with manufacturer's source code marking. C. Storage: 1. Store under cover in dry area. 2. Storage Temperature: Minimum 40 degrees F, maximum 90 degrees F unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. 3. Storage Damage: Immediately remove from site any material which becomes damp or otherwise defective during storage. 4. Storage Time: 6 months maximum, or shorter time if so recommended by manufacturer. RDAI 2363.00 03600 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Dayton Superior Corporation - 1107 Advantage Grout. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Euclid NS Grout or Euco Precast Grout. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Duragrout. 4. Sika Corporation - SikaGrout 212. 5. US Mix Products Company - US Spec MP Grout. 6. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 SHRINK- RESISTANT, CEMENTITIOUS, NON - METALLIC GROUT A. Grout Type: Packaged dry, non -gas forming, non - metallic, cementitious, non - shrink grout. 1. Grout shall contain no aluminum powder. B. Grout Performance Requirements: 1. Meet all performance requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B, or C. 2. Compressive Strength: In addition to compressive strength performance requirements of ASTM C1107, grout shall provide the following minimum strengths when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1 107 at plastic consistency. a. 3 Day Strength: 4,500 psi minimum. b. 7 Day Strength: 6,000 psi minimum. c. 28 Day Strength: 7,500 psi minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation for Cementitious Grouting: 1. Clean steel and concrete surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, loose concrete and other contaminants. 2. Remove free - standing water from concrete surfaces before grouting. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF CEMENTIOUS GROUT A. General: Mix and install grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Mix with minimum water necessary for placement method to-be used. 2. Extend grout with gravel for placements greater than 3 inches in depth. B. Grouting: Place grout at non -sag, damp pack consistency, completely filling area below plates with grout. Manually compact to eliminate air pockets and voids. 3.03 FINISHING A. Finishing Edges of Cementitious Grout: Before grout has reached final set, remove all grout above bottom edge of plate. In no case shall grout extend upward along side of base plate. Trowel edges at approximately 45 degree angle from bottom of plate to top of substrate. Horizontal shoulders will not be allowed. RDAI 2363.00 03600 -2 3.05 CURING A. Curing Cementitious Grout: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Maintain grout temperature between 40 degrees F and 90 degrees F for minimum 24 hours following placement. 2. Cover exposed grout surfaces with clean, wet rags and maintain moisture for minimum 6 hours following placement. 3. Immediately after removal of wet rags, apply Curing and Sealing Compound as specified in Section END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 03600 -3 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04060 MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Mortar for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Mortar for Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 3. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 4. Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 5. Stone: Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Submit mortar design mixes indicating ASTM C270 proportion or property criteria used for each type of mortar, including Portland cement, lime sand, water and admixture proportions. 1. Indicate coloring admixture by percentage of dry mix weight. B. Samples: Submit cured samples of colored mortar for acceptance. 1. Final Color Acceptance: In sample masonry wall required in Section 04853. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up Panels: Supply colored mortar for mock -up panels specified for installation under Section 04810 and Section 04853. PART 2 - PRODUCTS oxill1•"v in,111UPAW A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction: 1. Masonry cement not allowed. RDAI 2363.00 04060 -1 2. Stone Work Mortar: Provide non - staining complying with the non - staining requirements of ASTM C91. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Aggregates: ASTM C 144. D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. E. Mortar Color: As selected by Architect. 1. Davis Colors. 2. Color Pigments Industries. 3. Solomon Colors; www.solomoncolors.com 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. F. Other Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar Materials and Proportions: Comply with ASTM C270. B. Unit Masonry Setting Mortar: Type S, 1800 psi average compressive strength in 28 days. C. Non - Staining Stone Setting Mortar: 1. Type S: Containing non - staining Type I Portland cement, hydrated lime and aggregate. 1800 psi average compressive strength in 28 days. 2. Provide colored mortar to match accepted samples. D. Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime or lime putty and two parts aggregate passing the No. 80 sieve. 1. Provide colored mortar for stone to match accepted samples. 2. Stone Work: Provide non - staining Portland cement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing mortar before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: 1. Job Site Mixing: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not allowed. B. Mortar Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least three minutes and not more than five minutes in mechanical batch mixer, with maximum amount of water to produce workable consistency. RDAI 2363.00 04060 -2 C. Retempering: Retemper mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from mortar by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency. 1. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site -Mixed Mortar: Compressive strength tests of mortar mixed on -site to specified proportions is not required. lq2 .1Xi�1[�1►1 RDAI 2363.00 04060 -3 SECTION 04070 MASONRY GROUT z PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Grout for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 3. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 4. Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Reports of tests will be distributed in accordance with Section 01450. B. Grout Mix Designs: 1. Submit in accordance with Product Data provisions of Section 01330 if ready -mix grout is to be supplied. Mix design submittal is not required for site -mixed grout. 2. Follow provisions of Section 03300 for mix design submittal requirements and procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section 01450. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. 1. Masonry cement not allowed. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. RDAI 2363.00 04070 -1 C. Aggregates: ASTM C404. D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials E. Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Site -Mixed Grout for Masonry: 1. ASTM C476. Proportion by volume with sufficient water added to produce consistency for pouring without segregation. 2. Coarse Grout: Coarse grout may be used only in filled -cell construction 3" or more in both horizontal dimensions. Coarse grout to be composed of one part Portland cement with not more than one -tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one - fourth to three parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel. 3. Fine Grout: Use fine grout in all locations where coarse grout may not be used. Composed of one part Portland cement, with not more than one -tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one -fourth to three parts sand. 4. Grout shall attain a minimum strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. B. Ready -Mixed Grout for Masonry: Proportion with sufficient water added to produce consistency for pouring without segregation. 1. Minimum: 28 -day compressive strength: 2,000 psi 2. Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Design Slump: 8 -inch minimum, 10 inch maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing grout before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not allowed. B. Site Mixing of Grout: Mix cement and aggregate for at lease 3 minutes and not more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide the desired workability. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grout Tests: Control tests will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section 01 450 and Section 03300 for requirements. B. Ready -Mixed Grout: 1. Compressive strength shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the ASTM C1019. 2. Testing Agency: Grout tests will be conducted by a testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. RDAI 2363.00 04070 -2 3. Test Specimens: Take grout samples as grout is being placed into the wall. Construct three test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019 under the observation of the testing agency. Cure, protect, and store specimens on -site for 48 hours. Protect from freezing and variations in temperature until collected by testing agency. 4. Frequency: Minimum of one sample consisting of three specimens shall be built and tested for each 5000 square feet of wall area as masonry construction progresses. C. Site -Mixed Grout: Compressive strength tests of grout mixed on -site to specified proportions is not required. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 04070 -3 SECTION 04080 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Anchors and Ties. 2. Joint Reinforcement. B. Related Sections: 1. Dovetail Slots: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 4. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 5. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 6. Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 7. Stone: Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dur -O -WaI. 2. AA Wire Products. 3. Heckman Building Products. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 5. Accepted Substitute 2.02 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Horizontal Reinforcement: 1. General: Welded wire units of ASTM A82 cold drawn wire, No. 9 gage deformed side rods and No. 9 gage plain cross rods. a. Width: Approximately 2" less than width of wall. b. Provide prefabricated corners and tees. 2. Finish at Interior Walls: Brite finish. 3. Finish at Exterior Walls: Galvanized. 4. Type: • Truss design except provide ladder type at reinforced masonry walls. 2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES A. Wire Ties and Anchors: Dur -O -WaI D/A 515 1. General: Fabricate from 3/16' cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82, unless otherwise indicated, of length required for proper embedment in wythes of masonry. 2. Unit Masonry Ties: a. Provide rectangular ties for use with hollow masonry units. b. Provide hooked type (90° bend, 2' min. hook) for use with solid masonry units. RDAI 2363.00 04080 -1 3. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry is indicated for anchoring to structural framework with flexible anchors. Provide two -piece anchors that will provide lateral restraint. 4. Stone Veneer on Concrete Block: Adjustable or flexible type ties of 9 gage galvanized iron and 3/8" rebars. 5. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication. ASTM A153, Class B -2 (1.5 oz per sq. ft.) or 7 mil copper coating, ASTM B227, Grade 30 HS, except manufacturer's standard mill galvanized may be used for interior walls and partitions. B. Masonry Veneer Wall Ties: Dur -O -Wal D/A 213 Adjustable Veneer Anchors. 1. Drywall Screws: Self- tapping, self - drilling, galvanized No. 8 x 1 -1/4 ". Use two screws per anchor. C. Dovetail Anchors: 1" x 3 -1/2" or 1" x 5 -1/2 ", 16 gauge galvanized, corrugated. Size for 2" minimum embedment in horizontal mortar joint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Walls: 1. Install joint reinforcement continuously in every second horizontal block course (16" o.c.) of masonry walls. 2. Lap 6" at splices. 3. Provide one additional piece above and below openings extending 2' minimum beyond opening. 4. Use prefabricated pieces at corners and tees. B. Control Joints: Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. A. Masonry Over Concrete: Anchor masonry occurring against concrete by use of dovetail anchors inserted in slots built into the concrete. 1. Space anchors 16" vertically and 24" horizontally. 2. Extend anchors at least 2" into horizontal mortar joints. 3.03 WALL TIES A. Masonry Over Steel Stud Walls: I . Bond masonry to steel studs with wall ties located not more than 16" vertically on each stud. 2. Space at 8" o.c. vertically and horizontally at perimeter of openings in masonry, and 8" o.c. horizontally at the top and bottom stud wall tracks. 3. Fasten ties through sheathing into steel studs using power driven screws. 4. Field bend ties according to width of cavity providing 2" projection into the horizontal mortar joint. B. Masonry Over CMU Backup: 1. Where coursing is in alignment: Install joint reinforcing full width of total wall. 2. Where coursing is not in alignment: Install adjustable wire ties 16" o.c. in both directions. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 04080 -2 SECTION 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Control joints. 2. Weep holes. 3. Flexible flashing. 4. Cavity weep and mortar dropping protection system. B. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 3. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 4. Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 5. Stone: Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. 6. Sealing Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Block Control Joints: ASTM D2000, 2AA -805 rubber with durometer hardness of approximately 80. 2.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. Flexible Flashing: 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur -O -WaI, Inc. b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Flexible Flashing: Dur -O -WaI DCF reinforced vinyl ethylene with D/A 1502 flashing tape. B. Membrane Flashing: 1. Manufacturers: a. WR Grace. b. Dur -O -WaI. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Membrane Flashing: WR Grace Perm -A- Barrier Self adhering wall flashing with Perm - A- Barrier wall primer and EM 3000 edge sealant. C. Weep Holes: 1. In Stone: 1 /4" cotton sash cord. RDA! 2363.00 04090 -1 2.03 CAVITY WEEP AND MORTAR DROPPING PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Cavity Weep and Mortar Dropping Protection Mesh: Mortar Net or accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. High- density polyethylene, nylon or polyester open weave mesh fabricated in a dovetail configuration and connected by continuous bottom strip. 1. Thickness: Sized to fit cavities indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Install control joints in masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings. Joints shall be installed completely through and full height of masonry. 1. Both Sides of Joints: Sealed under Section 07920. 2. Where not otherwise indicated, space joints at 24 feet maximum on center. 3.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEPS A. Flexible Flashings: Prime all surfaces to receive flashing. Start flashings 1/2" from outside face of wall. Turn up face of sheathing a minimum of 8" and seal top edge. B. Weep Holes: Install where flashing or waterproofing turns out and terminates in horizontal mortar joints. Install at 24" o.c. in soft mortar. C. Mortar Net: Comply with manufacturer's installation recommendations. Install one continuous row at base of wall and over all wall openings directly on flashing after mortar has set. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 04090 -2 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Block masonry walls. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Masonry Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Mortar: Section 04060 Masonry Mortar. 3. Grout: Section 04070 Masonry Grout. 4. Items to be Built -In From Other Sections: a. Bolts and Anchors. b. Nailing Blocks. c. Inserts. d. Steel Lintels. e. Mechanical or Electrical Sleeves or Blockouts. f. All Other Built -In Members. C. Related Requirements: 1. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 2. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 3. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 4. Quality Control: Section 01450 Quality Control. D. Related Sections: 1. Dovetail Slots: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Stone: Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. 3. Water Repellent: Section 07194 Siloxane Water Repellents. 4. Calking Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI /NBS 211 (A41.1), "Building Code Requirements for Masonry". 2. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 21 - Masonry. 3. ACI 530.1- 95 /ASCE 6 -95 Specification for Masonry Structures. 4. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA, "A Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry" (collection of TEK Bulletins). 5. Portland Cement Association, PCA, "Concrete Masonry Handbook ". RDAI 2363.00 04810 -1 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance Criteria: 1. Minimum compressive strength, Fm of concrete masonry at the age of 28 days: 1,500 psi. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 for all reinforced masonry. Include minimum of the following. 1. Fabrication dimensions and locations for placing reinforcing steel and accessories. 2. Details of steel reinforcement, including lap lengths and bends. 3. Grade of reinf6rcing steel. 4. Masonry lintels. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit following tests for each class of unit and type of masonry assemblage two weeks prior to start of construction. Prepare specimens and test in accordance with Uniform Building Code and standards cited therein.. a. Tests made on individual masonry units within last four months. b. Current mortar test including mortar proportions. c. Current grout test including grout proportions. 2. Certificates: If requested by the Architect, furnish manufacturer's certification and test results indicating that concrete masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Where a fire - resistant classification is indicated, comply with the applicable building code requirements for materials and installation to achieve the indicated rating. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Masonry Units: Handle carefully to avoid chipping and protect against wetting prior to use allowing air circulation under stacked units. 1.07 - PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Protection during Installation: a. Preparation: Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch. Remove frozen or damaged masonry. b. Air Temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to minimum of 55 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. c. Air Temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 65 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. d. Air Temperature 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. Use salamander or RDAl2363:00 04810 -2 other sources of heat on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. e. Air Temperature 20 degrees F and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20 degrees F. f. Grout: Place grout in masonry at minimum temperature of 70 degrees F and maximum temperature of 120 degrees F. Maintain grouted masonry above 32 degrees F for 24 hours following placement of grout. g. Admixtures: Mortar admixtures will not be permitted without written acceptance of Architect. h. Frozen Work: Above paragraphs are designed to permit masonry work to continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen masonry work will be prima facie evidence that above requirements have not been complied with. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Architect. 2. Cold Weather Protection after Installation: a. Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours. b. Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Cover masonry completely for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Cover masonry completely with insulating blankets for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. d. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20 degrees F and Below: Maintain Masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other method proven to be satisfactory. 3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F in shade, protect freshly laid masonry from direct exposure to wind and sun. 4. Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather, Cover top of masonry walls at end of each day's work using waterproof material weighted down to insure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection until final capping of wall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Lightweight Concrete Block (Less than 105 pounds per cubic foot oven -dry weight of concrete): 1. Aggregate: ASTM C331 (Lightweight). 2. Hollow Loadbearing Units: ASTM C90. 3. Solid Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 145. 4. Classification: Grade N, Type 1. a. Curing: In moisture controlled atmosphere at normal pressure and temperature, or in an autoclave, to comply with requirements for Type I units. 5. Nominal Size: Eight inch x 16 -inch face size, thickness as indicated. 6. Minimum Net Compressive Strength: 1900 psi over minimum ungrouted net area. 7. Provide lintel blocks, corner blocks, jamb blocks, header blocks and required special shapes as detailed or required to complete the job. 2.02 MORTAR AND ACCESSORIES A. Mortar: See Section 04060. RDAI 2363.00 04810 -3 B. Grout: See Section 04070. C. Joint Reinforcement: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement D. Masonry Accessories: See Section 04090. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Bars: Supplied under Section 03200 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Bearing Surfaces: Inspect foundations and other bearing surfaces for proper grades and elevations, freedom from dirt and other foreign material. Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 2. Anchors: Inspect dovetail anchor slots cast into concrete for proper installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Q 10=1 A. Cooperation: Check relationship of masonry to work under other sections, cooperate with others and proceed as desirable for general progress and best interest of project. 1. Anchors: Coordinate installation of dovetail slots cast into concrete. B. Cleaning: Remove dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties and reinforcing prior to installation. 3.03 MASONRY INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay masonry plumb, level and true to lines to tolerances indicated. Bond as indicated on elevations and details. 2. Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts and to maintain bond. Cut neatly around contacting work. 3. Construct slots, chases, cavities and similar spaces as required for other work. 4. Masonry dimensions for exterior openings are nominal. Lay out masonry openings to provide 1/4-inch maximum sealant joint at metal frames. B. Solid Units: 1. Use solid units for top course of exterior piers, walls, windowsills, etc. as indicated and required. 2. Use solid units for soldier courses in bearing walls and wherever cores of hollow units would be exposed to view or weather. C. Mortar Joints: 1. Lay masonry work in shoved manner in full beds of unfurrowed mortar. Completely fill vertical and horizontal joints and voids with mortar. 2. Joints: Plumb or level. 3. Joint Treatment: RDAI 2363.00 04810 -4 a. Tool exposed joints to slightly concave surface well bonded to units. b. Cut unexposed joints flush. 4. Avoid overplumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. D. Built -In Items: 1. Cooperate to build -in items of others into masonry as work progresses. 2. Steel Door Jambs: Grout steel doorjambs set in masonry full of mortar as wall is built. 3. Lintels: Install lintels furnished under Section 05500 for openings over 16 inches in width. Install in beds of mortar and do necessary pointing. Fill hollow masonry units full with grout for three courses at lintel bearings. 4. Chases°and Recesses: Provide chases in masonry walls as indicated and required for mechanical and electrical work for pipes conduits. Build recesses as required for accommodation of cases and cabinets, radiators, and unit heaters. Install lintels for recesses over 16 inches in width. 5. Built -in Items: Install sleeves of proper size provided by others, where directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build -in wall sleeves, anchors, plates, and other members provided by others. Properly set built -in items as walls progress and under direction of party providing same. E. Starting and Stopping: Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly to obtain good bond with new work. Remove loose masonry and mortar. If it is necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, step back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course. Do not tooth. Cutting: Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with motor - driven masonry saw. G. Accessories: Install joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, control joints, weep holes, flexible flashing and other accessories in accordance with Section 04090. H. Bracing: Adequately brace masonry until cured and permanently supported. 3.04 CONCRETE BLOCK INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay concrete block in running bond. 1. Install bullnose block at exposed corners and at locations as indicated. Installation: 1. Joints: Uniform approximately 3/8 inch wide. 2. Wetting: Do not wet units. Lay dry. 3. Partition Heights: Extend interior masonry walls to structure above unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 REINFORCED MASONRY A. General: Where indicated on structural drawings, reinforce masonry unit cores or cavities with deformed steel reinforcing bars and grout as indicated. Layout: Build reinforced hollow unit masonry to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled. RDAI 2363.00 04810 -5 C. Reinforcement: Hold vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. D. Grouting: 1. Grout spaces less than two inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. In spaces greater than two inches use coarse grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. 2. Hold mortar in bed joints back 1/4 inch from edges of masonry unit adjacent to grout spaces, bevel back and upward from grout space. Keep mortar droppings out of grout spaces. Head and bed joints shall be shoved at least 1/2 inch into place. 3. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, stop pouring of grout, one inch below top of uppermost unit. 4. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration during placing before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the grout space. Grout pours 12" or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled. Low Lift Grouting: Grout in lifts not exceeding 16 inches and pours not exceeding 48 inches. Immediately vibrate grout spaces sufficiently to cause grout to flow into spaces between masonry units. High -Lift Grouting: Not allowed. 3.06 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises: a. 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 inch in any story 20 feet maximum. B. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, stripes, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: I . 1/4 inch. C. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of columns, walls and partitions: 1. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum. 2. 3/4 inch in 40 feet. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Do such work with experienced mechanics in workmanlike manner. Do not cut and patch work that will tend to injure strength or appearance of finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for purpose of building -in members will not be allowed. 3.08 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Take care to match color of exposed joints in masonry that will not be painted or otherwise covered. RDAI 2363.00 04810 -6 B. Daily Cleaning: Make every practical effort to keep brick masonry work as clean as possible during construction. At a minimum, dry brush masonry surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. C. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean all mortar, dirt and construction film from masonry using stiff brush and water when mortar is at least 7 days and not more than 14 days old. Deviations from this procedure must be requested in writing from the Architect prior to starting masonry work. D. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning leave the work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect projecting masonry liable to damage after setting by suitable planking well supported. Securely box jambs and sills of openings used for passage. Replacement: Replace masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 04810 -7 SECTION 04853 MORTAR - PLACED STONE ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Native stone veneer. 2. Cleft stone wall caps. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Mortar: Section 04060 Masonry Mortar. 2. Items to be Built -In From Other Sections: a. Bolts and anchors. b. Nailing blocks. c. Inserts. d. Mechanical or electrical sleeves or blockouts. e. All other built -in members. C. Related Requirements: 1. Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 2. Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 3. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 4. Quality Control: Section 01450 Quality Control. 5. Unit Masonry Assemblies: Section 04810. D. Related Sections: 1. Dovetail Slots: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Unit Masonry Assemblies: Section 04810. 3. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 4. Calking Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI /NBS 211 (A41.1). "Building Code Requirements for Masonry" 2. Colorado Masonry Institute, CMI, "Building Code Requirements for Masonry Construction ", CMI 301. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit full size samples of stone illustrating the full range of color and texture for acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up: Construct 4'x 6' wall panel with stone and colored mortar in location as directed by Architect. 1. Accepted Sample Wall: Standard for rest of work. 2. Remove at completion of project. RDAI 2363.00 04853 -1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Stone: Handle carefully to avoid chipping and protect against wetting prior to use allowing air circulation under stacked units. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Protection during Installation: ' a. Preparation: Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch. Remove frozen or damaged masonry. b. Air Temperature 40 °F to 32 °F: Heat sand or mixing water to minimum of 55 °F and maximum of 120 °F. c. Air Temperature 32 °F to 25 °F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 65 °F and maximum of 120 °F. d. Air Temperature 25 °F to 20 °F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 °F and maximum of 120 °F. Use salamander or other sources of heat on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. e. Air Temperature 20 °F and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 °F and maximum of 120 °F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 °F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20 °F. f. Grout: Place grout in masonry at minimum temperature of 70 °F and maximum temperature of 120 °F. Maintain grouted masonry above 32 °F for 24 hours following placement of grout. g. Admixtures: Mortar admixtures will not be permitted without written acceptance of Architect. h. Frozen Work: Above paragraphs are designed to permit masonry work to continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen masonry work will be prima facie evidence that above requirements have not been complied with. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Architect. 2. Cold Weather Protection after Installation: a. Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 °F to 32 °F: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours. ' b. Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 °F to 25 °F: Cover masonry completely for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 °F to 20 °F: Cover masonry completely with insulating blankets for 24 hours 48 hours for grouted masonry. d. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20 °F and Below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32 °F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other method proven to be satisfactory. 3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 99 °F in shade, protect freshly laid masonry from direct exposure to wind and sun. 4. Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather, cover top of masonry walls at end of each day's work using waterproof material weighted down to insure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection until final capping of wall. RDAI 2363.00 04853 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE A. Stone: Newly quarried rock as selected by Architect. 1. Size: Nominal four -inch thickness with sizes to match accepted sample. B. Wall Caps: 2 inch nominal thickness cleft sandstone, color as selected by Architect. 2.02 MORTAR AND ACCESSORIES A. Mortar: Furnished under Section 04060. B. Grout: Supplied under Section 04070. C. Joint Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties: See Section 04080. D. Fabric Flashing, Weep Holes and Other Accessories: See Section 04090. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Bearing Surfaces: Verify foundations and other bearing surfaces are at proper grades and elevations, free of dirt and other foreign material. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 2. Anchors: Verify dovetail anchor slots cast into concrete are properly installed. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Anchors: Coordinate installation of dovetail slots cast into concrete. B. Cleaning: Remove dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties and reinforcing prior to installation. C. Cooperation: Check relationship of masonry to work under other sections, cooperate with others and proceed as desirable for general - progress and best interest of project. 3.03 NATIVE STONE INSTALLATION A. General! 1. Lay native face stone work from outside face of walls. 2. Start at ledge on concrete walls as detailed. 3. Lay stones on natural flat beds in horizontal courses. Do not lay masonry on an incline. 4. Lay only good faces of stone that match face of work toward the outside. 5. Rough shape stone with hammer to approximately fit each other. Knock off weak portions to bring stones to even bearing. RDAI 2363.00 04853 -3 6. Carry up all walls at same time. 7. Completed stone work shall match accepted sample panel. Joints: 1. Fill all joints solidly with mortar throughout entire thickness of wall. 2. Avoid splashing exposed faces of stone with mortar. 3. Remove droppings and splashings immediately with clean sponge and water. 4. Joints: Full bedded, glove raked and back grouted. C. Stone Veneer Over Concrete or Masonry Backing: 1. Fill solidly against concrete or masonry backing with mortar. 2. Anchor to concrete with dovetail anchors set 24" o.c. vertically. Thoroughly embed anchors in mortar joints. D.. Wires: Cut off wires beneath surface that are used for tying stone in place during mortaring. Exercise care that such ends are properly covered to prevent rust. E. Built -In Items: 1. Cooperate to build -in items of others into masonry as work progresses. 2. Steel Door Jambs: Grout steel doorjambs set in masonry full of mortar as wall is built. 3. Lintels: Install lintels furnished under Section 05500 for openings over 16" in width. Install in beds of mortar and do necessary pointing. Fill hollow masonry units full with grout for three courses at lintel bearings. 4. Chases and Recesses: Provide chases in masonry walls as indicated and required for mechanical and electrical work for pipes and conduits. 5. Built -in Items: Install sleeves of proper size provided by others, where directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build -in wall sleeves, anchors, plates, and other members provided by others. Properly set built -in items as walls progress and under direction of party providing same. Starting and Stopping: Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly to obtain good bond with new work. Remove loose masonry and mortar. G. Accessories: Install weep holes, fabric flashing and other accessories in accordance with Section 04090. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Do such work with experienced mechanics in workmanlike manner. Do not cut and patch work that will tend to injure strength or appearance of any finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for purpose of building -in members not allowed. 3.05 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Pointing: Point stone work as work progresses using rounding pointing tool. Fill joints to match work in accepted sample wall panel. RDAI 2363.00 04853 -4 B. Cleaning: Upon completion of pointing and cleaning, leave work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry. 1. Clean soiled and stained exposed stone by scrubbing with soap powder boiled in clean water. Apply with stiff brush, adding clean, sharp, fine white sand to the soap and water mixture when necessary. 2. After scrubbing, drench surfaces thoroughly with clean water. 3. Leave entire work clean and perfect upon completion. 4. Do not damage moss. 5. Commercial cleaners and diluted acids not allowed. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect projecting masonry liable to damage after setting by well- supported suitable planking. Securely box.jambs and sills of openings used for passage. Replacement: Replace masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 04853 -5 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel framing and support members, tension rods and cables, sag rods which form part of structural framing, purlins, pipe or tube columns and struts, complete with required braces, hangers, connection plates, welds, washers, bolts, nuts, shims, anchor bolts and templates. 2. Base and cap plates. 3. Shear stud connectors. 4. Headed anchor studs. 5. Erecting, connecting, field welding, and adjusting for plumb and level. 6. Other structural steel components indicated on Drawings. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchors, Anchor Bolts, Bearing Plates, Angles etc. for Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories and Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01 450 Quality Control. 2. Quality Control System: Section 01450 Quality Control. D. Related Sections: 1. Bearing Plate Grouting: Section 03600 Grouts. 2. Steel Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck. — 3. Structural Steel Studs and C Joists: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 4. Miscellaneous Metals and Loose Steel Lintels: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 5. Supports for Mechanical or Electrical Equipment: Division 15 and Division 16. 6. Steel Stairs: Section 05511 Metal Stairs. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. 1. Design, Detailing, Fabrication and Erection: AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 1989 Edition, or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 1993 Edition. 2. Fabrication, Delivery and Erection: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Sections 5 through 7, latest edition. 3. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, latest edition endorsed by AISC. 4. AWS Dl .1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. AISC Technical Bulletin No. 3, Shape Material (ASTM A572 Gr 50 with Special Requirements) March 1997. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -1 B. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by Supplementary Requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: For the purposes of this Section, structural steel is defined as loadbearing structural metal framing excluding structural steel studs, steel joists, metal decking, metal stairs, and loose steel angle lintels built into masonry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop and erection drawings for all items under this Section. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 2. Shop drawings shall be original drawings produced by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. 3. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the following: a. Profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural steel members. b. Connections, attachments, and anchorages. c. Framed openings. d. Size and type of fasteners e. Cambers and clearances. f. Shop painting. 4. Checking: Shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy by fabricator and initialed by individual responsible for checking prior to submittal. 5. Connections: a. Detail, fabricate and erect structural steel connections as indicated on Drawings. b. If Contractor elects to propose alternate connection details, substitution request shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01600. Shop drawings indicating alternate connection details without Architect's prior approval of substitution request will be rejected. c. Shop drawing submittal of alternate connection details shall be accompanied by calculations for each proposed alternate connection. Calculations shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer registered in the State of Colorado. 6. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights indicated on the Drawings are not readily available, secure Architect's acceptance of acceptable substitute sizes in time to prevent any construction delay due to such substitutions. B. Certificates: 1. Mill Test Reports: Upon request, furnish for all structural steel supplied. Furnish mill test reports and load test results of each lot of high strength bolts if requested by Architect. 2. Welder Certificates: Furnish for all welding operators used for fabrication and erection. C. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for the following: 1. Load indicator bolts. 2. Expansion bolts. 3. Adhesive anchors. D. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 prior to the submission of shop drawings. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by AWS certified welding operators only. B. Testing Agency: If directed by the Architect, weld tests will be made by an approved testing laboratory experienced in X -ray or ultrasonic testing of weld joints, selected and paid for by the Owner. C. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: 1. All structural steel fabricated and erected under this Section, and all Metal Fabrications (Section 05500), Steel Deck (Section 05310), and Metal Stairs (Section 05511) furnished and installed under related Sections shall be furnished and installed under the single subcontract responsibility of an approved structural steel fabricator. If the structural fabricator subcontracts the erection, the erection subcontractor must also meet the minimum qualifications prior to bidding. 2. All fabricators and /or erectors for this project must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner the following qualifications in addition to any other requirements of the Project Manual. a. Business longevity under current business names of five years or more immediately prior to bidding this project. b. Previous experience showing successfully completed projects of similar size and complexity as this project involving fabrication and erection of structural steel. Fabricators must show fabrication experience and erectors must show erection experience to be considered. 3. Any change of steel fabricator /erector required as a result of failure to meet the above requirements shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Regulatory Requirements: Expansion anchors and adhesive anchors shall have current published ICBO Evaluation Report indicating ICBO approval as acceptable method of construction under the IBC. Comply with all limitations on use of anchors stipulated in Evaluation Report. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Delivery and Storage: 1. Steel: Store members above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. 2. Other Materials: Store in weathertight and dry place, until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original unbroken package or container. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Materials to be installed by others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices that are embedded in cast -in- place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast -in -place concrete operations or masonry work. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES A. Grade and Type: See General Notes on Structural Drawings. 2.02 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND WELDING MATERIALS A. Bolts: 1. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. 2. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325N. 3. Connection Types: a. Type N bearing -type with bolt threads included in shear plane. B. Nuts: ASTM A563. 1. Grade and surface finish: Nuts for use with A325 bolts shall comply with requirements of RCSC Specification for bolt type required. C. Washers: ASTM F436. Provide flat circular washers or square or rectangular beveled washers as indicated or required for each bolted connection. D. Anchor Bolts: Size, type and length as shown on Drawings. Provide hex nuts and plain washers unless indicated otherwise. 1. Hooked Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. a. Minimum hook projection: 3 inches unless indicated otherwise. b. Minimum threaded length: Match length of bolt projection. 2. Threaded Rod Anchors: ASTM A36. 3. Headed Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 with suitable nuts and plain washers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum length of embedment: 7 inches unless indicated otherwise. 5. Minimum length of projection: 3 inches unless indicated otherwise, and sufficient to fully engage nut after installation of steel member being anchored and washer, plus allowance for normal installation tolerance. E. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type, complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM 8633. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18 -8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. Kwik -Bolt II. b. ITW Ramset /Red Head Red Head Wedge Anchor. c. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Power -Bolt. d. Wej -It Corp. Wej -It. e. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -4 F. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, complete with required nuts, washers, epoxy or ester -based adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18 -8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. HAS or HIT threaded rods. HVA or HIT HY -150 Adhesive Anchorage System for anchorage to concrete or stone. HIT HY -20 Adhesive system for anchorage to brick or concrete masonry. b. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Straight Cut Anchor Rod with Power -Fast Cartridge System. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. G. Welding Materials: 1. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D 1.1. a. Strength level: In accordance with AISC and AWS specifications for base metals joined, weld type, and direction of applied load to weld. b. Welds for moment - resisting frame connections: E70T -4 not permitted. 2. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.1 or A 5.5. H. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors and Composite Beam Shear Studs: Conform to ASTM A108. Studs shall be manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW, or approved substitute. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Shop Paint: One of the following. 1. Tnemec Series 10 modified alkyd primer. 2. Society for Protective Coatings Specification SSPC Paint 25 lead and chromate free primer. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications. Connections: Provide connections as shown or noted on the Drawings. 1. Connections not shown or noted shall be standard framed beam connections as shown in AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 9th edition, pp. 4 -9 through 4 -31 inclusive, except that bearing -type bolts in slotted holes may not be used to transmit any component of stress in the direction of the slot. 2. High strength bolts may be installed snug tight. 3. No combination of welds and bolts, or of tensioned and snug tight bolts, may be used to transmit stress in the same faying surface of any connection. C. Provide anchors for columns, beams, channels, plates, etc., as indicated on Drawings and required. Locate as indicated on accepted shop drawings. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -5 D. Shop Painting: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust, loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: a. Surfaces to be concealed in the Completed Structure: SP -3 power tool cleaning. b. Surfaces to be exposed in the Completed Structure: SP -6 commercial blast cleaning. 2. Painting: Shop coat fabricated items with shop paint. a. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete, surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to receive welded studs, or surfaces in contact with slide bearing plates. b. Omit shop paint on contact surfaces in high strength bolted connections. c. Omit shop paint on surfaces to receive spray -on fire protection. E. Marking: Mark members in protected plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on setting diagrams. F. Finished Work: Finish work in accordance with accepted shop drawings. 1. Work: True and free from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects. G. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for accommodation of other trades and do whatever is necessary to secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling not allowed on project without acceptance of Architect. H. Subassemblies with Milled Surfaces: Completely assemble and weld before milling. Welding: Comply with AISC Specifications and AWS D1.1. Welds not specified shall be 1/4" continuous fillet but not less than AISC minimum based on thickness of parts joined. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain required lengths not allowed without prior acceptance of Architect and Structural Engineer unless indicated on Drawings. K. Cambering: Camber beams and girders as indicated on Drawings. L. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors and Composite Beam Shear Studs: Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached. Remove scale by grinding or sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Access: Architect, Structural Engineer and Independent Testing Agency shall be offered unlimited access to fabrication facility while work is in progress. Cooperate with Testing Agency to allow weld testing required on fabricator's premises. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Embeds: Prior to start of erection of steel, check location of embedded plates and anchor bolts and report deviations from embedded plate and anchor bolt setting plan to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Do not proceed until all unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. B. Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing as required to maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary guy lines as required to properly align members before bolting or welding. C. Field Measurements: Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erection: 1. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications and with additional requirements of this section. 2. Erection Safety: Sole responsibility of Contractor and structural steel erection subcontractor. Take precautions to ensure safety of personnel on site during erection of steel. Follow accepted industry standards and comply with all regulatory requirements. a. Provide and maintain barricades and temporary coverings over deck openings and edges until permanent construction at openings is installed. b. Schedule installation of projecting items that may present temporary tripping hazards as late as possible to minimize time of exposure. c. Install temporary bolted and welded connections during erection sufficient to hold members in place until permanent connections are completed. d. Take special precautions when working on slippery surfaces and in unfavorable weather conditions. 3. Bearing Plates: Set base and bearing plates level and leveling plates level (+ 1/32") and at correct elevations (+ 1/16 "). Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed. 4. Field Assembly: Assemble structural steel frames to lines and elevations indicated within specified erection tolerances. a. Align various members forming parts of complete frame or structure after being assembled and adjust accurately before fastening. b. Splice only where indicated on Drawings. c. Field correction of fabricated items by gas cutting not allowed. 5. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high strength bolts or field welding unless otherwise indicated. a. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. b. Tighten bearing -type non -slip critical bolts to snug tight condition with nut rotation sufficient to bring all plies in joint into firm contact. c. Drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes not allowed. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -7 d. Make minor corrections by reaming. e. Do not correct serious defects in field but call to attention of Architect for decision as to method or procedure. He may order new holes drilled or the member rejected and replaced. 6. Temporary Bracing: Consider structural steel as non -self supporting steel frames. Provide suitable temporary bracing as necessary to maintain structural steel in proper position until permanently secured. Leave temporary bracing in place as required for safety. 7. Field Modification: Using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel not allowed without written acceptance of Architect. Be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in field. 8. Compression Splices: Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought into contact. Clean bearing surfaces before assembling. Close gaps 1/32" wide or greater by driving non - tapered mild steel shims full depth of bearing surface along full length of gap. 9. Composite Beams: Field weld shear studs through metal deck as shown on the Structural Drawings. Automatically end weld or fillet weld at Contractor's option. 10. Slide Bearing Plates: Install where indicated. See Drawings for type, size and installation requirements. B. Allowable Erection Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice except maximum accumulative tolerance from all sources shall not exceed 1'' on columns. 1. Bases of Columns: Located on established column lines within +l/8 ". 2. Members Connecting to Columns: a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to supporting column working line shall not exceed +1 /16" from the location shown on Drawings. b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of supporting column shall not exceed +1 /8" or -1 /4" from the elevation shown on Drawings. 3. Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and elevation with respect to the supporting member shall not exceed +1 /16" from the location and elevation shown on Drawings. 4. Leveling and Plumbing: Based on mean temperature of 70 °F. 5. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Section 01450. Cost of additional testing required by this Article shall be- borne by the installing contractor. Testing Agency's Inspector: Perform duties in such a way that neither fabrication nor erection is unnecessarily delayed or impeded. Inspector will not recommend or prescribe method of repair of defect. C. Field Inspection: Include examination of erected steel for welding, proper fitting and tensioning of bolts and alignment. D. Welding and Materials: 1. Inspection of welding will endeavor to assure that work conforms to specified requirements and will include: RDAI 2363.00 05120 -8 RDAI 2363.00 05120 -9 a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal arc welding and electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to requirements of this section. b. Ascertainment that specified welding procedure and specified welding sequence are followed without deviation, unless specific acceptance for change is obtained from Architect. c. Ascertainment that welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. Testing Agency will witness such qualification testing of welding operators and welders, if required. d. Ascertainment that fit up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and Contract Documents, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without acceptance of Architect. 2. Embedded plates and assemblies will have all welded reinforcing tested by magnetic particle in following quantities: a. Assemblies Supporting Structural Elements: 100% b. Assemblies Supporting Masonry Elements: 60% c. Assemblies Supporting Curtain Wall Elements: 20% 3. The testing agency shall perform the following tests in the fabricator's shop: a. All Welds: 100% visual. b. All Full or Partial Penetration Welds: 100% ultrasonic c. The requirements for independent inspection by the testing agency in the fabricator's shop may be waived, provided the fabricator is an "approved fabricator" and satisfies all of the requirements of the 1997 Uniform Building Code, Section 1701.7. 4. Testing Agency will test all field welds, including wall and roof deck connections: 100% visual. 5. Additional testing will be required if more than 10% of tested welds are rejected, then additional 10% of welds will be tested using same method. This 10% additional testing process will be repeated until rejection rate drops below one in 10. 6. In addition, if defective welds are discovered, remaining uninspected welds will receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by Architect. 7. Testing Agency will have authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion weldment would not pass more detailed investigation. 8. All rejected welds shall be replaced and retested at the expense of the Contractor. 9. Reports by Testing Agency will contain, as minimum, adequate description of each weld tested, identifying mark of welder responsible for weld, critique of defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and statement regarding acceptability of weld tested, as judged by current AWS standards. a. Reports shall be distributed as early as possible but not later than two work weeks after tests have been performed. b. Architect shall be notified by phone if, in judgment of inspector, test results require immediate comment. 10. Radiographic testing may be substituted for ultrasonic. 11. Bolted Connections: Testing Agency will visually inspect all bolted connections to ascertain that all bolts, nuts and required washers have been installed and are of proper type, that all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contact and that all load indicator bolts have been tightened until the spline has twisted off. 12. Stud Connectors: The testing agency will inspect stud connectors as follows. RDAI 2363.00 05120 -9 a. All studs will be acoustically inspected. Studs that do not ring when struck with a hammer will be bent 15 degrees. If no fracture occurs, stud is considered acceptable and left bent. b. In addition to the above, not less than one of each 100 studs will be tested by bending 15 degrees. If no fracture occurs, stud is considered acceptable and left bent. c. If at any time the number of rejectable studs on any level of structural steel framing exceeds 3 %, additional testing in accordance with subparagraph b above shall be performed on one of each 25 studs at this level and this increased frequency of testing shall be continued on all succeeding levels until the number of rejectable studs at a level is 3% or less. d. The testing agency will verify that the number of studs provided satisfies the minimum number indicated on the Drawings. 13. Drilled -In Inserts: a. Self- Expanding Inserts: The testing agency will inspect self- expan_ ding, drilled -in inserts shown on the Structural Drawings as follows. (1) Prior to installation, the testing agency will determine that the installing contractor has the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the receiving surface of required diameter and length. (2) All inserts will be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. (3) The testing agency will inspect 10% of all inserts at each level -for a tension load of 150% of the manufacturer's recommended allowable working loads in tension. If at any time the number of rejectable inserts exceeds 10% of the number of inserts tested at that level, all inserts at that level shall be tested by the same method and this 100% testing rate shall be continued on all succeeding levels until 10% or less of the inserts tested at a level are found to be rejectable. (4) The testing agency will inspect all remaining inserts for a snug tight condition. Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. If at any time the number of rejectable inserts exceeds 10% of the number of inserts tested at that level, all inserts at that level shall be tested by the same method and this 100% testing rate shall be continued on all succeeding levels until 10% or less of the inserts tested at a level are found to be rejectable. b. Adhesive- Bonded Inserts: The testing agency will inspect adhesive - bonded, drilled -in inserts as follows: (1) The testing agency shall be present at the site to observe the installation of the first 5 inserts placed and for additional observation as directed by the Architect. Such observation will be to endeavor to ensure that drilled holes are of required diameter and depth, holes are properly cleaned prior to installation of the insert and that holes are completely filled with properly mixed adhesive after installation. All inserts will be visually inspected after • installation to endeavor to ensure that the insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. The testing agency will inspect 20% of all inserts for a snug tight condition as defined for self- expanding inserts above. If at any time the number of rejectable inserts exceeds 10% of the number of inserts tested, all inserts shall be tested by the same method and this 100% testing rate shall be continued until 10% or less of the inserts tested are found to be rejectable. s RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 05120 -10 SECTION 05310 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel roof deck. 2. Steel floor deck. 3. Steel deck accessories. B. Related Sections: STEEL DECK 1. Concrete Topping: Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 3. Structural Steel Studs and C Joists: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 4. Steel Opening Frames in Metal Deck Floors and Roofs: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Materials, Design, and Erection: Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks. 2. Materials and Computation of Structural Properties: AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members, 2001 edition. 3. Welding: ANSI /AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. SDI RDCHI - Roof Deck Construction Handbook. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Design to meet the following structural criteria. 1. Steel Roof Deck: a. Maximum Flexural Working Stress: 20,000 psi. b. Maximum Roof Deflection: 1/240 span length, center to center of supports under live load. 2. Composite Deck: a. Maximum Flexural Working Stress in Metal Deck Under Dead Load Plus Construction Load: 0.6 times minimum yield stress, 36 ksi maximum. b. Live Load Stress: Yield stress less dead load flexural stress divided by 2. c. Concrete: 0.45 times specified 28 -day strength for allowable strength design. d. Construction Loads: 20 psf uniformly distributed or 150 lb. concentrated at any point on a V -0 wide section of deck. e. Maximum Floor Deflection: 1/ 180 span length but not to exceed 3/4 inch, center -to- center of supports under weight of wet concrete plus construction loads. 1/360 span length, center -to- center of supports under superimposed dead load plus live load. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Product Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature and installation instructions for each product specified under this Section. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Furnish a copy of each instruction to the installer. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and erection drawings. a. Indicate decking plan, deck profile, dimensions, gages, supports, projections, openings and reinforcement, finishes, applicable details and accessories, deck fastening types and spacings. b. All shop drawings shall be original drawings prepared by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. c. Coordinate with structural steel and steel joist shop drawings to establish consistent deck support layout dimensions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Continuously engaged in production of metal decking for a period of at least 10 years. 2. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience in erection of metal decking for projects of similar size and difficulty. Subject to approval of Owner. 3. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently qualified according to AWS D1.3. B. Regulatory Requirements: All steel deck and mechanical fasteners supplied under this Section shall have current published Evaluation Report indicating ICBO approval as acceptable method of construction under the IBC. Comply with all limitations on use of deck and fasteners stipulated in Evaluation Report. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage and handling. Inspection: Inspect metal deck upon delivery to site. Reject and obtain new deck meeting these specifications as required to replace damaged deck C. Storage: 1. Store metal deck at site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports with one end elevated for drainage. Cover deck until needed with waterproof covering, vented to prevent condensation. 2. Check deck bundles periodically for tightness. Retighten as necessary to prevent wind loosening sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Steel Deck: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; www.canamsteel.com 2. Epic Metals Corporation. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -2 3. Verco Manufacturing, Inc.; 602/272 -1347. 4. Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corporation; www.vulcraft.com 5. Wheeling Corrugating Company; www.wheelingcorrugating.com 6. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Mechanical Fasteners for Steel Deck: 1. Hilti, Inc., www.us.hilti.com 2. ITW Buildex 3. Pneutek, Inc., www.pneutek.com 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01600. Steel deck design is based on manufacturers and deck types specified in this Section or as indicated on the Structural Drawings. Suppliers submitting substitute products of other acceptable manufacturers shall certify that proposed product is equal or better than the specified product(s) in load carrying capacity for indicated spans, stiffness, and in diaphragm shear resistance for the fastening types and spacings indicated, and shall attach product data corroborating such certification to the substitution request. If, in the judgement of the Structural Engineer and the Architect, the proposed product does not have equal or better structural capacities to that specified, the supplier may resubmit his substitution request with a thicker gage of decking, an increase in fastening, or both, as may be required to satisfy the Structural Engineer and the Architect that the structural design requirements have been satisfied. 2.02 STEEL ROOF DECK A. Steel for Roof Deck Units: Conform to Section A3 of the AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members. 1. Prime Painted Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008 -02, Grade C, D or E. 2. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi. B. Roof Deck Types: As indicated on Drawings. C. Gage and Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked on, rust inhibitive paint applied to chemically cleaned, phosphate coated surface. 2.03 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Steel for Composite Floor Deck Units: Conform to Section A3 of the AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members and with ASTM A653 -02 Structural Quality, Grade 33 or higher. 1. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi. B. Composite Deck: Provide manufacturer's standard roll form deck units of size and gage indicated on the Drawings. C. Gage and Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A924 -99 with a minimum coating class of G60 as defined in ASTM A653 -02. 1. Finish for Deck to Receive Fireproofing: Coordinate finish with Section 07810. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -3 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Accessory Standard: Provide accessories of types required by SDI specifications. B. Roof Deck Accessories: Provide following accessories as indicated or as required by SDI specifications. 1. Filler Sheets: 20 gage minimum, galvanized units to match deck profile and depth. 7 inch minimum width. 2. Inside or Outside Metal Closures: Fabricate of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units. Match deck depth. Bend to provide tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking. 3. Ridge and Valley Plates: 20 gage minimum, galvanized sheets. Bend to fit indicated roof slopes. Length of each leg adequate to'lap deck ribs minimum one inch each side. 4. Flat Plates: 20 gage minimum, galvanized sheets. 9 inch minimum width. Provide at changes of deck direction. C. Composite Deck Accessories: Provide following accessories as indicated or as required by SDI specifications. 1. Hanger Tabs: 60 pound capacity. 2. Z- Closures and Cell Closures: 16 gage galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units. Match deck depth. Bend to provide tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking. 3. Pour Stops: Fabricate of galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units. Gage as determined from SDI Pour Stop Selection Table in SDI Design Manual. Match slab depth. 4. Girder Fillers: 16 gage galvanized sheet steel of some quality as deck units. 5. Column Closures: 20 gage minimum, galvanized sheets of same quality as deck units. Provide as required at each column penetration through deck, sized to provide minimum one inch lap with deck ribs each side of column cutout. D. Fasteners: 1. Side Lap Fasteners: No. 10 self- drilling TEK screws. 2. Powder Driven and Pneumatic Fasteners: Fasteners shall have knurled shank; minimum 1 /2" diameter steel washer; electroplated zinc conforming to ASTM 8633, Sc. 1, Type III; meet SDI design requirements; and have Factory Mutual approval. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Length of Units: Fabricate deck units in length to span three or more support spacings unless indicated otherwise, with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nested side laps. 1. Do not fabricate until final approval of structural steel, steel joist, and steel deck shop drawings have been obtained. 2. Fabricate lengths to provide end bearing lengths over supports indicated, and in no case less than minimum 1 -1/2 inches bearing. 3. Roof Deck: Fabricate lengths to provide minimum 2 inch lap at end joints, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Non - Composite Form Deck: Fabricate lengths to provide lapped or butted end joints, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Composite Deck: Fabricate lengths to provide butted end joints, unless indicated otherwise. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -4 B. Composite Decks: Fabricate with deformations required to structurally bond fill material. C. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Panel Length: Plus or minus ' /z inch. 2. Thickness: Not less than 95 percent of design thickness. 3. Panel Cover Width: Minus 3/8 inch, plus 3/ inch. 4. Panel Camber: Maximum '/< inch in 10 foot length. 5. Panel Sweep: Maximum 'A inch in 10 foot length. 6. Panel End Out of Square: Maximum 1/8 inch per foot of panel width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Existing Conditions: Before beginning installation, examine supporting members for correct layout. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 DECK INSTALLATION IN GENERAL A. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, SDI specifications, and accepted shop drawings. B. Placing Deck Units: Position deck units on supporting members and adjust to final position with ends bearing on support and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. 1. Minimum End Bearing: 1 -1/2 inches unless indicated otherwise. 2. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 3. Place deck units flat and square, and secure to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. C. Fastening Deck Units to Supports: Secure to supporting members as indicated in Structural Notes on the Structural drawings. 1. Welds: Comply with ANSI /AWS D1.3. a. Employ only skilled, certified welding operators. b. Welding Procedures and Material Selection: Responsibility of installer. Exercise care in the selection of electrodes and amperage to provide a positive weld and to prevent high amperage blow holes. c. Welds for Deck Units with Thickness Equal to or Greater Than 22 Gage: 5/8 inch minimum visible diameter arc spot puddle welds with attachment pattern indicated on Drawings. d. Welds for Deck Units with Thickness Less Than 22 Gage: Weld deck through minimum 16 gage welding washers with nominal 3/8 inch hole. Weld pattern as indicated on Drawings. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Acceptable system subject to approval of Structural Engineer and Architect. a. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Install fasteners using a low velocity powder actuated tool. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -5 1) The nail head stand off shall be according to the manufacturer's recommendations and verified with an inspection gauge. The power level shall be determined by jobsite testing. 2) Installation of fasteners shall be accordance with design requirements and installed by an operator licensed by the manufacturer. D. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit deck units and accessories around openings and projections through decking. Make cuts neat, square and trim. Cut openings true to dimensions using metal saws, drills or shears. Do not torch cut. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide reinforcing for openings through metal deck as indicated on Drawings. 2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on Drawings, such as those required for vents, risers, conduits, etc. shall be cut and reinforced, if necessary, by trade requiring opening. 3.03 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. End Joints: Provide roof deck end laps of not less than 2 inches. B. Roof Deck Fastening to Supports: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, secure to supporting members at 6 inches on center at end laps and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. - C. Fastening Deck Unit Side Seams: Fasten side laps as indicated on Drawings. 1. Spacing: As indicated, but in no case greater than 36 inches on center. 2. Fastening Method: Self- drilling screws. 2. Fastening Method: Button punch crimping. D. Closure Strips: Install at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. 1. Install flexible closure strips in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for support of roof insulation adjacent to edges and openings. Fastening Roof Deck Accessories: Fasten to supporting members by arc spot welds or self drilling screws at 12 inches maximum intervals unless otherwise indicated. 1. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12" o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in bottom of sump pan to accommodate drain. 3.04 COMPOSITE DECK INSTALLATION A. End Joints: Provide butted end joints. B. Floor Deck Fastening to Supports: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, secure to supporting members at 12 inches on center at supports. C. Fastening Deck Unit Side Seams: Fasten side laps as indicated on Drawings. 1. Spacing: As indicated, but in no case greater than 36 inches on center. 2. Fastening Method: Self- drilling screws. 2. Fastening Method: Button punch crimping. RDAI 2363.00 05310 -6 D. Fastening Accessories: 1. Fasten pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Floor Deck Closures: Fasten column closures, cell closures and Z closures to deck to provide tight fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Fasten cell closures at changes of direction of deck units unless otherwise directed. a. Weld or mechanically fasten end closures at 48" o.c. b. Weld or mechanically fasten side closures at 36" o.c. E. Hanger Tabs: Coordinate with work of other installers. 1. Hanging loads exceeding 60 lbs. shall not be suspended from hanger tabs, but shall be suspended from joists or structural steel. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Inspect deck for tears, dents, or other damage. 1. Roof Deck: Inspect roof deck before placement of roof insulation and roof covering. 2. Floor Deck: Inspect deck before concrete placement. 3. Need for repair of damaged deck shall be determined by Architect. Inspect supporting structure for damage due to deck welding operations. Repair or replacement of supporting structural members burned through or otherwise damaged by deck welding shall be determined by the Architect. The cost of repair or replacement shall be the responsibility of the deck installer. C. Touch -up Painting: Touch -up galvanized finishes. c10�J3S111*630061 A. Deck Units: 1. Do not use for storage or as working platform until permanently secured in position. 2. Do not damage by use as runway, storage of materials or subsequent work. Do not allow construction loads which exceed safe carrying capacity of deck. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Sections 01450 Quality Control and 05120 Structural Steel. 1. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory as specified in Section 01450. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance with the Contract requirements. 2. Testing Agency will visually inspect deck to verify that material is in acceptable condition and has been properly installed. a. Inspection: Include deck welds and side lap connections. Special Inspection: Required for all field welding. See Section 01 450. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 05310 -7 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wall steel studs and other locations where "structural studs" are indicated. 2. Channel tracks and bracing. 3. Metal joist framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 2. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 3. Drywall Partition Studs: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. 2. AWS Dl .3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 3. ASTM C955 -96a Standard Specification for Load - Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings: Submit erection drawings as required by Section 01330 Submittal Procedures for all metal stud systems defined on the structural drawings. Indicate all member sizes including special framing at openings. Detail all connections and attachment to supporting structure including connectors, fasteners and accessories. Indicate all welds using standard AWS symbols. B. Product Data: Prior to starting erection of studs, submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials to be used with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: Minimum three years experience in erection of cold formed metal framing for projects of similar size and difficulty. Welder Qualifications: Currently qualified in accordance with AWS D1.3. C. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made by accepted testing laboratory. See Sections 01450 and 05120. RDAI 2363.00 05400 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Studco 2. Dale /Incor 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Marino Industries Corp. 5. Unimast, Inc. 6. Western Metal Lath Co. 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600 B: Steel Mechanical Properties: Conform to requirements of AISI Specification, Section A3. 1. Minimum yield point for material 14 gage to 10 gage in thickness: 50,000 psi. 2. Minimum yield point for material 16 gage and less in thickness: 33,000 psi. C. Steel Sectional Properties and Design: Computed in accordance with AISI Specification. D. Steel Studs, Tracks, Bracing, Bridging and Related Metal: ASTM C955. 1. Provide type and size of structural studs, track, bridging, and fasteners as indicated on drawings and specified in this section. 2. Studs: Sizes and locations as indicated on drawings. a. Provide 16 gage "C shape if not otherwise indicated. b. Head and Sill Track and Header Members: Unpunched track, same gage as studs or one gage heavier. c. Minimum flange Width: 1 -5/8. 3. Stud Bridging: 16 gage channel bridging. 4. Slip Clips: Minimum 14 gage galvanized steel with minimum lateral capacity of 500 pounds per clip. a. Dietrich Big D Slide -Clip. b. Dalson Industries, Inc. Vertical Slide Clip. c. Unimast Lovely Curtain Wall Slip Anchor. d. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. E. Cold Formed Steel Joists and Related Metal: 1. Provide type and size of joist framing members, bridging, and fasteners as indicated on drawings and specified in this section. 2. Joists: As indicated on drawings. a. Provide .18 gage "C shape if not otherwise indicated. b. Minimum flange Width: 2 inches. 3. Joist Web Stiffeners: 16 gage or heavier angle or channel stiffeners. F. Finish: Rust-inhibitive coating providing corrosion resistance equivalent to ASTM A653, G60 galvanized coating. Submit documentation from independent testing agency verifying corrosion equivalency. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Self- Drilling, Self- Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A90, hot -dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated; drilled expansion bolts; screws with sleeves. RDAI 2363.00 05400 -2 2.03 WELDING A. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.3. B. Welding Electrodes: Conform to SMAW AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E60XX or E70XX. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. General: Install framing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Framing may be prefabricated into panels at Contractor's option. B. Connections: 1. At Structural Steel: Welded. 2. Other: Unless otherwise indicated, screwed. C. Wall Framing: 1. Track: Anchor stud track to concrete as shown on drawings but not less than 3/16" x 1 -1 /8" powder- driven fasteners spaced not more than 24" o.c. 2. Studs: a. Place studs 16" on center at spacings indicated on Drawings and not more than 2" from abutting walls and at each side of openings. b. Connect studs to tracks with screws in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. c. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Double studs at door, window and sidelite jambs. d. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. e. Provide deflection allowance below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for non - loading- bearing framing. f. Erect load- bearing studs one -piece full length. g. Splicing or wire tying of framing components is not permitted. h. Refer to Drawings for location of partitions extended to ceiling only and partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. D. Joists: Set floor joists parallel and level with end bearing, lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Weld all joints and connections in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. E. Bridging and Diagonal Bracing: Install bridging and bracing of types and in locations indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, attach all bridging and diagonal bracing by welding capable of resisting a force of 500 lbs. minimum. F. Miscellaneous Framing and Furring: Provide for special framing at recesses, specialty items and as required. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Sections 01450 and 05120. RDAI 2363.00 05400 -3 B. Testing Agency: Will visually inspect cold- formed metal framing to verify that material has been properly installed. 1. Inspection: Visually inspect 100% of welded connections of metal studs supporting masonry. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 05400 -4 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel railings and guardrails. 2. Handrail brackets and handrails. 3. Steel ladders including elevator pit ladders. 4. Elevator sill support angles. 5. Overhead door steel frames. 6. Steel support for counters. 7. Steel opening frames in metal deck. 8. Trench drain covers. 9. Gratings. 10. Snow Guards. 11. Drilled -in Anchors 12. Rough hardware for heavy timber construction. 13. All other miscellaneous angles, channels, tubes and plates as indicated and required. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts and weld plates for anchoring metal fabrications installed under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories and Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Steel angle lintels installed under Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Railing sleeves installed under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 4. Steel bollards installed under Section 02776 Concrete Sidewalks. C. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel 2. Steel Stairs: Section 05511 Metal Stairs and Ships Ladders. 3. Field Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Detailing, Fabrication and Erection of Steel: RISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 1989 Edition. 2. Fabrication, Delivery and Erection of Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 1992 Edition, Sections 5 through 7. 3. Fabrication, Erection, and Dimensional Tolerances for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10. 4. Welding: AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. Painting: SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. RDA! 2363.00 05500 -1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Steel surfaces and connections fabricated under this Section which will remain exposed and subject to normal view by the public or occupants of the completed structure shall be considered Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel as defined by the AISC Code of Standard Practice, and shall be subject to all requirements for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel specified in Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals in General: Comply with Section 01330. Product Data: Submit product data for all manufactured stock items specified under this Section, including the following. 1. Trench drain covers and other castings. 2. Gratings. 3. Expansion bolts. 4. Adhesive anchors. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for all custom fabricated items under this Section. Include loose steel lintels, plates and welded steel opening frames. 1. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the following: a. Profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of members. b. Connections, attachments, and anchorages. c. Size and type of fasteners d. Finishes, coatings and shop painting. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable. 3. Indicate weld lengths and sizes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D 1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the fabrications and installations indicated. B. Regulatory Requirements: Expansion anchors and adhesive anchors shall have current published ICBO Evaluation Report indicating ICBO approval as acceptable method of construction under the UBC. Comply with all limitations on use of anchors stipulated in Evaluation Report. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Store metals above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect metals from corrosion. 2. Store other materials in weathertight and dry place, until ready for use. Materials to be installed by others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices that are embedded in cast -in- place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast -in -place concrete operations and masonry work. RDAI 2363.00 05500 -2 Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Steel Pipe and Tubing: ASTM A53, Grade B, or A500, Grade B, minimum wall thickness 11 gage. C. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Bolts: ASTM A307. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563. 3. Washers: ASTM F436. 4. Hooked Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rod Anchors: ASTM A36. 5. Expansion Bolts and Adhesive Anchors: Comply with Section 05120. D. Welding Materials for Steel: 1. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1. a. Strength level: In accordance with AISC and AWS specifications for base metals joined, weld type, and direction of applied load to weld. 2. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.1 or A 5.5. E. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors: Conform to ASTM A108. Studs shall be manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW, or approved substitute. Shop Paint: 1. Steel Items to Receive Painted Finish or To Be Concealed in Completed Structure: Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 11. 2.02 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Bollards: Six inch diameter steel pipe, standard weight, Schedule 40 black iron. 1. Concrete Base and Fill: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete and installed with concrete rounded at top under Division 2 Site Construction. 2. Size, Height and Embedment: As indicated on Drawings. 2.03 STEEL LINTELS A. Steel Lintels: All masonry openings 16' in width and over shall have lintels. Provide loose steel lintels except where masonry lintels are indicated on Drawings. 1. Sizes and Bearing Lengths: See Lintel Schedule on Structural Drawings. 2. Weld or bolt members together where indicated to form complete assembly. Where welds will be exposed in the completed installation, provide continuous welds and grind flush. Masonry Lintels: See Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. RDAI 2363.00 05500 -3 2.04 STEEL OPENING FRAMES A. Steel Opening Frames: Support all openings in metal roof deck greater than 10" in any direction on all four sides by a steel frame spanning between steel joists, beams, purlins or other structural deck supports. 1. Steel Member Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Weld members as indicated to form complete and rigid assembly. 3. Coordinate with Section 05120 Structural Steel and Section 05213 Open Web Steel Joists. Fabricate members based on dimensions indicated on structural steel and steel joist shop drawings that have been approved for construction. Provide adequate length to allow for normal sweep and installation tolerances of supporting members. 4. Steel Opening Frames for Mechanical Units: Coordinate with Division 15 Mechanical. Do not fabricate frames until final mechanical unit size and configuration has been provided. 2.05 GRATINGS A. Gratings: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Reliance Steel Products, Co. b. IKG Industries (Irving Grating) c. Approved Substitute 2. Type: Rectangular steel bar type, span as indicated on Drawings. Design by manufacturer to carry 100 psf live load. a. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1- 3/16" o.c. b. Cross Bar Spacing: 4" o.c. 3. Finish: Galvanized for field painting under section 09900. 4. Fastening Devices: Universal clips or saddle clips. 5. Supports: Provide support angles under bearing bars if required. 2.06 TRENCH DRAIN COVERS AND GRATE CASTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Neenah Foundry Co. 2. McKinley Iron Works. 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Trench Cover: Neenah R -4990 CX with frame. 1. Grate Openings: Type A covers. 2. Solid Covers: Type D. 2.07 DRILLED -IN ANCHORS A. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type, complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633. 2. Parking Garage Use, Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18 -8 stainless steel nuts and washers. RDAI 2363.00 05500 -4 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. Kwik -Bolt II. b. ITW Ramset /Red Head Red Head Wedge Anchor. c. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Power -Bolt. d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, complete with required nuts, washers, epoxy or ester -based adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. I.- Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18 -8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. HAS or HIT threaded rods. HVA or HIT HY -150 Adhesive Anchorage System for anchorage to concrete or stone. HIT HY -20 Adhesive system for anchorage to brick or concrete masonry. b. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Straight Cut Anchor Rod with Power -Fast Cartridge System. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Drop -In Anchors: Flush or shell type, complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM 8633. 2. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. HDI Anchors. b. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. D. Sleeve Anchors: Flush or shell type, complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633. 2. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. Sleeve Anchors. b. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate custom metal fabrications as indicated, scheduled or listed in Article 1.01. 1. Fabricate in accordance with details and accepted shop drawings. 2. Provide miscellaneous items of metal work indicated or as necessary to complete work. 3. Materials: New stock of types and sizes indicated. RDAI 2363.00 05500 -5 4. Make cuts clean and sharp with wire edges ground smooth. Provide straight, rigid, and tight work, free from defects. 5. Close exposed ends of steel pipe or tubing with welded caps. 6. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 7. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. 8. Fit and shop assemble, in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 9. Exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flush, countersunk screws or bolts, unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise. 10. Make exposed joints flush butt -type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened. 11. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of some material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified or detailed. 12. Welding: AWS D 1.1. Miter and cope intersections and weld all around. Remove splatter, grind exposed welds to blend and contour surfaces to match those adjacent. 13. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not available, secure Architect's acceptance of suitable sizes prior to proceeding. B. Steel Railings: 1. Material: 1 -1 /2" i.d. round pipe unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to lines, levels and patterns as indicated. 3. Joints: Cut, miter and weld all joints. Fill and grind smooth. 4. Insert into steel sleeves or epoxy mortar at Contractor's option. C. Steel Ladders: 1. Comply with ANSI 14.3. 2. Provide 1/2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges spaced 18" apart. Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs with non -slip finish, spaced 12" o.c. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points not over 5' o.c. with welded steel brackets with minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung or maximum surrounding structure allows and return rails to wall. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate. D. Steel Section Door Frames: Fabricate of shapes indicated, fully welded, uniform, square and true. Grind exposed welds smooth. Securely and rigidly anchor to masonry and concrete as indicated. Snow Guards: Steel pipe and plate as indicated. Grind all welds. Provide all attachment accessories. Pre - finish before installation as specified in Section 09900. 2.09 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Priming: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust, loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: a. Surfaces to be concealed in the Completed Structure: SP -3 power tool cleaning. b. Surfaces to be exposed in the Completed Structure: SP -6 commercial blast cleaning. RDAI 2363.00 05500 -6 2. Paint Application: Shop coat fabricated items with shop paint in accordance with SSPC -PA -1. a. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete and surfaces to be field welded. b. Shop Paint Thickness: 2.5 dry film mils. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A653, G90 Class minimum. Provide corrosion resistant galvanized coating on indicated or specified steel items after fabrication and shop assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Weld or bolt items securely in place or otherwise fasten as indicated on the drawings or accepted shop drawings. Include items indicated, scheduled or listed in Article 1.01. B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects. C. Field Welds: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS 131.1. 1. Painted Fabrications: Grind smooth and touch up with compatible primer. 2. Galvanized Fabrications: After installation, grind and touch -up field welds and scratched and damaged galvanized surfaces. Use a primer recommended for galvanized surfaces. D Drilled -In Anchors and Inserts: Install drilled -iri anchors and inserts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. 1. Adhesive Anchors: Thoroughly clean drill hole of all debris and drill dust prior to installation of insert and adhesive. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until material has achieved full design strength. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stained or otherwise defective work. Replace with new material END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 05500 -7 SECTION 05511 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY METAL STAIRS A. Section Includes: 1. Pan tread channel stringer stairs. 2. Pre - engineered steel stairs. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Pan Fill: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 3. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01 423. Comply with following: 1. Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 2. Welding: AWS Dl .1 Structural Welding Code -Steel. 3. Stairways: Standard construction details of "Metal Stairs Manual' of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, latest edition. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: 1. Steel Stairs: Capable of carrying indicated live loads. 2. Stair Fabricator: Responsible for structural design of members as required to carry live and dead loads. 3. Structural Calculations: Available to Architect on request. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Currently qualified according to AWS D 1.1. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. B. Materials to be installed by others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices that are embedded in cast -in- place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast -in -place concrete operations and masonry work. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. RDAI 2363.00 05511-1 C. Delivery and Storage: 1. Store metals above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect steel from corrosion. ~ 2. Store other materials in weathertight and dry place, until ready for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with Section 05500. 2.02 STEEL STAIRS A. Pan Tread Channel Stringer Stairs: Shop fabricated. 1. Design Criteria: Engineered by the fabricator to carry 100 psf live load. 2. Reference Standard: Construct in conformity with standard construction details of Metal Stairs Manual, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, latest edition. 3. Stair Components: Stair runs and platforms as indicated. 4. Tread and Platform Pans: 10 gage steel. 2.5 lb. minimum self - furring lath tack welded to pans immediately before concrete fill is placed. 5. Risers: 10 ga steel closed type. 6. Concrete Fill: See Section 03300. 7. Handrails: As indicated and in compliance with Section 05500. 2.03 PRE - ENGINEERED STEEL STAIRS - CONTRACTOR'S OPTION A. Manufacturers: 1. The Sharon Companies LTD. 2. Metal Service Co. Stairco 3. American Stair Speed Stair 4. Accepted Substitute B. Design Criteria: Engineered by the fabricator to carry 100 psf liveload. C. Construction: Standard manufacturer's components. 1. Stringers: Steel channel. 2. Treads: Pan type for concrete fill. 3. Risers: Closed 4. Landings: Pan type for concrete fill. 5. Concrete Fill: See Section 03300. 6. Handrails: As indicated. 2.04 PAINTING A. Materials: 1. Shop primer: Tnemec 10 -99. No substitutes. B. Preparation: Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC -SP3 Power Tool Cleaning. RDAI 2363.00 05511 -2 C. Shop Painting: Spray -apply to uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 -3.0 mils, free of runs, sags or other defects. Omit shop primer within 2" of field- welded connections, compression 'y joint surfaces, steel embedded in concrete and steel to be covered by spray on fireproofing. D. Field Painting: Following grinding of field welded connections to exposed steel work, field apply primer of same type and thickness as shop primer. Touch up all primer removed or damaged during erection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Weld or bolt items securely in place or otherwise fasten as indicated on the drawings or accepted Shop Drawings. 1. Field Welds: Grind smooth and touch up with red primer. B. Stairs: Install in accordance with fabricator's recommendations. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 05511 -3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roofing and flashing blocking. 2. Partition blocking. 3. Miscellaneous blocking and supports. 4. Miscellaneous wood sheathing. 5. Rough hardware. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchors Cast into Concrete or Masonry for Anchorage of Wood: Install under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories or Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Related Sections: 1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 2. Custom Cabinets: Section 06410. 3. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Blockouts: Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01423. Comply with the following: 1. Wood Framing: Comply with requirements of the 2003 International Building Code and ANSI /AF &PA NDS -2001 National Design Specification for Wood Construction, as published by the American Wood Council of the American Forest and Paper Association. 2. Lumber: Grading Rules for Lumber, latest edition, as published by Western Wood Products Association. 3. Plywood: U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 1 -95 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 4. Treatment: a. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. b. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire - Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. c. AWPA C27- Plywood - Fire - Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. d. AWPA P5 - Standard for Waterborne Preservatives. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade Stamps: 1. Lumber: Each piece shall be WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped. RDAI 2363.00 06100 -1 2. Wood Sheathing: Each panel shall be identified with the grade trademark of the APA. 3. Sill Plates and Other Lumber Specified to be Preservative Treated: Each piece shall be stamped to indicate compliance with AWPA pressure treatment standards. B. Treatment Labels: Label each piece of treated lumber. 1. Fire Treated Lumber: UL labels. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. B. Storage: Stack all materials minimum of 6 inches above ground to ensure proper' ventilation and cover with waterproofing covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Lumber: Sound, thoroughly seasoned, surfaced four sides, well manufactured and free from warp not correctable by bridging, blocking or nailing. 2. Moisture Content: Provide dry lumber as defined by the American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20, with moisture content limited to maximum 19 percent moisture content, graded S -DRY, KD or KD -HT, as documented by grade stamp. 3. Dimension Lumber Noted on Drawings to be Non - Combustible: Fire retardant treated with chloride salts. B. Blocking, Furring and Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Douglas Fir -Larch or Hem -Fir. Standard Grade or Better. 1. Blocking in Contact with Roofing Membrane: Pressure treated with preservative. 2. Seasoning (Up to Two Inches): 19% or less moisture content. 3. Interior Blocking: Fire retardant treated with chloride salts. C. Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing EXP 1. 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2.02 TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment of Dimension Lumber: All blocking in contact with roof membrane, exterior plates, posts embedded in concrete, and blocking and plates in contract with concrete or masonry shall be pressure preservative treated. 1. Acceptable Products: Osmose NatureWood Preservative or accepted substitute. 2. Type:. Waterborne, alkaline copper quaternary preservative system with co- biocide, registered by EPA as a non - restricted use pesticide. 3. Minimum Preservative Retention: a. Plates and Blocking: 0.40 Ibs of preservative per cubic foot of wood. 4. Water Repellent Additive: Required. 5. Treated Wood: Kiln -dried after treatment. RDAI 2363.00 06100 -2 2.03 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND HARDWARE A. General: provide necessary bolts, screws, nails, clips, plates, straps, hangers, etc. necessary for completion of rough carpentry. Provide correct material of proper size and strength for purpose intended conforming to specifications, drawings and applicable building codes. Supply anchors to be cast into concrete and masonry for anchorage of wood for installation under other Sections. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. C. Exterior Applications: Provide fasteners hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. D. Fasteners for Use in Pressure Treated Wood: One of the following: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Steel hot -dip galvanized to G 185 in accordance with ASTM A653. 3. Steel, Batch /Post Hot -Dip Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 4. Steel, mechanically galvanized to Class 55 or greater in accordance with ASTM B695. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry are prepared to required grades and dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Perform in substantial manner consistent with accepted standards of carpentry trade. 2. Framing: Erect plumb, level and true and rigidly anchor in place. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels. 3. Shims: Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use steel shims with full bearing on masonry or concrete. 4. Metal Framing Anchors: Install where required for proper connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, bolt plates.firmly to concrete or masonry with 3/8" x 12" (3" horizontal leg) anchor bolts, 7 -0" o.c. or use powder- actuated fastening system. 1. Size and Spacing: Accepted by Architect. C. Sheathing: Install panels continuous over two or more spans with face grain perpendicular to supports with end joints supported. Stagger ends of adjacent sheets four feet where possible. 1. Fasten per APA recommendations. K�•x��• • 10 N A. Provide 2" stock, width as shown, at location indicated. Anchor to concrete with 3 -3/8" bolts each jamb; four anchors if over 7'. Countersink heads into buck. RDAI 2363.00 06100 -3 3.04 WOOD BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER REQUIRED FOR WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. General: Cooperate with other trades. Provide required grounds, blocking, wood backing and framing. Perform necessary cutting and patching of rough carpentry work as required. Interior Blocking: Install blocking of size required for support of handrails, toilet and bath accessories, wall- mounted door stops, wall cabinets and other wall- mounted accessory items. Set true to line, level or plumb well secured in stud wall and flush with back of drywall or other wall finish. C. Exterior Blocking: 1. Install blocking of size required for exterior wall finish materials, exterior handrails, exterior wall mounted equipment, roof edge details and other locations as indicated. 2. Install blocking for wood board sidings as required to allow nailing of siding to studs, nailing strips or blocking at a maximum of 24 inches on center. 3. Roof Blocking: Anchor at 3 feet o.c. to resist force of 75 lbs. per lineal foot. D. Roof Curbs: Install blocking and framing as indicated for curbs at roof openings and rooftop mechanical units. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 06100 -4 SECTION 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Included: 1. Heavy Timber Beams and Stringers 2. Heavy Timber Posts 3. Rough Hardware and Connections B. Products Furnished but not installed under this Section: 1. Anchors built into concrete or masonry for support of heavy timber: Install under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete or Section 04810 Unit Masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. Wood Framing: Comply with requirements of Uniform Building Code and ANSI /AF & PA NDS -1997 "National Design Specification for Wood Construction ", as published by the American Forest Paper Association. 2. Lumber: Comply with Grading Rules for lumber, latest edition, as published by Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Heavy Timber: For purposes of this specification, heavy timber is defined as solid wood framing members having a nominal dimension of 4" and over in both thickness and width. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for heavy timber trusses, and all fabricated steel connections and supports. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data -for all other connections and supports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack all materials minimum of 6" above ground to insure proper ventilation and cover with waterproofing covering. Protect exposed members from damage during shipment, storage and installation. B. Store heavy timber trusses in a vertical direction, above ground and covered to prevent water staining. RDAI 2363.00 06130 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAVY TIMBER A. General Requirements: Sound, thoroughly seasoned, and free from warp or significant surface defects. B. Moisture Content: Maximum of 15% C. Species and Grade: 1. Beams and Stringers: a. Exposed: Select Structural Douglas fir - larch. b. Concealed: No. 1 or Better Douglas fir - larch. 2. Posts: a. Exposed: Select structural Douglas fir -larch b. Concealed: No. 1 or better Douglas fir- larch. D. Finish: Exterior, rough sawn; interior, resawn. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SUPPORT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Simpson Strong -Tie Company 2. United Steel Products Co. (USP) 3. Approved Substitute. 2.03 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Nails: Common wire nail length and diameters. Do not use box nails. Threaded hardened steel nails may be substituted for common size nail of corresponding size. Galvanized nails shall be hot dip galvanized ASTM A 153. B. Bolts and Lag Screws: Common bolts and screws, ASTM A307. Exterior shall be hot dip galvanized. C. Steel Plates and Straps ASTM A36, size as indicated. Weld plates together with 3/16" fillet welds all sides and full length of contact surfaces unless noted. Use E70 welding electrodes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: Verify that surfaces to receive rough timber framing are prepared to required grades and dimensions. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 ROUGH HARDWARE Provide and install rough hardware and metal fastenings as indicated, specified or required for proper installation. Nails, spikes, screws and bolts and similar items shall be sizes and types to properly secure members in place. RDAI 2363.00 06130 -2 3.03 HEAVY TIMBER INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Nail or spike members in accordance with Uniform Building Code. Framing 16" o.c. unless indicated otherwise. 2. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use steel shims with full bearing on masonry or concrete, 3. Do not cut, notch or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits without Architect's permission. Reinforce framing members as directed where damaged by cutting. B. Fasteners: 1. Where splitting is likely to occur causing a reduction in member or connection capacity, pre -bore nail holes 1/2 size of nail diameter and use threaded hardened steel nails. 2. Bolts: Boltholes shall be 1/ 16" to 1 /32" larger than the bolt diameter. Carefully center bolthole between side plates and main members. Provide standard washers between wood and bolt heads or nuts. C. Anchors, Connectors and Supports: Install as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 06130 -3 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior: a. Wood trim. b. Wood T & G ceiling. c. Wood wall set. d. Crowd holding. 2. Exterior: a. Wood trim and facia. B. Related Sections: 1. Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Cabinets and Casework: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08216 Stile and Rail Wood Doors. 4. Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 5. Wood Door Frames: Section 06460 Wood Frames. 6. Fiber Cement Siding and Soffits: Section 07464. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with Custom Grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03_ DEFINITIONS A. Finish Carpentry: Woodwork requiring smooth finish and exposed to view but not considered as cabinets or casework. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. 1. Include conformance to required reference standard. B. Certificates: Submit paneling fire rating certificates in accordance with Section 01330. Include certificates from each bundle of treated paneling boards. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with: 1. Wood Ceiling: Class 1 material, 0 -25 flame spread, Kopper's exterior fire treatment. RDAI 2363.00 06200 -1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and sufficiently dry to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR MATERIALS A. Trim Material: Knotty Alder. 1. Grade: AWI Custom Grade. 2. Moisture Content: 15% or less. B. Wood Ceiling and Wall Set: Custom grade knotty alder. B. Wood Ceiling: Redwood, CRA -RIS clear all heart vertical grain. 1. Size: 1 x 4 T&G V- groove, smooth finish. 2. Moisture Content: 15% or less. 3. Finish: Stain and varnish under Section 09900. 2.02 EXTERIOR MATERIALS A. Trim and Facia Material: Western red cedar, C select Grade and Better, smooth surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INTERIOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION A. General: All installations AWI Custom Grade unless otherwise specified. B. Interior Finish: AWI Custom Grade: 1. Lengths: Wherever possible, provide single piece for each length of finish. Butt joints not allowed except for long pieces or room molds that may be in two or more sections. When butt joints are necessary, bevel joints. 2. General: Install interior finish level, plumb and true. 3. Securing: Tightly secure to bracing with nails, screws, glue, etc. Blind nail wherever possible. Where surface nailing is necessary, use finish nails carefully set with nail punch. 4. Trim Finishing Against Walls or Ceiling: Mill with extra width and scribe to wall or ceiling at job. 5. Edges: Except where molded, mill trim with perfectly square edges. After erection, slightly round exposed edges by sanding as directed. RDAI 2363.00 06200 -2 6. Interior Finish: Hand smooth ready for finish under Section 09900 free from machine or tool marks or any roughness. 7. Replacement: Replace any interior finish bearing hammer marks, splits, cracks, mars or defects of any nature. 3.03 EXTERIOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION A. General: AWI Custom Grade unless otherwise specified. Exterior Trim: Wherever possible, provide each length of finish in single piece. Face nail into framing using aluminum casing nails. Drive flush but do not set. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 06200 -3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lavatory counters. 2. Cabinets and countertops. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Wood Trim: Section 06200 Finish Carpentry. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08216. 4. Job Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 5. Plumbing Fixtures: Division 15 Mechanical. 6. Stone Countertops: Section 06417. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with Custom Grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Woodwork: Custom fabricated cabinets and casework. Other woodwork not considered as cabinets and casework is considered finish carpentry and is specified under Section 06200. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures: 1. • Product Data: Submit catalog data for all countertop surfacing materials, countertop setting and grouting materials, shelving and shelving hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: Include conformance to required reference standard. a. Cabinets and Casework: Submit dimensioned plans, elevations, component profiles and large -scale details for each casework item. t) Indicated materials, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, location of hardware, and schedule of finishes for each casework item. 3. Samples: a. Material Samples: 1) Submit sample of each type and finish of cabinet and shelf hardware for approval before ordering hardware. 2) Submit samples of plastic laminate for color selection or verification. RDAI 2363.00 06410 -1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. B.. Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and sufficiently dry to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content. I;LT:ii�•a : � � � 2.01 MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1 M2, matte formed wood particleboard, 40-45# density industrial grade with sealer and lacquer finish. 1. Cabinet Interiors: Acrylic coated 45 -47# density industrial particleboard. B. Trim Material: Knotty alder. 1. Grade: AWI Custom Grade. 2. Moisture Content: 15% or less. C. Plywood: 1. Alder: Commercial Standard Premium Grade plain sliced knotty alder with lumber or particleboard core. Where both sides are visible, one side may be Commercial Standard Good Grade. D. Hardboard: Tempered Grade. 2.02 CABINET HARDWARE A. Cabinet Hardware Manufacturers: 1. Hinges: a. Julius Blum, Inc. b. Grass America, Inc. c. Hafele America Co. d. Hettich America LP. e. Mepla, Inc. f. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Pulls and Catches: a. Hafele America Co. b. Stanley Hardware. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 3. Drawer Slides: a. Accuride International, Inc., www.accudde.com. b. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 4. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: a. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing. b. Stanley Hardware. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Cabinet Hardware: Furnished and installed by the cabinet supplier: 1. Schedule: RDAl2363.00 06410 -2 Type Manufacturer Catalog No. Finish Hinges Blum Modul 90 176 Nickel Plated Pulls Stanley 4483 26D Catches Stanley SP46 28 Drawer Slides for Light Accuride No. 3832, all ball bearing, Electro -plate and Medium Duty handed lever Zinc Drawers, 16 -inch Wide or disconnect, full extension Less slides with a 100 ounds/ air load ratin Drawer Slides for Light Accuride No. 7434, all ball bearing, Electro -plate and Medium Duty rail- mount, full extension Zinc Drawers, 16 -inch Wide plus 1 -in. over travel to 24 -inch Wide slides, hold -in decent, with a 100 pounds /pair load rating and p rogressive movement Brackets for Shelves Knape & Vogt 256 Zinc Standards for Shelves Knape & Vogt 255 Zinc 2.03 FABRICATION A. AWI Grade: Construct counters and cabinets as indicated on drawings and as required for AWI Custom Grade work. B. Construction: Frame counters in substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces, etc. 1. Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200# man without sagging. 2. Frames: Pinned, glued, or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom Grade standards. C. Countertops Covered with Stone: Full sub -top constructed of particleboard. Rail tops not allowed. D. Cabinets: 1. Provide and install hardware as specified. 2. Construct shelving, counters, cabinets and casework with alder plywood. a. Exposed Edges: Band with alder. b. Provide 3/4" alder shelf cleats, supports, stiles, rails, etc. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frame cabinets and casework in a substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces, bottoms, etc. a. Cross Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200 pound man without sagging. b. Frames: Pinned, glued or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom Grade Standards. 4. Construction Type: Flush overlay (not lipped). 5. Cabinet Doors: Types, sizes and thicknesses indicated. a. Doors: Flush with edges perfectly smooth. b. Plywood Doors: Edge banded. 6. Cabinet Backs Not Exposed to View: Hardboard. RDAI 2363.00 06410 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine spaces and substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Counters: Construct supports for counters as indicated. 1. Securely attach counters to walls plumb and level. 2. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. B. Cabinets: 1. Bases: Construct cabinet bases for cabinets as indicated and securely anchor to floor. 2. Cabinets: Securely attach cabinets to bases and walls with cabinets plumb and level dnd hardware operating properly, ready for finish under Section 09900. 3. Rubber Base: Provided on base cabinets under Section 09650 after cabinets are set in place. 4. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 06410 -4 SECTION 06417 STONE SLAB COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Granite countertops. 2. Related stone shelves and splashbacks. Related Sections: 1. Casework and Subtops under Stone Countertops: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 2. Tile Countertops and Backsplashes: Section 09300 Tile. 3. Residential Appliances: Section 11451. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. Marble Institute of America (MIA) - Residential Stone Countertop Installation. B. ASTM International References: 1. C615 -99 - Granite Dimension Stone. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current product literature for the following: a. Setting adhesive. b. Joint filler materials. c. Cleaner. d. Sealer. 2. Shop Drawings: Include layout, anchoring, jointing and sink and trim openings. a. Sink and Appliance Cutouts: Coordinate with Division 15. Indicate cutout measurements and sink and appliance measurements upon which cutout measurements are based. 2. Samples: Submit 12 inch by 12 inch sample of each type of stone illustrating edge profile and full range of color for acceptance. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01780: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning and maintenance procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in cut stone and the installation. 1. Experience: Continuously installed cut stone and the in State of Colorado for five years. RDAI 2363.00 06417 -1 Mock -up: Construct one half -size sample countertop, including subtop construction, for Architect's review and acceptance. 1. Location: As directed by Architect. 2. Accepted Mock -up: a. Standard for rest of work. b. Remove after acceptance of completed work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery and Handling: Carefully packed and loaded for delivery. Do not use packing material that may stain or discolor stone. C. Handling and Storage: Carefully handle and store vertically to avoid chipping and discoloration. Protect from weather by means of non - staining waterproof covering. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE A. Granite: ASTM C615. Polished granite slab in single piece full length of counter wherever possible. Locate joints only where shown on approved shop drawings. 1. Finish: Polished top face and exposed edges. 2. Color: As selected by Interior Designer. 3. Edge Treatment: As selected by Interior Designer. 2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Setting Adhesive: Non - staining bonding agent sufficient to prevent movement and rated for exterior use. Type as recommended by stone supplier. Joint Filler Materials: 1. For Polished Stone: Color matched epoxy or polyester resin. Type as recommended by stone supplier. - 2. Joints Greater Than l/ 16 Inch in Width: Siliconized caulk. Not allowed without prior approval by Architect. 2.03 CLEANERS AND SEALERS A. Cleaner: Type as recommended by stone supplier. B. Sealer: Silicone based sealer as recommended by stone supplier. RDAI 2363.00 06417 -2 2.04 FABRICATION A. Carefully lay out stone to ensure that the markings, veins, and particularities of the individual slabs are within the tolerance range of the approved sample, and that all slabs are consecutive from the block. Joints: Joint stone to dimension. 1. Stone to Wall: Size stone to fit within 1/8 inch of wall. a. Verify with field measurements prior to fabrication. b. If irregularity in wall surface exists, edge of countertop shall be scribed and fitted to wall. 2. Stone to Stone: a. Abutting stone slabs shall be free of chips, spalls and cracks. b. Joint Finish: Slightly arrised. c. Joint Width for Resinous Grouting: Maximum of 1 /16 inch. d. Joint Width for Unsanded Portland Cement Grouting: Maximum of 1/8 inch. e. Joints at Reentrant Corners: Allowed only where accepted by Architect. Miter through bullnose edge. f. Backsplashes to Sidesplashes: Mitered. g. Rub edges true, cut overwidth and grind or saw to dimension after jointing. h. Joints in Stone Countertops Without Subtops: Locate over supports. C. Gage as required. 1. Thickness of Stone to be Installed over Subtop Underlayment: 3/4 inch unless indicated otherwise. 1 -' /z inch edges. a. Double thickness at unsupported overhangs greater than 6 inches and less than 10 inches. 2. Thickness of Stone to Span Between Supports Without Subtop Underlayment: 1'/4 inch minimum unless indicated otherwise. a. Maximum Unsupported Overhang Length: 10 inches. 3. Shelves Without Subtop Support: Laminate to 1'/4 inch minimum thickness unless indicated otherwise. D. Cutouts: Saw or grind cutouts and notches. 1. Finished Edge Cutouts: a. Joints at Sinks: 1 j Place joints at tangent point of corner radius. 2) Provide stainless steel washers sealed in slots to support front center piece. b. Supports for Sinks in Stone Tops Without Subtops: Provide holes for metal clip hanger anchors in underside of stone slab. Coordinate with fixture manufacturer. c. Stone Overhanging Sink: Radius bottom edge. d. Stone Set Back From Sink Edge: Square bottom edge to meet radius point on sink edge. Coordinate with fixture manufacturer. 2. Sawn Cutouts: Provide at self- supporting sinks. 3. Drilled Faucet Holes: Coordinate with fixture manufacturer. 4. Granite Countertops: Reinforce at cutouts by rodding. a. Insert round steel rods secured with epoxy or polyester resin in the bottom face of granite countertops along both sides where cutouts are required. b. Apply fiberglass mesh to the bottom face of the granite at the cutouts. E. Edges: 1. Laminate edge as indicated and specified. RDAI 2363.00 06417 -3 2. Profile and finish exposed edges as indicated and specified. a. As indicated. 3. Nosings: Full length unless indicated otherwise. a. Terminate sidesplashes at radius point of nosing. F. Layout to ensure fit before shipment to site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. a. Verify window and door casings and other trim are clear of stone installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. a. Cabinetry: Verify cabinetry to receive stone slab countertops is installed on a true plane and level within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Areas to Receive Stone: Verify substrate is of moisture resistant material, stable, rigid and capable of supporting weight of stone without flexing. c. Verify electrical outlets are roughed in. d. Field Measurements: Measure walls against which counters are to be installed and record irregularities prior to stone fabrication. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of sinks and sink trim. B. Cooperation: Check relationship of stone to work under other sections, cooperate with others and proceed as desirable for general progress and best interest of Project. C. Supporting Casework and Subtops: Installed under Section 06410. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stone Countertops: 1. Place and shim stones for countertops. 2. Trim and notch stone if required for final fitting. 3. Stone Countertops over Subtops: Laminate stone slab to' /< inch plywood subtop using stone supplier's recommended setting adhesive. Apply adhesive to within a few inches of all stone edges in a random pattern that ensures adhesive at approximately 6 inch centers. 4. Stone Countertops Without Subtops: Adhere stone slab to supports using stone supplier's recommended setting adhesive. 5. Splashes: Adhere stone splashes to countertops using stone supplier's recommended setting adhesive. B. Joint Filling: I . Thoroughly dry clean the stone tops. 2. Mask joint prior to installing joint filler. RDAI 2363.00 06417 -4 3. Joints in Polished Stone: Fill with color matched epoxy or polyester resin. Ensure that all resinous grout is higher than or even with the face of the countertop. Work with 00 or 000 grade steel wool and sanding block parallel to the joint until all high spots are removed and the joint shines. 4. Joints in Unpolished Stone: Fill with color matched unsanded grout. Fill joints with a grout gun and strike flush with surface. C. Installation Tolerances: Install tops, splashes and shelves within following dimensional and flatness tolerances: 1. Marble and Limestone: Plus or minus 1/32 inch in length, width and thickness at exposed edges. 2. Granite, Slate, and Quartz -Based Stone: 1. Plus or minus 1/8 inch in length and width. 2. Smooth Faced Stone: Plus or minus 1/] 6 inch at .exposed edges. 3. Square: One -half the joint size, but not more than plus or minus 1/ 16 inch for stone slabs with the largest edge dimension not greater than 39 inches. 4. Flatness of Smooth Finished Stone Slabs: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured along a 4 foot dimension in any direction. D. Sinks and Trim: Coordinate installation of sinks and trim by plumbing subcontractor. 3.04 ADJUSTING Replace countertops showing damage or disfiguration during progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. Replace with new slabs from same source and, in the judgment of the Architect, are compatible with the adjacent stone. 3.05 CLEANING AND SEALING Clean all stone surfaces and apply compatible clear sealer after installation. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect counter tops after setting by suitable boxing. Do not use lumber that may stain or deface stone. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 06417 -5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dampproofing on backfill side of concrete site retainaing wall. Extend dampproofing from top of footing to 6" below finish grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Backfilling: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Roof Underlayment: Section 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing. 3. Waterproofing: Section 07141 cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing and 07142 Hot Fluid Applied Waterproofing. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened containers and store at a temperature of 50 °F. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply if air temperature or surface temperature is below 40° F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING A. Products: 1. Karnak No. 100 2. Sonneborn - Contech Hydrocide 600 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. A. Dampproofing: FS SS A 7018 nonfibrous solvent type emulsion. B. Primer: ASTM D41 C. Mastic: Heavy bodied bituminous compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: Verify substrate is smooth, free of major defects, cured and dry. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions by applicator. RDAI 2363.00 07111 -1 Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to be Dampproofed: Clean and smooth. Brush down surfaces to remove loose scale, fins, dust, etc. 1. Prime surface and fill holes with mastic. 2. Penetrations Such as Pipes: Waterproof as follows: a. Pack space between pipe and pipe sleeve with mineral wool to within 1" of face of wall. b. Fill 1" space with mastic. c. Place fiberglass membrane over opening and embed in suitable coating. Carefully cut to fit around pipe and extend at least 6' onto solid material. d. Trowel coat over membrane patch with dampproofing. 3. Construction and Expansion Joints: a. Apply heavy coating of dampproofing. b. Follow with two plies of waterproof fiberglass membrane extended 6' each side of joint with pronounced buckle or wrinkle in membrane over joint to permit movement without breaking membrane. c. Follow with two heavy coats of dampproofing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Brush or spray two coats of dampproofing at rates and by methods as recommended by manufacturer to provide uninterrupted and impervious seal. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Review: Provide ample notice for Architect to review completed installation before covering. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07111-2 SECTION 07133 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Membrane waterproofing at the following locations: 1. Under all synthetic slate shingle roofing. Cover all surfaces including ridges and valleys. 2. Under all sheet metal roofing. Cover all surfaces including ridges and valleys. 3. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Sections 07141 and 07142. 2. Synthetic Slate Shingles: Section 07316. 3. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's written certification that applicator is approved by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. a. Submit one copy for Architect's information. b. Maintain one copy on site until completion of waterproofing installation. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in waterproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied waterproofing in state of Colorado for three years. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Roof Waterproofing Underlayment: Hold conference with General Contractor's Superintendent, roofing contractor, Manufacturer's Representative, and waterproofing contractor's foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance. RDAI 2363.00 07133 -1 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to waterproofing, including detailing, surface preparation, application techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. l 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver materials to the site until ready for use. Deliver bonding adhesive and lap sealant in manufacturer's original unopened containers. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with the following: 1. Store membrane no more than two pallets high off the ground. Provide cover on top and sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 2. Store primer, mastic, protection board adhesive and liquid membrane in a dry area away from high heat, flames or spark. 3. Store only as much material at point of use as required for each day's work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install membrane waterproofing when air and surface temperature is below 40 degrees F unless manufacturer's recommended special materials and methods are used. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Include watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Self- Adhered Modified Bitumen Roof Waterproofing Membrane Underlayment: ASTM D 1970 -01. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Systems: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. - CCW WIP 200. b. Grace Construction Products - Grace Ice and Water Shield system. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Membrane: a. Grace Ice and Water Shield or approved substitute by other acceptable manufacturer. b. Material: Composite laminated sheet of polyethylene film coated on one side with a factory applied rubberized asphalt and on other side with a removable protective release paper. c. Nominal Thickness: 40 mils minimum. 3. Primer: Grace WP3000 primer or other VOC compliant primer by acceptable waterproofing manufacturer. a. Cold Weather Primer: Grace B2 Primer or accepted substitute as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. RDAI 2363.00 07133 -2 B. Self- Adhered Modified Bitumen Waterproofing Membrane Underlayment under Copper Sheet Metal Roof: ASTM D 1970-01. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Systems: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. - CCW WIP 403HR heat resistant roofing underlayment. b. Grace Construction Products - Grace Ultra high temperature self- adhered roofing underlayment system. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2. Membrane: a. Grace Ultra high temperature, self- adhered roofing underlayment or approved substitute by other acceptable manufacturer. b. Material: High strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber adhesive and inter -wound with a disposable release sheet. c. Nominal Thickness: 30 mils minimum. 3. Primer: Grace WP3000 primer or other VOC compliant primer by acceptable waterproofing manufacturer. a. Cold Weather Primer: Grace B2 Primer or accepted substitute as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: a. Sheathing: Verify sheathing is clean, dry and ready for waterproofing installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove projections, concrete splatter, general surface dirt and other foreign materials to leave surfaces in clean condition suitable for application of membrane. 1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces with high - pressure air to remove dust.and debris. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Priming: 1. Prime surface at coverage of 250 to 350 sq. ft. per gallon. Apply with lambswool roller. 2. Prime only area to be covered with membrane in one working day. 3. Allow primer to dry one hour or until tack free. 4. Reprime areas not covered with membrane within 24 hours. RDAI 2363.00 07133 -3 C. Roof Application: 1. Apply membrane from low points to high points across fall line so that laps shed water. Stagger end laps. 2. Roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible with linoleum roller or standard water - filled garden roller less than 30" wide. Protect face of roller with resilient material such as 1 /2" plastic foam or two wraps of indoor - outdoor carpet. 3. Seal end laps and T joints at end of each workday. 4. Apply double thickness of membrane over properly sealed expansion, construction and control joints. D. Projections: 1. Projections: Apply double layer of membrane around projections at least 6" in all directions and seal terminations with Bituthene Mastic. E. Terminations: Terminate by pressing very firmly to wall and finish with troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic. Sealing Seams: 1. Overlap seams at least 2-1/2". Apply succeeding sheet with minimum 2 -1 /2" overlap and roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible to minimize bubbles caused by outgassing of air or water vapor from concrete. 2. Fishmouths: Slit and overlap flaps, repair with patch, press or roll to make seal, and seal edges of patch with troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic. 3. Misaligned or Inadequately Lapped Seams: Patch with sheet membrane. 4. Seal laps within 12" of corner details with troweling of Bituthene Mastic. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Membranes: Do not allow waterproofing to remain exposed to sunlight for longer than recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall be present during application of deck and roof membrane. B. Manufacturer's certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of application. See Paragraph 1.02 C Quality Control Submittals. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07133 -4 SECTION 07141 COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fluid applied waterproofing at the following locations. 1. Outside face of all exterior foundation walls. Cover vertical and horizontal faces of footing and extend up exterior face of wall to 6" below finish grade or intersection with slab above. 2. - Backfill side of elevator pit walls. Cover vertical and horizontal faces of footing and extend up wall to slab above. 3. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Foundation Drainage System: Section 02620 Subdrainage. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Samples: Submit samples of cured membrane in accordance with Section 01330. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's written certification that applicator is approved by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. a. Submit one copy for Architect's information. b. Maintain one copy on site until completion of waterproofing installation. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and specifications. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in waterproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied fluid applied waterproofing in State of Colorado for five years. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. RDAI 2363.00 07141 -1 C. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Concrete Wall Waterproofing: Hold conference with General Contractor's Superintendent, Manufacturer's Representative, and waterproofing contractor's foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance. 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to waterproofing, including detailing, surface preparation, application techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in sealed, undamaged containers, each identified with material name, date of manufacture, and lot number. C. Storage: Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I . Store under cover in original sealed containers. 2. Store between 40 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials in accordance with safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer or as required by local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not apply unless ambient temperature is minimum of 40 degrees F. 2. Do not apply if ambient temperature is likely to fall below 32 degrees F. 1.06 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING A. Sequencing /Scheduling: 1. Do not begin work until substrate has been completed and penetrations have been installed so membrane will not be penetrated or damaged by subsequent work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty shall cover maintenance of watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE WALL WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Grace & Co., Grace Construction Products. 2. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. B. Membrane: W.R. Grace Procor System waterproofing membrane or approved substitute by acceptable manufacturer. 1. Material: ASTM C836. Two part, self- curing, rubber - based, cold - applied waterproofing. 2. Nominal Thickness: 60 mils. 3. Product for Pour and Trowel Application: Procor 20. RDAI 2363.00 07141 -2 4. Product for Spray Application: Procor 75. C. Protection /Drainage Board: 1. Grace Hydroduct 2 Drainage Composite. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation to verify that concrete surfaces are smooth, free of major defects, cured and dry. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Remove concrete fins and projections greater than 0.13 inch in height, concrete splatter, general surface dirt and other foreign materials to leave surfaces in generally clean condition suitable for application of membrane. Clean surfaces with high - pressure air to remove dust, loose stones and debris. B. Patching: Patch honeycomb, form tie holes and irregular surfaces of concrete greater than 1/2-inch in depth. Patch with Portland Cement grout, concrete or epoxy grout. C. Expansion, Control, and Construction Joints including Joints between Precast Wall Panels: Clean, prime, fit with backer rod and fill with urethane sealant. Strip -coat with 60 mils wet film thickness non - flowing type membrane to width of not less than six inches on both sides of joint. D. Cracks: Rout or sawcut cracks exceeding 1/] 6" in width and fill with sealant. Strip -coat cracks with 60 mil dry film thickness non - flowing type membrane to width of not less than six inches on either side of crack. E. Projections: Fill slot around projection with backer rod and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's standard details. Strip -coat with 60 mil dry film thickness for a width of not less than six inches around projection. F. Protection: Protect adjacent materials with drop cloths or masking as required. G. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants which may adversely affect adhesion or performance of coating system and apply detail coat. 3.03 CONCRETE WALL MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. RDAI 2363.00 07141 -3 B. Application: Apply in two coats with waterproofing system manufacturer's recommended plural component spray equipment or trowel to 60 mil wet thickness (in addition to any preparation work). Check thickness at frequent intervals using wet film thickness gauge. 3.04 CURING Cure membrane minimum 24 hours before backfilling. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Remove foreign matter from finished membrane surface. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Drainage /Protection Board: Completely cover foundation wall waterproofing. Apply with manufacturer recommended adhesive. B. Membrane: Do not allow waterproofing to remain exposed to sunlight for longer than recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A: Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall be present during application of membrane. B. Manufacturer's certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of application. See Paragraph 1.02 D Quality Control Submittals. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07141 -4 SECTION 07142 HOT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fluid applied waterproofing at the following locations. 1. Horizontal waterproofing under all exterior concrete or landscaped areas over concrete parking garage roof. Extend 2' -0" up on all adjacent vertical surfaces (behind finishes) and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Cast -in -Place Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Waterproofing Underlayment: Section 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing. 3. Foundation Wall Waterproofing: Section 07141 Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing. 4. Joint Sealants: Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current product literature. 2. Samples: Submit samples of cured membrane and samples of protection board. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Applicator Qualifications: Submit document stating manufacturer's acceptance of subcontractor as an Approved Applicator for the specified materials. C. Contract Closeout Submittals "I . Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied fluid applied waterproofing in State Colorado for five years. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes, regulations, ordinances, and laws regarding use and application of products that contain volatile organic compounds (VOC). C. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Parking Garage Roof Waterproofing: Hold conference with General Contractor's Superintendent, Manufacturer's Representative, and waterproofing contractor's foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance. RDAI 2363.00 07142 -1 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to waterproofing, including detailing, concrete curing method, surface preparation, application techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Delivery: Deliver materials to Project site in original, factory- sealed, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and label intact and legible with following information. 1. Name of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Material safety data sheet. C. Storage: 1. Store flashing, mastic and primer in a protected area out of direct sunlight. Protect from rain and physical damage. 2. Storage area temperature shall not exceed 80 °F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials in accordance with safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer and as required by local, State and Federal authorities having jurisdiction.. 1. Do not apply membrane if temperature is less than 0 degrees F. or to a damp, frosty, snow covered or contaminated surface. 2. Keep flammable products away from spark or flame. Do not allow the use of spark producing equipment during application and until all vapors have dissipated. Post '"NO SMOKING" signs. 1.06 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING A. Do not begin work until substrate has been completed and penetrations have been installed so membrane will not be penetrated or damaged by subsequent work. B. Schedule application of waterproofing to occur after new concrete substrate has cured minimum 14 days. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide five year written, single source warranty covering all system components and installation for waterproofing in accordance with Section 01780, agreeing during the warranty period to promptly make repairs or replacement of defective materials of the waterproofing system without additional cost to the Owner. 1. Warranty shall cover maintenance of watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. American Hydrotech, Inc. RDAI 2363.00 07142 -2 2. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Incorporated, Sapulpa, OK, 800/338 -8701; www.carlisle- ccw.com 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. B. Membrane: Carlisle CCW -500 -R or accepted substitute. Reinforced, hot fluid - applied, rubberized asphalt membrane system, consisting of two layers of rubberized asphalt membrane reinforced with polyester fabric. 1. Thickness: 215 mils. C. Reinforcing Fabric: CCW Reinforcing Cloth, spunbonded polyester fabric. D. Accessory Materials: Provide following materials for Carlisle system or similar types standard with other acceptable manufacturer's system. 1. Primer: CCW -550 Primer. 2. Flashing: a. Non - exposed Areas: CCW - 711 -90 90 Mil Sheet Membrane and Flashing or CCW 60 mil uncured neoprene. b. Exposed Areas: Sure -Seal EPDM Flashing. 3. Mastic: CCW -704 Mastic. 4. Sealants: CCW -703 Vertical Grade Liquiseal Membrane or CCW -201 two - component Polyurethane Sealant. a. Backing Rod: Shall be closed -cell polyethylene foam rod. 5. Protection Board: a. Horizontal Surfaces: CCW Protection Board -H. 6. Drainage Composite: CCW Sure -Drain as recommended by the manufacturer for each condition. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: l . Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Before any waterproofing work is started the waterproofing applicator shall thoroughly examine all surfaces for any deficiencies. a. Verify concrete surface to receive waterproofing to be sound. Verify wood float or fine broom finish, free of fins, ridges, voids or entrained air holes. b. Verify concrete surface is thoroughly clean, dry and free of curing compound membrane or other surface contaminates or cleaning residue that may harmfully affect the adhesion of the membrane. c. Verify surfaces at cold joints are on the same plane. d. Verify voids, rock pockets and excessively rough surfaces have been repaired with approved non - shrink grout or ground to match the unrepaired areas. e. Drains: Verify drain installation ready for waterproofing installation. Verify proper two -stage drain type with a minimum 3 inch flange and installed with the flange flush and level with the concrete surface. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. RDAI 2363.00 07142 -3 3.02 PREPARATION AND DETAILING A. Coordinate waterproofing work with other trades. The applicator shall have sole right of access to the specified areas for the time needed to complete the application. B. Protect adjoining surfaces not to be waterproofed against damage or soiling. Protect plants, vegetation and animals that might be affected by waterproofing operations. C. Cleaning: 1. Remove concrete fins and projections greater than 0.13 inch in height, concrete splatter, general surface dirt and other foreign materials to leave surfaces in generally clean condition suitable for application of membrane. 2. Clean surfaces with high - pressure air to remove dust, loose stones and debris. 3. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants that,may adversely affect adhesion or performance of coating system and apply detail coat. D. Patching: Patch honeycomb and irregular surfaces of concrete greater than' /2 inch in depth. Patch with non - shrink grout, concrete or epoxy grout in accordance with Section 03325. E. Expansion, Control, and Construction Joints: Clean, prime, fit with backer rod and fill with sealant. Apply a thin film of primer 16 inches wide, centered over sealed joints. F. Cracks: Rout or sawcut cracks exceeding 1/] 6" in width and fill with sealant. Apply a thin film of primer 16 inches wide, centered over sealed cracks. G. Projections: Fill slot around projection with backer rod and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's standard details. Strip -coat with 60 -mil dry film thickness for a width of not less than six inches around projection. H. Apply 90 mils of membrane to cover primed areas. 3.03 FLASHING A. Install a 12 -inch wide strip of CCW- 711 -90 centered over joints and cracks greater than 1/ 16 inch in width. B. Flashing Method: 1. Apply primer at the juncture of all horizontal surfaces and vertical surfaces to the height indicated on the' Drawings (8" min.), such as parapet walls, curbs, columns and all penetrations through the deck at a rate of 400 -600 sq. ft. per gallon. Avoid puddles. 2. Allow primer to dry for 1 -hour minimum, 8 hours maximum. 3. Apply 90 mils of waterproofing membrane to cover primed areas. 4. Install 90 mil sheet membrane flashing or uncured neoprene flashing into this first course of waterproofing to cover the vertical section and extend 6- inches onto deck surface. 5. Completely cover all flashing material during installation of the subsequent layers of waterproofing membrane. C: Install EPDM flashings in exposed areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean and prime EPDM with splice cement prior to application of waterproofing membrane. RDAI 2363.00 07142 -4 3.04 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply primer to all surfaces and at the juncture of all horizontal surfaces and vertical surfaces, to the height indicated on the Drawings (8" min.), such as parapet walls, curbs, columns and all penetrations through the deck, to receive waterproofing membrane, including over flashings, at a rate of 400 -600 sq. ft. per gallon. Avoid puddles. Allow primer to dry for t -hour minimum, 8 hours maximum. C. Heat membrane blocks in a twin wall kettle with continuous agitation. Do not exceed maximum safe operating temperature of 400 degrees F. D. Apply heated hot applied membrane to primed area and pre - installed flashings as required to obtain an average thickness of 90 mils. E. Apply reinforcing cloth and any required flashings while membrane is still warm and tacky. Cut and trim off any wrinkles or overlap sections of the reinforcing fabric. F. Apply a second coat of hot applied membrane as required to obtain an average thickness of 125 mils. Total thickness of the system shall be 215 mils. G. Curing: Cure membrane minimum 24 hours before flood testing and backfilling. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flood Test: Flood test for 24 hours. 1. Allow membrane to cool. Plug drains and provide barriers necessary to contain floodwater. 2. Water Depth: Minimum 2 inches but not greater than structural capacity of structural deck or supporting structure. Consult with Structural Engineer. 3. Inspect for leaks and repair membrane if leaks are found when membrane is dry. 4. Repeat test until membrane is leak free. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection Board: Apply according to manufacturer's recommendations immediately after flood testing on horizontal surfaces. If flood testing is delayed, install a temporary covering to protect the membrane from damage by other trades.. D. Drainage Composite: Install over protection board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.07 CLEANING A. Maintain work area in a neat and orderly condition, removing empty containers, rags, and rubbish daily from the site. B. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Remove foreign matter from finished membrane surface. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07142 -5 SECTION 07184 EQUIPMENT ROOM DECK COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Waterproof coating on concrete floors and curbs of all above -grade mechanical spaces. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Floor Slabs: Section 03320. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current product literature and technical data. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 600. 2. Applicator Qualifications: Submit document stating manufacturer's acceptance of subcontractor as an Approved Applicator for the specified materials. 3. Submit letter from coating manufacturer approving specified concrete floor slab curing compound. See Section 03320. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Maintenance instructions and recommendations. 2. Warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company regularly engaged in manufacture of material for five years. 2. Applicator: Manufacturer approved company specializing in application of waterproofing deck coatings. a. Office: Within 100 miles of Project. b. Experience: Company that has continuously installed fluid applied traffic toppings in the state of Colorado for five years. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened, undamaged containers and store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Before beginning work, the area shall be warm, dry and well ventilated. R DAI 2363.00 07184 -1 2. During cold weather, maintain substrate temperature at a minimum of 55 degrees F. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Cure concrete a minimum of 28 days prior to application. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide five year written warranty covering materials and installation for coating in accordance with Section 01780. Warranty shall include watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Incorporated, Sapulpa, OK, 800/338 -8701; www.carlisle- ccw.com 2. ChemRex, Inc.; www.chemrex.com 3. Tamms Industries; www.tamms.com 4. Tremco, www.tremcosealants.com 5. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 WATERPROOF EQUIPMENT ROOM DECK COATING A. Acceptable Materials: 1. Carlisle Mechanical /Equipment Room System CCW -5113. a. Base Coat: CCW -501. b. Top Coat: CCW -503. 2. Carlisle CCW -5413 Zero VOC 100% Solids Pedestrian /Mechanical Room System. 3. Sonneborn Sonoshield Conipur II Deck Coating System. 4. Tamms Duraldeck System. 5. Tremco Vulkem 350/351 [NF low odor /no VOC] pedestrian deck coating system. 6. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning application. a. Verify concrete is smooth and dry, free of loose or deteriorated material, and properly prepared for application of coating. Verify curing compound, if used, has sufficiently dissipated. Verify absence of detrimental vapor emission from slab. Coordinate with Section 03320. b. Verify steel form deck to be properly vented. c. Application shall not begin until the installer is familiar with existing subfloor conditions. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. RDAI 2363.00 07184 -2 B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjacent areas against damage or staining from deck covering operations. B. Joints and Cracks: 1. Saw cut cracks greater than 1/16 -inch wide to' /4 -inch wide by' /4 -inch deep. 2. Sweep all joints and saw cut cracks clean of debris and dust. 3. Prime, fit with backing rod, and seal all joints and saw cut cracks with non -sag polyurethane sealant. Tool sealant flush in joints up to 1 /2-inch wide, slightly concave in larger joints. C. Angle Changes, Walls, Curbs and Other Projections: Apply a one -inch face, 45- degree cant of sealant. D. Allow sealants to cure thoroughly before proceeding with detailing and coating application. E. Surface must be free of dust, curing compounds, surface contaminants and standing wash. Remove surface contaminants with diluted acid if necessary. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Primer: Apply primer to all concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Detailing: 1. Apply 6 -inch wide, 30 mil thick detail coat centered over all sealant cants, sealed cracks, control joints, and cold joints. Feather terminating edges. 2. Joints Between Dissimilar Materials: Apply detail coat and reinforcing fabric as recommended by coating manufacturer. C. Apply base coat and top coat uniformly and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with silica sand aggregate embedded in top coat. Backroll to encapsulate the sand. 1. Allow base coat to cure at least 24 hours at 75 degrees F before applying top coat. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CURING Restrict all traffic until materials are fully cured, minimum 48 hours. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07184 -3 SECTION 07185 TRAFFIC DECK SEALANT AND WATERPROOFING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protective Concrete Sealer for the Following Surfaces: a. New concrete traffic deck. b. New concrete slabs -on- grade, concrete paving, curbs, walks, islands and pour strips inside the parking structure (not including enclosed rooms). 2. Concrete control joint sealant system. Related Sections: 1. Pavement Marking: Section 02765. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single Contract Responsibility: It is the intent of this section of these specifications that a single installer be responsible for providing a complete sealant and waterproofing system designed to minimize the occurrence of common sealant, waterproofing and concrete deterioration problems. In order to obtain these objectives, all measures called for in these specifications will be rigorously enforced. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Make submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 and as specified herein. 2. Submit reviewed shop drawings to all others whose work is related. 3. Submit five copies of snow removal guidelines for areas covered by the guarantee. Protective Concrete Sealer System: 1. Submit written computations to the Architect of material quantities to be applied to concrete surfaces at least two weeks prior to sealer application. 2. Submit proposals for alternate application methods to the Architect at least two weeks prior to sealer application. C. Concrete Control Joint Sealant System: 1. Submit: a. Materials samples. b. Installation plans and large scale details. c. Any other information necessary to show placement of control joint system 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. One month prior to construction, provide written certification to the Architect that the system installer is approved by such system manufacturer. RDAI 2363.00 07185 -1 2. Materials shall be compatible with the materials of related work with which they come into contact and with the materials covered by this section. B. Protective Concrete Sealer: 1. Manufacturer shall provide a complete system of compatible materials designed to produce a protective sealer. 2. Upon request, manufacturer shall furnish a sample of the materials to be used on this project to the Owner for spectrographic analysis. 3. Upon request, furnish additional samples, one for each 100 gallons of materials used, to the Owner as the sealer is installed. Designate the lot and batch number from which each sample is taken and identify the bay and tier where sampled batch is applied. All samples may be sent to the testing agency for spectrographic comparison with the original sample to verify that the material installed on this project is the same as that submitted initially by the manufacturer as a standard. 4. The sealer shall be applied to this project at the same rate used to pass the NCHRP 244 test. However, Article 3.03, BS of this specification must also be met. If both requirements cannot be met simultaneously with a single application rate the sealer will be rejected. C. Concrete Control Joint Sealant System: 1. Review and approve joint details prior to construction. 2. Coordinate the layout of the joint system and approve the methods for providing the joints with the precast concrete and concrete contractors. 3. Inspect site and precast plant prior to precast production to insure proper joint configuration. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to site in original, unopened containers, bearing the following information: 1. Name of product. 2. Name of manufacturer. 3. Date of preparation. 4. Lot or batch number. Store materials under cover and protect from the weather. Replace packages or materials showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to the Owner 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty applies to all materials covered in this section except the protective concrete sealer. B. Furnish the Owner with a written total responsibility guarantee that the system will be free of defects, water penetration and chemical damage related to system design; workmanship or material deficiency, consisting of: 1. Any adhesive or cohesive failures. 2. Weathering. 3. Surface crazing (does not apply to traffic topping protection course). 4. Abrasion or tear failure resulting from normal traffic use. C. If the material surface shows any of the defects listed above, supply labor and material to repair all defective areas and to repaint all damaged line stripes. RDAI 2363.00 07185 -2 D. The guarantee period shall be three years commencing with the date of acceptance of the work. E. Perform any repair under this guarantee at no cost to the Owner. F. Prior to construction, provide the Architect with a sample of the final guarantee. G. Snowplows, vandalism, abnormally abrasive maintenance equipment, spinning studded snow tires, truck traffic and construction traffic are not normal traffic use and are exempted from the warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Protective Concrete Sealer: For existing and new concrete surfaces below top level shall be Class 5: 1. Approved Protective Concrete Sealers: a. "Isoflex 611 U.V.S:' by Harry S. Peterson Companies, Pontiac, Michigan (2 coats at 400 sq. ft. /gal. per coat). b. " Hydrozo Clear 30" by Hydrozo Coatings Co., Lincoln, Nebraska (1 coat at 100 sq. ft. /gal.). c. 'TBS960A" by Tremco, Cleveland, Ohio. (1 coat at 200 sq. ft. /gal.). d. "Euco- Guard" Siloxane by the Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, Ohio (minimum application rate = 100 sq. ft. /gal.). e. "Consolideck SX" Siloxane by ProSoCo Inc., Kansas City, Kansas (minimum application rate = 1255 sq. ft. /gal.). f. Approved substitute. 2. Proposed substitutions shall conform to this section. Vendors shall submit written proof that an independent testing laboratory has tested and certified the proposed substitution as having met the following standards: a. NCHRP 244 Tests: 1) Four Inch Cube Series II: The upper limits of average weight gain and chloride content at the completion of the cube test series shall be limited to 20% of the weight gain and 20% of the net chloride content of untreated control cubes. 2) Southern Climate: The upper limit of the average chloride content at the end of the 24 week test shall be limited to: Class S: 10% of the net chloride content of the untreated control slabs. Class H: 3% of the net chloride content of untreated control cubes. b. ASTM C672 Test: 1) In part 7 use a 4% sodium chloride solution. 2) In part 8 the acceptable rating for Class S shall be "one ". B. Concrete Control Joint Sealant System: 1. Provide a complete system of compatible materials designed by the manufacturer to produce waterproof, traffic - bearing control joints as detailed on the drawings. 2. Compounds used for sealants shall not stain masonry or concrete. Aluminum pigmented compounds are not acceptable. 3. The color of sealants shall match adjacent surfaces. 4. Bond Breakers and Fillers: As recommended by the system manufacturer. 5. Primers, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, shall be used in accordance with their printed instructions. RDAI 2363.00 07185 -3 C. Sealant for Horizontal (Non -Cove) Joints: I . Traffic bearing, two- component, Type I self - leveling unmodified polyurethane sealant containing no coal tar, asphalt or other adulterants and conforming to Federal Specification TT- S- 00227E. Approved control joint sealants. . a. "Isofex 880GB" by Harry S. Peterson Companies, Pontiac, MI. b. "NR -2W' by Pecora Corp., Harlyesville, PA. c. "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant" by Sonneborn Contech, Minneapolis, Minn. d. 'THC900 /THC901" by Tremco, Cleveland, OH. e. Approved substitute. 2. Proposed substitutions shall show proof of satisfactory performance for a previous five -year period. D. Sealant for Vertical and Cove Joints: 1. Two - component, Type 11, non -sag unmodified polyurethane sealant containing no coal tar, asphalt or other adulterants and conforming to Federal Specification TT -S- 00227E. Approved control joint sealants: a. "Isoflex 882 GB or Isoflex 2000" sealant (gray) by the Harry S. Peterson Companies, Pontiac, MI. b. Tremco Dymeric By Tremco, Cleveland, OH. c. Approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine surfaces to receive the work and report immediately in writing to the Architect any deficiencies in the surface that render it unsuitable for proper execution of this work. 2. Coordinate and verify that related work meets the following requirements: a. Concrete surfaces are finished as acceptable for the system to be installed. b. Curing compounds used on concrete surfaces are compatible with the work to be installed. c. Concrete surfaces have completed the proper curing period for the system selected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protective Concrete Sealer: 1. All control joint and expansion joint work must be complete and accepted by the Architect prior to beginning protective sealer surface preparation and application. 2. This Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of all sealant materials damaged by surface preparation operations. 3. Waterblast, sandblast or mechanically clean the surfaces to be treated as specified by the sealer manufacturer prior to sealer application. 4. Equipment used during floor slab cleaning shall not exceed the height limitation of the facility and shall not exceed a 3,000 lb. axle load or vehicle gross weight of 6,000 lbs. 5. Water jet pressure of the waterblasting equipment shall have a constant pressure between 2,000 psi and 5,000 psi. Keep water jet from previously installed sealant materials. RDAI 2363.00 07185 -4 B. Concrete Control Joint Sealant System: 1. Correct unsatisfactory conditions in a manner acceptable to the installer before installing sealant system. 2. Grind joint edges smooth and straight prior to sealing. All surfaces that are to receive sealant shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned of all loose particles, laitance, dirt, dust, oil, grease or other foreign matter. Get written approval of the method from the system manufacturer prior to beginning cleaning. 3. Check preparation of substrate for adhesion or sealant. 4. Prime and seal joints according to the manufacturers directions and protect as required until sealant is fully cured. 5. Cease installation of sealant under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION /APPLICATION A. General: 1. Do all work in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and specifications including but not limited to moisture content of the substrate, atmospheric conditions (including relative humidity and temperature), coverages, mill thicknesses and texture and as shown on the drawings. B. Protective Concrete Sealer: 1. Submit manufacturer's recommended application rates in writing prior to start of sealer application. 07100, 104 B4 states the minimum rate. 2. All concrete to be treated shall be cured above 50° F. for at least 14 days before applying sealer. 3. All concrete to be treated shall be air dried for at least 72 hours (following surface wetting) at temperatures above 50° F. immediately before applying penetrating sealer system. 4. Ambient and concrete temperatures shall be 50° F. or higher during application of protective sealer. 5. Install three trial sections of the sealer to verify that treated surface is not glazing as a result of the sealer application. If application of the sealer causes glazing at the trial section, then this Contractor shall contact the sealer manufacturer to obtain written recommendations for solving the problem. This Contractor shall not proceed with sealer application following trial section applications until directed to do so in writing by the Architect. 6. Clean all surfaces affected by sealer material'overspray and repair all damage caused by sealer material overspray to adjacent construction or property at no cost to the Owner. C. Concrete Control Joint Sealant System: 1. Completely fill the joint without sagging or smearing onto adjacent surfaces. 2. Fill horizontal joints slightly recessed to avoid direct contact with wheel traffic. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07185 -5 SECTION 07187 BALCONY DECK COATING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Waterproof coating on balcony decks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for review prior to proceeding. See Section 01330. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened, undamaged containers and store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Application shall not begin until the installer is familiar with existing subfloor conditions. B. Environmental Requirements: During cold weather, maintain substrate temperature at a minimum of 55° F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL .A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tremco Manufacturing Co 2. Approved Substitute B. Acceptable Materials: 1. Tremco 350/351 Pedestrian Deck Coating System. 2. Approved Substitute C. Color: As selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface must be free of dust, surface contaminants and standing wash. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Treat joints in substrate and install flashings as required. RDAI 2363.00 07187 -1 Apply first and second coats with roller using methods recommended by manufacturer. Add non -slip aggregate to top coat. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CURING Restrict all traffic until materials are fully cured. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 07187 -2 SECTION 07194 SILOXANE WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water repellent sealer on all exposed exterior stone veneer. B. Related Sections: 1. Stone: Section 04853 Mortar - Placed Stone Assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 manufacturer's product literature and specifications. B. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 1. Submit one copy for Architect's information. 2. Maintain one copy on site until completion of water repellent application. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports. See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and specifications. 3. Proof of Purchase: Applicator shall submit copies of purchasing documents indicating products and quantities for application on this project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Waterproofing contractor with minimum 2 years experience in waterproofing applications. B. Regulatory Requirements: Product shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Job Mock Up: Apply sealer to a selected 5 -foot square area after masonry cleaning. . Confirm acceptable penetration on dense substrate surfaces. Obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealer materials in manufacturer's unopened containers and store at a temperature of at least 50° F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply if air temperature or temperature of surface to receive sealer is below 40 degrees F or above 95 degrees F. RDAI 2363.00 07194 -1 2. Do not apply in rainy conditions. B. Sequencing /Scheduling: No sealer shall be applied until cleaning work is completed and inspected and approved by the Architect. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Statement of Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Manufacturer shall warrant that product will prevent moisture penetration or seepage where applied in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Warranty period: Minimum 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ProSoCo. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Sealer: ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane PD (Predilute) or approved substitute. 1. Clear, non - staining. 2. Active Substance: Emulsion of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes. 3. Total Solids and Active Ingredients by Weight: 7 percent. 4. VOC: Less than 400 grams per liter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Examine wall surfaces following cleaning to assure conditions are satisfactory for application. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. Verify that masonry joints -found unsound, hollow or otherwise defective have been raked out and pointed with mortar. Verify that cracks that exceed 1/64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar or sealant. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray B. In hot, dry weather, apply light spray of water prior to application of sealer. RDAI 2363.00 07194 -2 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply using methods recommended by the Manufacturer. 1. Apply in two coats, saturating substrate from bottom of wall up, using low- pressure airless spray equipment. 2. Apply sufficient material to create a 4 -inch to 8 -inch rundown below the spray contact point. B. Coverage Rate: Apply at 100 to 250 square feet per gallon. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall test completed application for water penetration resistance. In case of unsatisfactory test results, reapply sealer in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer's certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of application. See Paragraph 1.02 B Quality Control Submittals. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07194 -3 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Blanket Insulation as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Section 07240. 2. Roof Insulation: Section 07538 Ballasted EPDM Membrane Roofing. 3. Sound Insulation in Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store insulation under cover to prevent weather damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens- Corning 2. Johns - Manville 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Insulation: Fiberglass blankets. 1. Thickness and R- Value: As indicated. 2. Width: As required to fit framing. 3. Facing: Unfaced. 4. Vapor Barrier: Four -mil polyethylene sheeting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. RDAI 2363.00 07210 -1 3.02 INSTALLATION s A. Blanket or Batt Insulation: Install insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations. Fit tight to adjoining work and adjoining insulation so that completely tight enclosure free from open joints, holes, cracks and voids is achieved. Attach insulation in place in manner insuring stability and to eliminate sagging. 1. Faced Blankets: Secure flanges to framing for leak free barrier. 2. Vapor Barrier: Completely cover unfaced blanket insulation on warm side. Take care to protect vapor barrier from puncture. Lap over framing and secure in place for leak free barrier. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 07210 -2 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation and finish system as indicated. 2. Finish system only at concrete masonry and concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Block Masonry: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 3. Calking: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include manufacturer's specifications and application instructions. B. Samples: Submit 2'x 2' samples of each type of color and texture for acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Factory approved and trained. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. 1. Delivery: Deliver materials in original unopened containers and store off ground and under cover. 2. Storage: Store at temperatures not less than 40 °F. 3. Storage: Protect metal accessories from rusting during storage. 4. Rusted and water damaged materials subject to rejection. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Protection: a. Do not apply materials to surfaces frozen or containing frost. Do not use frozen materials. b. If artificial heat is used, locate heater to prevent concentration of heat or fumes on finish surface. c. Do not apply if ambient temperature is less than 40 °F. Maintain this temperature 48 hours prior to application, during application, and for 24 hours after application. d. Provide temporary heat and enclosure if necessary. 2. Hot Weather Protection: Protect against uneven or excessive evaporation during dry hot weather and from strong blasts of dry air, either natural or artificial. Am , ]PAr-190 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. (Dryvit) 2. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc. (Insul- Flex /Perma -Flex) 3. Parex, Inc. 4. Pleko Systems International Inc. ( Pleko Therm) 5. Sto Industries, Inc. (STO) 6. Synergy (Senerflex) 7. TEC Specialty Products, Inc. (Ful -O -Mite) 8. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. System: Dryvit Outsulation or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Dryvit Primus /Adhesive. B. Insulation Board: i . Type: Expanded polystyrene. 2. Flame Spread: Less than 25. 3. Average Density: 1.0 lbs. /cu. ft. 4. Insulating Value: K of 0.23 per inch. 5. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 6. Insulation Manufacturer: Approved by system manufacturer. C. Reinforcing Mesh: Dryvit Standard Reinforcing Mesh. D. Finish: Dryvit acrylic based factory mixed coating with integral color and texture. Three colors required. See Exterior Finish Schedule in detail book: two (2) textures required. E. Cement: ASTM C 150 -85 Portland cement Type I. F. Water: Clear and potable. G. Sealer: Dryvit 601 or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. H. Parging Coat: 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts clean sand. I. Bonding Agent: Larsen's Plasterweld or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. RDAI 2363.00 07240 -2 B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide drapes, drop cloths and other protection required to protect adjacent surfaces from damage during finish operations. CMU Substrate: Apply skim coat of parging material over CMU and bring to an even, uniform finish to prevent telegraphing of mortar joints through finish. Where adjacent to dissimilar substrate, provide reinforcing mesh at intersection prior to apply finish. C. Concrete Substrate: All concrete surfaces to receive finish system shall be sacked to provide an even, uniform surface prior to application of finish coat. Where uneven surfaces occur, apply bonding agent and skim coat of parging material prior to finishing. At joints in concrete or where adjacent to dissimilar substrate, provide reinforcing mesh over joint prior to finishing. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation, reinforcing mesh, trim and finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Insulation: Install insulation with adhesive in running bond with joints staggered and interlocked at corners. Align edges to produce flat surfaces. Let dry 24 hours. Sand high areas to produce flat surfaces. C. Base Coat: Apply 1/16" coat of adhesive and immediately embed reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive and smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Lap mesh edges 2-1/2". Allow to dry 24 hours. 1. Provide Panzer mesh at parapets and first floor as indicated. D. Finish Coat: Apply with clean stainless trowel in continuous operation without cold joints in color and texture to match accepted sample. 1. Form to special shapes and lines as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces splattered with synthetic plaster. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07240 -3 SECTION 07272 PLASTIC SHEET WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Continuous plastic weather resistive barrier and air infiltration barrier over sheathing at all areas behind simulated stone veneer. 2. Continuous plastic weather resistive barrier and air infiltration barrier over sheathing at all areas behind wood siding. 3. Weather resistive barrier flashing around window and door opening frames. Related Sections: 1. Wood Siding: Section 07468. 2. Caulking: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review and Acceptance: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's current product data sheets describing products to be supplied with all selected options clearly identified, basic uses, composition and materials, physical properties, precautions and limitations, applicable standards, approvals, and general installation procedures. a. Include current National Evaluation Service (NES) report. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of two years experience on equivalent projects. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall have current National Evaluation Service Committee report finding that products to be provided under this section comply with or are suitable alternates to those specified in the 2003 International Building Code as water- resistive /moisture protection barriers and as air infiltration barriers, and that they comply with surface - burning characteristics required by code for these applications. 1. Installation shall comply with all conditions stipulated in report. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver in original unopened manufacturer's containers with labels intact. C. Store in way protect from damage and keep dry. RDAI 2363.00 07272 -1 1.05 SEQUENCING A. Windows: Install weather barrier flashing at window sills prior to installing window frame. 1.06 SCHEDULING Cover plastic sheet weather barrier with weather - resistive wall finish indicated within 270 days after application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC SHEET WEATHER BARRIERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. E.I. DuPont De Nemours and Company, Inc., Fibers Department, Tyvek Weatherization Systems; www.construction.tyvek.com 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Plastic Sheet Weather Barrier: ASTM El 677, Type 1 Air Retarder. 1. Acceptable Products: DuPont Tyvek CommercialWrap, Style 1162B, or accepted substitute. 2. Material: 100 percent flash spunbonded olefin manufactured from polyethylene fibers that have been bonded without binders or fillers into a sheet. C. Weather Barrier Around Window and Door Openings: 1. Types: DuPont FlexWrap and DuPont StraightFlash or accepted substitute. 2. Material: Laminate of polyethylene film, elastic fiber, adhesives, and top sheet of plastic matching plastic sheet weather barrier. D. Joint Tape: DuPont Tyvek Weatherization Tape or equal. 1. Width: 2 inches or 3 inches. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Provide large head or plastic washer head nails or screws with corrosion resistant coating. 1. Type: Tyvek WrapCaps or Wrap Cap Screws. 2. Subject to prior approval of Architect, wide staples with 1.0 inch minimum crown may also be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate prior to beginning application to ensure that previous work is free from conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Wipe surfaces to receive adhered weather barrier around windows and doors to remove moisture, dirt, grease and debris that could interfere with adhesion. RDAI 2363.00 07272 -2 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation guidelines and instructions, consistent with requirements of Project Specifications and details on Drawings. Refer apparently conflicting requirements to Architect for clarification in accordance with Section 01251. B. Sequence: Coordinate with window and door frame installations, and install in one of the following sequences at Contractor's option: I . Weather Barrier Flashing and Window and Door Frames Installed Before Weather Barrier, in Following General Sequence: a. Sill flashing. b. Window and door frame installation. c. Jamb and header flashing. d. Weather barrier over sheathing. 2. Weather Barrier Installed Before Weather Barrier Flashing and Window and Door Frames, in Following General Sequence: a. Weather barrier over sheathing. b. Sill flashing. c. Window and door frame installation. c. Jamb and header flashing. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHER BARRIER FLASHING AT WINDOW AND DOOR FRAMES A. Rectangular Window Sills: 1. Attach apron made of weather - resistive barrier under sill. Apron shall extend at least 10 inches beyond sides of rough opening jambs and far enough below the rough opening to overlap the sill plate or the weather - resistive barrier below. The sides of apron shall be securely attached to wall and the bottom of apron shall be left free to overlap with later weather- resistive barrier installation. 2. Cut sill flashing tape at least 12 inches longer than width of rough opening sill. 3. Cover horizontal sill by aligning inside edge of sill, and adhere into rough opening across sill and up jambs minimum 6 inches. Cover horizontal sill by aligning FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. 4. Fan FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press sill flashing to ensure full adhesion. Secure fanned edges with mechanical fasteners. 5. Apply continuous bead of caulk to wall or back side of window mounting flange across jambs and head, but leave bottom sill flange uncaulked. B. Install windows and doors as specified in Division 8. C. Cut two pieces of StraightFlash or FlexWrap for jamb flashing extending 1 -inch above window head flange and below bottom edge of sill flashing. Remove release paper and press tightly along sides of window frame. D. Rectangular Window and Door Heads: Cut a piece of StraightFlash or FlexWrap for head flashing to extend beyond outer edges of jamb flashings. Install completely covering mounting flange and adhering to exposed sheathing or framing members. E. Round -Top Windows and Transoms: Cut head flashing at least 12 inches longer than the arc length of round -top window. Install to conform around top of window, covering entire mounting flange and adhering to exposed sheathing or framing members. Head flashing shall overlap jamb flashings at least 6 inches. Secure outer edges of head flashing using mechanical fasteners. RDAI 2363.00 07272 -3 3.05 WEATHER BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install sheets horizontally in shingle fashion starting at bottom of wall. Unwrap roll at comer, leaving 6 -inch to 12 -inch overlap. 1. Shingle sheet over back edge of weep screed. Seal wrap with caulk or tape to weep screed. Don't block weep holes. B. Installation over Framed Walls: Secure weather resistive barrier every 12 inches to 18 inches on vertical stud line with approved mechanical fasteners. C. Unroll directly over windows and doors. Upper roll shall overlap bottom roll by 6 inches horizontally. D. Cover interface of upper and lower top plates with weather barrier sheet. E. Tape all horizontal seams at band joists, headers and roll overlaps with 2 -inch or 3 -inch Tyvek Tape. F. At Window and Door,Openings: 1. If weather barrier installed before weather barrier flashings, cut sheet at windows, fold and secure flaps at jambs and sills in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines. Cut a flap above the rough opening to expose sheathing or framing members and allow head flashing installation. Head flashing shall adhere to exposed sheathing or framing members. After installation of window or door frame and flashings, fold down sheet so it lays flat, covering head flashing. Tape all cuts in weather barrier and across head of all windows. 2. If weather barrier installed after weather barrier flashings, door and window frames, cut sheet to expose window and apron. Do not cut flashings or apron. Tape perimeter of opening and all seams. G. Repair all accidental tears, damage or penetrations with Tyvek Tape to form a leak free barrier. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07272 -4 SECTION 07315 SYNTHETIC SLATE SHAKES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Synthetic slate shakes 2. Related accessory materials. Related Sections: 1. Self- Adhering Roof Underlayment: Section 07133. 2. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review and Acceptance: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's current product data sheets describing products to be supplied with all selected options clearly identified, basic uses, composition and materials, physical properties, precautions and limitations, applicable standards, approvals, and general installation procedures. a. Include current ICC Evaluation Service (ICC -ES) report. 2. Samples: Submit 3 full size shakes illustrating color and texture for Architect's verification. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. a. Submit one copy for Architect's information. b. Maintain one copy on site until completion of underlayment installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Install shake roofing to comply with all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Shake roofing product shall have current published National Evaluation Service Committee report finding that products to be provided under this section comply with or are suitable alternates to those specified in the 2003 International Building Code and indicating ICC approval as acceptable method of construction under the IBC. a. Installation shall comply with all conditions stipulated in report. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Transport and deliver shakes on pallets and in a manner to avoid physical damage. Store off the ground and cover to prevent exposure to weather. RDAI 2363.00 07315 -1 1.05 WARRANTY A. Installer's Warranty: Provide two (2) year written warranty covering materials and installation in accordance with Section 01780. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide Manufacturer's 50 -year transferable warranty against defects in manufacture and materials. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: At completion of the work, deliver to the Owner replacement shakes in the amount of 1 percent of the total of each type of shake installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHAKES A. Acceptable Shake Manufacturers: 1. DaVinci Roofscapes, LLC., 800/328 -4624, www.davinciroofscapes.com. 2. Acceptable substitute. B. Roofing Shakes: DaVinci shakes or accepted substitute meeting all specified material and performance rating requirements. 1. Fire Resistance Rating: UL 790, Class A. 2. Impact Rating: UL 2218, Class 4. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. a. Color solid throughout. b. Color Retention Treatment: Manufacture shakes with UV inhibitors. 4. Weight: 250 pounds per square. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, No. 30 asphalt- saturated organic felt. Fasteners: Approved by FM 4470. Corrosion resistant. C. Waterproofing Underlayment: Section 07133. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Verify that work of other trades that penetrates roof deck and flashings has been completed. 2. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of application of roofing. 3. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. RDAI 2363.00 07315 -2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Layout: Layout roofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Underlayment: 1. Waterproof Membrane: See Section 07133. 2. Roofing Felt: Cover all surfaces of sheathing and waterproof underlayment with No. 30 felt prior to installation of shakes. 3.03 ROOF SHAKE INSTALLATION A. General: Install roofing products in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions and recommendations. B. Install shakes slightly staggered with maximum 10 -inch weather as indicated on the Drawings. Interweave roofing felt with each layer. C. Begin with double starter course at eave line using special starter shakes. Apply shakes with butts to the straight line starting at the eave line. Nail shakes into wood sheathing with not less than two (2) hot dipped zinc coated nails per shake. Drive nails flush but do not crush shake. Nailing guns or staples are not acceptable. D. Form hips and ridges as required using same weather as the field of the roof. 3.04 COMPLETION At completion of Project, replace warped or damaged shakes as directed by the Architect. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07315-3 SECTION 07464 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber cement vertical panel siding. 2. Fiber cement trim. 3. Fiber cement soffit panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of shop finished materials on each specified material. 1. Siding: Submit three 6 inch x 6 inch pieces of siding in texture and widths shown and specified herein. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. B. Storage: Store planks and panels flat on a smooth level surface, under cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. James Hardie Building Products. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2.02 FIBER CEMENT SIDING A. Material: ASTM C 1186 Grade II, Type A. Autoclaved, non - asbestos, fiber - cement. B. Vertical Siding: Hardipanel Sierra 8 fiber- cement vertical siding. 1. Size: 4 foot by 8 foot panels, 5/16" thick. C. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant hot - dipped galvanized nails. Length sufficient to penetrate wood framing minimum of 1 inch. Type as required by NER report for applicable siding type and design wind load. D. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's PrimePlus system. RDAI 2363.00 07464 -1 2.03 FIBER CEMENT SOFFITS A. Material: ASTM C1186 Grade II, Type A. Autoclaved, non - asbestos, fiber - cement. B. Soffit Panels: HardiSoffit soffit panels by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 1. Texture: Cedarmill. 2. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's Prime Plus system. C. Fasteners: Phillips bugle head Rock -On type screws with Hi -Lo thread and corrosion resistant coating. Length sufficient to penetrate wood framing minimum of 1 inch and metal studs minimum of 3 threads. 2.04 FIBER CEMENT TRIM A. Type: Harditrim XLD 1" Smooth Planks. B. Factory Primer: PrimePlus sealer and primer. C. Thickness: 5/4 inch nominal, 1 -inch actual. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with a copy to Architect. 5. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation, General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Exterior Trim: Wherever possible, provide each length of finish in single piece. Face nail into framing using corrosion resistant casing nails. Drive flush but do not set. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 07464 -2 SECTION 07538 FULLY ADHERED EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid insulation. 2. Fully adhered EPDM single membrane roofing and base flashings. 3. Bonding adhesives, lap sealants, fasteners and other accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Roof Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 2. Perimeter Nailer: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 3. Metal Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with the following. B. ASTM International Standards: 1. ASTM C1289 -03 -Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 2. ASTM D 1079 - Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials. 3. ASTM D4637 - Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane. 4. ASTM E 108 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Reference Standards: 1. FM 4470 - Approval Standard - Class 1 Roof Covers. 2. Loss Prevention Data 1 -28 - Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement, June 1998 edition. 3. Loss Prevention Data 1 -29 - Above -Deck Roof Components, June 1998 edition. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Reference Standards: 1. UL Standard Specification 790 -Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof - covering Materials. . 2. Roof Materials and Systems Directory. 3. Fire Resistance Directory. Volume 1. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide watertight, leak free roofing system capable of withstanding thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure. B. Wind Uplift Resistance Capacity: Meet both of following criteria as a minimum 1. Provide fully adhered system meeting FM Windstorm Class 1 -90. RDAI 2363.00 07538 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications covering roofing system materials and methods proposed. Include manufacturer's standard details for seaming and flashing. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of insulation boards, individual membrane sheets and fastener spacings. 1. Include details of penetrations and perimeter. 2. Indicate flashing details. 3. Include tapered roof insulation thickness and layout. D. Samples: 1. Submit 1'-0" x 1' -0 minimum size sample of membrane. 2. Submit sample of each type of fastener proposed for installation. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Credentials: Prior to starting the roofing, submit credentials from roofing manufacturer of applicator approval. 2. Wind Uplift Report: Submit copies of testing reports indicating roofing system has been tested and approved for wind uplift criteria specified. 3. Fastener Certification: Manufacturer's certification identifying maximum uplift pressure resisted by fastener when tested in accordance with FM 4470. 4. Design and Specification Approval: Submit Drawings, this Section, related Sections, and proposed roofing and insulation system to Manufacturer for review prior to submittal of shop drawings. Prior to starting roofing, submit a signed statement by membrane manufacturer that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project. 5. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit one copy for Architect's information. Maintain one copy on site until completion of roofing system installation. F. Quality Control Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01450. 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: a. Submit written report from manufacturer's representative after inspection of roof deck to verify deck is satisfactory for installation of system. b. Submit additional report indicating roof has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Record of Work: Submit written records indicating temperature and moisture conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations. 2. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing manufacturer licensed installer. B. Fire Resistance Requirements: 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. RDAI 2363.00 07538 -2 2. Internal Fire Resistance Rating: Strictly comply with detailed requirements of UL fire rated roof assembly listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory as referenced on Drawings. C. FM Listing: Membrane, base flashings and other components of system shall meet FM 4470 as part of roofing system listed in FMRC Approval Guide for Class 1 for noncombustible construction, as applicable. D. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Before beginning roofing installation, hold conference with General Contractor's Superintendent, roofing contractor, roofing manufacturer's representative, and metal flashing contractor's foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance. 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to roof system installation, including detailing, preparation, coordination between trades, installation techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: 1. Membrane Sheets 20 Feet to 30 Feet in Width: Deliver non - reinforced membrane sheets to site with single fold. C. Handling: Handle insulation and rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends. D. Storage: 1. Store off the ground and keep covered with waterproof covering. Materials that become wet will be subject to rejection. 2. Store all materials in a dry area and at a temperature between 60 degrees and 80 degrees F. 3. Replace damaged materials. 4. Do not leave insulation exposed to weather. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not expose membrane and accessories to d constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees F. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations during cold weather. 3. Adhesive Application: Temperature shall be minimum 40 degrees F and rising. B. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a manufacturer's written total system warranty against defects in materials and workmanship in roofing system for a period of ten (10) years in accordance with Section 01780. RDAI 2363.00 07538 -3 B. Submit contract documents to Manufacturer for review and verification of Manufacturer's minimum warranty requirements prior to submittal of shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable EPDM Sheet Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle SynTec, Inc. 2. Firestone Building Products Company. 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. Acceptable Roofing Systems: 1. Carlisle SynTec Inc. Sure -Seal FR fully adhered EPDM system. 2. Firestone Rubbergard EPDM Fully- Adhered System. 3. Approved substitute by accepted manufacturer. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. EPDM Sheet Material: ASTM D4637, Type 1. Vulcanized elastomeric terpolymer of ethylene, propylene and diene. 1. Thickness, Grade and Class: 60 mils, nominal, Grade 1 and Class U, unreinforced. 2. Non - Reinforced EPDM Sheet Size: 25 -foot maximum width by 100 foot maximum length. 2. Sheet Size: 10 -foot maximum width by 100 foot maximum length of seamless sheet. No factory splices. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. B. Sure -Seal System and RubberGard System Materials: 1. Membrane: Carlisle Sure -Seal EPDM Classic FR or Firestone Rubbergard FR, non - reinforced, .060" minimum thickness, black EPDM rubber sheet. 2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water -based bonding adhesive. a. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): Maximum 50 grams VOC's per liter. 3. Splicing Cement: Roof membrane Manufacturer's standard product. a. Carlisle Splicing Cement. b. Firestone SA -1065 Splice Adhesive. 4. Splice Cleaner, Lap Sealant, In -seam Sealant, Water Cut -offs and Miscellaneous Accessory Materials: Roof membrane Manufacturer's standard products. 5. Pre - cleaned Membrane: Contractor's option. 2.03 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide insulation board and fastening system approved and fully warrantable by roofing manufacturer for use with fully adhered single ply membrane system. B. System Description: Roofing insulation system shall be multiple layers of rigid isocyanurate mechanically fastened to structural steel deck. 1. Provide factory- tapered rigid isocyanurate crickets over flat insulation to provide slopes indicated. C. Isocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 1289. Isocyanurate foam core with fibrous mat facers or glass reinforced foil facers. RDAI 2363.00 07538 -4 I . Provide insulation of manufacturer and type approved by roofing membrane manufacturer and consistent with roof system fire resistance criteria specified in Part 1. 2. Facers: Glass reinforced scrim. D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory- tapered rigid isocyanurate or perlite crickets to provide consistent surface slopes indicated. 1. Minimum slope 1/4 inch per foot and maximum ' / 2 inch per foot to drains. E. Insulation Fasteners: Fully coated with manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer paint for corrosion resistance. Provide type approved by FM 4470 and warrantable by manufacturer for roofing insulation and wind uplift criteria. 2.04 FLASHING A. Flashing: Carlisle Sure -Seal or Firestone Rubbergard, 0.060" thick, or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. 1. Walls, Parapets and Curbs: Cured EPDM membrane flashing with reinforced securement strip. 2. Metal Edging: Cured or semi -cured EPDM membrane flashing as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Penetrations, Corners and Other Locations Where Flashing Membrane Must Be Formed: Elastoform uncured neoprene. 4. Provide cured and uncured flashing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's standard flashing details. Cant Strips: ASTM C208, Class 2. High- density wood fiber manufactured cant strip approved by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that work of other trades that penetrates roof deck has been completed. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness that would prevent the execution and quality of application of roofing system as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. Acceptance: Do not proceed until the surface to be covered is acceptable. Beginning of work means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces: Dry and broom clean before beginning work. Clean roof drains and collection boxes as indicated and reset if drains and boxes are not at the proper level to drain the finished roof. Protection. Protect paving and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Lap suitable protective materials at least 6 ". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work. RDAI 2363.00 07538 -5 3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install rigid boards in multiple layers with joints offset in each direction. B. Joints in insulation boards shall be 1/4" or less in width. Install no more insulation at one time than will be protected from rain or snow by installation of roofing membrane on the same day or prior to storm. Install temporary water cutoffs at completion of each day's work and remove upon resumption of work. C. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered insulation top layer in accordance with accepted shop drawings. Attach to insulation layer with adhesive as required to prevent shifting or blow -off prior to placement of membrane. D. Mechanically fasten insulation to steel deck as required to meet specified wind uplift requirements and in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.04 EPDM MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install membrane fully adhered over insulation. Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. B. Membrane Bonding: Install membrane in manner that allows temporary sealing on down -slope surface at end of each workday. 1. Unroll membrane and remove backing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Position membrane with clean side down at location where it will be adhered. 3. Fold sheet back past factory seam to expose half of sheet. 4. Apply membrane - bonding cement to substrate only at rate and using methods recommended by the manufacturer 5. Allow adhesive to dry to tacky stage and roll folded half of membrane evenly into adhesive. 6. Brush or roll bonded half of sheet to fully bond sheet to substrate. 7. Repeat bonding procedure with other half of sheet. C. Tape Splicing: 1. Clean and dry surfaces to be spliced with cleaning agents and wipes recommended by manufacturer. Apply primer. 2. Form splices in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply tape to bottom membrane sheet. Press tape onto sheet using hand pressure. 3. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch. 4. Roll splices to fully bond laps. 5. Install a 6 -inch wide section of Pressure - Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform Flashing over all field splice intersections and overlapped tape ends and seal edges with Lap Sealant. D. Perimeter Attachment: Secure with manufacturer's recommended mechanical fasteners and rubber nailing strips at roof perimeter and roof penetration curbs and nailers. E. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods, materials and details recommended by the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals R DAI 2363.00 07538 -6 where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturers standard details. F. Terminations: Make terminations according to manufacturer's standard details and as indicated. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to manufacturer's specifications and details. B. Record of Work: Keep a record indicating temperature and moisture conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations. Submit in accordance with submittals article in Part 1. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07538 -7 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sections Includes: 1. Flashing and Counterflashing 2. Parapet Flashing Cap 3. Gutters With Downspouts 4. Pourable Sealer Pockets 5. Other sheet metal flashing related to the above, indicated on the drawings and not specified elsewhere. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking and Nailers: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Roofing and Filling Pourable Sealer Pockets: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 3. Sheet Metal Roofing and Flashing Associated with Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing. C. Related Requirements: 1. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," latest edition, as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include: 1. Overall layout of sheet metal work. 2. Type, thickness, and details of sheet metal components. 3. Joints, expansion joints, attachment and anchoring of sheet metal components. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. s 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Comply with: 1. Wind Resistance: Factory Mutual Class 1 -90. B. Pre - Installation Conference: Attend conference with roofing installer, roofing manufacturer's representative, General Contractor and Architect in accordance with Sections 01600 and 07538. V1lllE►fitY- KI.01 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for sheet metal in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Include that system shall be watertight and weatherproof. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Galvanized Iron: ASTM A526 commercial quality sheet steel, ASTM A653, G90 commercial hot -dip galvanizing. Provide gages as indicated and specified, 24 gage minimum. 1. Finish: Mill phosphatized for painted finish under Section 09900. B. Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled temper, weighing not less than 16 oz. per square foot. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIAL A. Clips or Cleats: Same material and gage as sheet metal being installed. B. Nails and Fasteners: Hard copper, brass or bronze nails shall be flat head, barbed wire slating nails, not less than NO. 12 gauge, one inch long. C. Screws and Bolts: Round heads D. Roofing Felt: ASTM D266, # 15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Building Paper: Resin sized unsaturated paper weighing six pounds per 100 square feet. F. Solder: ASTM B32, composition 50% tin and 50% lead. Use muriatic acid killed with zinc or soldering flux. G. Sealant: Approved type of polyurethane; see Section 07920. Roofers mastic is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Examine surfaces to receive flashing or sheet metal. Surfaces shall be smooth, sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. RDAI 2363.00 07600 -2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections. Verify placement of wood blockings, inserts, nailing strips, cants, etc. Coordinate with Section 07538. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 423. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, workmanship and details shall comply with NRCA Manual, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, and FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49. Edges: 1. Edges: Hem all exposed edges, 1/2" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Drips: Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drips. 7' C. Joints: Make joints watertight and allow for expansion. I . Reinforce sheet metal corners as required. 2. Reinforcement: Conceal within finished assembly. 3. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. D. Fastenings: Use concealed hook strips and fasteners. Exposed hook strips and fasteners not acceptable. E. Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction and building movement in completed work. 2. Make watertight and weathertight throughout. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide expansion joints at maximum of 20 feet and not more than 4 feet from corners. Seal joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07920. 3.04 SHEET METAL A. Flashing and Counterflashing: As detailed of 16 oz. copper. Lock and solder joints and hem exposed edges. B. Parapet Flashing Cap: As detailed of 16 oz. copper similar to SMACNA Figure 3 -1. Cover blocking with roofing felt. Miter, seam and seal corners. Use Figure 3 -2, Alternate No. 4 seams, sealed. C. Gutters With Downspouts: 1. Gutters: As detailed of 20 oz. copper. Lock and solder joints and hem exposed edges. 2. Downspouts: As detailed of 20 oz. copper similar to SMACNA Figure 1 -32 E with brackets similar to Figure 1 -35B located 8' -0" max. o.c. 07600 -3 D. Pourable Sealer Pockets: Provide where several or irregular shaped items penetrate roofing membrane as required. Fabricate of 24 gage galvanized iron as indicated, approved by roofing manufacturer and similar to SMACNA Figure 4 -16E. Seam and seal joints. Hem edges. Pocket filled under Section 07538. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07600 -4 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam copper sheet metal roofing. 2. Adjacent flashings at eaves, gables, ridges, top of slope, etc. B. Related Section: 1. Plywood Deck: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Galvanized Iron Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1993 edition as published by Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate panel layout, flashings, accessories and attachments. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in installation of metal roofs. 1. Experience: Continuously installed copper roofing in State Colorado for five years 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. B. Deliver and store panels and accessories in dry place to avoid condensation and contact with materials that might cause staining, such as lime, cement, fresh concrete or chemicals. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. RDAI 2363.00 07610 -1 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide five year written warranty covering materials and installation for metal roofing system in accordance with Section 01780. I; . "A 19 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Copper: ASTM B370 -84a, cold rolled temper, weighing not less than 16 ounces per square foot. B. Underlayment: See Section 07133. C. Building Paper: Resin sized unsaturated paper weighing six pounds per 100 square feet. D. Accessory Material: 1. Flashing Caps and Fascias: Match roofing system. 2. Nails and Fasteners: Hard copper, brass or bronze nails shall be flat head, barbed wire slating nails, not less than No. 12 gauge, one inch long. 3. Screws and Bolts: Round heads. 4. Clips or Cleats: Same material and gage as sheet metal being installed. 5. Solder: ASTM B32, composition 50% tin and 50% lead. Use muriatic acid killed with zinc or soldering flux. 6. Sealant: Polyurethane in accordance with Section 07920. Roofers mastic is not allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Surfaces: Smooth, sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. B. Underlayment: Apply to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. See Section 07133. C. Building Paper: Cover underlayment with layer of building paper with copper nails spaced 18" o.c. along lapped seams. RDAl2363.00 07610 -2 3.03 STANDING SEAM COPPER ROOFING A. General: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, comply with workmanship and details of Reference Standards. 1. Roofing Type: Construct in accordance with "Standing Seam Roofing" standard details and specifications for slopes of three inches to six inches per foot. 2. Roofing Pans: Constructed of 120" long panels with standing seams 16 -3/4" o.c. as indicated. 3. Start erection of panels so sheets may be held true to line. Hold horizontal lines straight and level and vertical lines plumb. 4. Exposed fasteners not allowed. Insulation: Where copper sheet metal work joins other types of metal, separate two metals by lead insulation or other equally effective method of preventing electrolysis. C. Cleating and Fastening: 1. Fasten pieces over 12" wide by cleats about 3/4" from end. Turn end back to cover nail heads. Lock free end of cleat into seam or folded edge of piece. Where seams are soldered, tin cleats. 2. Cleats: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, 16 -ounce copper, spaced not more than 12" apart. 3. Secure pieces up to 12" wide by nails placed along one edge only and spaced not more than 4' apart. 3. Provide edge strips at eaves and closures. 4. Provide expansion type as required for seams over 30 feet long. D. Standing Seams: 1" high. Soldered Seams: Where soldered seams are necessary, construct in manner consistent with good trade practice for soldering of copper. After soldering, clean off flux stains with solution of soap and 5% to 10% washing soda. END OF SECTION R DAI 2363.00 07610 -3 SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatches. 2. Snow guards. B. Related Sections: 1 Low Slope Roofing Section 07538 Ballasted EPDM Membrane Roofing. N 3. Snow Fences: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current catalog literature for each product supplied under this Section. Indicate details, accessories and attachments. 1. Snow Guards: Submit Manufacturer's Engineered Layout Charts. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Snow Guards: Submit drawing indicating layout. C. Samples: Submit 3 full size snow guard samples. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Supply to Owner 10 extra snow brackets at the completion of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCH A. Manufacturers: 1. Bilco. 2. Babcock Davis. 3. Inryco 4. O'Keeffe's Inc. 5. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Description: Bilco Type 55, 34 inches x 48 inches, paint bond galvanized steel. 1. Safety Post: Bilco Ladder -Up Safety Post. RDAI 2363.00 07720 -1 2.02 SNOW GUARDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. TRA - Tile Roof Accessories, American Fork, Utah, 801 /756-8666, www.trasnowbrackets.com. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Snow Brackets: TRA Snow Bracket 1. Length: As required for specified concrete the to ensure that the downward snow load is over the head lap of the roofing product. 2. Material and Finish: 16 gauge powder coated paintlock steel. C. Snow Brackets For Metal Roofing: TRA Snow Bracket I. 1. Length: 9'/2 inches. 2. Material and Finish: Copper. D. Caulking: One of the following. 1. Dow Corning 790 and 791. 2. Sika Sikaflex 151-M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Roof Accessories: Securely install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce watertight assembly in coordination with roofing installer. 1. Coordinate installation of components of this Section with installation of roofing materials and base flashings. 2. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cements with work of this section to ensure water tightness. B. Snow Brackets: 1. Brackets Per Roofing Square: Install per manufacturer's engineering layout charts based upon the design snow load, the roof slope and the sheathing thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. Snow Bracket Layout Pattern: Layout per manufacturer's staggered pattern at locations indicated on Drawings. 3. Install snow brackets vertically over the field tile. 4. With lug over the horizontal batten, secure the spike into the batten by pulling down on the triangle end. a. Do not to damage the underlayment with the angled piece at the uphill end. b. The flat piece at the uphill end shall lay flat on the underlayment. 5. Continue with the installation course by course, placing the snow brackets on the roof as shown on the layout design. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07720 -2 SECTION 07730 FALL ARREST SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fall arrest system on roof including cables and support brackets. B. Related Sections: 1. Lanyards, Lanyard Couplers, Harnesses and other accessories: By Owner. 2. Blocking in Roof for Bracket Supports: See Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Standards. B. American National Standard Institute Inc. (ANSI). 1. A 10.14 Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, Lifelines, and Drop Lines for Construction and Industrial Use. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: System engineered by the manufacturer to resist all required or anticipated loads, including size and type of support bracket blocking in the roof. The Fall Protection System shall allow the user to walk uninterrupted the entire length of the system and provide secure anchorage to arrest a fall by the user. All essential components shall be included as part of the above referenced system, though not specifically stated, so as to provide a complete and fully operational system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and product information for manufactured materials and products. 2. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and erection. Include plans, member profiles, sizes, elevations, and details for anchorages and connections. 3. Maintenance Manual: Indicating parts list and maintenance requirements for all equipment. 4. Operations Manual: Indicating proper procedures and equipment for safe operation of the system. 5. Experience Information: Including type of Fall Protection System, location and date of installation, and owner's name and address. 6. Test Certificate: Indicating completion of proof load testing on installed system. RDAI 2363.00 07730 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FALL ARREST SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Preferred Safety Products, Inc., 4785 Erati Street, Suite 15, Denver, Colorado 80216. Tel: 800/301 -3188. 2. Approved substitute. B. Description: Man Safe Fall Arrest System including stainless steel cable and brackets with tension adjustment capabilities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine support blocking before beginning installation to determine proper size and installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation by manufacturer according to accepted Shop Drawings. Coordinate with installation of roofing and waterproofing. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. By manufacturer. Manufacturer will issue a certificate of acceptance upon completion. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 07730 -2 SECTION 07810 APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sprayed fireproofing at structural steel. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 2. Gypsum Wallboard Fireproofing: Section 09261 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls and Section 09262 Gypsum Board Ceilings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Spray fireproofing material onto structural members as indicated on drawings with proper thickness and densities to provide fire resistive ratings as indicated and scheduled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Test Reports: Certified test reports from independent testing laboratories indicating conformance to performance characteristics specified. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in sprayed fireproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied fireproofing in State of Colorado for three years. B. Regulatory Requirements - Sprayed Fireproofing: Tested by UL or other certified testing agency in accordance with E119 -83. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Deliveries: Deliver fireproofing material in original unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer, brand and proper UL labels for fire hazard and fire resistance classifications. 2. Storage: Keep material dry until ready for use. Store packages of material off ground under cover and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces. RDAI 2363.00 07810 -1 Discard bags that have been exposed to water before use. Rotate stock of material and use before its expiration date. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Maintain temperature and enclosure conditions as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. Maintain minimum air and substrate temperature of 40 °F for 24 hours before and after application of fireproofing. 2. Ventilation: Make provisions for ventilation to properly dry fireproofing after application. In enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation, provide air circulation and ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for fireproofing in accordance with Section 01700. 1. Warranty: Include fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation, and blistering. Reinstall and repair such defects and failures. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequencing: 1. Ensure clips, hangers supports, sleeves, and other attachments to fireproofing bases, provided under other sections of specifications are installed prior to application of sprayed fireproofing. 2. Ensure ducts, piping, conduit, and other suspended equipment that interfere with uniform application of fireproofing material is positioned after application of sprayed fireproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIREPROOFING A. Manufacturer and Type: W.R. Grace & Company Monokote cementitious type, U.S. Minerals CAFCO Blazeshield or accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 1. Fireproofing: Formulated without asbestos. 2. Bond Strength: ASTM E736 -80, Minimum 200 lbs. /sq. ft. 3. Bond Impact: ASTM E760 -80, no cracking, flaking or delamination. 4. Compressive Strength: ASTM E761 -80, Greater than 500 lbs. /sq. ft. 5. Deflection: ASTM E759 -80, does not crack. 6. Air Erosion: ASTM E859 -82, Less than 0.025 gms. /sq. ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation to see that steel is acceptable to receive fireproofing. Steel shall be free of oil, grease, loose mill scale or any other coating or substance that may impair proper adhesion. RDAI 2363.00 07810 -2 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to receive fireproofing of rust, loose dirt, grease, oil or any materials which prevent good adhesion. 1. Remove incompatible materials that affect bond. B. Protection: Mask off adjacent areas not receiving fireproofing to protect from overspray. Provide drop cloths as required to protect materials below. 1. Ductwork, Piping and Conduit: Close off and seal openings to prevent infiltration by fireproofing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply sprayed fireproofing in accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply to thicknesses required to achieve specified fire rating. C. Patching: Patch and repair damaged sprayed fireproofing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Fireproofing contractor shall select and pay independent testing laboratory to sample and verify thickness and density of fireproofing in accordance with ASTM E605 -77 "Standard Test Method for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members" or Uniform Building Code Standard No. 7 -6, 'Thickness and Density Determination for Spray - Applied Fireproofing ". 1. Test Samples: Minimum of two locations per floor. B. Inspection: At completion of project prior to concealment of fireproofing. Inspect fireproofing to ensure integrity of fireproofing. Repair any damaged areas as required. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: After completion of fireproofing work, remove equipment and clean exposed surfaces of deposits of sprayed fireproofing materials. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Fireproofing: Locations 1. Columns and Bracing 2. Primary Members 3. Secondary Members END OF SECTION UL Fire Rating One hour One hour One hour RDA[ 2363.00 07810 -3 SECTION 07840 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY FIRESTOPPING A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping and Smokeseals as indicated on the Drawings as well as the following areas: a. All openings in fire -rated floors and walls both empty and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, cable trays, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. b. Openings at each floor level in shafts or stairwells. c. Elsewhere as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Cast -In -Place Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Unit Masonry: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 3. Gypsum Drywall Partitions and Ceilings: Sections 09263 and 09264. 4. Joint Sealers: Section 07920. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Division 15 and 16. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Types of firestop to be used for each condition shall be the responsibility of the installer and shall comply with all specified regulatory requirements. Firestop materials in exposed areas shall be compatible with specified finishes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's printed product data indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria for each product proposed for use. Installation Instructions: Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of firestop required by the project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firestopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Regulatory Requirements: Firestopping materials proposed for use on this project shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E -814 or UL 1479 firetests. The F rating and T rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.03 inches of water column. RDAI 2363.00 07840 -1 C. Mockup: Prepare job mock -up of each system proposed for use in the project as directed by Architect. Approved mock -ups may be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the standard for remaining work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages fully identified with Manufacturer's name, trade name and UL label. B. Materials shall be stored off the ground and protected from environmental conditions as required by Manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Firestop Installer shall warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements as herein specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. The Rector Seal Corp. (Metacaulk) 2. 3M Fire Protection Products 3. Tremco Tremstop 4. Hilti Firestop Systems 5. STI Specseal 6. Nelson Firestop Products 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. B. Materials: 1. Materials shall be free of asbestos. 2. Materials shall provide a Flame (F) and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated, as tested per ASTM E -814. 3. Materials shall conform to all applicable governing codes. 4. Use pillow type firestopping or intumescent firestop blocks at large openings through fire - rated walls and floors. 5. All materials shall be compatible with the material penetrating the fire assembly. C. Accessories: Furnish all accessory materials such as fire safing batts, sleeves, sheet metal, sealants, etc. necessary to complete fire stopping systems unless furnished by others. RDAI 2363.00 07840 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: 1. Contractor shall inspect and verify that the surface and condition of the substrates and all sleeves or blockouts furnished by others have no defects or errors that would interfere with the installation of the firestopping materials. 2. Notify Architect in writing of any defects or errors in workmanship. Do not proceed with work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Acceptance: Start of installation of firestopping shall constitute the Contractor's acceptance of surfaces and conditions of substrates, sleeves and blackouts. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials that may affect the proper bond or installation of the firestops in strict accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide primers as required which conform to Manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions. C. Do not apply firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer, curing compound, water repellant or other coating unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required in compliance with Manufacturers instructions. D. Mask where necessary to protect adjoining surfaces. Remove excess material and stains on surfaces as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions to provide a Flame (F) and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. Ensure that all accessories such as anchoring devices, back -up materials, clips, sleeves, supports and other materials used in the actual fire test are installed. C. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure an effective smokeseal. D. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Frestop Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect if the firestopping systems herein specified cannot meet the requirements of the specification. B. Firestop Contractor shall examine firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this specification. RDAI 2363.00 07840 -3 C. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code authorities. D. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost. 3.05 CLEANING A. When finished work will be visible, clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. B. If visible in fhe finished work, remove temporary dams after initial cure of firestops. C. Correct staining and discoloring on adjacent surfaces. D. Remove all debris and excess materials entirely from site and leave work in a neat and clean condition. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 07840 -4 SECTION 07875 COILING CURTAIN SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Smoke containment system at each elevator hoistway door opening, all floors. B. Related Sections: 1. Elevator: Section 14240 Hydraulic Elevators. 2. Electrical Service and Smoke Detectors: Division 16 Electrical 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. 1. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke - Control Door Assemblies, 1989 edition. 2. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface - burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1013- 1988 and ICBO Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft - Control Door Assemblies. 4. UL 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's current catalog literature and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate minimum of the following. 1. Elevator lobby ceiling height. 2. Clearance above ceiling to structure. 3. Hoistway door opening width and height, door frame profile, projection from finished wall and face width, and door frame material and finish. 4. Mounting height. 5. Location of elevator position indicator, call station and signage. 6. Smoke detector connections. 7. Provide wiring diagrams. D. Certifications: Submit certification of compliance with reference standards with attached acceptance test results and other documentation required by code and governing -authorities. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable state and local codes. 1. Smoke containment system: Listed and labeled by an independent testing laboratory meeting requirements of ICBO Evaluation Service. RDAI 2363.00 07875 -1 B. Installer Qualifications: Factory trained by system manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. B. Deliver smoke containment barrier, frames and hardware cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and storage at the project site. Identify hardware which is shipped loose to assure its proper location and assembly at the project site. Keep stored materials covered and protected from damage. C. Inspect products and equipment for damage upon delivery at the project site. Minor damages may be repaired, provided that the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect, otherwise remove and replace damaged items as directed. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Smoke Guard Corporation 2. Approved Substitute B. Description: Smoke Guard Smoke Guard Containment System, model 200. 1. Film: 2 mil thick transparent polyamide plastic reinforced with 200 denier nomex yarn, meeting requirements of UL 736B. 2. Magnetic strips: Flexible, multi -pole, exerting minimum 1.4 MGOe force, attached tc each longitudinal edge of film. 3. Housing: Located above ceiling at each elevator hoistway opening. Provide hoistway jamb extensions as required. 4. Cove Base: 24 gage primed metal anchored to floor in front of hoistway door frame. 5. Rewind Switch: Spring type. 6. Rewind Motor: Locate as indicated. 12 volt DC unit powered by 120 volt AC power passing through a transformer. 7. Emergency back up: Provide 12 volt DC battery equipped with charger. 8. Release mechanism: Capable of deploying system in less than 10 seconds in accordance with UL 508. 9. Maximum Air Leakage Rate: Less than 1 cfm per square foot of opening when tested under both positive and negative pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures at a differential air pressure of 0.3 inches water column in accordance with UL 1784. 10. Cycle testing: No fatigue and full function of system after 100 cycles in accordance with ICBO standards. RDAI 2363.00 07875 -2 C. Signage: 1. Each smoke containment unit: Posted with sign warning occupants not to exit through smoke barrier. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine conditions under which smoke containment system is to be installed. 2. Verify smoke detector installation in ceiling and supply of emergency power. 3. Verify elevator hoistway door finish to be compatible with smoke containment system. 4. Verify clearances required for system. 5. Notify the General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install smoke containment system in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and recommendations, and the reviewed shop drawings, using only manufacturer's certified installers. B. Installation: On lobby side of elevator shaft plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. C. Electrical: Electrical contractor shall install switches, control wiring and make power connections to motor operations. 1. Connection to Smoke Detector: Connect to normally open auxiliary contact circuit. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation and function at every door. Lubricate moving parts with the type of lubrication recommended by the manufacturer. Replace items that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for each application. B. Cleaning: After completion of the installation work, clean exposed surfaces; touch up and refinish any minor damages to painted surfaces using matching primer. Repair or replace damaged or defective work as directed by the Architect. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of system during the final adjustment. 3.05 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Operating Test Report: Submit written report of required operations test at completion of the project. RDAI 2363.00 07875 -3 B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01780. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07875 -4 SECTION 07920 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY JOINT SEALANTS A. Section Includes: Providing all calking and sealant indicated on Drawings, specified herein, and not specified under other sections. In general, seal all openings indicated on Drawings and at other locations requiring sealant to seal visually and against infiltration from air and water, including but not limited to following: 1. Expansion joints in concrete paving and sidewalks. 2. Expansion joints and control joints in exposed interior concrete floor slabs. 3. Joints between and adjacent to precast wall panels, both above and below grade 4. Flashing reglet and retainers. 5. Exterior wall joints. 6. Masonry control joints 7. Isolation joints, between structure and other elements. 8. Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other service and equipment (excepting fire and smoke seal). 9. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 10. Joints between door and window frames and adjacent materials, exterior and interior. 11. Bedding for door thresholds. 12. Open joints between similar or dissimilar materials as required to close and conceal jointing of the work. 13. Construction and expansion joints, joints around windows, door frames, louvers, and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall; interior walls as detailed or specified. 14. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Sealants Related to Roofing: Section 07538. 2. Sealants Related to Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3. Glazing Sealants: Section 08800 Glazing. 4. Acoustical Sealants: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each material and location of application. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each type of sealant for color selection. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. RDAI 2363.00 07920 -1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in sealant application. Separate subcontractor is required. 1. Experience: Continuously installed sealants in State of Colorado for five years. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send qualified technical representative to project site, for purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in original unopened containers and store in area not subject to extreme heat or cold. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply exterior sealants during wet weather or when outside temperature is below 40 °F or apply interior sealants when inside temperature is below 60 °F. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide three year written warranty covering materials and installation for sealants in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Require installer, at no cost to Owner, to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, color retention, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified as inherent quality of material by submitted manufacturer's data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT BACKING MATERIAL A. General: Size joint backing material for minimum 30% compression when inserted in joint. Material: Round rod or semi - circular type. B. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam. 2. Sonneborn, Sonofoam. 3. Schlegel Manufacturing Company, Schlegelfoam. 4. Denver Foam. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 SEALANT MATERIAL A. Manufacturers: I . DAP Incorporated. 2. Parr, Inc. 3. I'ecora Corporation. 4. Sika Corporation RDAI 2363.00 07920 -2 5. Sonneborn Building Products. 6. Tremco Manufacturing Company. 7. Mameco International. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Silicone Sealant Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Dow Corning. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Acceptable Materials: 1. Interior and Under Thresholds: Latex acrylic, ASTM C834-00e 1. 2. Exterior: Two - component polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, non -sag. 3. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4. Sealant at Concrete Paving and Interior Floor Slabs: Two - component self - leveling polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, pourable type. 5. Sealant at Lavatories, Tubs and Showers: Silicone sealant, mold resistant. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from standard colors. 2.03 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant- contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self- adhesive tape wherever applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Inspect joints to be sealed to application of any work under this section. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of any joints which cannot be put into proper condition to receive sealants in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces: 1. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Mask edges, if required, to protect adjoining surfaces and produce a straight finish line. 3. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances that would interfere with bond of sealant. 4. Do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces that have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment of coating. Remove coating or treatment joint surfaces before installing sealant. 5. Etch concrete masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant manufacturer's printed instruction indicated that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid, neutralize RDA[ 2363.00 07920 -3 with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation. B. Priming: If required, prime surfaces which are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended or standard primer, after surfaces have been prepared as specified. Before use, check primers for discoloration and dirt pick -up on adjacent surfaces. If staining occurs, after exposure, take adequate measures to prevent primer from being applied over face of adjacent porous materials by masking or other suitable measures. C. Joint Backing: 1. Joints: Depth necessary to provide for specified allowable thickness of sealant and also required backing where and as specified. Provide backing of extent and type as specified and required to provide for allowable depth of sealant. 2. Back -up Materials for Sealants: Non- staining, compatible with sealant and primer. resilient nature, and as recommended by manufacturer of sealant. a. Size and Shape: As required by width of joint and specified. b. Do not use materials impregnated with oil, solvents or bituminous materials. 3. Compress backing material minimum of 30% when inserted in joint. Backing material for upper portion of joints shall be round rod or semi - circular in cross - section where in contact with sealant. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Install where indicated and as required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that sealants will deform properly. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Metal Window Sills: Set in full bed of polyurethane sealant. B. Exterior Thresholds: Set in full bed of latex acrylic sealant. C. Seal Joints: 1. Apply sealants in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets, using ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun. 2. Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will not extrude from joints. 3. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean adjoining surfaces. 4. In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry. 5. Use anti -tack agent where necessary to protect freshly applied sealant from public traffic and dirt. 6.. Slightly recess joints to facilitate painter's line. Handtool and finish joints throughout construction. 7. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. D. d Concrete Expansion and Control Joints: Blow clean with compressed air. Pour full but do not over -fill. E. Sinks, Lavatories and Showers: Fill joints between dissimilar with silicone sealant. RDAI 2363.00 07920 -4 Workmanship: Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete 'wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. 2. Where horizontal joints are between horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. G. Joint Sizes: Install sealants to depths as indicated or, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within following general limitations: 1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not more than 1/2" deep or less than 1/4" deep. 2. For joints sealed with non - elastomeric sealants and calking compounds. fill joints to depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint width. H. • Spillage: 1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either primer /sealer or sealant. 2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. Do not damage adjoining surfaces or finishes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Samples: Where directed by Architect, cut out and remove total of three samples consisting of undisturbed sealant and back -up material from joint. Samples shall be 6" in length. Reseal cut out areas with same materials. 3.05 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Curing: Cure sealants and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. B. Protection: 1. Advise General Contractor of procedures required for protection of sealants during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. 2. Protect surfaces from damage. Clean soiled surfaces immediately. Replace any damaged material that cannot be cleaned with new material. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 07920 -5 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow metal doors. 2. Hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 2. Access Panels: Section 08310 Access Doors and Panels. 3. Hardware including Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 4. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. NAAMM Standard HMMA 861 or ANSI A250.8 -1998. 2. ANSI Al 15 Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metal work shall be submitted under Section 08710 directly to hollow metal manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1: Certificates: Submit certification that specified surface preparation and primer have been applied to all hollow metal to receive high performance coating under Section 09900. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Rating: Provide fire rating label acceptable to local building code authority on doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. If any door or frame scheduled to be fire -rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect prior to submission of bids. 2. NFPA Standard No. 80. RDAI 2363.00 08110 -1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store frames in manner to prevent twisting. Doors with dimples or dents will be rejected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwestern Hollow Metals 2. Gateway Metal Products 3. North Central Supply 4. Curries Manufacturing 5. Elco Metal Products 6. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Frames for hollow metal and wood doors, entrances, windows and borrowed lights, etc. indicated to be hollow metal shall be of design sections as detailed and assembled as indicated. Gages: 1. Frames on Exterior Walls: 14 gage steel. 2. Frames on Interior Walls: 16 gage steel. 3. Loose Glazing Beads: Not less than 20 gage steel, corners butted. C. Construction: Construct frames encompassing one or more doors with sidelights or transoms, and steel window walls, etc., in rigid units of as large size as practical to reduce to minimum number of job- fabricated joints. 1. Joints and Connections Including Job - Fabricated Joints: Welded and ground and entire assembly reinforced and braced as required to ensure absolute rigidity. 2. Provide expansion joints as indicated or required. 3. Where so indicated or as required, provide channel stiffening within and securely welded to frame member. 4. Do not use exposed screws except where specifically accepted. D. Accessories: 1. Reinforcement for Hardware: Machine frames for attachment of hardware,' including mortising, reinforcing, drilling and tapping for hinges. a. Butt Hinges: Seven gage, 12" long, full width of frame profile or equivalent. b. Closers: 10 gage, 12" long, full width of frame or equivalent. c. • Strikes, Flush Bolts and Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 12 gage or equivalent. 2. Anchors: Furnish anchors of type and number required for anchoring frames to structure, partitions, etc. as follows: a. Three jamb anchors on seven foot high jamb. b. Four jamb anchors on jambs over seven feet. c. Special strap masonry anchors at existing walls containing fire -rated assemblies. Wire anchors will not be allowed. Provide such installation instructions as are necessary to ensure proper installation of anchors. RDAI 2363.00 08110 -2 3. Silencers: Drill stop of lock jamb of each interior frame for installation of pneumatic rubber door silencers. Silencers shall be furnished under Section 08710, numbers as indicated on schedule. 4. Joints: Conceal welded joints in two -sided mullions or similar sections behind glazing stops. Continuous weld and grind smooth exposed joints. E. Hinges: Install mortar protection box behind each hinge cut. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Doors indicated to be hollow metal shall be hollow metal, flush, swing type doors of types indicated. B. Construction: Construct hollow metal doors from 16 gage steel, fully welded, ground smooth and completely sound and fire insulated. Provide thermal insulation in exterior doors. Manufacture hollow metal doors and panels with flush tops, sides and bottoms. Plastic inserts are not acceptable. All vertical seams shall be fully welded. Lock seams or epoxy filled seams are not acceptable. C. Labels: Provide fire rated construction and UL labels where listed in door schedule. D. Hardware: Mortise and reinforce doors to receive hardware. 1. Hinges: Seven gage steel plate, 9 ", welded to continuous 16 gage interior edge channels or equivalent. Drill and tap. Use of coined or extruded holes not acceptable. 2. Locks, Latches, Push /Pulls and Panic Devices: 12 gage steel spot welded to 16 gage interior edge channels or equivalent and designed to provide adequate support and reinforcement for required hardware. 3. Closers: Not less than 12 gage internal reinforcement. Provide special attention to reinforcing doors where closers are to be bolted through door. E. Insulation: Foam or batt type. Honeycomb core is not acceptable. 2.04 FINISH A. Cleaning and Primer: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, rust and scale to insure paint adherence. Apply filler to doors where required to produce a smooth surface. 2. Doors and Frames to be painted. Apply one coat of baked on factory primer. 3. Doors and Frames to receive High Performance Coating: Apply one shop prime coat of Tnemec 50 -330 Poly -Ura -Prime to doors and frames to receive high performance coating under Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Frames: 1. Set steel frames accurately in accordance with details, straight and free of twist with head level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely brace until surrounding work is completed. Provide deflection clearances at frame heads where indicated. RDAI 2363.00 08110 -3 2. Fire -Rated Openings: Place frames and provide clearances in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 3. Feld Welds: Make welds full length of joints. Remove splatter and grind exposed welds to match adjacent surfaces. Provide Architect with ample notice to review welds before finish operations begin. 4. Wherever possible leave spreader bars in place until frames are securely anchored. 5. Jambs shall be filled with grout under Section 04810 where frames occur in masonry walls. B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 1. Clearance Tolerances: a. Head: 1/8" maximum. b. Jamb: 1/8" maximum. C. Between Doors (Pair): 1/8" maximum. d. Sill without Threshold: 1/2" maximum. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08110 -4 SECTION 08210 PANELED WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior Paneled Wood Doors Related Sections: 1. Hardware: Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 2. Field Finish: Section 09900 Painting. 3. Fire Rated Wood Frames: Section 08230 Packaged Wood Door Frames 4. Custom Wood Frames: Section 06275 Wood Door Frames 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01060 for custom wood doors. Comply with the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program„. 1994 Edition, as published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute. a. Comply with premium grade requirements. 2. NWWDA industry standard I.S.I -A7 Series - Wood flush Doors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate location, size, elevation, details of construction, hardware blocking, fire rating, factory preparation requirements for each door type. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on wood doors will be submitted under Section 08710 directly to wood door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. C. Samples: Submit full size sample of each type of door. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL or Warnock Hersey label on doors requiring fire label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to building until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete work is completed and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of locality. 2. Storage: Stack doors flat and off floor. Do not drag doors across one another. RDAI 2363.00 08210 -1 3. Protection: Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with "On -Site Care" recommendations of NWWDA and with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide written two -year warranty in accordance with Section 01700 for exterior flush solid core doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELED DOORS A. Ac( 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ;eptable Manufacturers: Eggers Industries Karona, Inc. Stallion Weyerhaeuser Approved Substitute Description: Solid stock stile and rail with panels as indicated, AWI custom grade construction. Laminated rails not allowed. Pre - machined for hardware. Thickness as scheduled. 6" minimum rail width on doors to receive card readers. 1. Fire Rating: Where indicated. 2. No Finger joint material will be allowed. C. Species: 1. Residential Interiors: Knotty Alder 2. Fire Rated Corridor and Unit Entrance Doors: Clear fir D. Style: See Interior Design Specifications. Traditional 6 panel. E. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.02 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory. 1. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. 3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules and doorframe shop drawings with hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. 4. Prefit for ving locksets where occurring. B. Tolerances: Comply with NWWDA tolerance requirements for prefitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. RDAI 2363.00 08210 -2 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously work at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware. Brush -apply exterior seal coat to all job site cut or planed surfaces. 1. Sealer: Type recommended by manufacturer. D. Blocking: Install minimum 3/4" non -com blocking at jambs of each interior door and 2x non -com blocking at jambs of corridor doors. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. In no case shall doors be cut down to opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactured. 2. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions. Clearance: 1. Non -Fire Rated Doors: Per AWI Standards a. Jamb: 1/8", 1/8" bevel in 2 ". b. Head: 1/8". c. Between Double Doors: 1/8". d. Bottom at Decorative Floor Finish or Covering: 1/2". e. Bottom at Threshold: 1/4" between bottom of door and top of threshold. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Comply with applicable building code and AWI Standards. i C. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, brush -apply an exterior seal coat to job site cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended by door manufacturer. 2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3. No thru- bolting of hardware will be allowed. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. RDAI 2363.00 B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project. C. Replacement: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 1. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges of veneer. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08210 -4 SECTION 08216 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior Paneled Wood Doors Relqted Sections: 1. Hardware: Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 2. Field Finish: Section 09900 Painting. 3. Fire Rated Wood Frames: Section 08230 Packaged Wood Door Frames 4. Custom Wood Frames: Section 06275 Wood Door Frames 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01060 for custom wood doors. Comply with the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, 1994 Edition, as published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute. a. Comply with premium grade requirements. 2. NWWDA industry standard I.S.1 -A7 Series - Wood flush Doors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate location, size, elevation, details of construction, hardware blocking, fire rating, factory preparation requirements for each door type. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on wood doors will be submitted under Section 08710 directly to wood door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL or Warnock Hersey label on doors requiring fire label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to building until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete work is completed and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of locality. 2. Storage: Stack doors flat and off floor. Do not drag doors across one another. l 3. Protection: Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with "On -Site Care" recommendations of NWWDA and with manufacturer's recommendations. A. Warranty: Provide written two -year warranty in accordance with Section 01700 for exterior flush solid core doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELED DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eggers Industries 2. Karona, Inc. 3. Stallion 4. Approved Substitute B. Description: Solid stock stile and rail with panels as indicated, AWI custom grade construction. Laminated rails not allowed. Pre - machined for hardware. Thickness as scheduled. 6' minimum rail width on doors to receive card readers. 1. Fire Rating: Where indicated. 2. No Finger joint material will be allowed. C. Species: 1. Residential Interiors: Alder. 2. Fire Rated Corridor and Unit Entrance Doors: Clear fir D. Style: See_ Drawings. E. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.02 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory. 1. Take- accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. 3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules and doorframe shop drawings with hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. 4. Prefit for ving locksets where occurring. B. Tolerances: Comply with NWWDA tolerance requirements for prefitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600: 1. Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. RDAI 2363.00 08216 -2 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously work at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware. Brush -apply exterior seal coat to all job site cut or planed surfaces. 1. Sealer: Type recommended by manufacturer. D. Blocking: Install minimum 3/4" non -com blocking at jambs of each interior door and 2x non -com blocking at jambs of corridor doors. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. In no case shall doors be cut down to opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactured. 2. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions. B. Clearance: 1. Non -Fire Rated Doors: Per AWI Standards a. Jamb: 1/8", 1/8" bevel in 2 ". b. Head. 1/8". c. Between Double Doors: 1/8". d. Bottom at Decorative Floor Finish or Covering: 1/2". e. Bottom at Threshold: 1/4" between bottom of door and top of threshold. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Comply with applicable building code and AWI Standards. C. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, brush -apply an exterior seal coat to job site cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended by door manufacturer. 2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3. No thru- bolting of hardware will be allowed. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project. RDAI 2363.00 08216 -3 C. Replacement: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 1. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges of veneer. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION 08216 -4 SECTION 08253 METAL CLAD WOOD DOOR AND FRAME UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior metal clad wood doors and frames and related transoms. B. Related Sections: 1. Adjacent Wood Windows and Sidelites: Section 08551 Metal Clad Wood Windows. 2. Glazing:. Section 08800. 3. Final Cleaning of Glass: Section 01741 Final Cleaning. 4. Finish Hardware: Section 08710 Door Hardware 1.02 SUBMITTALS 7 A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so that minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. C. Storage: Store cases according to printed instruction on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep Storage area clean and dry. D. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide one year written warranty for material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED WOOD DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Marvin 2. Pella Products, Inc. 3. Eagle 4. Sierra Pacific 5. Approved Substitute C. Finish: Aluminum clad outside. Standard Color as selected by Architect. RDAI 2363.00 08253 -1 D. Hardware: Manufacturers standard hinges, threshold and weatherstripping. Locksets by hardware supplier. E. Weatherstrip: Weatherstripped. F. Exterior Trim: See Section 06200. G. Glazing: Doors pre - glazed with 5/8" clear Low E, tempered insulating glass units, altitude adjusted if required. H. Accessories: Provide necessary hardware, anchors and related items. I. Screen: None required. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Before installation, verify that openings are plumb and square and of proper dimension. Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the Construction Manager before proceeding. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT A. General: Install according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings. Adjust to work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Re- adjust at completion of the job if directed by the Construction Manager. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cover windows during spray painting or other construction operations that might cause damage. B. Protect threshold during construction. 3.04 CLEANING A.' Leave in a job clean condition. Final cleaning of glass will be done under Sections 01741. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08253 -2 SECTION 08254 PACKAGED WOOD DOOR FRAMES - FIRE RATED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire rated packaged wood door frames at corridor doors to living units and for other scheduled wood frames at fire rated doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Welded Steel Door Frames and Hollow Metal Doors: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Wood Doors: Section 08216. 3. Finish Hardware: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 4. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 5. Custom Wood Door Frames: Section 06460 Wood Frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all items under this section. See Section 01330 Submittal Requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire label as required on doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver and store frames in original cartons. Gay "A IN a�iIlili1W 2.01 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dimension Millworks 2. Eggers Industries 3. Approved Substitute B. Construction: 1. Eggers Industries Fire Guard 20 Minute. 2. Sizes and Types: As indicated. Widths as required for wall conditions. Machined for hinges and strikes specified under Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 3. Species: Northern white pine or cypress for job finish under Section 09900. 4. Fire Ratings: 20 minute where indicated. RDAI 2363.00 08254 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Set frames accurately in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight and free of twist with head level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to partitions as required for fire rating. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08254 -2 6=41811012tel- M.- METAL CLAD WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wood sliding glass doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior Wall Framing: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 2. Final Cleaning of Glass: Section 01741 Final Cleaning. 3. Metal Clad Wood Windows: Section 08551. 4. Metal Clad Wood Doors and Frame Units: Section 08253. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with installation schedules so that minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. C. Storage: Store cases according to printed instruction on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep Storage area clean and dry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Ac( 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. :eptable Manufacturers: Marvin Pella Products, Inc. Eagle Sierra Pacific Accepted Substitute B. Description: Aluminum Clad Patio Sliding Doors and Frames, as indicated. 1. Glazing: Factory tempered insulating clear glazing units, altitude adjusted if required. 2. Exterior Finish: Aluminum clad, color as selected. 3. Accessories: Provide with sliding aluminum mesh screens. 4. Hardware: Provide complete with standard pulls and interior deadlock, threshold and weatherstripping, 5. Trim: Aluminum clad wood to match door and frame. RDAI 2363.00 08264 -1 C. Accessories: Provide necessary anchors and related items. D. Trim Flashings: Provide all related aluminum trim (lashings, color to match doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examination: Before installation, verify that openings are plumb and square and of proper dimension. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT A. General: Install doors according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings. Adjust to work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Readjust doors and screens at completion of the job if directed by thetror Maur. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cover doors during spray painting or other construction operations that might cause damage. B. Protect track threshold during construction. 3.04 CLEANING A. Leave doors in a job clean condition. Final cleaning of glass will be done under Section 01741. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08264 -2 SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors into pipe and utility spaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Roof Hatches: Section 07720 Roof Accessories. 2. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Mechanical Equipment: Division 15 Mechanical. 3. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Electrical Equipment: Division 16 Electrical. 4. Installation of Access Doors: Appropriate sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS A. Located in Masonry, Tile, Concrete, Gypsum Drywall: 1. Milcor Style M 2. MM Systems Boico Style C 3. Karp Model DSC -214M 4. JL Industries Model TM 5. Nystrom Building Products NW 6. Williams Brothers WB -GP 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. Fire -Rated Access: 1. Milcor Fire -Rated Access Door 2. MM Systems Boico Fire Rated Access Door Series F 3. Karp Model KRP -150 FR -4. JL Industries Model FD 5. Nystrom Building Products IW 6. Williams Brothers WB -FR 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Description: 1. Sizes: -As indicated on drawings or as required to properly service mechanical or electrical equipment. 2. Locking Devices: Key operated cam locks. 3. Finish: a. Toilet Rooms and Food Service Areas: Stainless steel. b. All Others: Prime for painted finish under Section 09900. RDAI 2363.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical or Electrical Access: Access doors required for access to mechanical or electrical equipment shall be provided under Division 15 or Division 16 and installed by the trade responsible for the material in which door is located. B. General Access: Furnish access door indicated on drawings for general access to be installed by trade responsible for material in which door is located. �!7;1" Z.1c�011 END OF SECTION 08310 -2 SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overhead Sectional Garage Doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Steel Frame: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 2. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 3. Electric Power: Division 16 Electrical. 4. Job Applied Wood Finish: Section 06200 Finish Carpentry. 5. Interface with Parking Control Equipment: Section 11150. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERHEAD DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Overhead Door Corp. 2. Raynor Manufacturing Co. 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Manufacturer and Type: Overhead Door Series 420, 20 gage galvanized steel sectional overhead doors, 2" thick sections. C. Weatherstripping: 1. Jambs: Neoprene rubber 2. Floor: U -type vinyl. 3. Head: Neoprene rubber. 4. Section Joints: Neoprene foam rubber D. Insulation: 1. Insulate doors with 1 -1 /2" rigid foam isocyanurate and 24 gage galvanized steel back cover with R value of 12.1. E. Track: Two inch galvanized steel. Provide standard lift type as indicated. F. Hardware: Counterbalance doors with torsion springs and galvanized_ lift cable. No cylinders required. G. Finish: Prime coat doors, both interior and exterior, for job painting. R DAI 2363.00 08361 -1 H. Electrical Operation: Overhead Model FL /SFL electric operation for doors as indicated. Provide size motors as manufacturer recommends for type and size doors. Locate jackshafts as indicated. Provide in 120 volt single phase. Provide chain hoists for emergency operation. Electrically interlock chain hoist to electric operator with 24 volt control. I. Controls: Provide contactors for interface with control equipment specified under Section 11150 Parking Control Equipment. J. Support: Provide necessary supplemental framing for support of tracks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install overhead doors according to manufacturer's recommendations and accepted shop drawings. B. Electrical: Provide electrical motor operators and controls._ Conduit, wiring and connections are provided under Division 16. C. Adjustment: Adjust to work freely with hardware functioning properly. Re- adjust at completion of job if directed by Architect. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08361 -2 SECTION 08551 METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Clad Wood Windows B. Related Sections: 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Section 01 741 Final Cleaning 2. Metal Clad Wood Doors and Frames: Section 08225. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Samples: Provide color samples for verification of custom color. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with installation schedules so that minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. C. Storage: Store cases according to printed instruction on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED WOOD WINDOWS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Marvin 2. Pella Corporation 3. Eagle 4. Sierra Pacific 5. Approved Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Pella -clad fixed and casement units. Provide aluminum mesh screens. Provide jamb extensions as required. True divided lites where indicated. C. Finish: Stain finish inside. Aluminum clad outside in standard color selected by Architect. D. Exterior Trim: See Section 06200. RDAI 2363.00 08551 -1 E. Hardware: 1. Casements: Roto operator and sash fastener. Egress hardware at all living units as required by code. F. Weatherstrip: Manufacturer's standard. G. Glazing: Factory pre - glazed with clear, Low E insulating glass, altitude adjusted. H. Accessories: Provide necessary hardware, anchors and related items. I. Trim Flashings: Provide all related aluminum trim flashings, color to match windows. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Before installation, verify that openings are plumb and square and of proper dimension. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT A. General: Install windows according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings. Adjust operable sash to work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Re- adjust at completion of the job as directed by the Architect. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cover windows during spray painting or other construction operations that might cause damage. 3.04 CLEANING A. Leave windows in a job clean condition. Final cleaning of glass will be done under Section 01741. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 08551 -2 SECTION 08710 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door Hardware B. Products furnished but not Installed Under This Section: 1. Cylinders for Automatic Entrance Doors: Section 08460. C. Related Sections: 1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Wood Doors: Section 08216. 3. Door Opening Assemblies: Section 08114 Steel Door Assemblies. 4. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 5. Threshold Sealant: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: 1. Within 20 days after receipt of order for finish hardware, prepare complete schedule and submit in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Do not order hardware until accepted copy of schedule is returned to supplier bearing stamps of Contractor and Architect. 3. Include catalog cut of each different hardware item on hardware schedule. 4. Schedule: Indicate following details: Door Numbers Frame Materials Location Hand of Door Size and Thickness of Door Degree of Opening Door Material Type of Attachment As well as any other pertinent information regarding door and quality and type of hardware to be furnished. B. Templates: Within 10 days after receipt of accepted hardware schedule, submit four sets of templates and schedules to: 1. Hollow metal door and frame supplier. 2. Wood door and frame supplier. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Include printed sheets from manufacturer covering hardware furnished. Include following information: a. Name, address and telephone number of hardware suppliers. b. Maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of operating hardware including: RDAI 2363.00 08710 -1 (1) Locks (2) Exit Devices (3) Closers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Hardware supplier shall have in his employ regular member, in good standing, of American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide Underwriters Laboratory listed hardware for fire or accident hazard where scheduled or required to maintain rating of opening. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Deliver hardware to job site only after proper provision for storage have been made. 2. Labels: Properly package and label each item to indicate exact location for which intended. 3. Check -In: Hardware supplier shall authorize his representative to be present when finish hardware is delivered to site and shall check in each item and turn over to Contractor for storage in secure place under lock and key. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide following written warranties covering hardware in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty against mechanical failure of door closers for five year period. 2. Warranty against failure of parts for hardware except door closers for two year period. Warranty shall include cylinder locks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. See Interior Design Specifications. 2.02 KEYING, KEYS AND MASTER KEYS A. Keying Schedule: Key all cylinders alike or different as directed by Owner. Be responsible to schedule meeting with Owner to obtain Owner's keying requirements. B. Construction Keys: All exterior cylinders shall be construction master keyed. At time of Owner occupancy, make construction keys inoperative. C. Master Key. Cylinders shall be master keyed. Provide total of six building master keys. D. Keys: Provide two keys for each interior cylinder keyed. Stamp keys and cylinders with door number. RDAI 2363.00 08710 -2 E. Key Delivery: 1. Master Keys and Submaster Keys and Identified Change Keys: Delivery direct from factory by registered mail in safety envelopes directly to Owner 2. Other Keys: Mail other keys to General Contractor at his office. 2.03 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws and bolts for proper installation. Provide suitable sizes, type and finish to harmonize with hardware. 1. Hardware Attached to Metal: Templated and fastened with machine screws long enough to penetrate 1/2" thick reinforcing. B. Silencers: Provide rubber silencers for doors installed in interior metal frames. Provide three silencers for each door and two for each pair of doors. C. Cylinders: Furnish cylinders of same keyway unless otherwise specified. D. Stops: Provide wall- mounted stops where possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide factory hardware technician to be present to assist and instruct those applying finish hardware. B. Fastening: Furnish items of hardware with attachment screws, bolts, nuts, etc. as required to attach hardware to type of material involved and with finish to match adjacent hardware. 1. Make attachments to metal by template machine screws. 2. Through -bolt hardware such as door closers, forearm shoes of closers, holding devices and panic hardware mounted on doors or panels. 3. Attach hardware to masonry or concrete with expansion bolts or similar drilled anchors to develop full strength of attached device. Set expansion anchors in solid masonry not mortar joints. C. Weatherstripping and Thresholds: 1. Weatherstripping and Soundstripping: Run full height of both jambs and full width of head. 2. Thresholds and Door Bottoms: Run full width of opening. Install thresholds with continuous threshold anchors cast into slab and set in sealant under Section 07920. D. Mounting Heights (Unless Otherwise Indicated): Dimensions given are from floor to center line of hardware item. 1. Door Knobs and Levers: Standard - 38 Inches 2. Pushplates: Standard - 46 Inches 3. Pullplates: Standard - 46 Inches 4. Exit Devices Cross Bar: Standard - 36 Inches Note: a. Mount pull on opposite side of panic device to coincide with exit device template. b. Install pushplate to conceal through bolts of pull. RDAI 2363.00 08710 -3 3.02 PROTECTION A. Painting: Do not install door silencers, kickplates, pushplates, door bottoms and wall stops until after painting is complete. Loosen locksets and panic hardware prior to painting and retighten after painting is complete. Mask hardware or otherwise protect during painting operation. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjusting by Hardware Manufacturer's Representative: Prior to final inspection, inspect and adjust door closers, locks and items requiring close adjustment and regulation and check keying. aZ PAY- c111I17 END OF SECTION 08710 -4 SECTION 08744 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic swing door operator and controls. Related Sections: 1. Door Hardware: Section 08710. 2. Electrical Wiring: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. ANSI A156.10- Power Operated Pedestrian Doors, 1999 edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review and Acceptance: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate all elements including electrical requirements. 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions. 2. Warranty. 1.04 WARRANTY Automatic door package shall be warranted for two years against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC DOOR PACKAGE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. KM Systems, Inc.; www.kmsystemsinc.com 2. Stanley Magic Swing. 3. Tormax Technologies, Inc.; www.Tormax.com 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Description: Stanley Magic -Swing Electro- Mechanical Swinging Door Operator and electrical control, aluminum header, connecting hardware, actuating controls, guide rails and power on /off switches 1. Aluminum Header Finish: Match door frame. 2. Manual Use: Operator shall function as a manual door closer with or without electrical power. RDAI 2363.00 08744 -1 3. Automatic Operation: Wall mounted switches where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory for installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate size and location of electrical rough -in. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The swinging door operator package shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and according to approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent frames. B. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible materials. C. Instruct Owner's representative in proper operation of units. D. Make necessary electrical and control connections for full operation of doors. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moveable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight when closed. B. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Clean aluminum surfaces. . D. Leave units in closed position. END OF SECTION L.. RDAI 2363.00 08744 -2 SECTION 08800 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY GLAZING A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and Glazing For: a. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 2. Frameless Mirrors. B. Related Sections: 1. Factory Glazed Windows and Doors: Section 0253, 08264 and 08551. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards - See Section 01423. Comply with: 1. Glazing Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual, 1997 edition. 2. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Sealing Systems Manual, 1990 edition. 3. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturing Association. (SIGMA) Glazing Guidelines, 1997 edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass in accordance with Section 01330. Cut glass sizes as requested by Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Safety Glass and Glazing: Comply with State Statutes, UBC and ANSI Z97.1. B. Certifications: 1. Insulating Glass: IGCC certified to Level A. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. 2. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry. 3. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS RDAI 2363.00 08800 -1 A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field- measured products. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All insulated glass in the vertical positions shall be warranted against seal failure for a period of ten years. B. All glass with Low E coating shall be warranted against hazing of the coating for a period of ten years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS A. Manufacturers /Fabricators: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. AFG Industries, Inca 3. Libby- Owens -Ford Co. 4. General Glass Corporation. 5. Guardian Industries. 6. Viracon. 7. Visteon Float Glass Operations. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. B. Labels: Each Individual Piece of Glass: Bear label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until reviewed by Architect. C. Glass Types: Provide glass of following types as indicated: TYPE DESCRIPTION A 3/4 -inch nominal thickness double sealed insulating glass. 1/2-inch air space. Inside face 1/4 inch tempered clear. Outside face 1/4 inch tempered clear. Use at safety locations and as indicated. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks, Shims and Glazing Clips: Size and type as recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Preshimmed Glazing Tape: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Bostik Chem -Tape 60. b. Pecora Shim -Seal Tape. c. Tremco Preshimmed 440 Tape. d. Approved substitute. 2. Description: Preformed, adhesive, elastome6c butyl /polyisobutylene glazing tape with continuous built -in EPDM shim, designed for pressure sealing of glazing units in framing system. RDA[ 2363.00 08800 -2 2.03 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: 1/4-inch thickness polished plate, mirror- glazing quality with polished edges. 1. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by Mirror Glass Manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Before glazing, verify #hat frames are plumb and square with metals stops set for proper glass -to -stop face clearance. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction operations that might cause damage to glass. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stops: 1. Hold glass with wood stops as detailed. a. Stops: Furnished under other sections. 2. Carefully remove any stop already in place as necessary to permit glazing. 3. Handle stops carefully and install to avoid damage. B. Glazing in Wood Frames: 1. Tape entire opening to prevent glass from touching frame in any direction. 2. Center glass in glazing rabbet to maintain recommended clearances at all four sides, inside and out. 3. Rest glass on setting blocks as recommended by the glass manufacturer. 4. Install shims or use shim tape as recommended to maintain clearance between stops and face of glass. 5. Install glazing tape and stop in with specified stops. 6. Cover top of tape with silicone sealant on both sides of frame. 7. Cut all glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by the openings. Edge clearances shall comply with flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. 8. Leave sealant smooth and clean. Remove sealant from adjoining surfaces without damaging the finish. C. Allowable Tolerances: Maintain glazing tolerances between glass and frame or stops as recommended by the FGMA. 1. Maintain 1/8-inch clearance between glass face and stops. 3.04 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: Install with approved adhesive. RDAI 2363.00 08800 -3 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave glass in job clean condition with glazing compound and putty carefully removed from glass and adjoining surfaces. 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 01741. B. Breakage: Unless responsibility can be assessed to another contractor, be responsible for glass broken during shipment, storage and installation. END OF SECTION t RDAI 2363.00 08800 -4 DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09253 GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum sheathing on exterior walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior Wall Steel Studs: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 2. Interior Gypsum Board: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Manufacturers: 1. Georgia- Pacific 2. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600 B. Sheathing Panels: 5/8" Thick Georgia- Pacific Dens -Glass Gold Firestop, Type X Gypsum sheathing, 4' wide x 8' length. C. Fasteners: USG Type "S" drywall screws or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine framing to receive sheathing before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Apply gypsum sheathing panels of maximum practical length with long dimensions at right angles to studs. 1. Secure with drywall screws spaced 12" o.c. in the field of board and 8" o.c. along abutting edges. RDAI 2363.00 09253 -1 2. End Joints: Occur over supports with end joints staggered. 3. Properly support panels around cutouts and openings. 4. Joint finishing is not required. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09253 -2 SECTION 09263 GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS AND WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Stud and Gypsum Board Partitions. 2. Metal Furring and Gypsum Board. 3. Structural Metal Studs and Gypsum Board as Indicated. 4. Shaftwall System. 5. Sound Insulation and Sealants. 6. Accessories and Finishing. 7. Backer Board for Wall Tile in showers and tub recesses. Products installed but not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 2. Blanket Insulation: Section 07210 Building Insulation. 3. Drywall Ceilings: Section 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings. 4. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 5. Structural Metal Studs: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C645 -95 Standard Specification for Non -Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. - 2. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw - Attached Gypsum Board. 3. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 4. AI51 Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members, 1986 edition. 5. ANSI A108.11 -1992 Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 6. ANSI A118.9 -1992 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Gypsum Board Partitions: Partitions listed and labeled for fire protective ratings where indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01.330 Submittal Procedures. RDAI 2363.00 09263 -1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Steel studs, runners and accessories shall be certified by manufacturer of gypsum board as acceptable integral components of its gypsum board system. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. B. Pre- Rocking: Any gypsum drywall installation prior to complete weather enclosure of the building shall be done with weather resistant faceboards. 1.07 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING A. Sequencing: Wherever partitions stop against bottom of ceiling grid system, install grid systems prior to stud erection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD FOR DRYWALL PARTITIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. United States-Gypsum (USG) 2. Georgia- Pacific 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. BPB Celotex 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Faceboards: 1. Size: 5/8 inch thick unless specifically indicated otherwise. 48 inch wide x length to allow for vertical installation without cross joints. 2. Type: USG tapered edge Firecode (Type X) or Regular Gypsum Panels as required. 3. Water Resistant: USG W/R tapered edge Firecode (Type X) Gypsum Panels. 2.02 DRYWALL STUDS AND RUNNERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Unimast Incorporated. 2. American Studco, Inc. 3. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 4. Dale Industries, Inc. 5. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 6. Harrison Manufacturing Co. 7. National Gypsum Co. 8. Marino \Ware. 9. Western Metal 10. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. RDAI 2363.00 09263 -2 B. Interior Non -Load Bearing Steel Studs: Unimast ST 25 gage No. 358ST25 (3 -5/8 inch). Use other sizes where specifically called for. 1. Provide Unimast CW 20 gage No. 358CW20 studs both sides of door frames. 2. Provide Unimast CW 20 gage No. 358CW20 studs for walls supporting cementitious board. C. Steel Stud Runners: Unimast CR 25 gage Runner No. 362CR25 (3 -5/8 inch) to match studs. Provide long leg runners for slip joint at structure above where indicated. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: .•1. United States Gypsum Company (USG). 2. Beadex. 3. Dale Industries. 4. Georgia Pacific. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. Unimast Incorporated. 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. B. Fasteners: One -inch Type S drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of stud. C. Corner Bead: USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur -A -Bead, 1 -1 /4" x 1 -1/4 ". D. Metal Trim: USG Sheetrock No. 2008. E. Control Joint: USG Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093. F. Finishing Materials: Gypsum board manufacturer's standard products equivalent to the following: 1. Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. 2. Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond Joint Compound. G. Laminating Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond. H. Sound Isolation Materials: 1. Sound Attenuation Blankets: USG Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blankets. Three inches thick unless otherwise indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. 3. Ductwork Penetrations Packing: Low density fiberglass. I. Furring Channels: USG DWC -25 Metal Furring Channels. J. Resilient Furring Channels: USG resilient furring channels. 2.04 BACKER BOARD A. Manufacturers and Type: 1. Custom Building Products WonderBoard. 2. USG Durock. 3. Georgia- Pacific Dens - Shield. B. Thickness: 1/2 inch unless indicated otherwise. R DAI 2363.00 09263 -3 2.05 SHAFTWALL SYSTEM A. 3 -3/4" total thickness, 2 -hour label with components as follows: 1. Studs: 2-1/2" C -H studs or equal. 2. Faceboards: 2 layers 5/8" fire rated drywall. 3. Liner Board: 1" Gypsum shaftwall liner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION OF DRYWALL STUD PARTITIONS A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Layouts: Align partition studs accurately according to partition layout. C. Anchoring: Anchor runner channels to concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power - driven anchors at 24 inches o.c. Anchor runner channels to ceiling grid where applicable with stove bolts. Install headers where required to receive runners where studs extend above ceiling system. D. Studs: Position studs vertically in runners. Anchor studs located adjacent to openings or partition intersections and corners to runners with USG metal lock fastener or with 1/2- inch Type S pan head screws. 1. Space studs 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Corners and Intersections: Locate studs no more than two inches from abutting partitions, corners, etc. 3. Openings: Locate studs not more than two inches from opening frames. Anchor studs to frame anchor clips by bolt or screw attachment. Install headers over openings as recommended by the manufacturer. a. _ Wood Doors and Hollow Metal Doors: Provide two studs at jambs. 4. Wood Blocking: See Section 06100. Bracing: Provide diagonal bracing at head of studs that terminate above the ceiling level. Bracing shall consist of metal studs bent to V -shape and extending at 45 degrees from partition head to structure above. Locate bracing 48 inches maximum o.c. 3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND FURRING A. General: Provide necessary framing, and furring for special framing at recesses; specialty items; wall mounted casework, shelving and equipment; etc. Frame around columns as indicated. Provide necessary framing and suspension for offsets, verticals, recessed and all other gypsum drywall surfaces not provided under Section 09262 Gypsum Board Ceilings. B. Furring: Install furring channels over back -up material. Position channels vertically at 24 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise. Use powder- activated fasteners or stub nails at 24 inches o.c. along alternating flanges. RDAI 2363.00 09263 -4 3.03 INSULATION A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Place in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. 1. Ductwork Penetrations: Provide one -inch wide clearance around ductwork and pack with fiberglass ready for calking. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Reference Standard: Apply and finish gypsum board in accordance with GA 216. B. Layout: Apply gypsum wallboard panels vertically with abutting ends and edges occurring over stud flanges or furring. Horizontal installation is not allowed. 1. Joints on Opposite Sides of Partitions: Shall not occur over same stud. 2. Two Layer Construction: Stagger joints between layers. C. Fasteners: Apply board to studs or furring with drywall screws spaced 12 inches o.c. in field of board and eight inches o.c. staggered along vertical abutting edges. 1. Use Type S -12 screws for attaching to structural studs. D. Layers: Install multiple layer drywall as indicated. E. Water Resistant: Use where specified or required by code. Backer Board: Apply over steel studs as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install as back up for ceramic tile in showers and tub recesses. G. Corner Bead: Apply as recommended by manufacturer at exposed out corners. H. Trim: Apply as recommended by manufacturer, where gypsum board abuts other materials, and as indicated. Tolerances: Gypsum board surface plane within +/- 1/8" in 10'. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at horizontal and vertical joints, corner bead, trim, penetrations and fastener dimples as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except at trim accessories. 3. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting -type joint compound. b. Fill coat: Setting -type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready -mix drying -type all- purpose or topping compound. 4. Finish to Gypsum Association Level 4 finish. K. Texture: Apply texture to skip trowel finish following application of prime coat by painting subcontractor. L. Acoustical Sealant: Apply at perimeter and at all penetrations of gypsum board in single bead. 1: Locations: Apply at partitions with sound attenuation blankets. RDAI 2363.00 09263 -5 2. Caulk ductwork penetrations. 3. Caulk both sides of partitions edges with continuous bead. 3.05 SHAFTWALL SYSTEM A. Erect shaftwall system as recommended by manufacturer and as required to meet specified fire rating. Use manufacturer's standard details for corners and wall junctions. Finish faceboards as specified under Article 3.04. Add additional faceboards where indicated on drawings. Provide horizontal installation where indicated. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09263 -6 SECTION 09264 GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Suspension and Gypsum Board Ceilings. 2. Accessories and Finishing. 3. Acoustical hangers. B. Products installed but not Furnished Under This Section. 1. Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: 1. Drywall Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards -See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Wallboard. 2. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire Rating: All gypsum board ceilings listed and labeled for one hour fire protective rating. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials to be used with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all material in original, unopened containers and store in a clean, dry area until ready to use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. RDAI 2363.00 09264 -1 B. Pre - Rocking: Any gypsum drywall installation prior to complete weather enclosure of the building shall be done with water- resistant faceboards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Drywall, Metal Suspension System, and Accessories: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Georgia- Pacific 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. BPB Celotex 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2.02 METALS A. Runner Channels: USG Donn Rigid X System, RMX 12,1-1/2", minimum 16 gage cold rolled channels, black asphaltum painted. B. Cross Channels: USG Donn Rigid X System, 7/8 inch RCX 4 or 1 -1/2 inch DXL 424. C. Furring Channels: USG DWC -25 metal furring channels. D. Steel Studs: Unimast ST 25 gage. Size as indicated. E. Hanger Wire: No. 9 gage galvanized wire. F. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage galvanized wire. G. Acoustical Hangers: Mason Industries WHR or Kinetics AF100. 2.03 DRYWALL AND RELATED MATERIALS A. Faceboards: 1. Size: 5/8" thick unless specifically indicated otherwise 48" wide x length to minimize cross joints. 2. Type: USG Firecode tapered edge gypsum panels. B. Fasteners: One inch USG Type S or W drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of metal framing. C. Accessories: 1. Corner Bead: USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur -A -Bead, 1 -1 14'x 1 -1 /4" 2. Metal Trim: USG Sheetrock No. 2008. 3. Control Joint: USG Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093. 4. Adhesives: a. USG Durabond multi - purpose adhesive. b. USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond. D. Finishing Materials: 1. Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. 2. Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond Joint Compound. 3. Texture: USG texture. RDAI 2363.00 09264 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRILLAGE ERECTION A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C574. B. Hangers: Install wire hangers spaced not over 48" o.c. in direction of 1 -1/2" main runner channels and within 6 of ends of main runners or interruptions of ceiling continuity. Hang from structure above. Install hangers 24" o.c. at gypsum drywall ceilings supporting double layer or triple layer drywall. Install acoustical hangers at all wire hangers. C. At light troffers or other openings, reinforce grillage with 3/4" cold rolled channels wired atop and parallel to main runner channels. D. Erect grillage as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary framing and suspension for offsets, verticals and decorative recesses, etc. Use drywall studs where indicated or required. See Section 09261 for type. Install 1- 1/2" main runner channels 24" o.c. at ceilings supporting wood or metal ceilings or other secondary ceiling systems. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Apply gypsum board of maximum practical length with long dimensions at right angles to furring channels and fasten with drywall screws spaced 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along abutting edges. All end and edge joints shall occur over furring channels with end joints staggered. Properly support gypsum board around cutouts and openings. B. Apply metal trim as recommended by the manufacturer and wherever gypsum drywall abuts other materials. C. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at side and end joints, trim, penetrations and fastener dimples as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except ot,trim accessories. 3. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting -type joint compound. b. Fill coat: Setting -type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready -mix drying -type all- purpose or topping compound. 4. Finish to Gypsum Association Level r finish. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09264 -3 SECTION 09300 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic Floor Tile 2. Ceramic Wall Tile 3. Ceramic Tile Base 1.02 REFERENCES TILE A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. Installation Specifications: ANSI A108.1 A -1999: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.5 -1999 Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex - Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.10 -1999 Installation of Grout in Tilework 2. Material Specifications: ANSI A118.4 -1999 Latex - Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.6 -1999 Ceramic Tile Grouts ANSI A137.1 -1988 Ceramic Tile 3. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): 2003 -2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all setting, grouting and miscellaneous materials in accordance with Section 01330. B. Samples: Submit complete samples of tile and grout to Architect for color verification in accordance with Section 01330. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver the in unopened, grade sealed packages. Deliver mortar mixes and grouts in unopened containers. Store materials in a clean, dry area. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install the set in Portland cement mortar when the ambient temperature is below 50 °F. Comply with minimum temperature requirements of bonding and grouting materials manufacturers. B. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before the work begins. RDAI 2363.00 09300 -1 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Materials: Provide the Owner at completion of the job 3% of each size and color used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile and Base: See Interior Designer's Schedule B. Accessory Pieces: Provide bullnose ceramic the pieces at all outside corners or exposed edges. 2.02 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bostik /Hydroment. 2. C -Cure Chemical Co., Inc. 3. Custom Building Products 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Approved Substitute B. Portland Cement Mortar: 1:3 Portland cement /sand gauged with C -Cure Latex Admix or approved substitute. Mix as recommended by manufacturer. Bond Coat: Neat Portland cement gauged with C -Cure Crete or approved substitute. C. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin -Set): ANSI 118.4. 1. For Installation on Walls and on Slab -On- Grade: C -Cure Crete and C -Cure Crete Powder. 2. Flexible Latex - Portland Cement Mortar for Structural Floor Installations: C -Cure Multi Flex 914 or equal by other acceptable manufacturer capable of withstanding substrate deflection up to 1/240 of span without loss of bond or cracking. D. Grout: C -Cure M -P Grout. Mix as recommended by manufacturer. See Interior Designer's Schedule. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT A. Floors: Two component self - leveling sealant complying with FS TT- S- 00227E. Color to match floor grout. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Troweled on Waterproofing System: C -Cure Ultra Cure waterproof membrane with flashing unit. . c �I� ��•IcIiA�►� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Before proceeding, examine surfaces to receive tile, setting beds or accessories for defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of the installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Verify locations of all expansion and control joints in substrate for compliance with Article 3.04. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Clean concrete base slab to receive thin set the to remove dust, dirt and loose material. Remove curing compounds and sealers and test for absorption using water or acid methods. B. Waterproofing: Trowel apply waterproofing on shower floors to receive the according to manufacturer's written data sheets. Extend minimum of 6" up walls behind wall finish. Reinforce all corners, joints and penetrations with flashing unit. C. [Floor] [Wall] Underlayment: Install and tape in accordance with ANSI A108.1 1 -1992. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Tile Floors - Thin Set Installation On Concrete Slabs on Grade: Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method F113 and ANSI A108.5 using latex - Portland cement mortar. Slab shall be free of curing compound or other contaminates before proceeding. B. Tile Floors - Thin Set Installation of Gypsum Mortar Bed or Lightweight Topping: Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method F122 and ANSI A108.5 using waterproof membrane, Latex - Portland Cement Mortar and Latex - Portland Cement Grout recommended by the manufacturer for this purpose. C. Wall Tile and Base - Installation Over Gypsum Board: Install wall the using the thin set method. Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method W243 and ANSI A108.5 using latex Portland cement mortar. D. Wall Tile and Base - Installation Over Cementitious Board: Install wall the using the thin set method. Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method W244 and ANSI A108.5 using latex- Portland cement mortar. E. Ceramic Tile Showers: Install, grout, clean, protect in conformance with TCA Handbook Method B415 in conjunction with Method W244. Ceramic Tile Walls in Bathtub Recesses: Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Methods B412 or B413 over cementitious board backup. RDAI 2363.00 09300 -3 3.04 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Comply all with requirement of TCA Handbook Method EJ 171. Locations: 1. Ceramic Floor Tile: a. At intersection of all ceramic floor the and cove base, install and calk 1 /4" wide expansion joint. b. At junction of floors with walls in showers as recommended in TCA Methods specified. 2. Other Locations: Directly over all expansion and control joints in concrete slab below and all other locations required by EJ 171. 3.05 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Just prior to occupancy of the building, clean unglazed ceramic the with sulfamic acid and flush with clean water. When tile and joints are completely clean of cement, scum and dirt, apply manufacturer - approved sealer to floors only. Do not apply sealer to floors in showers or other wet areas. B. Apply sealer according to manufacturer's recommendations in sufficient coats to produce an even glaze over entire floor area. Exercise care to avoid damage to adjoining surfaces. C. Clean all other floor and wall the according to the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09300 -4 SECTION 09637 STONE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stone flooring. B. Allowance: Allow $35 per sq. ft. installed. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements of Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of flooring proposed for use showing extreme variations in color and texture. B. Product Data: Submit product data on all setting, grouting and cleaning materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Flooring subcontractor must have at least five (5) years experience in the installation of stone flooring projects. B. Mock -Up: At a location directed by the Architect, pour concrete base slabs and install sample panels approximately 4' -0" x 4' -0" in size of each type and color of stone flooring. Use construction methods and materials specified. Maintain approved mock -ups for comparison with finished work. Dispose of mock -ups when project is completed or when directed by the Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect flooring units upon delivery to insure color match with the approved sample panel and handle carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. Store on pallets or concrete slab until ready for use. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use, allowing air circulation under stacked units. B. Store cementitious materials off the ground and under cover. Store admixtures in original unopened containers. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Follow procedures for cold and hot weather protection specified in Section 04200 Unit Masonry. RDAI 2363.00 09637 -1 B. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: 1. Protect all flooring after setting by suitable covering. 2. Replace any work showing damage or disfiguration during the progress of work in its entirety. No patching or hiding of defects will be permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE FLOORING UNITS AND ACCESSORIES A. Material: Granite, color as selected. B. Finish: Thermal or polished as indicated. C. Sizes: 12" x 12 ". 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Thick Bed Mortar: 1:3 Portland cement /sand gauged with Laticrete #3701 Admix as specified under Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. B. Slurry Bond Coat: Portland cement /sand gauged with Laticrete #4237 Admix as specified under Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. C. Latex Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI 118.4, 1:1 Portland cement /sand gauged with Laticrete 4237 tile setting liquid. D. Grout: Laticrete Dry Bond Grout and Joint Filler or approved equal gauged with Laticrete #3701 Grout and Mortar Admix. Color as selected by Architect. E. Mixing proportions and procedures shall be in strict accordance with recommendations of Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. 2.03 CLEANER A. Laticrete TC -500 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Edge Strips: Zinc terrazzo strips, size and type as required: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate to ensure that conditions are satisfactory before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean concrete base slabs to remove all contaminants. Acid etch, if required, to remove curing compounds and rinse clean. Dry or dusty concrete surfaces shall be wet down or washed and excess water removed just prior to application of setting bed. RDAI 2363.00 09637 -2 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Setting Bed Installation: Install flooring over base slab according to thick bed setting materials and methods specified in paragraphs 6.0 and 10.0 of Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. Back butter each unit before setting. Install in patterns indicated with 1/8" joints between units. Thin Set Installation: Install flooring over base slab according to thin bed setting materials and methods specified in Paragraphs 6.0 and 9.0 of Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. Back butter each unit before setting. Install in patterns indicated with 1 /8" joints between units. Install column plinths using thin set materials and methods. C. Edge Strips: Install between stone flooring and carpet or other floor covering. 3.04 GROUTING AND CLEANING A. Grouting: 1. Grout joints as soon as initial set or setting bed is achieved. Grout joints shall be pumped full using grout gun or pointing gun and struck flush. 2. Cure grout by maintaining in damp condition for seven (7) days. Cleaning: Remove grout haze with grout and the cleaner applied and removed as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09637 -3 SECTION 09640 WOOD FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Slotted foam mat and adhesive. 2. Wood flooring. 3. Wood thresholds and Transition strips. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions if requested by Architect. B. Finish Samples: Prepare samples of selected finishes and submit for approval. Re -make samples until a satisfactory finish is obtained. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Wood flooring to be installed and finished by a contractor with at least five years experience in the installation and finishing of wood floors. Evidence of experience shall be available on request. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling and Storage: 1. Handle and store flooring materials as packaged by manufacturer, with seals and labels intact. Protect materials against damage or water penetration during delivery, handling and storage. 2. Do not store finish flooring in the building until all drywall and concrete work is completed and thoroughly dry. 3. Store flooring in the room in which it is to be laid for a minimum of three days prior to installation under proper and protected ventilation. 4. The temperature of the room shall not be more than 70° F nor less than 50° F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOORING SYSTEMS A. Acceptance Manufacturers and Systems: 1. Sika Acubond Bonding and Acoustical Dampening System. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. A. Materials: 1. Slotted Acoustical Mat: Sika Layer 03 Polyethylene Foam Mat. 2. Adhesive: Sika Bond T -53 Single Component Polyurethane Adhesive. RDAI 2363.00 09640 -1 2.02 FLOORING A. Bruce Hardwood ECW 181 Coastal Woodlands Cherry, square edge and end. 1. Size: '/2 x 7 11/16" x random length 2. Finish: Pre - finished urethane 2.03 WOOD TRIM A. Threshold, base and shoe by flooring manufacturer. Pre - finished to match. Provide touch -up kit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine concrete surfaces to receive flooring for unevenness, dampness or unsatisfactory conditions that affect work. Work shall not be started until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Grinding And Cleaning: Grind surfaces to receive wood flooring and clean with an industrial cleanser to assure adherence of adhesive. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL MAT A. Install slotted mat and apply adhesive to floor at slots according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FLOORING A. Layout: Provide starting lines at 90 angle to each other and parallel to the starting wall in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow 1/2" gap for expansion at perimeter walls. B. Flooring: Ensure joints of flooring are aligned in one direction. Lay flooring symmetrically about room. Place flooring with full adhesive contact for permanent bond to substrate. C. Expansion: Provide ample expansion space at walls and other vertical obstructions. 3.05 WOOD TRIM A. Installation by flooring manufacturer. Fill nail holes and touch up finish. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Clean floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protection: Provide temporary protective coverings until final acceptance. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09640 -2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring (VCT). 2. Rubber Base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330, a full set of samples of the brand of floor tile, sheet vinyl, treads and base to be used. Samples shall be complete and up to date. Colors will not be selected until samples are received. At the option of the Architect, full size samples may be required. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01330. B. Temperature: Store materials in original containers at not less than 70° F for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in space to receive the between 70° F and 90° F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. Following 48- hour period maintain minimum temperature of 55° F until completion of building. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide the Owner at the completion of the project the following items: 1. Floor tile in the amount of 1% of each color used. 2. One case base of each type and color used. 3. One gallon of each type of adhesive used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong 2. Azrock Floor Products 3. Approved Substitute B. Tile (VCT): 12" x 12' x 1/8" Armstrong Excelon; colors as selected by Architect. RDAI 2363.00 09650 -1 2.02 RUBBER BASE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Azrock Floor Products 2. Flexco Division of Textile Rubber Co., Inc. 3. Johnsonite 4. R. C. Musson Rubber Company 5. Roppe Rubber Corporation 6. Burke Industries 7. VPI 8. Approved Substitute B. Base: 1/8" thickness x 4" high unless other sizes are indicated. Provide pre- formed external corners. Job - formed internal corners may be used at Contractor's option. Use topset cove base at all other locations. Colors as selected by Architect. C. Vinyl Edging: Furnish at exposed edges of resilient floor tile, vinyl edging 1 " wide, 1/8" thick. Colors as selected by Architect. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer of the material being installed. Adhesive for vinyl edging and base shall be a type not affected by heat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of resilient flooring until defects have been corrected except where correction is indicated under Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Leveling: Level major uneven concrete floor joints or other irregularities by bush hammering or grinding and filling with latex type underlayment. Leveled areas shall be sanded to provide a surface level +1/4" in 10'. Leveled areas shall be inspected by the Architect before flooring work may proceed. B. Cleaning, Patching and Priming: Thoroughly clean concrete floors before applying floor coverings. Remove rough spots and any foreign matter that might be evident through the floor covering. Patch minor rough areas, voids and defects with compatible leveling compound. Prime concrete floors as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring. 3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. General: Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by RDAI 2363.00 09650 -2 adhesive manufacturer. Cover only that amount of area that can be covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive. B. Application: Apply adhesive uniformly over surfaces with notched trowel or other suitable tool. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to insure proper application of adhesive. C. Cleaning: Remove any adhesive that dries or films over. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives. Promptly remove spillage. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Tile Flooring: 1. General: Install in accordance with the recommendations and specifications of the tile manufacturer. Make joints straight, tight, and flush. Tightly cement to floor. 2. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, layout each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a tile on the centerline of the area each direction. Where tile with a directional pattern is used, confer with Architect for direction of pattern. 3. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, lay out each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a tile on the centerline of the floor. B. Base: Tightly cement base to wall with butt joints 1/16" or less in width. Install base in toe space of cabinets. Install base in carpeted areas, after carpet has been installed. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Upon completion, remove loose, cracked, chipped, stained or otherwise defective tile, or base and replace in a satisfactory manner. Clean surfaces using only cleaners approved by the manufacturer. Remove mastic cement from adjoining work with particular care to not damage such work. B. Buffing: Dry mop and buff flooring. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect finished work from damage by subsequent construction operations. Where possible, lock rooms following installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 09650 -3 SECTION 09680 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY CARPET A. Section Includes: 1. Direct Glue Down Carpet in corridors and public areas. 2. Accessories 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Seaming Diagram: Before starting installation, submit a layout indicating all seams in accordance with Section 01330. B. Installation Instructions: Before beginning installation, submit manufacturer's written recommended installation procedures for particular carpet and installation conditions. C. Maintenance Instructions: Provide the Owner, through the Architect, 3 copies of a complete manual of the manufacturer's maintenance recommendations for each type of carpet provided. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Carpet installer must have a minimum of five years experience on installations of similar size and complexity The installation crew must be fully qualified to install the type of carpet to be furnished. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces as soon as delivered. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture. Protect adhesives from freezing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Carefully check dimensions and other conditions and be responsible for proper fitting of carpet in areas designated. Do not begin installation until ceilings and finish work are completed. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide Owner with 5% extra of gross area of each carpet type and color for maintenance purposes. RDAI 2363.00 09680 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet: Karastan 100% nylon with Scotchgard turtle cut pile. 1. Style: Talavgra #43283. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application and expected service. C. Edging: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. b. Johnson Rubber Co. (Johnsonite) c. Roppe Rubber Corp. d. Approved Substitute 2. Exposed Carpet Edge: Mercer Imperial sized for carpet thickness. 3. Carpet /Vinyl Tile Transition: Mercer the and carpet joiner. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt solvents, oil, grease, paint and other substances that would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to dry thoroughly. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative. C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity. D. Use approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. 3.02 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer tb ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only' enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. B. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. C. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. D. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. E. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces leaving no gaps. RDAI 2363.00 09680 -2 F. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set. G. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor well fastened at edges and is to present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. H. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Take adequate care to protect all adjacent work from damage or marring as a result of the work of this section. B. Clean the carpet of all spots with a spot remover as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Cut all loose threads with a sharp scissors. D. Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean the entire floor surface with an upright beater bar type vacuum cleaner. Remove all debris resulting from the work of this section from the site. In addition to extra materials in Article 1.06, leave all usable pieces of carpet not necessary to complete the work on the job site and place in an orderly manner in an area designated by the Owner. G. Cover with non - staining paper or polyethylene. Leave cover in place until final inspection. END OF SECTION i RDAI 2363.00 09680 -3 1►��i7��I•f:T:� CARPET WITH PAD 0 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor carpeting and pad in living units. 2. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Direct Glue Down Carpet: Section 09686. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Carpet installer must have a minimum of five years experience on installations of similar size and complexity. The installation crew must be fully qualified to install the type of carpet to be furnished. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit full range of 12" x 12" minimum size samples of each carpet type for Architect's selection. B. Seaming Diagram: Before starting installation, submit a layout indicating all seams in accordance with Section 01330. C. Installation Instructions: Before beginning installation, submit manufacturer's written recommended installation procedures for particular carpet and pad and installation conditions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces as soon as delivered. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture. Protect adhesives frown freezing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Carefully check dimensions and other conditions arid be responsible for proper fitting of carpet and pad in areas designated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide written one year warranty for material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. Upon demand, correct any condition due to faulty material or installation during the warranty period. RDAI 2363.00 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pad: See Interior Design Specifications. 1. Thickness: .350 inches B. Carpet: See Interior Design Specifications C. Tackless Strip: Kintrim standard tackless strip or equal. D. Edging: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mercer Plastics Company Inc. b. Johnson Rubber Company (Johnsonite) c. Roppe Rubber Corporation d. Approved Substitute 2. Exposed Carpet Edge: Mercer Imperial sized for carpet and thickness. 3. Carpet /Resilient Tile Transition: Mercer Tile and Carpet Joiner. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of carpeting as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor with copy to Architect. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of carpeting and pad until defects have been corrected except where correction is indicated under Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Removal: Remove all existing carpet, pad and accessory items from the site. B. Cleaning and Patching: Thoroughly clean concrete floors before applying carpeting. Remove rough spots and any foreign matter that might be evident through the carpeting. Repair minor rough areas, voids and defects with compatible leveling compound. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Layout: Lay out sheet goods so that wherever possible seams are eliminated or held to a minimum in high traffic areas. B. General: Install carpet and pad in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Unsatisfactory installation resulting from work performed which is not in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations shall be the responsibility of the carpet installer and may result in the removal and re- laying of carpet and pad at the expense of the installer. Particular attention should be paid to recommendations for application of floor pad, carpet and seaming. RDAI 2363.00 09685 -2 C. Tackless Strip: Install around perimeter of each room. D. Edging: Install carpet edging at all exposed carpet edges. Locate under doors where carpet stops in door openings. 3.04 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, clean up dirt and debris and clean carpet of spots with cleaning agents recommended by the manufacturer. Remove loose threads with sharp scissors then clean with vacuum cleaner. B. Remove rubbish, wrapping paper, salvages, etc. from the job site. 3.05 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Maintenance Manual: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance program for this Project. 3.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Maintenance Materials: Provide Owner with all usable carpet scrap over 4 feet square. END OF SECTION s RDAI 2363.00 09685 -3 SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Paint or stain all exterior surfaces not specifically excluded. 2. Paint or natural finish all interior surfaces not specifically excluded. B. Exclusions: In addition to material obviously not requiring paint such as glass, floor, tile, etc. do not paint or finish: 1. Surfaces indicated by the finish schedule to remain unfinished. 2. Factory finished surfaces unless otherwise specified. 3. Exterior insulation and finish system C. Related Sections: 1. Project Sign: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Pavement Markings: Section 02765. 3. Piping Identification: Division 15 Mechanical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Color Schedule: The Architect will provide a color schedule listing paint colors selected. Color selections will be made by the Architect from color systems of recognized paint company. If materials of other manufacturers are used, colors must match those selected. Paint and Stain Samples: If requested by Architect, prepare and submit paint and stain samples. Remake samples until accepted. C. Material List: Immediately after award of the contract submit a letter listing the manufacture and product name of each different material for use on the project. Materials list shall be accepted by the Architect before ordering materials. D. Substitutions: See Section 01600. Requests for substitutions must be on company letterhead and signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. Letters from sales representatives or retailers will not be acceptable. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand and name of manufacturer. Order materials sufficiently in advance to be on the job when needed and deliver at the building in sufficient quantities so the work will not be delayed. No claim by the Contractor concerning unsuitability of any material specified or his inability to produce first -class work with the same, will be entertained unless such claim is made, in writing, with the material list submittal. RDAI 2363.00 09900 -1 C. Storage and Mixing: Painter will be assigned a room or space in which to mix or store material. Provide galvanized mixing pans for this paint room or space in which paints shall be mixed. No mixing of paint shall be done except in these pans. Empty containers bearing the name or brand of any manufacturer shall not be brought upon the premises for mixing of paint unless labels are canceled and containers are closely marked as to contents. D. Inspection: The paint storage area shall be open for periodic inspection by the Architect to insure only approved materials are being used. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. Do not finish rooms or spaces where rubbish has accumulated or while rubbish is being removed. Finishing will not be allowed in dusty rooms. Do not remove rubbish while finish is fresh. Surfaces to which finish is to be applied shall be dry and clean. B. Environmental Requirements: Do not finish outside surfaces in extreme cold, frosty, foggy, or damp weather. In winter weather, finish only when the temperature is 50 °F or over and surfaces are absolutely dry. Exterior painting shall not be allowed while dust is blowing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The best quality materials as manufactured by any of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: (Paint Only): 1. For Brush, Roller or Spray Work: a. Benjamin Moore b. Diamond Vogel c. Fuller O'Brien d. ICI Dulux e. Kelly -Moore f. Kwal Paint g. Pittsburgh h. Sherwin- Williams i. Approved substitute. 2. Interior Stain: a. Sherwin- Williams. b. Pittsburgh c. Approved substitute. 3. Exterior Stain: a. Okon b. Cabot C. Olympic d. Approved substitute B. Quality: All products not specified by name shall be "best grade" or "first line" products or acceptable manufacturers. See Part 3 Execution for materials required for this Project. Where possible, materials shall be of a single manufacturer. RDAI 2363.00 09900 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included under Preparation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to the Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of application means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Sand finishes on wood and metal surfaces between coats to assure smoothness and adhesion of subsequent coats. Use extra fine sandpaper to avoid cutting the edges when sanding. Apply putty or spackling compound after surfaces are primed and primer is dry. Bring material flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Surfaces shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting work. Fill cracks, holes or checks full and make smooth before finish is applied to surfaces. Fill any cracks, etc., which occur after walls are sized. B. Interior Wood Surfaces to be Painted: Remove sap on surface by solvent- wiping. Touch- up resinous areas and knots with an approved sealer. Fill voids with a high quality, lead - free Paste Wood filler after primer is dry. C. Ferrous Metal: Remove foreign material from unprimed metal with wire brush and dust clean. D. Shop Primed Metals: Touch -up shop primed metals with a primer similar to the existing. Sand shop primer on hollow metal work immediately before painting to remove grease and dirt film from surfaces. E. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Solvent clean with mineral spirits or other acceptable solvent in accordance with SSPC -SP 1 to remove all residue oil, grease or other contamination. Prime as specified. F. Interior Wood to be Clear Finished: Sand as required. Fill voids and nail holes after first coat is dry using a filler compatible with the finish system and matching color. G. Protection: Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where finishing is being done to protect floors and other work from damage during the execution of work. Where it becomes necessary to remove temporary coverings placed by others, replace same in proper manner. H. Remove oily rags and waste from the building every night. Do not allow to accumulate. Damage to Work of Others: Be responsible for any damage done to the work of other trades, repairing same to the satisfaction of the Architect. Replace any materials damaged to such an extent that they cannot be restored to their original condition. RDAI 2363.00 09900 -3 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Existing Surfaces: If the surfaces are not in proper shape for painting, repair, rebuild or refinish before proceeding with the work. Be responsible for any poor work caused by improper surfaces. The application of the first coat does not relieve the responsibility for the base. Do not apply any coats on either damp or wet surfaces and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard. B. Application: Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials and thoroughly brush out. Sand work between coats. C. Wood Doors: Finish the upper and lower edges of wood doors the same as the face. Do this work after doors have been fitted and are ready for final hanging. D. Colors: Finish coat shall be color as selected by Architect. Tint primers to match finish coat. E. Roller Application: Where paint or enamel is rolled on, use a fine nap roller so a nearly flat or orange peel texture is obtained. 3.04 COATING SYSTEM - INTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Woodwork and Wood Doors - Stained: First Coat Sherwin- Williams Wood Classics Oil Base Stain Second Coat Polyurethane Varnish Third Coat Polyurethane Varnish Sand with No. 00 sandpaper between coats. B. Woodwork - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi -Gloss Enamel C. Ferrous, Zinc Coated or Factory-Primed Metals - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer or Factory-Prime Coat Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi -Gloss Enamel D. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Painted: First Coat Factory-Prime Coat (Sanded) Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat- Semi -Gloss Enamel E. Block - Painted: First Coat Second Coat Third Coat RDAI 2363.00 Block Filler Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss 09900 -4 F. Drywall - Painted: Toilets And Kitchens First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss Third Coat Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss G. Drywall - Painted Flat: First Coat Second Coat Third Coat All Other Suitable Primer Latex, Flat Latex, Flat 3.05 COATING SYSTEM - EXTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Metal Doors, Frames and Ferrous Metals - Painted: First Coat Factory Prime Coat or Suitable Primer Second Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior B. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized) - Painted: First Coat All- Surface Acrylic Latex Primer Second Coat Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior C. Wood Trim, Wood Siding and Heavy Timber- Stained First Coat Okon Weatherpro Stain /Preservative Second Coat Okon Weatherpro Stain /Preservative 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Piping and Ductwork: Wherever insulated pipe or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished, cover canvas jacket with one coat sealer and two coats flat wall paint. Wherever uninsulated piping or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished or elsewhere as called for, finish pipes as called for under ferrous zinc coated, or factory primed metals. See Division 15 for identification markings. B. Grilles, Registers and Louvers: Prime coated grilles, registers and louvers, except those built permanently into masonry, will be delivered to this contractor by the party furnishing same. They shall be spray painted in colors as directed thoroughly covering all surfaces visible after installation and returned to the supplier for installation. After installation, do such touch up of screws and scuffed spots or repainting as required to achieve a uniform paint job. C. Boiler Stacks: Paint steel stacks with heat resistance stack paint. D. Objects on Roof: Paint all metal objects on the roof including, but not limited to, rooftop mechanical units, flashings, roof drains, vents, exhaust fans, air intake hoods, roof hatches, etc. as specified under ferrous, zinc coated metals. E. Prime Coated Hardware: Paint all door closers, removable mullions and prime coated hardware as specified under ferrous, zinc coated or factory primed metal - painted. F. Electrical Wiremold: Paint to match wall on which installed. RDAI 2363.00 3.07 CLEAN UP A. Final Clean -Up: At the completion of work, remove all surplus materials, staging, rubbish; clean off all paint, varnish, stains from floors, glass, walls, hardware; and leave the premises in clean condition. 3.08 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Paint: At the completion of painting, deliver to the Owner one full gallon of each paint color and type used along with the color number or formula for each type. RDAI 2363.00 END OF SECTION DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Wall Louvers 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS A. Design Criteria: Louver manufacturer shall design and provide structural supports to carry a wind load of not less than 40 psf on louvers. Design for expansion without distortion of louvers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate details, accessories and attachments. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. Deliver and store louvers and accessories in a dry place to avoid condensation or contact with materials that might cause staining such as lime, cement, fresh concrete or chemicals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Airolite 3. Accepted Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Construction Specialties Model 4105. Provide necessary accessories, braces and supports to withstand specified wind load. Provide for expansion, if required, by size of louver. All fastenings to be stainless steel or aluminum. Furnish all louvers with 1/2" mesh bird screen in removable aluminum frames. C. Description: Provide drainable blades, 50% free area, 4" deep. D. Aluminum Finish: Kynar 500 painted finish. Color as selected by Architect. RDAI 2363.00 10210 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10210 -2 SECTION 10310 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes prefabricated fireplace insert, steel flue and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Masonry Work: Sections 04060, 04070, 04080 and 04810. C. Related Sections: 1. Steel Lintels: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Design: Fireplace shall be designed for both wood burning and gas log at the Owner's option. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data on fireplaces and all accessories as specified under Section 01330 Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fireplaces and accessories must be listed and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the International Conference of Building Officials. Units, flues and installation shall meet building code requirements referenced in Division 1. B. Reference Standards: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 211. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store in original crates and under cover until ready for installation. s PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Majestic 2. Approved substitute B. Fireplace Insert: Majestic G 330, zero clearance type non - recirculating, flat black finish with refractory brick hearth and lining. C. Accessories: 1. Screens: Black mesh draw screen with black finish track at each opening. 2. Gas Log: Real Fyre ceramic gas log as manufactured by Robert H. Peterson Company or approved substitute. Size to fit fireplace. Style as selected by RDAI 2363.00 10310 -1 Architect. Furnish Type G -4 glowing ember burner, brass key operated with SPK -10 safety pilot kit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fireplace, flue and accessories according to approved shop drawings and product data manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain all required clearances to combustible materials. B. Gas Service: By Mechanical Contractor. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10310 -2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior door signs as required by code. B. Related Sections: 1. Lighted Exit Signs: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Products Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include installation instructions. Signage contractor to prepare a sign location plan and specification package for review and approval by Architect. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Color Chart: Submit color samples for selection by Architect. 2. Submit full size sign samples for review. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provisions for Users with Disabilities: Comply with all applicable provisions of ADAAG guidelines. All room numbers, restroom identification, and other permanent identifying devices shall have tactile type and symbols integral with signage. 2. Address Numbers: Comply with requirements of all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from single manufacturer. C. Pre - installation Meetings: - 1. Schedule a pre - installation meeting for interior signage. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling: In accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions. B. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and installation. C. Maintain protective coverings in place and in good repair until removal is necessary. D. Storage: Store products in dry condition inside enclosed facilities. 1.05 SCHEDULING Deliver signs when mounting surfaces are ready for installation work to proceed. RDAI 2363.00 10400 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR ETCHED SIGNS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI Sign Systems. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Types: 1. Mechanical Room Identification: Surface mounted on wall adjacent to doors of each mechanical room opening to a public space. 2. Public Restroom Identification: Surface mount on wall adjacent to doors at each public toilet indicating "Men" or "Women ". Braille and Universal Pictorial Symbols in conformance to ADAAG guidelines. C. Description: 1. Type: Engraved braille, routed copy. 2. Material: 1/16 inch ultra matte engraving stock, clear core. 3. Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Lettering Style: Optima, upper and lowercase fonts. Centered. Provide normal spacing between letters. Variation of letterforms is not acceptable. 5. Letter Size: One inch or best fit. 6. Sizes: a. Room Identification: 6 inch by 12 inch. 7. Graphics: a. Toilet Rooms: Universal symbol with braille. Handicap accessible symbol. 8. Mounting: Permanent adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS A. Locations: Mount permanent signage on walls in accordance with ADAAG guidelines. B. Mount at locations as indicated or as directed by the Architect and in compliance with all applicable codes. Attach by means of concealed theft - resistant adhesive mounts. Attach in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using only the mounting materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer for the surface upon which the items are to be mounted. C. Signs: Install straight level and plumb according to details. After installation, remove protective coverings, marks and fingerprints and leave signs and adjacent surfaces clean. D. Cooperate with other trades for installation of sign units to finish surfaces. Repair and replace damaged units as directed by the Architect. E. Protection: Protect units from damage until final acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10400 -2 SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 2. Fire Extinguishers B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Drywall Openings: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. Indicate types and locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Larsens' Manufacturing Company 2. J.L. Industries 3. Norris Industries 4. Seco Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Standard Fire Hose Company 6. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company 7. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation 8. Alenco 9. Potter - Roemer - 10. Accepted Substitute B. Cabinets: Larsen Model 2409 -6R duo -panel door with semi- recessed 18 gage steel box. Key lock with breakaway plastic face to open door. Provide fire rated cabinets where located in fire rated partitions. 1. Provide surface mounted cabinets in parking garage. C. Extinguishers: 10# multi - purpose A -B -C type with pressure gage. Furnish wall bracket for wall -hung extinguishers. RDAI 2363.00 10520 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets: Install cabinets according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide necessary wood blocking. Extinguishers: Install in cabinets or on wall brackets and leave fully charged. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10520 -2 SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pedestal Mounted Mail Boxes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified in Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Mailboxes and parcel lockers shall be manufactured and installed in strict accordance with US Postal Service regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAIL BOXES A. Mail boxes shall be pedestal mounted, rear - loading type with anodized aluminum front plate and doors and anodized aluminum boxes similar and equal to auth - florence model CBU -F. Each mailbox unit shall contain compartments arranged as indicated on the Drawings. B. All mail compartments shall be individually locked and entire mailbox unit shall be controlled by a single master lock. 1. Master Door: The security of the master door shall meet USPS- STD -4B +. C. Each mail compartment shall contain a 5/8" x 2" number slot with plastic window. Mailboxes shall be manufactured and installed in strict accordance with US Postal Service regulations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install postal specialties as recommended by the manufacturer and indicated on shop drawings. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10550 -1 SECTION 10810 BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bath accessories for Living Unit Baths: B. Related Sections: 1. All Glass Shower Enclosures: Section 10826. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIVING UNIT BATH ACCESSOREIS A. See Interior Design Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Fasten accessories rigidly and securely to walls using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjustment: Before final inspection, inspect each accessory installation for rigid and secure installation. Take action necessary for rigid and secure installations. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10810 -1 SECTION 10826 ALL GLASS SHOWER ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Swinging Shower Doors and Enclosures B. Related Sections: 1. Bath Accessories: Section 10810. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data for all doors and enclosures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOWER DOOR AND ENCLOSURES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Century Shower Door 2. Keystone Shower Doors 3. Approved Substitute B. Swinging Shower Door Enclosures: Century Glasstec shower door and enclosure or approved substitute. Full floor to ceiling construction with sizes as indicated. 1. Door Pulls: As selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Adjust to work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Readjust at completion of job if directed by Architect. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 10826 -1 DAVISON 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pedestal mounted card operator 2. Vehicle detectors. 3. Detector loops. 4. Auxiliary components. Related Sections: 1. Cast -In -Place Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Electrical Rough -In and Final Hook -Up: Division 16 Electrical. 3. Overhead Sectional Garage Doors: Section 08361. 4. Overhead Coiling Garage Doors: Section 08330. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: System shall be a " card in - free out" system. B. Entrance: Upon entering the entrance lane, the vehicle operator shall use his card to operate the switch unit. This operation will open the sectional or coiling door to allow entrance. As the vehicle proceeds into the facility; it is sensed by the closing loop which closes the door after the vehicle has left the detection system. C. Exit: Upon entering the exit lane, the vehicle will be sensed by the opening loop that will open the door. As the vehicle proceeds out of the facility, it will be sensed by the closing loop that will close the sectional or overhead door after the vehicle has left the detection system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include equipment wiring diagram and electrical circuitry diagram. Include evidence of the manufacturer's approval of the installer. Coordinate with shop drawings for sectional overhead garage doors.. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Maintain an approved equipment service center within 100 miles of the project site. The service center shall: 1. Use experienced manufacturer - trained personnel. 2. Assume total responsibility for proper installation and operation of all components within the system. B. All Equipment: Provided by the same manufacturer and UL approved. RDAI 2363.00 11150 -1 C. Installer: Worked continuously and successfully with the equipment manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's one -year warranty for materials and installation in accordance with Section 01780. Warranty shall cover keeping equipment operational. L• 1; � � 1: � � 111 l� 1 [ •' l 2.01 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cincinnati. 2. Federal APD. 3. Approved Substitute. B. Auxiliary Items: Provide auxiliary items required for the complete proper functioning of the system including but not limited to heaters, wiring, transformers, relays, etc. C. Operating Conditions: Provide equipment with sufficient insulation, heating and cooling systems to operate effectively under the following climatic and exposure conditions: Equipment Minimum Temperature Maximum Temperature Operators -20° F. 110° F. D. Keys: Provide the Owner with 2 sets of keys for equipment cabinets. Keys shall be unique to this parking equipment and not fit any other equipment in the area. E. Cards: Coordinate with electronic room security system so room access card will also operate card or key reader for garage doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: Inspect setting surfaces, power wiring and conduit installation to verify that they are proper for a satisfactory installation. Report and unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. B. Acceptance: Beginning of Installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Provide those responsible for related work with: 1. Installation diagrams and details for setting equipment. 2. Templates and cast -in inserts for setting equipment. 3. Electrical wiring diagrams and details. 4. Electrical power requirements. RDAI 2363.00 11150 -2 B. Electrical: Meet with the Division 16 contractor before any rough -in work begins to review the project in relation to the parking equipment. Explain details and precautions necessary to assure a proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION AND SYSTEM START -UP A. General: Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and reviewed shop drawings. B. Adjustment: Program the equipment as necessary to ensure proper operation as specified under System Description in Part 1. Adjust and tune the system as required to assure proper operation. Test all functions. C. Acceptance: System must operate continuously for 5 days with no down time in order to considered acceptable. 3.04 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Demonstration: Instruct the Owners personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with Section 01780. B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01780. Include wiring and electrical circuitry diagrams. 3.05 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE A. Service: Provide maintenance and callback service of parking equipment for a period of one year from the time of final acceptance of the project. Use only original manufacturer's parts for replacements. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 11150 -3 SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Kitchen Appliances B. Related Sections: 1. Cabinets: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. B. Ductwork: Division 15 Mechanical. C. Electrical Hook -Up: Division 16 Electrical. D. Other Appliances: By Owner. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Appliances by General Electric: 1. Appliances: See Interior Design Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Appliances: Install in casework according to manufacturer's instructions. Duct connection and electrical hookup will be provided under Divisions 15 and 16. END OF SECTION a RDAI 2363.00 11451 -1 DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 12481 FLOOR MATS A. Section Includes: 1. Entrance floor mat and frame assemblies. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Mat frame for installation under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and technical data, with all options to be provided clearly indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout of recessed mats and frames. a. Include installation details, anchors and accessories. b. Include dimensioned drawing of recesses in concrete floor slab to receive mat and frame assemblies. Where recess is to be oversized to allow later frame installation, indicate both preliminary and final recess sizes. 3. Samples: a. Submit one 12 inch by 12 inch sample of the specified mat and frame assembly. b. Submit samples of tread inserts and rails for Architect's color selection or verification. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600, B. Delivery: Deliver materials in unopened original factory packaging. C. Storage: Store components in original containers in a clean, dry location. 1.04 SCHEDULING Schedule installation of mat and frame assembly to occur after building enclosure is complete and when related floor finish work is in progress. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAT AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Arden Architectural Specialties; Inc. 2. Balco Inc. RDAI 2363.00 12481 -1 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. (C /S). 4. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Mat and Frame Assembly Type: C/S Pedimat M2 All Aluminum with surface mounted frame. 1. Mat Rails: Extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum. Continuously hinged to permit rollback for cleaning. a. Color: Clear anodized. D. Tread Inserts: Serrated aluminum. Field replaceable. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. a. Recesses: Field measure before fabrication of mats and frames. 2. Substrate: Verify substrate is smooth, level and suitable to receive mat. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mat Frame: Deliver for installation under Section 03300. B. Mat: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, aligned plumb and level. 1. Tread Inserts: Positively locked into rails. C. Coordinate installation for correct elevation with adjacent flooring and with bottom of doors that swing across mats. 3.03 PROTECTION A. After installation of frame, install temporary filler of plywood in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. B. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 12481 -2 SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver window blinds at all exterior living unit windows and doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Samples: Submit complete set of color samples for Architect's selection. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 600. Deliver and store in original crates under cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Levolor Riviera 2. Bali Blinds 3. Hunter Douglas Flexalum 4. Approved Substitute. B. Description: Levolor Riviera with 1" wide aluminum slats, Magic Wand Guardian Tilter and Cord Lift Control. Provide separate section for each window section. Color as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Field measure all openings before fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds with brackets at required locations. B. Adjust for smooth operation. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 12491 -1 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTUCTION SECTION 13157 SWIMMING POOL AND WHIRLPOOL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Pool contractor shall design, furnish and install all equipment and materials required for the following, complete and functioning in compliance with drawings, these specifications and all applicable codes and regulations. 1. Swimming pool. 2. Whirl pool. B. Section includes the following work by pool contractor: 1. Excavation to shape required to receive gunite concrete and removal of excavated material from the site. 2. Design and placement of steel reinforcing. 3. Placement of gunite concrete. 4. Trimming, finishing and curing of gunite concrete. 5. Cutouts for steps, inserts, lights and mechanical equipment. 6. Interior plaster swimming pool finish, the depth markers, waterline the and coping. 7. Ceramic the interior finish for whirlpool. 8. Deck equipment. 9. Complete filter systems including filter, water treatment system, pumps, valves, vacuum cleaner, connections to heater, connecting pool piping to filter, and all necessary pipe and fittings for filter and pool equipment for swimming pool and whirlpool. Provide all start up chemicals. 10. Gas fired pool heaters. 11. Dewatering of pool excavation during pool construction. 12. Gravel sub -base, drain tile under pool and pipe to daylight outlet. 13. Pool lights for swimming pool and whirlpool. 14. Hydrojets and pump for whirlpool. C. Related Sections: 1. Compacted Fill and Other Earthwork Preceding Pool Excavation: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Concrete Pool Deck: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3. Pool Deck Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 4. Pool Drainage Connection: Division 15 Mechanical. 5. Pool Fill Connection: Division 15 Mechanical. 6. Electrical Equipment and Connection: Division 16 Electrical. D. Construction Manager Responsibility: 1. Layout, location and elevations for pool excavation. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -1 E. Work by Other Contractors: 1. Concrete Decks: After the guniting operation is completed, pour and finish concrete deck in accordance with Section 03300. 2. Caulking: All expansion and caulk joints as required and shown and between pool deck and roll out rim in accordance with Section 07920. 3. Pool Equipment Room: Construct pool equipment room as shown on drawings. F. Work by Mechanical Contractor: 1. Furnish and install water service to filter room, pool fill line and to other equipment in pool area as shown on drawings. 2. Install gas service and connect to pool heaters. 3. Install vent stacks for pool water heaters and connect to heaters. 4. Furnish and install sumps, pumps, piping for waste removal from filter room and pool area as shown on drawings. 5. Provide fill water for pool and whirlpool. G. Work by Electrical Contractor: 1. Electrical Service: Provide electrical service to filter room and pool as required, including all conduit, wiring, junction boxes, switches, panels, motor starters, start/stop stations, GFI protection system, wiring to all motors and equipment. 2. Grounding: Perform all grounding required for pool and pool components, rebar, filter room equipment, all outlets in accordance with NEC Section 680, state and local codes. 3. Furnish temporary power to pool contractor as required. 1.02 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Pool Data: Design pumping and filtration system for 6 hour turnover for pool and 30 minute turnover for whirlpool or as required by code. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Unless specified otherwise, follow recommendations of the following: 1. Detailing, Fabrication and Placement of Reinforcing Steel: ACI 301, 315 and 318. 2. Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete: ACI 304. 3. Application of Concrete by Pneumatic Pressure: ACI 805. 4. Recommended Practice for Shotcreting: ACI 506R- 90(95) - Guide to Shotcrete.. 5. Specification for Shotcrete: ACI 506.2 -95. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit with proposal in accordance with Section 01330. See Document 00200. Include all equipment and accessories. Design Drawings: Submit to General Contractor. C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Prepared by and stamped by professional engineer registered in State of Colorado. 2. Working Stresses: Based upon predetermined ultimate strengths of materials used with safety factor of not less than 2-1/2. DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES RDAI 2363.00 13157 -2 D. Permits and Fees: 1. Prepare and submit drawings and other documents for pools as required to obtain building permits and state and county health permits. 2. Obtain and pay for all required inspections, permits and fees. Provide notices as required by governmental authorities. E. Testing Reports: Reports of all control tests, special tests or core tests specified under Field Quality Control shall be distributed by the testing laboratory as listed under Section 01450 Quality Control F. Previous Test Reports: The concrete supplier shall have on record and available for Architect's review the following: 1. Reports of compliance tests of aggregate made during the last six months. 2. Reports of compression tests made on samples taken from similar mix designs. G. Samples: Submit samples for all items requiring color selection. H. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01785. Include manufacturer's literature and drawings covering requirements and recommendations for proper operation, maintenance, and service availability of all pool equipment and system. Include preventative maintenance schedule for total system. 2. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pool Designer and Installer: Company specializing in design, engineering, fabrication and installation of swimming pool systems. 1. Experience: Continuously designed and installed pools of similar size and magnitude in State of Colorado for five years. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The pool contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience as a contractor specializing in the placement of wet process gunite for swimming pools and shall have sufficient equipment in good working condition on the job site to secure the placement rate necessary. 2. Only experienced foremen, gunmen and nozzlemen shall be employed. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all provisions of applicable standards, whether or not such provisions and standards are referenced in Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency: All testing shall be done by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid by the pool contractor. See Field Quality Control. E. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the pool contractor listing the time and date of placement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect for examination at any time. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -3 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequencing and Scheduling: Schedule and coordinate swimming pool earthwork, concrete work, plumbing work and electrical work with General Contractor and work of other contractors as required for expeditious completion of pool work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitating or other transportation device within 1 -1 /2 hours after the mixing water has been added. B. Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix. Any additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the truck ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where extra water is added to the concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of the drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or when the mean daily temperatures are below 40° F, follow recommendations of ACI 306. Maintain concrete temperature at a minimum of 50° F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. The concrete may not contain calcium chloride. Maintain forms in place for a minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete. High early strength cement may be used. Do not place concrete without approval of the Architect on days when the temperature at 9 AM is below 30 °F until, in the opinion of the Architect the Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all the necessary equipment to prevent the concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305. The optimum temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85 °F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. When the air temperatures are expected to exceed 90 1 F., the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Construction Manager on the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing, and curing of concrete. Pozzolith Retarder, as manufactured by Master Builders CO., Cleveland, Ohio, Or approved substitute, may be used. The use of continuous fog sprays may be required by the Architect for 24 hours after depositing or the work restricted to evening or nights, especially in times of low humidity. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Shell of pool and whirlpools including all related work, warranted against cracking or failure to hold water for a period of 3 years from date of completion provided the pool is: Kept full except for a period of ten (10) days per year for maintenance; the water table is not above the lowest point of the pool, the structure is not damaged by earthquake, earth or earthfill movement, or conditions not occasioned by the contractor. B. Plaster surfaces warranted for two years against delamination, but not against discoloration. C. Equipment installed by pool contractor warranted by equipment manufacturer and installer per manufacturer standards for a minimum of one year. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -4 D. Owner must maintain pool water according to a chemical program set up by the Contractor. Should such a program not be maintained the warranties shall become void. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GUNITE A. General: Complete pool tank for swimming pool and whirlpool is to be constructed by the wet gunite system and conform to ACI 506.2. Pool structure shall be designed as a monolithic unit and all pneumatically applied concrete shall be placed so far as possible in one continuous operation. Dry type gunite process is unacceptable. A C. M E. Cement: Type V Portland cement. Gravel: 3/8" diameter, well rounded, washed clean of all impurities. Crushed stone or gravel chips are unacceptable. Sand: Clean, hard, sharp particles. Moisture content not to exceed 5% by weight. Sand shall be graded within these limits: Passing Through 3/8" Screen #4 Mesh #8 " #16 Passing Through 3/8" Screen #30 " #50 " #100" Percent by Weight 100 98 -100 70 -95 Percent by Weight 45 -65 15 -35 0 Proportions: Premixed concrete shall have the following proportions per yard: 80% Sand 20% Pea Gravel 10% Water 3 Oz. Pozzolith Compound 8 -1/2 Bags Portland Cement 3 -1/2 Oz. Air Entrainment Compound � F. Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days. G. Slump: Maximum 3" slump. 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL A. Standard sizes of deformed bars equal to requirement of "Standard Specifications for Billet Steel, Concrete Reinforcement ", intermediate grade, Serial Designation A615 as adopted by ASTM, or rail steel reinforcing bars, equal to requirements of Serial Designation GR40 adopted by ASTM. R DAI 2363.00 13157 -5 2.03 POOL FINISH A. White Marsite plaster swimming pool finish with tile at waterline for swimming pool. B. Interior of whirlpool shall be fully lined with 1 "x 1" or 2 "x 2" thickset ceramic tile. 2.04 POOL COPING A. Precast terrazzo pool coping around swimming pool and whirlpool. Provide mitered and radius corners as required. Color as selected by Architect. 2.05 CERAMIC TILE A. Includes depth markers and 18" high waterline the by pool contractor. All tile by American Olean Tile Co. Also includes whirlpool. B. Exterior Tile: Frostproof, acidproof and stain resistant porcelain tile. 1. Pool Tile: 6 "x 6" installed as continuous band at water line. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect. Submit samples for acceptance. 2.06 PIPE, FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES A. Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, Type II permanently marked with manufacturer's name, PVC 2116, nominal size, and NSF approval. 1. Size so that velocities do not exceed 8 FPS. 2. Fittings: Schedule 40 white PVC, Type I. B. Skimmers: 1. Equip skimmers with vacuum trim and equalizer fittings. 2. Minimum Through Rate: 30 GPM. 3. Number: Provide minimum of three (3). 4. Locations: As required per Regulatory Requirements. C. Return Line Fittings: Provide a minimum of: Four (4). D. Drains: 1. Provide one (1) at deep end of swimming pool and one in whirl pool. E. Inlets: Combination of floor and side wall inlets. 2.07 UNDERWATER LIGHTS A. Swimming *Pool Light Fixtures: 1. Lights: 500 watt lamp enclosed in stainless steel housing cast into pool wall. 2. Equip light with nickel- chrome plated bronze face ring. 3. Swimming Pool: Provide total of four. 4. Whirl pool: One in whirlpool. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -6 2.08 HEATING, FILTRATION CHLORINATION AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Filter: Single filter or separate filters for swimming pool and whirlpool. 1. Type: Rapid sand type, 50 psi maximum working pressure, fiberglass reinforced plastic tank. B. Circulation Pumps: As required. 1. Pumps: Equipped with oversize hair and lint strainers. C. Flow Meter: 1. Provide with rate -of -flow indicators on pump discharge line leading to filters, calibrated for measuring both water for filtration and backwash. Install activating element creating pressure differential for indication of flow with adequate clear distance upstream and downstream to obtain reasonable degree of accuracy. 2. Rate Indicator: Calibrated for and provided with scale reading in gpm and with range of 10% below established filtration rate and 10% above backwash rate established. D. Heaters: Provide gas fired pool heater for swimming pool and whirlpool as.required to maintain temperature for outside swimming in winter. E. Chlorinators: Tablet type feeder. 2.09 STAIR RAILS AND LADDERS A. Deck Mounted Stair Rails for Swimming Pool and Whirlpool: 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel tube. 2. Provide at locations as indicated. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Swan b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 600. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Pool Fittings: Non - corrosive material. B. Safety and Rescue Equipment: Provide as required by state and county regulations for pool, equipment, and chlorine storage. 1. Submit product data to Architect for acceptance. C. Chemical Testing Equipment: 1. Provide as required for monitoring of pool chemical and pH levels for minimum period of one year from pool acceptance. D. Cleaning Equipment: Provide vacuum cleaner, wall brush, hose, leaf nets, etc. E. Whirlpool Hydro Jets and Pump: Provide as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 POOL EXCAVATION AND GRADING A. Layout work and elevations by General Contractor. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -7 B. Pool contractor shall provide all labor and necessary equipment for rough machine excavation of pool areas and removal of excess soil from the site. Pool contractor also to furnish all necessary labor and equipment required for hand trimming of pool and be fully responsible for directing all excavation operations in order to obtain proper depths and contours of the pool. C. Rough excavation and hand trim shall be carried on as one operation to aid in eliminating over excavation. Over excavate pool depth by a minimum of 1' -0" deep. In order to obtain an even wall line, the excavation shall be cut to exact shape of vertical and curved portion of wall and checked in vertical position with carpenter's level. Floor area shall be fine graded by placing of screeds at intervals. D. Any voids that may occur due to over excavation shall be filled with a lean mixture of concrete or granular fill compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. E. A tolerance of 1 " shall be allowed in excavation subgrade. F. All excavated material shall be disposed of off site as directed by.General Contractor. G. After completion of pool excavation, to prevent movement during shooting of pneumatically applied concrete. 1" thick strips shall be nailed to top of forms, the ends of which shall denote interior face of pool shell. A taut ground wire shall be anchored to the end of these strips. Purpose of this wire is to act as a cutting line for interior face of pool shell. 3.02 SUB -BASE AND DRAIN TILE A. Place 4" diameter "ADS" type, perforated flexible drain line under swimming pool and extend to daylight drain as required. B. Cover entire swimming pool area with a minimum depth fill of 1 ft. of 3/4" diameter to 1- 1 /2" diameter sized washed river gravel. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Place before concrete placing is started. Steel shall be new, free from dirt, oil, paint and mill scale in position and sizes indicated on drawings; secure by not less than 16 gauge annealed tie wire. Metal chairs or concrete blocks shall be used to insure proper spacing. 3.04 PLACING FITTINGS A. Pool contractor shall place, before beginning the concrete work, all piping, all special pool and equipment anchors, receptacles, or mounting shells for underwater lights that are to be embedded in concrete and shall be responsible for their positioning in accordance with drawings. 3.05 PLACING OF GUNITE A. General: Apply structural gunite against thoroughly compacted earth that will not yield during application of gunite. Entire surface of pool excavation shall be dampened with a fine water spray just prior to start of gunite operation. Where gunite is applied against RDAI 2363.00 13157 -8 existing concrete, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and drenched with water at least twice on the day before placing gunite. Surfaces upon which gunite is to be applied shall be sufficiently damp to prevent excessive absorption of water content in the gunite mix, but not so wet as to overcome suction. Gunite deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angels to surface, starting at the bottom and continuing upward. Build up in layers of thickness that will not slump, allowing sufficient time between the placing of layers for initial set to take place. All loose, fine aggregate or rebound shall be removed from the surface before placing the succeeding layers and whenever possible, the first layer shall entirely cover the reinforced steel in order to secure it in its proper position. B. Quality of Finished Gunite: Pools shall be free from cracks, honeycombs, spalls, voids and other surface defects. Surface shall be of adequate roughness and levelness to provide for proper bond for tile and plaster finish. C. Curing: All structural gunite shall be kept continuously wet for a period of five days, or the entire pool shall be covered with plastic film. No curing compound allowed. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ROLLOUT COPING, WATER LINE TILE, DEPTH MARKERS AND WHIRLPOOL TILE A. Submit shop drawings for approval before ordering tile. Show elevations and sections of pool tank with detail of coping showing layout of individual tiles. Indicate also locations of all the markings and lettering, showing exact locations and positions of individual tiles. B. Deliver all products to job in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals unbroken and intact. Maintain temperature at 50 °F minimum during the work and for seven days after completion. Supply extra 2% of each color of each shape and size tile in clean marked cartons for Owner's use. C. For materials for setting bed and grout, follow recommendations of Tile Council of America Specification #P431. D. Before tiling, check tank shell for acceptability as follows: 1. Tank wall surface medium -rough texture. 2. All surfaces to be tiled free of dust, rust, paint, from oil or other release coatings. 3. Provision for grab bar ladders, lights at proper locations. 4. Plane of concrete set back average of 1 -1 /2" from finished the face with 1/4" maximum additional deviation all owed. 5. Concrete shall be true to line, level, plumb and curvature. 6. Width, depth and length shall permit finished accuracy of markings and dimensions. E. Align all joints to give uniform grout lines. Use products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of manufacturer. Proportion all mixes in accordance with latest ANSI Standard Specifications. Smooth all exposed edges. Use Portland cement mortar bed. 1 -1/2" minimum on concrete. Follow ANSI A108.1 (Reference TCA P431) using dry set mortar bond coat on cured bed. Clean tile surface as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. Delay acid cleaning for at least 10 days following completion of grouting. G. Before acid cleaning, saturate with clean water all grout joints in areas to be cleaned. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -9 H. Use 1 part muriatic acid to 9 parts water for cleaning off grout film. As soon as cleaning is done. Hose down thoroughly to completely remove all traces of residual acid. 3.07 APPLICATION OF PLASTER FINISH A. General: 1. Swimming pool shell shall be free from cracks, honeycombing, spalls, voids, and other defects. Surfaces shall have adequate roughness and levelness in order to provide a proper surface for ceramic the and plaster. Contractor to roughen with bush hammer if directed by Architect. 2. Provide complete preparation and finish for floors and walls of pool tank interior. Perform this work by a specialist having provided finish for a minimum of at least 10 pools. 3. Coordinate with tile installer to assure proper completion of pool edge coping and lane markers. 4. Protect tile, deck, deck equipment, fittings and other items by suitable coverings. B. Preparation: 1. Check alignment of surfaces and their suitability to receive the finish.. If the finish thickness will be more than 3/8" thick or more than 20% of the area will be 1/8" thick for true surfaces, apply leveling coat to true up the substrate. 2. Neutralize concrete with 1:8 muriatic acid solution brushed over all surfaces and rinse thoroughly with clean water. 3. Apply leveling coat if needed. C. Mixing: Mix leveling coat (if needed) and finish coat in mechanical batch mixer as follows: 1. Leveling Coat: 1 Part Portland Cement 3 Parts Sand. 1 Qt. Anti -Hydro Per Sack of Cement 2. Finish Coat: 1 Sack White Portland Cement Plus 1 No. 2 Shovelful 2 Sacks White Marble Sand 1 Oz. Air Entraining Agent 1 Gal. Hydrated Lime 1 Qt. Anti -Hydro D. Application: 1. Trowel on leveling coat (if needed) to bring surfaces within specified tolerances. Moist cure 48 hours and allow to dry 7 days. 2. Apply finish coat to minimum 1/8" thickness, 3/8" maximum thickness and 1/4" average. 3. Apply finish coat with pneumatic plaster pump. Scratch in and double back before scratch coat has taken up. Steel trowel minimum of two times and as required to produce smooth, hard, uniform finish free of blemishes. Furnish sufficient experienced craftsmen to complete entire tank finish in one day. Start at deep end and proceed in continuous operation. Immediately on completion of finish, start filling of pool and bring up to full level without interruption. 4. If work must extend over more than one day, provide moist curing and continue the following day. RDAI 2363.00 13157 -10 3.08 POOL AND FILTER ROOM PIPING A. Furnish and install all piping, fittings, valves from the pool system to filter room, connecting to all equipment at pool and in the filter room. Plumbing installation to be complete within the limits of the pool work. B. Pool contractor is to provide all trenching and backfill. Support all horizontal runs on pipe on a gravel fill. Comply with compaction requirements of Section 02300 Earthwork. C. Support all piping on a minimum of 8 ft. centers. D. Plumbing Pressure Testing: Pressure test all piping, including buried piping. Pressure -test all plumbing to fixtures cast in pool prior to placement of gunite. 1. Pressure Testing: Performed in presence of Architect. 2. Flush lines, cap, and pressurize to 80 psi and hold for 12 hours. 3. Repair and repeat testing of failed lines until successful test. a. Repair leaks by removing and replacing damage parts. 4. Provide testing equipment as required. 3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install equipment in locations as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide vents, drains, valves, fittings, and appurtenances as required for proper operation. B. Electrical: Provide electrical hook -up of equipment and other electrical work as indicated on drawings. 1. Comply with applicable state and local codes and with National Electrical Code. Bond pool to comply with National Electrical Code. C. Start-Up: 1. Filling: Fill with water. 2. Chemicals: Provide chemicals required for initial chemical treatment and as required for first 30 days of operation. Install in pool as required to comply with State and County water quality standards. 3. Testing: Operate and test all equipment. Make repairs and adjustments required for proper system operation. 4. Start-Up: Start -up system to operating condition. Make adjustments for proper operation. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstration: Instruct Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of pool equipment and facility in accordance with Section 01800. Post written operational instructions in conspicuous locations within pool equipment room. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Testing: 1. The pool contractor shall employ and pay an independent testing laboratory approved by the. Architect to perform control testing of compressive strength of the gunite concrete in accordance with ACI 506.2. Make unreinforced test panels at least l" square and 3" thick with gunned shotcrete as work progresses and as RDAI 2363.00 13157 -11 specified herein. Extract cores or cubes from the test panels for compressive tests in accordance with ASTM C39. Make visual inspection of the shotcrete to check for uniformity, lamination or separation and other visual defects. 2. The number of and frequency of tests shall be determined by the Architect prior to any placement of concrete by pool contractor. Two cylinders or cubes shall be furnished for each of the following conditions: 1) Each day's pour. 2) Each type of concrete. 3) Each change of supplies or source. 41 Each 50 cubic yards of concrete and fraction thereof. B. Test Procedures: 1. Obtain samples of concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172. Take all test samples at point of placement. 2. One cylinder or cube shall be broken at 7 days and the other at 28 days. 3. A slump test in accordance with ASTM C 143 shall be made and reported for each cylinder group. 4. Test results shall be reported as specified under Section 01450 Quality Control. 5. If, at any time, the concrete control test specimens shown a compressive strength of 28 days or less than that required, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, have sufficient core tests taken, the number and location to be approved by the Architect on such portions of the work as may have been affected to determine the actual condition of the concrete. The securing, preparing and testing shall be in accordance with C42. Should the tests reveal that the concrete does not meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace the entire section involved and /or make all corrections deemed necessary by the Architect. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 13157 -12 SECTION 13851 INTELLIGENT REPORTING FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. B. Contract drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both. If inconsistency exists, the most restrictive requirement shall be applied. C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of 2002 Edition of NFPA 72 and the requirements of the AHJ. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. D. The system and its components shall be UL listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in compliance with the UL listing. 1.02 REFERENCES The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 edition 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 2002 edition 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 2002 edition Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 2. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective 3. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances 4. UL 1480 Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use 5. UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances C. International Building Code 2003 edition as amended by City of Vail Building Department D. International Fire Code 2003 edition as amended by City of Vail Building Department E. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) which is the Vail Fire and Emergency Rescue department. F. The system shall have proper listing and /or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: 1. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2. FM Factory Mutual RDAI 23263 13851 -1 06/12/06 G. The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 (Control Units) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system providing Voice /Alarm Signaling Service shall be installed in accordance with the project specifications and drawings. Minimally the system shall include a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FRCP) located as shown on the drawings for the purpose of monitoring addressable devices, notifying occupants of an alarm, and reporting alarms and supervisory signals to an approved Central Station via a Digital Alarm Communicating Transmitter (DACT). B. Basic Performance: 1. System Detectors with Sounder Bases shall be provided for all living units. Activation of a unit smoke detector shall cause a supervisory condition at the FACP and shall also cause the sounder base to activate in all rooms associated with that unit. Smoke detector activation in designated handicapped units shall also activate the Visual Notification appliances associated with that unit without activating notification devices outside the unit. 2. For general alarm conditions, occupant notification shall be accomplished by playing a pre- recorded digital voice message over listed speakers of sufficient quantity to provide for audibility and intelligibility as required by NFPA 72, 2002 edition. 3. System shall incorporate an integral microphone for manual override of the pre- recorded message. 4. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 5. Initiation Device shall report as an addressable device connected to the SLC circuit. 6. Exterior Water Flow Alarm Signal: Provide horn and strobe unit listed for exterior use to be located above the fire department connection. Strobe candela shall be 110. The horn /strobe unit shall have a minimum audibility level of 86 dBA at ten feet. Mount above each fire department connection at a height of ten to fifteen feet above adjacent grade. This device shall track sprinkler water flow, and shall be unaffected by the Signal Silence activation at the FACP. 7. Elevators shall be protected as indicated on the plans and shall be in compliance with ANSI A 17.1. Sequence of operation for elevators shall be as follows: a. A smoke detector shall be provided at the top of the elevator shaft, in the elevator machine room, and at each elevator lobby. Activation of one of these smoke detectors shall initiate elevator primary recall to the first floor, except for the primary level of egress. If the primary level of egress lobby detector activates, the elevator shall initiate alternate floor recall to the second floor. b. Elevator Phase 2 operation shall be provided by the elevator vendor. c. A heat detector shall be provided within 2 feet of each sprinkler within the elevator machine room and bottom of each elevator shaft. The heat detector shall have a maximum activation temperature of 165 °F. Activation of the heat detector shall initiate elevator recall (if not already initiated by the smoke detector). Once recall is complete, the elevator shunt trip is to occur to disconnect power from the elevator. D. Basic System Functional Operation - When a general fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices (i.e., manual station, water flow, heat RDAI 23263 13851 -2 06/12/06 detectors, or common area smoke detector), the following functions shall immediately occur: a. The system alarm LED on the FACP shall flash. b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. c. The display on the FACP shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location. d. The FACP shall be capable of logging all alarm and supervisory events and storing the information indefinitely, along with time and date of occurrence. e. Alarm signals shall be transmitted via a DACT to a monitoring station. f. A digitized voice message shall be broadcast throughout the building. g. All door holders shall release. h. All fans shall shut down. L All smoke dampers shall close. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Four (4) copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the engineer for review prior to submittal to the AHJ. 2. After acceptance by the engineer, the submittal shall be submitted to the Vail Fire and Emergency Service Department (AHJ) as required for their review and permitting process. B. Shop Drawings 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point -to -point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Battery and Voltage Drop calculations shall be included. 4. Provide all information as required by NFPA 72 and the AHJ. C. Manuals 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of system operation that provides, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. 1.04 WARRANTY A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. PART 2 - PRODUCTS RDAI 23263 13851 -3 06/12/06 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. 2.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing, these conductors, per NEC Article 760 -29. 4. Wiring shall be in conduit in the parking garage area and similar areas where the likelihood of damage is increased. B. Wire 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and /or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 6. No terminations or splices outside of buildings or enclosures shall be permitted. 7. All terminations shall be at terminal strips. Pigtail connections shall not be used. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. 2. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. 3. Surge suppression shall be provided for all circuits at the point of exit and entry from a building or enclosure. 4. All addressable fire alarm devices shall be labeled in a manner acceptable to the engineer with their respective SLC address descriptor. 2.03 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The FACP shall be completely microprocessor based and shall be listed for Voice /Alarm Signaling Service. The system shall be capable of broadcasting an automatic digital voice message approved by the AHJ, and also provide for manual override of the voice message via an integral microphone. B. Basic System Operator Controls RDAI 23263 13851 -4 06/12/06 I . Acknowledge Switch: Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and /or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady -ON. 2. Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all alarm devices to return to the normal condition after an alarm. 3. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. 4. Lamp Test: The Lamp Test switch shall activate all system LEDs and light each segment of the liquid crystal display. C. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The fire alarm control panel shall include a full featured, operator interface. 2. The system shall be fully field programmable. 3. The FACP shall provide the minimum following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy and reduce false alarms. b. Detector sensitivity test, per NFPA 72. c. Maintenance alert, to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. Multiple sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. e. System status reports to display or printer. f. Alarm verification, with verification counters. g. Cross zoning with the capability of counting two detectors in alarm. h. Walk test. i. Selectable sensitivity levels, three minimum. j. History Storage, with a minimum of 400 events. k. Point Enable /Disable. I. Point Read (status and level of obscuration). D. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) 1. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and intelligent modules (monitor or control). Each SLC loop shall be wired NFPA 72 Style 4. E. Power Supplies 1. The main power supply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide available power for the control panel and peripheral devices. 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio - visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio - visual power supplies or field mounted power supplies. 3. Over - current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger. 4. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual -rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. 5. All circuits shall be power - limited, per UL864 requirements and include earth fault detection. 6. The main power supply shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current. F. Specific System Operations 1. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. RDAI 23263 13851 -5 06/12/06 2. Waterflow Operation: An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be affected by the signal silence switch. 3. Supervisory Operation: An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the 80 character display. 4. Signal Silence Operation: The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay, speaker, etc.) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch. 2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices - General 1. All initiating devices provided and installed for the project shall be intelligent addressable devices unless otherwise noted. 2. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. 3. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide alarm and power /polling LEDs. LED(s) shall flash under normal conditions and LED(s) shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating an alarm condition. 4. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system. 5. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a separate twist -lock base with tamper proof feature. 6. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 7. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real -time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm /normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 8. LEDs shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 9. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test each detector for 100% obscuration, reported to the FRCP. B. Addressable Pull Box (manual station) 1. Manual pull stations shall be non -break glass double action style devices. 2. Manual pull stations shall be suitable for semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches or more than 48 inches above the finished floor. 3. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test -reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 4. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. C. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector - Ionization smoke detectors are not permitted. RDAI 23263 13851 -6 06/12/06 D. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light- scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. E. Intelligent Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector 1. Duct Detectors shall be analog addressable devices connected to the SLC loop. Activation of duct detector shall cause a supervisory condition on the FACP and shall cause their associated air handling equipment to shut down. Duct detectors shall be furnished with a remote indicating light and keyed test switch mounted a maximum of T above the finished floor in a location approved by the owner. F. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect dry contact devices as needed. G. Addressable Control Module 1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of fans and other auxiliary control functions. H. Hard Wired Thermal Detectors 1. Heat detectors provided in unconditioned areas shall be hard wired Thermotech model 302 -AW devices or approved equal. Individual or groups of thermal detectors shall be monitored by addressable monitor modules as specified on the plans. 2.05 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - NOTIFICATION DEVICES A. All notification appliances shall meet UL 464, UL 1971 and /or UL 1480 requirements, as applicable. B. Speaker only units shall be flush mounted units with white cover plates. Devices shall be Gamewell SP20OW or approved equal. C. Combination speaker /strobe units shall have white finish. Devices shall be Gamewell SP2W41224MC or approved equal. 2.06 BATTERIES A. The batteries shall be sealed Gel Cell type, 12 volt nominal (two required). B. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 24 hours plus 15 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. 2.07 DOOR HOLDERS A. Door holders shall be wall mounted magnetic type devices. The device shall be 120 volt rated. Control module shall be provided to disrupt power to door holder circuit. See electrical for circuiting information. RDAI 23263 13851 -7 06/12/06 t t. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Unfinished areas include the parking garage, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and janitorial rooms. All other areas shall be considered finished. . 3.02 ACCEPTANCE TEST A. Prior to scheduling an acceptance test the contractor must submit a record of completion to the Engineer of Record and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. The service of a competent, factory- trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. C. A factory- trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.03 INSTRUCTION A. A minimum of 2 instruction sessions of not less than 2 hours in duration shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands -on demonstrations of the operation of all system components shall be provided. B. The contractor and /or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" which shall be laminated and affixed to the fire alarm panel in plain view. END OF SECTION RDAI 23263 13851 -8 06/12/06 SECTION 13930 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide all material, labor, equipment, design and services necessary to perform the installation of the fire sprinkler and standpipe system described in the specification and as shown on the drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Edition 2. NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 2003 Edition B. International Building Code 2003 edition as amended by City of Vail Building Department C. International Fire Code 2003 edition as amended by City of Vail Building Department D. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual E. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) The system shall have proper listing and /or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment Directory 2. Factory Mutual Approval Guide 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall consist of a wet -pipe automatic sprinkler system in all areas except the First Level Basement Garage ramp. The First Level Basement Garage ramp system shall be a dry-pipe automatic sprinkler system. C. Manual, wet standpipes shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. 1.04 APPROVALS A. Authority Having Jurisdiction: For purposes of code compliance the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for this installation will be the Fire Marshal for the Vail Fire Department. Contractor shall submit plans, calculations and manufacturer's data to the Fire Marshal, as required to obtain a permit. B. All plans, calculations, and manufacturer's data shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to submission to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All plans shall be approved by the RDA 23263 13930 -1 06/12/06 Engineer prior to forwarding to the AHJ. Items that are not acceptable to the Engineer shall be corrected by the contractor and resubmitted. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Material Submittals 1. Furnish to the Engineer a complete list of equipment and products, and a manufacturer's catalog sheet for each item to be included in the project. 2. Partial submittals are not acceptable. Where more than one item appears on a manufacture's catalog sheet, the item or items to be used shall be indicated. 3. Welding a. Welding procedures shall comply with NFPA 13. b. Contractor shall provide information to indicate qualification of all welders and procedures to support quality welding operations. Shop Drawings 1. Prior to any installation or fabrication of the system components, Contractor shall submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to the Engineer for approval by the Engineer and the Owner. 2. Incomplete shop drawings will be rejected unless prior approval is requested and given from the Engineer for partial submittals. 3. Shop drawing shall conform to, and include, all items as set forth in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. 4. After approval is received from the Engineer and Owner, submit shop drawings to Vail Fire Marshal for approval and permitting. Deliver copies of the shop drawings bearing the approval stamps to the Owner. 1.06 DRAWINGS OF RECORD A. Updating Drawings: Provide and keep up -to -date, a complete record set of approved shop drawings, corrected daily to show every change from the approved shop drawings. Keep this set of prints on the job site and use only as a record set. B. Final Record Set: Upon completion of the work, the record drawings and hydraulic calculation shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer and Owner. After receiving approval, the record set shall be used to produce a set of final CAD files of the complete installation. The record set of CAD files and hydraulic calculations shall be turned over to the Owner. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications of Contractor: 1. The design of the fire sprinkler and standpipe system shall be performed by a Level III Technician certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) or Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. The person performing the design shall have experience with automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems. 2. The contractor performing the installation shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with fire protection systems. Such experience shall be made available upon request. Y a RDA 23263 13930 -2 06/12/06 PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials and Equipment: All materials and equipment in the system shall be new and current products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Where two or more pieces of equipment are required to perform interrelated functions, they shall be products of one manufacturer. B. Approval Guides: Unless otherwise indicated, all products shall be listed in the latest • publication of Approval Guides for Underwriters Laboratory and Factory Mutual for the service intended. 2.02 PIPE A. All pipe shall be ferrous and meet the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. All piping 2 1 /2 inches and larger shall be joined using mechanical couplings. Piping 2 inches and smaller shall be joined using threaded fittings. No plain -end fitting shall be used. B. Copper piping and fittings is acceptable in place of ferrous piping. Copper piping shall comply with all requirements of NFPA 13. If copper is installed where exposed to direct fire impingement, the copper piping shall be brazed. C. Dry pipe systems, non - pressurized fire department pumper connection piping, and pipe located in corrosive environments shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13, be ferrous and galvanized, no exceptions. D. Rust Inhibitive Paint: All exposed threads on galvanized pipe are to be coated with rust inhibitive paint. E. Plastic pipe shall not be allowed. 2.03 FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS A. Rust Inhibitive Paint: Grooved Fittings and couplings shall be coated with a rust inhibiting paint. B. Threaded Fittings: Threaded fittings shall be cast iron class 125, rated for 175 psi. Cold water working pressure and shall conform to ANSI 81 6.4, ASTM 126 and ANSI B2.1 NPT. Malleable threaded fittings will not be permitted. C. Nipples: No close nipples will be permitted. For short pipe connections use standard short nipples. D. Adjustable Nipples: Adjustable drop nipples may be used on flush or concealed type sprinklers only and must be of double o -ring seal design. E. Thread -O -Lets: Shop welded Thread -O -Lets may be used where a certified welder is used and the Thread -O -Lets are listed. F. Grooved Fittings: Elbows, Tees, and reducers shall be malleable iron or ductile. RDA 23263 13930 -3 06/12/06 G. Adapter Flanges: Adapter flanges (fittings) shall be cast iron /class 125 conforming to ANSI B -16.1, with a rust inhibiting coating. H. Grooved Couplings: Grooved couplings and reducers shall be malleable or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A -47. Coupling gasket shall be molded Elastomer (EPDM) per ASTM D2000, Victaulic grade "E" (Type A) or equal. On dry-pipe systems a "FlushSeal" or "Flush Gap' gasket shall be used. Grooved couplings and reducers shall be of the same manufacturer as used for the grooved fittings. Plain End Couplings: No plain end couplings (Roust -A- Bouts, Plainloks or similar couplings) may be used. J. Hole Cut Outlets, New Systems: No hole cut outlets may be used. 2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers: Provide hangers to support all piping, in alignment without sagging or interference, to permit free expansion and contraction and meet the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. B. Pipe Rings: Pipe rings to be zinc coated Grinnell figure 69 or approved equal. C. Hanger Rods: Hanger rods to be electro- galvanized. D. C- Clamps: All c- clamps (beam clamps) shall be equipped with retaining straps. E. Riser Clamps: Riser clamps shall not protrude more than 2" beyond the edge of the hole. The riser clamps shall be UL listed, Grinnell figure 261 or approved equal F. Concrete Anchors: Concrete expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Phillips, Rawl, ITW, or approved equal. G. Explosive Anchors: Explosive driven type fasteners are not permitted. 2.05 VALVES A. Outside Screw and Yoke (OSY) Valves: OSY valves shall be cast iron, flanged and rated for 175 psi, non -shock cold water working pressure. B. Isolation /Control Valves: Sprinkler system, standpipe, and other above ground controlling valves shall be gear- operated slow -close butterfly valves with flag type indicator, cast iron lug body, bronze disc, EPDM crowned seat, stainless steel stem with bronze bushings, two internal single -pole, double -throw monitor switches, and locking chain supplied by the valve company. C. Supervised Valves, 1 / Inches and Smaller: Sprinkler controlling valves 1 /z inches and smaller shall be slow -close supervised butterfly valve type or approved equal. D. Valves controlling sprinklers in elevator machine room and bottom of elevator shaft: Sprinklers located in elevator machine rooms and at the bottom of the elevator shaft shall be controlled by a supervised slow turn control valve. Valve shall be butterball type of approved equal. RDA 23263 13930 -4 06/12/06 E. Drain Valves: Drain valves shall be UL Listed, screw -in bonnet bronze globe valves, rated to 175 psi non -shock cold water working pressure. Low point drain valves shall have, in addition, a 3/4" brass nipple with 3/4" male hose threads and cap. F. Check Valves: Check valves shall be grooved, iron body, bronze seat, stainless steel clapper with a replaceable rubber seal (a rubber seal integral with the seat is not acceptable), and 175 psi non -shock cold water working pressure. G. Provide a double check valve assembly (backflow preventer), including two approved control valves. The assembly shall be UL certified and of a type meeting the Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. H. Provide a reduced pressure double check valve assembly ( backflow preventer), including two approved control valves for the anti - freeze systems. The assembly shall be UL certified and of a type meeting the Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. 2.06 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinklers: Provide the following sprinkler types in the specified areas: 1. All residential units shall have sprinklers listed for residential use. Sprinklers shall be ordinary temperature rated, concealed type. Escutcheon finish shall be coordinated with the architect. 2. All commercial areas except the garage shall be provided with quick response ordinary temperature rated sprinklers. Sprinklers in finished areas shall be chrome finish, semi - recessed with two -piece escutcheon or as required by the architect. Sprinklers in unfinished areas shall be brass or chrome finish. 3. Garage areas protected by a dry system shall have upright, dry- pendant or dry- sidewall ordinary temperature rated sprinklers, brass or chrome finish. Areas with finished ceilings shall have dry- pendant sprinklers or pendant sprinklers installed on return bends as required by NFPA 13. 4. Areas subject to high temperatures shall be provided with intermediate or high temperature sprinklers as required by NFPA 13. B. Spare Sprinklers: Provide spare sprinklers and escutcheons shall for each type and style of sprinkler used in accordance with NFPA 13 and proportioned based upon the number of each type and style of sprinkler used on the job. In no case should less than 6 of each type of sprinkler heads be provided. Spares of dry- pendent sprinklers are not required. 2.07 SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET A. Provide a spare sprinkler cabinet to accommodate the required number of spare sprinklers and escutcheons. Include a wrench for each type of sprinkler in the cabinet. 2.08 SPRINKLER HEADGUARD A. Provide UL Listed sprinkler headguards for sprinkler heads subject to mechanical damage or for any sprinkler of which any portion is at, or lower than, 7-0" above the floor. RDA 23263 13930 -5 06/12/06 2.09 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Provide one fire department connection (FDC) with horizontal type connections, dual clapper, two 2' /z inch inlets, with rocker lug caps and chains. FDC to indicate "Automatic Sprinkler" or equal. B. Provide one fire department connection (FDC) with horizontal type connections, four 2'/2 inch inlets, with rocker lug caps and chains. FDC to indicate "Manual Wet Standpipe" or equal. C. The fire department connections (FDC) shall be flush mounted type and shall have a finish as approved by the architect. 2.10 BALL DRIP A. Provide a bronze ball drip for the fire department connection inside of the building unless water can drain out through the FDC. 2.11 HOSE VALVE A. Provide 2'/2 inch chrome hose valves with 2'/2 inch x 1' /z inch reducing fitting, and cap and chain. Threads shall be as required by the local fire department. 2.12 SIGHT DRAIN A. Provide a single piece sight drain at all flow test points. 2.13 PRESSURE GAUGE A. Provide a 3'/2 inch diameter, bourdon type pressure gauge, 0 -300 psi, ' /4 inch soft metal seat globe valve with arrangements for draining pipe between gage and valve, located near each main or floor control valve assembly on the main line or near each test location. B. For monitoring of air pressure, provide a 3'/2 inch diameter; bourdon type pressure gauge, 0-80 psi with a minimum of 250 psi retard, '/, inch soft metal seat globe valve with arrangements for draining pipe between gage and valve, located near each main or floor control_valve assembly on the main line or near each test location. 2.14 DRUM DRIP A. Provide a cast iron drum drip at the low drain points on the dry system. 2.15 SPLASH BLOCK A. Provide a splash block at the point of discharge for the drains outside of the building, if the ground will be disturbed by the flow of water. 2.16 SLEEVES A. Provide 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal with lock seam joints or'h inch overlap sleeves in floors, partitions, ceilings, and in construction without waterproof membranes. Provide �n RDA 23263 13930 -6 06/12/06 schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves in exterior walls. Provide schedule 40 pipe sleeves with clamping rings in slab -on -grade or exterior walls having below grade penetrations. Provide sleeves through roofs with flashing collars. 2.17 WALL ESCUTCHEON A. Provide plastic split ring type escutcheons and paint to match the wall. Escutcheons. are only required with exposed pipe installations. 2.18 DRY PIPE ALARM VALVE A. Provide a dry pipe alarm valve, trim package, accelerator and air maintenance device, all by the same manufacturer. 2.19 AIR COMPRESSOR: A. Provide an air compressor, sized to completely refill the system within 30 minutes. B. Provide an air filter and air dryer system on outlet of the compressor. C. Compressor shall be hardwired to AC power on a dedicated circuit. Only means of disconnect shall be the circuit breaker for the circuit. Provide sign at compressor indicating circuit breaker location. D. Air compressor shall be floor mounted and shall include isolation grommets as required by the AHJ. 2.20 FIRE ALARM AND RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment in this section shall be provided, installed, and adjusted by the sprinkler Contractor. Coordinate installation of fire sprinkler system with all other trades. Conduit, wiring, and terminations, shall be by others. 1. Vane Type Waterflow Switches 2. Valve Supervisor Switches 3. Pressure Type Waterflow Switches 4. High and Low Air Pressure Monitoring Switches 2.21 SIGNS A. Provide all control, drain and test valves with signs identifying the type of valve. B. Provide a sign at the riser indicating the hydraulic design information for the system (i.e., "hydraulic nameplate "). 2.22 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL A. Firestopping material is to be installed in conformance with the firestopping specification. Firestopping is to be applied by only manufacturer approved personnel. All firestopping shall be UL, FM or Wanock- Hersey Rated. 2.23 PIPE THREAD SEALANT B. Provide a brush -on pipe thread sealant with Teflon, Grinnell Tuff-Loc or approved equal. Teflon tape may be used in conjunction with thread sealant but shall not be the only product used. RDA 23263 13930 -7 06/12/06 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Requirements Prior to Installation: Do not order, fabricate, or install any material prior to receipt of all approvals as stipulated in Part 1 of this Section. Standards and Requirements: All installation work shall be performed in accordance with the reference standards without exception, and as required by the AHJ. All piping shall be installed straight, true and plumb and installed in a workmanlike manner. C. Changes to the Work: Install all piping as shown on the approved shop drawings. Minor deviations shall be carefully noted on the record drawings as outlined in Part 1 of this Section. Before making significant deviations from the approved drawings, written approval shall be obtained from the Owner and the AHJ. D. Coordination of Work: Carefully coordinate work with other trades so that unnecessary offsets and revisions to the approved drawings are avoided. Failure to coordinate does not relieve Contractor from meeting the performance standards herein. 3.02 PENETRATIONS A. Required Clearance Around Pipe: Piping passing through fire rated assemblies, including fire rated GWB assemblies shall be provided with clearance around the entire circumference of the pipe as required by NFPA 13. Piping 3yz inches and smaller shall have a minimum one inch clearance around the entire circumference of the pipe and pipe larger than 3'/2 inch shall have a minimum two inch clearance around the entire circumference of the pipe. Penetrations of walls, floors or ceilings shall be made in a neat manner using properly sized hole saw or masonry/concrete coring as necessary. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: The annular space between the wall or pipe sleeve and the sprinkler pipe in fire rated assemblies shall be filled with UL classified firestopping material in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, also see Section 2.22. C. Escutcheons: Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed where exposed piping or hangers pass through a finished floor, wall or ceiling and shall fit snugly, securely and cover the opening. 3.03 CONTROL VALVES A. Install all control valves, supply valves and test valves in easily accessible locations, with the valve handle or wheel installed at the lowest point and no higher than seven feet above the finished floor. Coordinate valve installation with the AHJ. 3.04 INSPECTOR'S TEST AND DRAINS A. Inspector's Test: Inspector's test valves shall be provided for all waterflow monitoring devices. The inspector's test location shall be at the hydraulically most remote point of the system and shall include an open -bore orifice equivalent to the smallest sprinkler in the system. The inspector's test connection shall be piped to the exterior of the building or a drain riser terminated as directed on the drawings. The inspector's test connection RDA 23263 13930 -8 06/12/06 valve shall be readily accessible, at a location no higher than seven feet above finished floor. B. Main Drains: Main drains shall be piped as indicated on the drawings and shall discharge to a safe location outside the building. Splash blocks shall be provided to limit damage to landscaping. C. Auxiliary Drains: Provide auxiliary drains at all low points of the system, where the trapped section of pipe exceeds five gallons, and from the residential units. The drain shall consist of, as a. minimum: a valve, a 3/4" brass nipple with 3/4" male hose threads, and cap. Locate auxiliary drains in unfinished areas without suspended ceiling wherever possible. In finished areas, locate the hose bib within six inches of an access panel (minimum 12 inch x 12 inch dimensions). If located in bathrooms the panel is to be stainless steel. 3.05 GAUGES A. Provide gauges at the main system riser and each riser control assembly. Tap gauges from the main piping, not from the drain piping. Gauges shall be provided on both the supply and system side of the backflow preventer. 3.06 LAY -IN CEILINGS A. For lay -in suspended acoustic ceilings, sprinklers shall be centered in the the and shall be carefully aligned. 3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. The fire sprinkler system shall not be connected to supply until the underground piping has been flushed as required by Colorado Division of Fire Safety and NFPA 12, 13, and 14. Partial System Test or Inspection: Perform tests with the sprinklers installed in their final positions. Where it is critical to the continuance of the project as a whole to cover portions of the piping with ceilings or walls prior to the completion of the entire system, partial testing of the system may be performed after receiving written approval from the Owner and AHJ. In this case "partiar' indicates an entire zone or floor of one system. A satisfactory partial test does not relieve Contractor from performing all final testing procedures. C. Preliminary Hydrostatic Test: Perform a hydrostatic test, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 13, after the system has been fully installed and is ready for service, and prior to installation of suspended ceilings. Take special precautions to detect and stop water leakage so that any water damage will be minimal. D. Dry System Air Pressure Test and Inspection: In accordance with NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test of the dry pipe system shall be performed to ensure no or minimal air leaks. Test the system for not less than 24 hours at an air pressure of 40 psi without the addition of any air. Any leaks resulting in a pressure drop of more than 1'/2 psi over the 24 hour period shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E. Final Hydrostatic Test and Inspection: Final inspection of all phases of the Work shall be made by Engineer and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Notify the Engineer at least 7 days in advance of making the required tests, so that arrangements may be made for the RDA 23263 13930 -9 06/12/06 presence of the Engineer and the AHJ representative to witness the tests. The installing foreman or other representative of Contractor shall be present at this time to conduct any operating tests of alarm, drains or other system functions requested by the Engineer, Fire Marshal or Owner. Test the complete system for not less than 2 hours at a pressure of 200 psi (or 50 psi above static pressure, whichever is greater) without the addition of any water. Any leaks or drips shall be repaired immediately by Contractor. F. Test of Fire Alarm Equipment: Test the operation of the water flow, pressure, and supervisory switches. When Contractor has satisfied itself that the system is in complete operating condition in every respect, it shall notify the Construction Coordinator in writing that the system has been inspected and tested the system and that it is ready for final inspection. G. Punch List: Deficiencies found in the system will be recorded on a punch list and delivered to Contractor. Correct punch list items within two weeks of receipt of the punch list, no exceptions. Occupancy shall not be made until all Fire Protection Punchlist items have been corrected. H. Certificate of Completion: A completed contractor's test and materials certificate shall be delivered to the Owner upon satisfactory completion of the work. RDA 23263 END OF SECTION 13930 -10 06/12/06 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hydraulic elevators. 2. Jack hole. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 - Electrical: a. Electrical connections. b. Suitable connections from the power mains to each controller signal equipment feeders as required, including necessary circuit breakers and fused mainline disconnect switches. c. Outlets at the machine room for lighting in the car. Electric power for construction, testing, and adjusting, of the same characteristics as the permanent supply. 2. Other Sections: a. Door Sill Support Angles: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. b. Floor Finish: [Vinyl composition tile under Section 09650.] [Carpet under Section 09680.] [Sheet vinyl under Section 09650.1 c. Divider Beams: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. ANSI A] 7.1 Safety Code for Elevators. 2. NEII Minimum Passenger Elevator Requirements for Handicapped. 3. Americans With Disabilities Act /Accessibility Guidelines 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: Schindler 3304 or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Number and Type One (1) pre- engineered oil hydraulic Type Passenger Floors Served See Drawings Travel See Drawings Number Landings See Drawings Number Openings See Drawings Power Supply Verify available voltage Capacity 2,500 lbs. Minimum Up Speed 125 feet per minute full load up Car Size 6' -8" wide x 4' -3" clear inside. Operation Simplex selective collective, Cab Design See car in Part 2 R DAI 2363.00 14240 -1 Hoistway Entrances Opening Size and Type Door Operation Signals Leveling Inspection Operation Emergency Lighting Communications Special Features Required Jack Hole and Casing Baked enamel 3' -6" wide by 7-9', single speed side opening DC power Illuminated car and hall buttons, car position indicators, car riding lantern, NEII handicapped provisions. Two -way Top -of -car inspection Automatic emergency light and alarm system Telephone with armored cord in car cabinet by elevator installer. Exhaust fan, dual beam photo eyes, protective pads for cab walls, oil viscosity control, low oil control. Under this section by elevator contractor B. Complete Installation: Provide a complete installation of electric oil- hydraulic (electrically operated hydraulic elevator using oil as the fluid medium) elevator. Include the accessory items listed performed in a first -class and workmanlike manner. Include materials and work as indicated on drawings and specified. Where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include: 1. Hoistway drawings. 2. Equipment room drawings. 3. Elevator cab drawings and descriptive brochure. 4. Hoistway entrance drawings. 5. Control button locations. Color Selection Charts: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local codes. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: The following work shall be performed under other sections: 1. A legal hoistway, properly framed and enclosed, and including a pit of proper depth, provided with ladder, drains, lights, and waterproofing, as required. Suitable machine room, adequate for the elevator equipment, including floors, lighting, ventilation and heat to maintain the room at a temperature of 50° F minimum to 100° F maximum. 2. Adequate supports and foundations to carry the loads of equipment including supports for guide rail brackets. 3. Setting of anchors and sleeves. Pockets or blockouts for signal fixtures. RDAI 2363.00 14240 -2 4. Sill recesses and the grouting of doorsills and hoistway frames after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide one year written warranty for material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. Make good any defects, not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use, which may develop within the warranty period. 1.09 TEMPORARY USE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Temporary Use: Should the General Contractor desire to use the service of the elevator during the period when work on the elevator is in progress or before final acceptance of the building, the General Contractor agrees to sign the temporary acceptance form and be bound by the terms and conditions thereof. Also, the General Contractor agrees to provide, if required, temporary enclosures, guards or other protection of hoistway openings, necessary power signaling devices, lights in the car, elevator operators and other work required to permit this temporary usage. B. Repairs: The General Contractor agrees to pay costs of maintenance of the equipment during temporary use and further agrees that the complete elevator equipment will be returned to the same condition of repair and maintenance as existed when the elevator was placed on temporary service. If repairs or replacements are necessary to restore the apparatus to its condition at the time the General Contractor placed it in temporary service, the General Contractor agrees to permit this contractor to make such repairs or replacements and to pay the elevator contractor for this added expense at regular billing rates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Thyssen Dover Corporation 2. Otis Elevator Company 3. Schindler Elevator Corporation 4. Kone Elevator 5. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Car: Standard finish with stainless steel front returns; baked enamel doors; plastic laminate walls and rear walls; 4" stainless steel handrails on 3 sides; false ceiling with fluorescent tubes above; exhaust fan; telephone compartment; flooring by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to beginning the installation of elevator equipment, examine the following to verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the quality of execution or work as specified: 1. Hoistway size and plumbness. 2. Sill pockets and entry supports. 3. Stability of hoistway walls. 4. Condition of elevator pit. RDAI 2363.00 14240 -3 B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. The entire front wall of the hoistway shall be left open until entrances are installed. After elevator guide rails are set and lined, the entrance frames shall be installed in perfect alignment with the guide rails. Finished walls shall then be completed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install according to manufacturer's instructions, reference standards and approved shop drawings. B. Wiring Piping and Oil: Furnish and install necessary wiring in the hoistway in accordance with the NEC, to connect the operating buttons and switches to the control board in the power unit. All wiring shall be done in rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing except to moving apparatus that shall be connected by short lengths of flexible conduit. Provide necessary pipe and fittings to connect the power to the jack unit and oil of the proper grade. Protect underground conduit and piping against corrosion. C. Painting: Properly paint exposed metal work furnished under this section except as otherwise specified after installation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Running Test: In addition to the other requirements, inspections, tests and remedies herein provided upon completion of the elevator installation and before final inspection make, in the presence of the Architect, a running speed test with full maximum load on the elevator car to determine whether the - elevator equipment as installed meets the speed, capacity and other requirements of the specifications. B. Replacement: In the event the equipment does not meet requirements of the specifications, promptly remove from the premises work condemned by the Architect as failing to conform to the specifications, and promptly replace and re- execute work in accordance with the specifications, without expense to the Owner. Bear expense of making good work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 3.05 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Operating Test Report: Submit written report of required operations test at completion of the project. B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01780. C. Maintenance Agreement: Submit the required maintenance agreement at completion of the project. 3.06 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE A. Service: Provide maintenance and callback service of elevator equipment for a period of 12 months after Date of Acceptance of total project by Owner. Include regular RDAI 2363.00 14240 -4 examination of installation by competent and trained employees; and include necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in good operation, except such parts made necessary by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by this contractor. Provide 24 -hour emergency call basic service. Use only original manufacturer's parts for replacements. END OF SECTION R DAI 2363.00 14240 -5 SECTION 14241 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Holeless Hydraulic Elevators (Elevator No. 1). 1. Guide rails and brackets. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 - Electrical: a. Electrical connections. b. Suitable connections from the power mains to each controller signal, equipment feeders as required, including necessary circuit breakers and fused mainline disconnect switches. c. Outlets at the machine room for lighting in the car. Electric power for construction, testing, and adjusting, of the same characteristics as the permanent supply. 2. Other Sections: a. Door Sill Support Angles: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators. 2. NEII Minimum Passenger Elevator Requirements for Handicapped. 3. Americans With Disabilities Act /Accessibility Guidelines 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Elevator No. 1 Number and Type Type Floors Served Travel Number Landings Number Openings Power Supply Capacity ' Minimum Up Speed Car Size Operation Cab Design Hoistway Entrances Opening Size and Type Door Operation RDAI 2363.00 Otis 2100 or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Pre - engineered oil hydraulic Service . See Drawings. See Drawings. See Drawings. See Drawings. Verify available voltage 2,000 lbs. 125 feet per minute full load up Custom size x 8' -0" clear height. Simplex See car in Part 2 No. 4 finish stainless steel 4' -6" wide by 7' -0 ", single speed, side opening DC power 14241 -1 Signals Illuminated car and hall buttons, car position indicators, car riding lantern, NEII handicapped provisions. Leveling Two -way Inspection Operation Top -of -car inspection Emergency Lighting Automatic emergency light and alarm system Communications Telephone with armored cord in car cabinet by elevator installer. Special Features Required Exhaust fan, dual beam photo eyes, protective pads for cab walls, oil viscosity control, low oil control. Muffler on hydraulic line. Smoke seal Sealeze brush type smoke seals at all levels. Acoustical requirements Acoustical rails and hydraulic silencer. B. Complete Installation: Provide a complete installation of electric oil- hydraulic (electrically operated hydraulic elevator using oil as the fluid medium) elevator. Include the accessory items listed performed in a first -class and workmanlike manner. Include materials and work as indicated on drawings and specified. Where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include: 1. Hoistway drawings. 2. Equipment room drawings. 3. Elevator cab drawings and descriptive brochure. 4. Hoistway entrance drawings. 5. Control button locations. B. Color Selection Charts: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local codes. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: The following work shall be performed under other sections: 1. A legal hoistway, properly framed and enclosed, and including a pit of proper depth, provided with ladder, drains, lights, and waterproofing, as required. Suitable machine room, adequate for the elevator equipment, including floors, lighting, ventilation and heat to maintain the room at a temperature of 50° F minimum to 100° F maximum. 2. Adequate supports and foundations to carry the loads of equipment including supports for guide rail brackets. 3. Setting of anchors and sleeves. Pockets or blockouts for signal fixtures. 4. Sill recesses and the grouting of doorsills and hoistway frames after installation. RDAI 2363.00 14241 -2 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide one year written warranty for material and installation in accordance with Section 01780. Make good any defects, not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use, which may develop within the warranty period. 1.09 TEMPORARY USE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Temporary Use: Should the General Contractor desire to use the service of the elevator during the period when work on the elevator is in progress or before final acceptance of the building, the General Contractor agrees to sign the temporary acceptance form and be bound by the terms and conditions thereof. Also, the General Contractor agrees to provide, if required, temporary enclosures, guards or other protection of hoistway openings, necessary power signaling devices, lights in the car, elevator operators and other work required to permit this temporary usage. B. Repairs: The General Contractor agrees to pay costs of maintenance of the equipment during temporary use and further agrees that the complete elevator equipment will be returned to the same condition of repair and maintenance as existed when the elevator was placed on temporary service. If repairs or replacements are necessary to restore the apparatus to its condition at the time the General Contractor placed it in temporary service, the General Contractor agrees to permit this contractor to make such repairs or replacements and to pay the elevator contractor for this added expense at regular billing rates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOLELESS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Otis Elevator Company 2. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Car Finishes: 1. Walls: Pattern # PR 16 embossed stainless steel all sides. Stainless steel rails on 3 sides. 2. Front Panel and Doors: Stainless steel. 3. Floor: a. Rubber. See Section 09650. 4. ' Ceiling: Black egg crate with fluorescent light. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to beginning the installation of elevator equipment, examine the following to verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the quality of execution or work as specified: 1. Hoistway size and plumbness. 2. Sill pockets and entry supports. 3. Stability of hoistway walls. 4. Condition of elevator pit. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. RDAI 2363.00 14241 -3 3.02 PREPARATION A. The entire front wall of the hoistway shall be left open until entrances are installed. After elevator guide rails are set and lined, the entrance frames shall be installed in perfect alignment with the guide rails. Finished walls shall then be completed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install according to manufacturer's instructions, reference standards and approved shop drawings. B. Wiring Piping and Oil: Furnish and install necessary wiring in the hoistway in accordance with the NEC, to connect the operating buttons and switches to the control board in the power unit. All wiring shall be done in rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing except to moving apparatus that shall be connected by short lengths of flexible conduit. Provide necessary pipe and fittings to connect the power to the jack unit and oil of the proper grade. Protect underground conduit and piping against corrosion. All hydraulic piping shall be Victaulic or equal. C. Painting: Properly paint exposed metal work furnished under this section except as otherwise specified after installation. D. Acoustical Requirements: 1. Isolate hydraulic lifts (pistons) from the structure by installing a 3/4" resilient pad such as Mason Super W Pads under the lifts and isolate the attachment points using a neoprene pad and resilient grommet. 2. Attach elevator guide rails, pistons and other equipment to the edge of the slabs within shafts and not to walls, columns, or diagonal braces. 3. Isolate guide rails at the attachment points by installing neoprene isolators such as Mason RCA Pad between the steel brackets. 4. All hydraulic elevator pumps to include hydraulic line muffler (CEMCO Lift Elevator Systems) to reduce noise from hydraulic lines. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Running Test: In addition to the other requirements, inspections, tests and remedies herein provided upon completion of the elevator installation and before final inspection make, in the presence of the Architect, a running speed test with full maximum load on the elevator car to determine whether the elevator equipment as installed meets the speed, capacity and other requirements of the specifications. B. Replacement: In the event the equipment does not meet requirements of the specifications, promptly remove from the premises work condemned by the Architect as failing to conform to the specifications, and promptly replace and re- execute work in accordance with the specifications, without expense to the Owner. Bear expense of making good work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 3.05 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Operating Test Report: Submit written report of required operations test at completion of the project. B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01780. RDAI 2363.00 14241 -4 C. Maintenance Agreement: Submit the required maintenance agreement at completion of the project. 3.06 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE A. Service: Provide maintenance and callback service of elevator equipment for a period of 12 months after Date of Acceptance of total project by Owner. Include regular examination of installation by competent and trained employees; and include necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in good operation, except such parts made necessary by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by this contractor. Provide 24 -hour emergency call basic service. Use only original manufacturer's parts for replacements. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 14241 -5 SECTION 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. General. This Specification Section contains administrative requirements of DIVISION 15. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide complete and operating mechanical systems The work also includes the completion of details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling the system to make it operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. 1.03 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements (coordinating with other trades) and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. 1.04 VERIFICATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS A. Before undertaking each part of the Work, carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with field measurements. Promptly report in writing to the Mechanical Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with all applicable codes and utility company regulations. In case of conflict with the Contract Documents the most stringent shall govern. B. Unless otherwise specified, comply with the following codes: 1. 2003 International Building Code (IBC) 2. 2003 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 3. 2003 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 4. 2003 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 5. 2003 International Residential Code (IRC) 6. 2003 International Fire Code (IFC) 7. 2002 National Energy Code (NEC) 8. 2003 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 1.06 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES RDAI 2363.00 15010 Page 1 of 35 A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of Work. B. The Tap Fees for water and sewer will be paid for by the Owner. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit data for Mechanical Engineer's approval as required by each Specification Section. Obtain approval from Mechanical Engineer before entering orders for materials and equipment or before performing any related work. 2. The following material may be required to be submitted during the course of the project. a. Information for Approval of Substitutions. b. Product Data on all Scheduled Equipment on the DRAWINGS. c. Product Data on Temperature Control Equipment. d. Required Shop Drawings. e. Balancing and Testing Report. f. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Review Time. s 1. Allow 5 (five) working days for review of submittals. Begin no work until all submittals are returned approved. Engineer shall not be responsible for any project delays due to the review of substitutions. C. Number of Copies. Except where otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall submit five (5) copies for the Mechanical Engineer's review. Only two (2) copies will be returned to the Contractor with Engineer's and Owner's comments as applicable. If the Contractor requires more returned copies for his use, the Contractor shall submit additional copies. D. Resubmission Requirements. Make all revisions required by the Mechanical Engineer and resubmit as required for initial submittal. Cola I] Z IA' I N 0141 A. Submit the following Shop Drawings for approval in accordance with the SUBMITTAL paragraph in this Specification Section: 1. Information for approval of substitutions and /or changes from the DRAWINGS or SPECIFICATIONS. 2. All Temperature Control Systems except those installed by the factory as part factory assembled equipment. 3. Fire Sprinkler System. 4. Refrigeration Piping System. 5. Grease Hood and Associated Duct Systems. RDAI 2363.00 15010 Page 2 of 35 B. Mechanical Engineer's review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of providing mechanical systems which satisfy the intent of the Contract Documents. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Sheets shall be 8 1/2" X 11 ", except pull out sheets may be neatly folded to 8 1/2" X 11 ". Submit three copies to the Mechanical Engineer before final payment. Manuals shall be bound in plastic covered, three ring, loose leaf binder with title of project lettered on front, and the names of all Contractors and Subcontractors who provided materials or services under the Mechanical Sections of these Specifications. The Manual shall contain but not limited to, the following items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating and Maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment including all wiring schematics of factory wired packaged equipment marked up if changed from factory shipped configuration. 3. Schedule of lubrication, filter replacement, and water treatment schedule showing type and frequency of required action. All equipment will be included in this one schedule. 4. Normal operating instruction including a sequence of operation for each system. 5. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. 6. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. 7. All Factory warranties which exceed the one year warranty provided by the Contractor. 8. Final Balancing and Testing Report. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Guarantee all workmanship, material and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. B. Equipment which is factory warranted for a period longer than one year shall be passed on the Owner with the dates that the warranty is in effect. This information shall be inserted in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. 2.02 SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS A. An acceptable manufacturer's name and model number of a product may be given for an example. This is the equipment contemplated during the design process and forms the basis of a standard of quality. Verify the model number is still accurate and meets all the requirements as shown on the DRAWINGS. If there is a discrepancy between the requirements of the DRAWINGS and the model number, RDAI 2363.00 15010 Page 3 of 35 the requirements of the DRAWINGS shall govern. Equals may be allowed unless otherwise noted. 2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Approval Required. If Contractor is contemplating using materials, equipment, or procedures which are not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Mechanical Engineer. Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to refuse the substitution and require the Contractor to provide materials and labor per these Contract Documents. Submit information in accordance with paragraph entitled SUBMITTALS in this Specification Section. B. Substitution Liability. In making formal request for substitution the Contractor agrees to the following: a. Proposed product is equal to or superior in all respects to that which was specified. b. Same warranties apply as for the product specified. c. To coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. d. To waive claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. ._ e. To pay all redesign costs which may be required. f. To pay all additional costs to other Contractors whose work is affected by the substitution. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities and functions, be responsible for the protection against damage to and interruption of the Owner's operation. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. General. Install all work to permit easy removal of coils, heat exchanger tubes (boiler, bundles, chiller), rotating shafts, motors, filters, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange valves, balancing cocks, and controls for easy access. B. Space Preference. 1. Ductwork or heating mains shall not have preference over plumbing lines below plumbing fixtures, or over electrical conduits above or below electric switchgear and panels. No piping or ductwork shall be installed over electrical equipment or in required clearances around electrical equipment. RDAI 2363.00 15010 Page 4 of 35 3.03 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL COORDINATION A. The interface between the General, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors shall be according to the "HVAC, PLUMBING, AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR COORDINATION SCHEDULE" on the DRAWINGS. 3.04 OPERATIONAL DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING. A. Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor for operating all systems and equipment installed under the Mechanical Division of the Specifications for a period of 8 hours, or as otherwise specified. The period is purposely set aside to demonstrate the workability of all systems and to instruct the Owner or his representative, fully in the operations, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Give at least 5 working days notice to the Owner and Mechanical Engineer in advance of the demonstration. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. At the completion of work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including any all areas around or in equipment provided under the Mechanical Section. Remove off site all rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave all equipment spaces absolutely clean and ready for use. RDAI 2363.00 15010 Page 5 of 35 SECTION 15050 4 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Specification Section describes the materials and methods common to all sections of DIVISION 15. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STARTERS AND COMBINATION STARTERS A. Over current protection on all current carrying conductors. B. Size starter and over current protection to properly serve the connected motor. C. Manual resettable overload protection. D. Green running pilot light. E. Hand Off Auto selector switch. F. Auxiliary contacts as required. G. Fused control transformer when required. H. NEMA 3R or 4 enclosures in damp or wet locations. 2.02 MOTORS A. Enclosure. 1. Install totally enclosed fan cooled motors exposed to weather and open drip proof motors in all other locations. B. Power Factor Correction. 1. Provide power factor correcting capacitors to correct power factor to 95% at full load for all motors over 50 hp. Capacitors shall be installed on load side of starter to isolate capacitor from the electrical system when motor is off. C. Belt Drives. 1. Motors with belt drive shall be mounted on adjustable steel motor bases or adjustable motor mounting rails. Adjustment shall be through threaded adjustment bolt. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VIBRATION CONTROL A. Equipment. 1. Install vibration control equipment on all mechanical equipment driven with motors rated over 3/4 HP unless otherwise noted. RDAI 2363.00 15050 Page 6 of 35 B. Pipe Hangers. Suspend piping connected to all mechanical equipment requiring vibration control equipment with combination spring and rubber hangers for 50 feet from vibrating equipment. C. Flexible Pipe Connectors. All mechanical equipment requiring vibration control shall have flexible pipe connectors. Connector shall be same size as the piping in which it is installed. Use flanged connections for pipe sizes 3" and larger. a. Water Service. 1) Connectors shall be twin sphere neoprene type or stainless steel bellows with stainless steel braided cover. 2) Twin sphere type shall be provided with control rods where thrust force is applied by equipment. 3) 150 psi / 220 deg. F. rating. b. Refrigerant Service. 1) Bronze seamless corrugations /copper fittings /bronze braid. 2) 425 psi working pressure. D. Ductwork. All ductwork connected to mechanical equipment requiring vibration control equipment shall have flexible duct connections. Duct connections shall be double neoprene coated 30 oz. fiberglass fabric, 6" wide, and UL labeled. Thrust restraints shall be provided where necessary to maintain a slack position of the flexible duct connections. 3.02 GENERAL PIPING PRACTICES A. Installing. Maintain maximum head room under piping. Install exposed pipe parallel to or at right angles with the lines of the building or with other exposed pipes, care being taken to avoid all windows, doors, or other outlets and not to weaken any structural portion of the building. Make all offsets, bends, reductions, etc. with factory manufactured long radius fittings of corresponding finish, strength, etc., as pipe. No bending shall be allowed. Provide drains with hose connections at low points for draining system. B. Fittings. Piping fittings and specialties shall be the same size as the pipe they are installed in, unless otherwise specified. All piping specialties and valves located at pumps shall be same size as the piping shown on the DRAWINGS regardless of the size of the suction and discharge connections of the pump. C. Unions. 1. Provide a union or flange connection between equipment and its respective shutoff valve. D. Dielectric Unions. RDAI 2363.00 15050 Page 7 of 35 1. Dielectric unions and flanges shall be provided at the following connections between ferrous and non ferrous metals. a. Connections between above ground and buried ferrous and non ferrous metallic piping. b. Connections between ferrous and non ferrous metallic domestic water, or other open system piping and equipment. E. Thermometers. Provide thermometers on each side of equipment where a change in temperature takes place. P/T plugs may be substituted in lieu of thermometers on terminal equipment. F. Pipe Hangers. Provide pipe supports to support piping without sagging. Support piping at flexible connections. Provide pipe clamps for vertical pipes at each floor. Provide all supplementary steel angles, channels, and etc. where hanger location falls between joists, purlins or beams. Safety factor of all such assemblies shall be 5 to 1 minimum. Provide inserts between piping and hangers on insulated piping. When hangers contact pipe, hangers shall be of the same material as the pipe, or have a plating of the same material as the pipe. G. Sleeves. _ 1. Provide sleeves wherever pipes pass through masonry walls or floors. 2. Terminate floor sleeves flush with finished floor. Terminate floor sleeves 1" AFF in toilet rooms, equipment rooms, and chases. 3. Sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. 4. Seal sleeves in rated construction with fire barrier caulk. 5. Seal sleeves in below grade walls with watertight mechanical type compression link seals. H. Piping Imbedded In Concrete. Cover all piping either passing through or imbedded in concrete with 1/2" thick closed cell insulation, unless otherwise noted. Escutcheons. 1. Install escutcheons on exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings. 2. Escutcheons may be deleted in mechanical equipment rooms. J. Piping On Roofs. Support piping on stands 12" above roof unless otherwise noted. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment. RDAI 2363.00 15050 Page 8 of 35 1. Permanently identify mechanical equipment with the PLAN CODE as shown on the DRAWINGS. Apply pipe markers and directional arrow markers on each pipe. Identification shall be applied every 50 LF, or at least once in each room. C. Fire Dampers. Fire dampers shall be identified by stencil painted lettering. END RDAI 2363.00 15050 Page 9 of 35 SECTION 15250 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Specification Section applies to field applied insulation on Mechanical Equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. For the purpose of clarification in this Specification the labels "TYPE A,B, and etc." are used for descriptive purposes only, and do not refer to any manufacturer's type or model number. 2.02 FIRE RATING A. Insulation In Air Plenums. 1. Insulation materials used in plenums shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. B. Insulation Not Located In Air Plenums. Insulation materials, adhesives, coatings, and other accessories shall have surface burning characteristics as determined by ASTM E 84 not to exceed 75 for flame spread and 150 for smoke developed except for the following materials: a. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts or equipment. b. Factory premolded one piece PVC fittings and valve covers. c. Weatherproof coating (Exterior locations only). d. Asphaltic mastic (Buried locations only). e. Any applicable local code or regulations which require more stringent flame spread /smoke developed materials shall govern. 2.03 TYPE A INSULATION (fiber glass pipe) A. Molded sections of fiber glass insulation. B. Maximum conductivity .24 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. C. Factory applied presized jacket. D. Self sealing type jacket lap or stapled jacket. E. 500 degree F. rating. F. Manville Micro Lok 650 type AP,APT, or ML or approved equal. 2.04 TYPE B INSULATION (foam pipe) A. Molded rigid phenolic foam. B. Maximum conductivity .27 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. C. 180 degree F. rating. RDAI 2363.00 15250 Page 10 of 35 D. Armstrong Armaflex or approved equal. 2.05 TYPE C INSULATION (foam sheet) A. Closed cell foam sheet insulation. B. 40 to 180 degree F. rating. C. Maximum conductivity .27 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. D. Armstrong Armaflex II sheet insulation or approved equal. 2.06 TYPE D INSULATION (flexible tank insulation) A. Semi rigid fiber glass board with bonded jacket. B. Maximum conductivity .24 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. C. 450 degree F. rating. D. Manville Pipe & Tank Insulation or approved equal. 2.07 TYPE E INSULATION (direct burial) A. Insulation. 1. Cellular glass insulation. 2. Wrap and coat with mastic coating. 3. Foamglas by Pittsburgh Corning or approved equal. B. Jacket. 1. 125 mils thick bituminous resin reinforced with a woven glass fabric. 2. Protective plastic film coating. 3. Self sealing adhesive strip. 4. Pittwrap SS II by Pittsburgh Corning or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 THICKNESS AND TYPE A. Refer to the PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE in this specification section for the thickness and type of insulation to be used for specific pipes and equipment. 3.02 PIPES A. Chilled and Domestic Cold Water Piping (Temperatures below 60 degrees F.) 1. General. a. All cold surfaces shall be insulated and a vapor barrier shall be provided on all exterior surfaces of the insulation including terminations and exposed edges. 2. Insulation type A. a. Vapor barrier jacket may be self adhering type or fastened with staples. Seal off ends of the pipe insulation at all staples (if used), valves, fittings, flanges, hangers, and terminations with a vapor barrier coating. 3. Insulation type B. RDAI 2363.00 15250 Page 11 of 35 a. All butting insulation surfaces shall have adhesive applied at joints. Apply 2" wide vapor barrier insulation tape over all joints. b. Apply vinyl lacquer type coating as per manufacturer's recommendations to seal and protect insulation. 4. Insulation at Hangers and Supports. a. Install heavy density, half round insulation inserts of magnesium silicate and /or suitable hard wood blocking. b. Butt insulation against insert. c. Install 180 degree sheet metal saddle. d. Apply vapor barrier coating over entire joint. B. Hot Water and Steam Piping Over 105 degrees F. 1. General. a. Insulation shall be the same as for Cold Piping except the vapor barrier may be omitted. Insulation shall be rated a minimum of 50 degrees F. higher than the temperature of the pipe on which it is installed. 3.03 VALVES, FLANGES, AND FITTINGS A. General. 1. Valves, flanges and fittings shall be insulated and jacketed with methods and materials similar the adjoining insulation. B. Cold Piping. 1. Valves, flanges, strainers, unions, and fittings shall be insulated with factory preformed PVC covers as follows: a. Apply proper factory precut insulation insert to the pipe fitting. b. Apply intermediate vapor barrier over insulation, around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation, and around the edges of the PVC cover. c. After the PVC cover is in place seal all edges with vapor barrier tape. C. Hot Piping. 1. Insulation shall not be required on valves, flanges, strainers, unions, and other fittings (except tees and elbows) less than 2" in diameter. For valves, flanges, strainers, unions, and other fittings larger than 2" in diameter insulate same as cold piping except vapor barrier shall not be required. 3.04 HOT EQUIPMENT A. General. 1. Insulation should not cover identification plates or should not interfere with the operation and maintenance of the equipment. B. Materials and Methods. 1. TYPE D insulation installation. RDAI 2363.00 15250 Page 12 of 35 a. Secure welded pins to equipment on a 12" grid or use 16 gauge galvanized wire to form a 12" grid to securely attach insulation to equipment. b. Cover with two .250" thick layers of insulating cement reinforced with 1" hex .015 galvanized mesh. c. Finish with presized glass cloth and vinyl acrylic mastic coating. 2. TYPE C insulation installation. a. Using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, apply full adhesive coverage. b. All butting insulation surfaces shall have adhesive applied at joints. c. Apply vinyl lacquer type coating as per manufacturer's recommendations to seal and protect insulation. 3.05 PIPES PASSING THROUGH SLEEVES A. All insulation and jacketing shall be continuous through sleeves. 3.06 INSULATION EXPOSED TO WEATHER A. All insulation exposed to the weather shall be weatherproofed as follows: Cold Pipes and Equipment. a. Pipes and equipment shall be insulated, jacketed, and a vapor barrier applied in the same manner as for nonexposed pipes as specified for the applicable service, prior to application of the weatherproof jacket. b. A.010" thick stainless steel or .016" thick alumipum jacket shall be installed and shall overlap no less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with 3/8 inch by .020" bands at not more than 12 inches on center. c. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and circumferential joints shall be sealed with a coating recommended by the manufacturer. d. All valves and fittings shall be weatherproofed in the same manner. PVC covers shall not be left exposed to the weather. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used. 2. Hot Pipes and Equipment. a. Insulation may be weatherproofed same as for cold pipes and equipment or factory applied aluminum or stainless steel jacketed insulation may be provided. RDAI 2363.00 15250 Page 13 of 35 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE Minimum Insulation Thickness (inches) (Note 4.) PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE (continued) System Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) System Insul. Runouts 1 " 1.25" 2" 3 " 5 " 8 " Type Temp Type. to 2 and & & to & and E 1.5" thick Note 3 Note 1 Less 1.50" 2.5" 4 " 6" Over Heating (steam & hot water) Low Temp. 141 -200 A & B 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Low Temp. 105 -140 A & B .5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 Domestic Hot Water 105 -140 A & B .5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 see Note 2 Domestic Cold Water Any A & B .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 (see Note 5) Roof Drain Any A & B .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 Cooling Systems Chilled 40-60 A & B 1.0 1.0 1.0 Water .5 .5 .75 .75 Refrigerant Under 40 A & B 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 & Brine PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE (continued) System Insul. Type Temp Type. Insulation Thickness Note 3. Hot Equip. 181 -450 D 1.5" thick 140 -180 D & C 1.5" thick Buried Any E 1.5" thick Pipe Notes: 1. Runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 ft. in length. 2. Applies to recirculating sections of service or domestic hot water systems. 3. "Type" is described in this Specification Section. 4. For pipes and equipment located outside increase required thickness by 1/2 ". 5. Mains from water entry room to unit shut -off only. Distribution within the units not required to be insulated. END RDAI 2363.00 15250 Page 14 of 35 SECTION 15251 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Specification Section applies to field applied insulation to ductwork and casings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. For the purpose of clarification in this Specification the labels "TYPE A, B, and etc." are used for descriptive purposes only, and do not refer to any manufacturer's type or model number. 2.02 FIRE RATING A. Insulation In Air Plenums. 1. Insulation materials used in plenums shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. B. Insulation Not Located In Air Plenums. 1. Insulation materials, adhesives, coatings, and other accessories shall have surface burning characteristics as determined by ASTM E 84 not to exceed 75 for flame spread and 150 for smoke developed except for the following materials: a. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts or equipment. b. Any applicable local code or regulations which require more stringent flame spread /smoke developed materials shall govern. 2.03 DUCT WRAP A. Fiber glass blanket type flexible duct insulation. B. Maximum conductivity .31 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. C. Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass scrim laminated to UL rated craft facing. D. 250 degree F. rating. E. Owens Corning SOFTR or approved equal. 2.04 DUCT LINER A. Fiber glass flexible duct liner B. Maximum conductivity .24 BTU IN /SF.F.HR. @ 75 degrees F. C. Rated for velocity of 5,000 fpm. D. Rated for temperature of 250 degrees F. E. Owens Coming Aeromat or approved equal. RDA[ 2363.00 15251 Page 15 of 35 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 THICKNESS AND TYPE A. Refer to the DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE on the DRAWINGS for the thickness and type of insulation to be used.. 3.02 DUCT INSULATION A. General. 1. All ductwork exposed to the weather requiring insulation shall be insulated with duct lining. B. Duct Wrap. 1. Install external insulation to rectangular ductwork in the following manner: a. Bond duct wrap to the duct by application of 4 inch strips of adhesive a 8 inches on center. b. Additionally secure insulation on the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 24 inches wide with mechanical fasteners at not more than 18 inches on center. c. Seal joints by stapling 9/16 inch outward clinched staples through the overlapping facing of flange at 6 inches on center and by taping with minimum 3 inch wide foil reinforced kraft tape. d. All pin penetrations and punctures in the facing shall be taped or sealed. C. Duct Lining. 1. Install duct lining in accordance with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standards and in the following manner: a. Brush or spray adhesive on 100 percent of the duct surface and liner. b. Install stud weld or glue on type pins and clips starting within 3" of upstream- transverse edges of the liner and spaced at a maximum of 15" on center and not more than 3" from any corner. c. Apply adhesive to both surfaces of butt joints in the duct lining. d. The upstream transverse edges and clips shall be sealed with vapor barrier adhesive. e. Use adhesive sealer at each register and grille location to terminate lining. AND] RDAI 2363.00 15251 Page 16 of 35 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide complete plumbing systems from 5' outside building to all interior work. Fuel gas piping is from gas meter to gas fired equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with SUBMITTALS paragraph in the GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS Specification Section: Product Data on all fixtures and equipment listed in the FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the DRAWINGS. Belfay Engineering 15400 Page 17 of 35 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE SERVICE PIPE FITTINGS REMARKS Cold water and hot Type "IN hard drawn Wrought copper, sweat CU -PH solder water buried. copper. type. Type "K' soft Flared type. drawn copper. Cold water and Type "L" copper Wrought copper, <.2% Lead solder hot water or sweat type. above ground. Type "M" copper. Sanitary soil buried. Cast iron, hubless. Cast iron, hubless. Stainless steel hardware. ABS or PVC DWV. ABS or PVC DWV. Sanitary soil and vent Cast iron, hubless. Cast iron, hubless. above ground. Roof drains. Sch. 40 galvanized. Sch. 40 galvanized 2" and smaller. threaded. DWV copper. DWV copper sweat connections. ABS or PVC DWV. ABS or PVC DWV. Buildings not exceeding 3 floors. Not in return air plenums. Sch 40 black steel. 150# malleable iron Fuel gas piping. G.C. to paint piping (Natural gas) threaded or welded. exposed to the weather. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Work includes interior work to 5' outside building where connection is made to the building sewer. 1. Insulation. a. Provide insulation on all interior above ground storm drains and roof drains. See Specification Section INSULATION. 2. Cleanouts. Belfay Engineering 15400 Page 18 of 35 a. Provide accessible cleanouts at 100 foot maximum intervals. b. Provide accessible cleanouts in horizontal lines for each change of direction exceeding 45 degrees, though no more than one cleanout in 40' of developed length unless otherwise noted. c. Cleanouts shall have brass or plastic plugs. All wall cleanouts shall have chrome plated cover plates flush with the wall. Floor cleanouts shall have brass covers flush with floor. d. Provide accessible cleanouts at the base of all stacks. 3.02 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General. 1. Test all new piping and connections installed under these Mechanical Specifications prior to painting, backfilling, insulation or concealment within building construction. During the test do not exceed working pressure on any equipment such as boilers, etc. Test such equipment at rated working pressure and then valve equipment out of system during piping test. Perform each test as specified hereinafter and continue or repeat until the lines under test are proven tight. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. Furnish all instruments and fittings required for testing. B. Testing Schedule SYSTEM TEST MEDIUM TEST PRESSURE DURATION Domestic Water Water 50 15 Min. Soil and Waste Water 10 ft. w.c. 15 Min. Compressed Air Air 1 -112 times 2 Hrs. (service) working pres. Oil Air 60 2 Hrs. Natural Gas Air 60 30 Min. 3.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Install all fixtures and /or rough in, according to the FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the DRAWINGS. B. Fixtures shall be secured to walls and floor or countertops in accordance with manufacturer's roughing in and setting requirements to form a rigid installation. C. Exposed pipe at fixtures shall be brass chrome finish with chrome escutcheons. D. Shutoff valves shall be provided at each fixture and piece of equipment at rough in locations. E. Vacuum breakers shall be provided at all hose bibbs and all other threaded hose connections. Ame Belfay Engineering 15400 Page 19 of 35 SECTION 15500 t FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a complete working fire protection system. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Included. 1. All piping, fittings, and associated equipment beginning from the flange located above ground on the fire system riser and extending to complete the system. Provide all necessary Drawings with Colorado Registered Engineer's stamp to secure all required permits. B. Work Not Included. 1. Fire service main piping from the water main to the first above ground flange on the fire system riser main (for this work see Specification section 15400 PLUMBING). 2. All electrical wiring and interlock wiring shall be provided under the Electrical Division. All flow switches, supervisory switches, and system alarms shall be furnished and set in place under this section but shall be wired under the Electrical Division. 1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. All work must be performed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards. 1.04 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for approval. 1. Product data including cut sheets on all devices. 2. Complete shop drawings. a. Shop drawings shall be drawn to an indicated scale, on sheets of uniform size, with plan of each floor, made so that they can be easily duplicated, and shall show the following data: 1) City main test results. 2) Classification of Occupancy. 3) Application density. 4) Total area of application. 5) Coverage per sprinkler. 6) Total number of sprinklers. 7) Total water required. RDA[ 2363.00 15500 Page 20 of 35 3. Hydraulic calculations. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT. A. Contractor is responsible to prepare and submit all materials including Shop Drawings (stamped by a registered professional engineer if required) to secure a fire protection construction permit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be listed for fire sprinkler service by UL or FM. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install all components and devices per manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA, IBC, IFC and all local codes. Verify building conditions before any devices are ordered and provide all necessary hardware and equipment to allow proper installation. 3.02 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Do not install any portion of a wet system in locations where freezing temperatures may exist. 3.03 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. A. Confer with other Contractors and Subcontractors regarding the location and size of pipes, equipment, fixtures, conduit, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, etc., in order that there may be no interferences between the installation or the progress of the work of any Subcontractor on the project. The Drawings are diagrammatic and do not relieve the Contractor from coordinating with other trades. No extras will be allowed for failure to coordinate with others. 3.04 INSTRUCTION A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. "Hands on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system shall be provided to a representative approved by the Owner. END RDAI 2363.00 15500 Page 21 of 35 SECTION 15600 HEAT GENERATION, REFRIGERATION AND LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PART 4 GENERAL 4.01 SCOPE OF WORK. A. Provide a complete liquid heat transfer installation including all heating and cooling units, piping, specialties, insulation, and etc. as specified herein and in related sections as required to provide a complete operating installation. PART 5 PRODUCTS 5.01 WATER, STEAM, AND DRAIN - PIPE AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE A. Low pressure (less than 125 psi) B. Low temperature (less than 250 degress F.) I SERVICE PIPE I if FITTINGS — IF REMARKS Buried - Sch 40, black steel, Welded. Provide corrosion butt-weld, ASTM A -53. protection. Chilled, Condensor, Steam (L.P.) and Heating. Type "K" hard Wrought copper, Copper - phosphorus drawn copper. sweat type. solder. Above ground - Sch 40, black steel, 150# Screwed (2" and All uninsulated steel butt-weld, ASTM A -53. less), piping and fittings Chilled, Condensor, exposed to the weather Steam (L.P.) and Welded 2 -1/2" and shall be either Heating. over, or galvanized or painted. Mechanical grooved lock (any size), or 125# cast -iron or 150# steel flanges. Type "L" hard drawn Wrought copper. <2% lead solder on copper. cold pipes. 95 -5 solder on hot pipes. Steam condensate Sch 80, black steel, Same as for steam. return. butt-weld, ASTM A -53. Pressure relief, Drain Type "M" copper. Wrought copper. <2% lead solder. pan piping. RDAI 2363.00 15600 Page 22 of 35 5.02 REFRIGERANT PIPE AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE A. For systems larger than 5 tons OR where line sets are not allowed. SERVICE PIPE FITTINGS REMARKS Buried - Type " C ACR hard Wrought copper, long Copper to copper use copper, cleaned, radius. copper- phosphorus dehydrated and brazing. capped w /nitrogen charge. Copper to bronze, steel, or brass use silver brazing alloy. Above ground - Type "L" ACR hard Wrought copper, long Copper to copper use copper, cleaned, radius. copper- phosphorus dehydrated and brazing. capped w /nitrogen charge. Copper to bronze, steel, or brass use silver brazing alloy. Use refrigeration quality thread sealant on threaded connections. 5.03 STRAINERS. A. 125 pound rating. B. 1/4" to 2" bronze body, 2 1/2" and larger cast iron body. C. Threaded cleanout plug. D. Furnish with .045" perforated stainless steel, 225 holes per sq.in., 36% open area screen. 5.04 PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSER. A. 175 psi rating. B. 300 degree F. rating. C. Angle type body with inlet vanes. D. Orifice cylinder with 3/16" openings for pump protection. E. Provide with adjustable support foot. F. Provide with removable start up strainer. 5.05 PRESSURE GAUGES. A. 4 1/2" dial if within 8 feet of floor, 8" face if mounted higher. B. Pressure ranges as required. C. Provide with required fittings and pigtail. D. Phosphor bronze bourdon tube. E. Brass socket. 5.06 WATER PIPE THERMOMETERS. RDAI 2363.00 15600 Page 23 of 35 A. 7" multi angle with separable socket. B. Red reading mercury. 5.07 REMOTE WATER PIPE THERMOMETERS. A. 5 1/2" dial. B. Remote liquid filled bulbs installed in separable sockets. 5.08 WATER, STEAM, AND DRAIN VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. High Pressure (greater than 125 psi) B. High Temperature (greater than 250 degrees F.) C. All valves and specialties shall be similar to specified in paragraph 2.03 of this specification however they shall be rated for maximum temperatures and pressures of at least 120% of the maximum temperatures and pressures of the installed service piping. 5.09 REFRIGERANT HAND VALVES. A. 5/8" and smaller shall be packless type diaphragm valves. B. 7/8" and larger shall be refrigeration grade with manual lifting stem. 5.10 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES. A. Thermal expansion valves shall be externally equalized with manually adjustable superheat. VAV systems, use Alco's double ported valve or Sporland's OVE series or approved equal. B. Filter drier (5 tons and less), cartridge type, steel shell with upstream shutoff valve. Reversible type for heat pump use. C. Filter drier (over 5 tons), replaceable core type, steel shell with flare fittings and upstream shutoff valve. Reversible type for heat pump use. D. Solenoid valve (liquid line), 24 volt or 120 volt, 2 psi pressure drop, manual opening lever. E. Hot gas bypass valve, 120 volt, 2 psi pressure drop, weatherproof if located outdoors. They shall be externally equalized and sized to bypass sufficient hot gas capacity. A solenoid, rated for hot gas duty, shall be installed immediately upstream of the bypass valve. A hand valve shall be installed to provide a manual means of shutting off the got gas bypass line. The refrigerant distributor hot gas bypass connection at the coil shall be a side outlet tee, installed at the factory. F. Vibration isolators shall be standard refrigeration grade isolators. Where ever possible install parallel to the compressor crank shaft. G. Provide two moisture and liquid indicators, one at the evaporator, and one at the condensing unit. PART 6 EXECUTION 6.01 GENERAL PIPING PRACTICES. A. Refer Specification Section 15050 entitled "BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ". 6.02 WATER PIPING. A. .. B. RDAI 2363.00 Grade and valve piping systems and provide valves with 3/4" threaded hose connections to permit complete drainage of system. All reducers in supply piping shall be eccentric with top level. 15600 Page 24 of 35 C. Vent all high points in piping as follows: 1. Equipment rooms shall have automatic vents. All other locations vents shall be combination automaticimanual. 2. Pitch unvented branch piping up toward mains to allow mains to vent air. 3. All vents shall have vertical downward discharge so that a small container can be used to catch water blowing through vents without damaging insulation, ceilings, floors, etc. D. Provide isolation valves on supply and return pipes in each individual piece of radiation or equipment. On return lines a positive shut off balancing valve may serve as an isolation valve. E. All branches and terminal unit circuits shall be piped with balance control fittings to allow the system to be properly balanced. 6.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING. A. General. 1. The refrigerant piping installation, pressure testing, evacuation, charging and start up shall be performed by contractors regularly engaged in this work using only trained "licensed" refrigeration pipe fitters. B. Submittals. 1. The Contractor shall submit a detailed piping drawing including the line sizes required due to actual field lengths and lifts. This drawing must be approved the the Mechanical Engineer. C. Coordination. The refrigeration contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades and the interlock wiring requirements and the system start up with the temperature control contractor. D. Piping Installation. During brazing continuously purge pipes with nitrogen to prevent oxidation from forming on the inside of the pipes. E. Compliance. All piping pitch, traps, coil connections, specialty component locations, lift traps, double suction risers, etc. shall all be in compliance with standard ASHRAE refrigerant piping practices and the equipment manufacturer's requirements. F. Evacuation and Dehydration. The vacuum pump shall be connected to the system through a 3/8" connection. This is the minimum size to use, preferably larger. 2. The evacuation should be performed when the ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. when ever possible. RDAI 2363.00 15600 Page 25 of 35 3. Triple evacuation procedures. a. Evacuate to 1500 microns and break the vacuum with the refrigerant to be used in the system to 0 psi. Let stand for one hour. b. Repeat step 1. c. Install final drier cores. d. Make final evacuation. Let the system stank at 1500 microns for a minimum of 4 hours as a final leak test. Break vacuum with the refrigerant to be used. Leave system stand in a positive pressure. Record this pressure and the ambient temperature for reference at start up. 4. System Start UP. a. Charge and start the system in accordance with standard practices and the manufactures requirements. Provide a log of system operation showing all voltages, amperages, temperatures, pressures, superheats and subcooling (see specification section 15010). 6.04 CORROSION PROTECTION OF BURIED FERROUS PIPE. A. All buried ferrous piping and fittings shall have machine applied corrosion protection. Field wrapping shall provide equivalent protection and is restricted to those short sections and fittings necessarily stripped for threading or welding. Field wrapping shall be as follows: 1. One coat of pipe primer 2. Two layers of polyethylene backed butyl rubber adhesive tape. 3. Wrap tape with 50% overlap. 4. Coating shall extend to 6" above finished grade. B. Re coat all welded joints in factory protected pipe using pipe manufacturer's recommended materials and procedures. 6.05 PIPE TESTING SCHEDULE. Test all piping prior to concealing, backfilling, or insulating in accordance with the following schedule: System Test Medium Test Pressure Duration Domestic Water Water 50 15 min. Soil and Waste Water 10 ft. w.c. 15 min. Compressed Air Air 1 -1/2 times 2 hrs (service) working pres. Oil Air 60 2 hrs. Natural Gas Air 60 30 min. END X RDAI 2363.00 15600 Page 26 of 35 I'-. SECTION 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work of this section consists of providing ductwork, intakes, discharges, fire dampers, and appurtenances, and installing motorized dampers (motorized dampers specified in section 15900) in connection with the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Metal. 1. Galvanized sheet steel. 2. ASTM A525 75 G90 coating (SMACNA 1.25 oz. /sq. ft.) B. Stainless Steel. 1. AISI type 304 or 316. 2. ASTM finish type Mill Polish #4. C. Hardware. 1. All associated reinforcing angles, supports, screws, bolts, etc. shall be of same material as sheet metal. 2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Spring steel wire helix. B. Vinyl coated non porous liner. C. 1" thick insulation. D. Outer jacket with permeability rating of .75 perms. E. UL 181 and NFPA approved. 2.03 OPPOSED BLADE DAMPERS A. Multiple opposed blades. B. External handle and quadrant type locking device. C. Blades not to exceed 6" in width. 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS A. UL listing and label. B. 1.5 hour fire rating. C. 165 degree fusible link. D. Galvanized steel construction. E. Stainless steel closure spring on horizontal units., RDAI 2363.00 15800 Page 27 of 35 2.05 FIREISMOKE DAMPERS A. UL listing and label. B. 1.5 hour fire rating. C. 165 degree thermal disk. D. Galvanized steel construction. E. 24V, power -open /spring- return (fail close) actuator. 2.06 SMOKE DAMPERS A. UL listing and label. B. 1.5 hour fire rating. C. Galvanized steel construction. D. 24V, power -open /spring- return (fail close) actuator. 2.07 DUCT MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Double galvanized steel with 1" fiber glass insulation (insulation not required when installed in uninsulated ducts). B. Hinges and Latch. C. Continuous gasket to seal edges. D. 12" X 16" minimum size. Where duct size will not accommodate this size door, the door shall be made as large as practicable. E. Where clearance to building construction is limited, doors shall be removable. 2.08 FIELD ASSEMBLED CASING A. 16 gage galvanized steel panels with flanged and double standing seam. B. 1" fiber glass with aluminum foil or neoprene facing securely fastened to panels with adhesive, pins and clips. C. 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/8" galvanized steel angle iron located on 4 foot grid to maintain structural rigidity. D. Full size access door with latch handle on both sides of the door. E. Seal all joints airtight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HVAC DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION A. Thickness. 1. Construct ducts in accordance with the International Mechanical Code unless otherwise noted. B. Hanging. 1. Suspend ducts from structure with proper hangers at 4 feet on center and at each floor. C. Branch Takeoffs. 1. Do not install takeoffs on elbows or other points of the system where air velocity is not uniform. D. Elbows RDAI 2363.00 15800 Page 28 of 35 1. Elbows shall be long radius type wherever possible, with a centerline radius not less than 1 1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct. Where space does not permit the use of long radius elbows, mitered elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes shall be used. E. Offsets. 1. Make all duct offsets with 15 degree transitions. Sharper transitions can be made only when space does not allow 15 degree off sets, 30 degree offsets maximum. F. Rated Construction. 1. All ducts penetrating fire rated or smoke rated construction shall be provided with dampers as required by the International Building Code. 3.02 SEALING A. Low Pressure Ductwork. 1. Seal all ductwork not located in the conditioned space (including above suspended ceilings) per SMACNA Class B Standards. Seal by using mastic or mastic and tape. B. Ductwork Exposed To Weather. 1. All joints shall be watertight by welding, soldering, or duct sealants. 3.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Attach all flexible duct inner liner helix to duct connectors, diffuser necks, or ductwork with sheet metal screws 4" on center and stainless steel worm driven clamp. Tape outer vapor barrier securely over clamp with vapor barrier tape. 3.04 FIRE, FIRE/SMOKE, AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. General. 1. Install fire, fire /smoke, and smoke dampers in accordance with NFPA -90A. Coordinate with Fire Alarm Contractor.for exact actuator power /voltage requirements before ordering fire /smoke and smoke dampers. B. Duct Mounted Access Doors. 1. Provide access door in duct large enough to permit raising of damper and installing new heat link. C. Identification. 1. All fire damper enclosures shall be painted red. 3.05 DUCT MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. General. RDAI 2363.00 15800 Page 29 of 35 1. Provide a duct access door sized and located to permit easy access for future servicing and inspection. In locations where an easily removable grill core will permit sufficient access to the damper, the access door may be omitted. B. Where Required. 1. Provide access doors at each of the following. a. Duct mounted coil. b. Duct mounted fan. c. Filter bank. d. All dampers. e. All fire, fire /smoke, and smoke dampers. f. Duct mounted equipment not easily removable. g. Elsewhere as shown on the DRAWINGS. 3.06 CASINGS A. Secure the casing to floors, walls and ceilings by a 2" X 2" X 1/8" galvanized angle iron. Attach angle iron by 1/4" bolts located 12" on center. Seal between angle and building and all joints airtight. Provide access doors to equipment and coils. 3.07 OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Interior. 1. Coordinate location of all devices with General Contractor and other trades before fabricating ductwork. Fit ceiling mounted units symmetrically into grid pattern of ceilings. B. Exterior. 1. Coordinate location of all devices with General Contractor and other trades before fabricating ductwork. Provide water proofing as required. END RDAI 2363.00 15800 Page 30 of 35 SECTION 15900 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 4 GENERAL 4.01 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for a complete and operating system of automatic controls of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment as described in the Sequence of Operation and on the DRAWINGS. 4.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for approval per SUBMITTALS paragraph in the GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS Section. 1. Product Data. a. Product Data shall include descriptive literature and specifications on all components of the control system. 2. Shop Drawings. a. Shop Drawings shall consist of Sequence of Operation, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, indicator and gage locations, control panel location, and control panel fronts. PART 5 PRODUCTS 5.01 PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT A. Provide proper subbase to allow cooling mode if required. 1. Microprocessor based thermostat. 2. Digital clock. 3. 4 programmable events per 24 Hr. period. 4. 7 day program with 5 day option. 5. Battery backup. 6. Manual setting mode. 5.02 SENSING DEVICES A. Liquid sensors shall be provided with separate wells. B. Remote capillaries shall be ambient compensated type. C. Panel mounted 2" gage to display the sensed variable. D. Sensor shall be'compatible with controller. 5.03 DAMPERS A. All galvanized steel construction. B. Maximum blade width 6 ". C. Teflon, nylon, or oilite bronze bearings. RDAI 2363.00 15900 Page 31 of 35 D. All edges of the blades and frame shall be provided with replaceable, butyl rubber or neoprene seals. E. Side seals may be spring loaded stainless steel. F. Linear flow of equal percentage linkage as application requires. G. 4 cfm /sf maximum leakage at 2" W.G. differential. H. Mixing dampers shall be parallel blade style. I.. Modulating and face and bypass dampers shall be opposed blade style. 5.04 ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS (Damper and Valve) A. Reversible. B. Spring return to normal position upon power interruption. C. Auxiliary switch. D. Adjustable start point. 5.05 CONTROL VALVES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. -` K. 5.06 TIM 125 psig rating. Screwed brass body up through 2.5" diameter. Flanged iron body 3" diameter and larger. Stainless steel stem. Replaceable composition disk. Teflon or silicone packing. Plugs, disks, and seats replaceable without removing valve body from line. Equal percentage flow plugs for water service. Sufficient operator size to close valve against 125% of pump dead head. Normally open heating valves. Pressure drop not to exceed 5 psig. E CLOCKS A. 7 day 24 hour. B. Multiple event. C. Manual over ride. D. Spring wound or automatic recharge battery backup. E. Furnish with appropriate contacts. 5.07 CONTROL PANELS A. Surface mounted in location as shown on the Plans. B. Key locked hinged front panel. C. All controllers, relays, terminal wiring, and other control components shall be mounted internally. D. Flush mount all indicating gages, thermometers, switches and etc. E. All identification labels shall be engraved plastic strips securely mounted to the front panel directly under the respective device. PART 6 EXECUTION 6.01 INSTALLATION A. General. 1. The entire Temperature Control System shall be furnished and installed by a Temperature Control Manufacturer or a Factory Authorized Representative. RDAI 2363.00 15900 Page 32 of 35 The system shall be complete in all respects, put into operation and calibrated under occupied conditions. B. Coordination With OTHERS. 1, The Temperature Control Contractor shall coordinate with OTHERS to insure that the proper auxiliary contacts are furnished in motor starters. C. Control Valves. Motorized control valves shall be furnished by this Section and installed under Section 15600 HEAT GENERATION, REFRIGERATION, AND LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER. D. Motorized Dampers. 1. Motorized dampers shall be furnished by this Section and installed under Specification Section AIR DISTRIBUTION. 6.02 WIRING A. All wiring shall comply with the current edition of the National Electric Code (NEC), local codes and the Electrical Division of these specifications. B. All wiring shall be run in metallic conduit, tubing or raceways with the following exception: NEC Class 2 low voltage wiring where not exposed to view such as above suspended ceilings, in shafts, and etc. If space above suspended ceiling is a return air plenum use plenum rated cable. C. The conductor material size and insulation shall be suitable for the particular application or as required by NEC. Minimum conductor size shall be AWG #18 except for remote thermocouple and thermistor sensing circuits which may be a minimum of AWG #22. 6.03 THERMOSTATS A. Mount thermostats 5'6" above the finished floor and locate as shown on the DRAWINGS. 6.04 CONTROL PANELS A. Locate control panels as shown on the Drawings. Furnish a schematic diagram of all control components within the control panel. The schematic diagram shall be attached to the inside of the control panel. 6.05 CAPILLARY TUBES A. Install all capillary tubes in EMT conduit except if located in the sensing medium or in equipment. 6.06 PREPARATION FOR TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) RDAI 2363.00 15900 Page 33 of 35 A. Prepare the system for TAB work and shall have a technician on duty during the ' TAB work to assist the TAB technician. 6.07 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install laminated engraved plastic instruction labels at all control switches, devices, sensing devices, etc., to assist future maintenance personnel in the operation of the system. 6.08 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. Mechanical Room Drawings. Install reproduced (reduced to size if necessary) Record Control Shop Drawings of each respective system laminated in rigid plastic and framed on the wall of each mechanical room. Drawings shall consist of the entire control system overlayed on a schematic of the mechanical system. All information such as setpoints, throttling ranges, differentials, reset voltage /pressures, % Authority settings, and all other information that is required to totally calibrate and maintain the system shall be shown on the drawings. If a DDC type controller is used a copy of the program source code shall be shown along with programming instructions. B. Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Furnish Operating and Maintenance Instructions as described in section 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS. 6.09 RESIDENTIAL SYSTEM A. The residential unit mechanical systems shall be controlled by 7 day programmable electronic thermostats located per the DRAWINGS. The thermostat shall automatically cycle heating and cooling as required. END 3 RDAI 2363.00 15900 Page 34 of 35 SECTION 15950 TESTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 BALANCING CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS. A. The balancing firm shall be an independent balancing company which specializes in and whose business is limited to the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. The firm shall be fully certified by NEBB, AABC, or TABB. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINAL REPORT. A. Submit copies of final test report in accordance with paragraph entitled SUBMITTALS in this Specification Section for approval prior to final acceptance of the project. Copies of the test report shall also be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL. A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide such items as thermometer wells, pressure test cocks, access doors, etc., as required to allow tests and adjustments to be made as described in this section. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install extra sheaves, belts, trimmed pump impellers, and etc. when required by the Balancing Firm to provide proper performance of the mechanical systems. B. The balancing firm as a part of its contract shall act as authorized inspection agency, responsible through the Mechanical Contractor to the Mechanical Engineer and the Owner, and shall report any discrepancies or items not installed in accordance with contract drawings and/or specifications pertaining to the air distribution, cooling and heating and exhaust systems. 3.02 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. A. The General Contractor shall coordinate work done by the Balancing Firm with work of other trades in the following manner: 1. Notify the Balancing Firm within 30 days after award of their contract so that the preliminary plan check and field inspection phase may be initiated. 2. Provide two sets of Drawings for plan check purposes to Balancing Firm prior to construction. 3. Direct the Mechanical Contractor to make all necessary changes or additions to the Work provided under the Mechanical Division reported by the Balancing Firm to be not in accordance with contract Drawings and /or Specifications. 4. Inform Balancing Firm of any major changes made to the Work provided under the Mechanical Division during construction and provide complete set of As Built Drawings. END RDA[ 2363.00 15950 Page 35 of 35 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART I. GENERAL LDESCRIPTION A. General. This Specification Section contains administrative requirements of DIVISION 16. It also defines the scope of work to be provided by DIVISION 16 with respect to the entire PROJECT and with respect to other Trades involved with the PROJECT. B. Work Included. Provide complete and operating electrical systems. The work also includes the completion of details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems. C. Work Not Included. a.Temporary wiring for welders, cranes, construction trailers, barricade lighting, and etc. b.Costs incurred due to utility energy and installation charges for temporary power. 2. PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of Work. 3. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER Provide temporary power before construction and remove after construction as follows: A. 125A. single phase temporary power service consisting of an overhead drop to a mast, meter housing, and load center. B. 125A. single phase, 24 space main circuit breaker load center. C.Provide 2 each 4 -plex GFCI receptacles. D.Provide sufficient temporary lighting in all areas which are not provided with RDAI 2363.00 16010 -1 Belfay Engineering natural light to comply with OSHA requirements. E.No part of the permanent electrical systems or the existing electrical system may be used for temporary construction power unless approved by the Engineer. 4. VERIFICATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS Before undertaking each part of the Work, carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with field measurements. Promptly report in writing to the Electrical Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy. 5. CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with all applicable codes, The 2002 National Electrical Code, and utility company regulations. In case of conflict with the Contract Documents the most stringent shall govern. 6. PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of Work. 7. EXISTING UTILITIES A. Shown or Indicated on Drawings. The information and data shown or indicated on the DRAWINGS with respect to existing utilities at the site is based on information and data furnished to the Electrical Engineer. The Electrical Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data. The Contractor shall have full responsibility for the following: a.Reviewing and checking all such information and data, for locating all utilities shown or indicated on the DRAWINGS. b.Coordination of the Work with the owners of such utilities during construction. c.The safety and protection of the workers. d.Repairing any damage resulting from the Work, at no extra cost. B.Not Shown or Indicated. If utilities are encountered during construction which are not shown on the drawings and which the Contractor could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, ask for instructions from the Architect. 8. DRAWINGS RDAI 2363.00 16010 -2 Belfay Engineering A. Construction Drawings. The Electrical DRAWINGS indicate the extent and general arrangement of the electrical systems. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without violation of applicable codes, standards, specification requirements, or extra charges to the Owner. B. Record Drawings. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. Before final payment, provide the Architect with one clean set of plans and specifications corrected to show as-built conditions. 9. SUBSTITUTIONS AND APPROVED EQUALS If Contractor is contemplating using materials, equipment, lighting fixtures, or procedures other than those which are specified, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Electrical Engineer prior to performing any related work. Electrical Engineer reserves the right to refuse the substitution and require the Contractor to provide materials and labor per these Contract Documents. Submit information in accordance with paragraph entitled SUBMITTALS in this Specification Section. 10. SUBMITTALS A.General. Submit data for Electrical Engineer's approval as required. Obtain approval from Electrical Engineer before entering orders for materials and equipment or before performing any related work. B.Review Time. Allow 5 (five) working days for review of submittals. Begin no work until all submittals are returned approved. Engineer shall not be responsible for any project delays due to the review of substitutions. C.Number of Copies. Except where otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall submit five (5) copies for the Electrical RDAI 2363.00 16010 -3 Belfay Engineering Engineer's review. Only two (2) copies will be returned to the Contractor ' with Engineer's and Owner's comments as applicable. If the Contractor requires more returned copies for his use, the Contractor shall submit additional copies. D.Resubmission Requirements. Make all revisions required by the Electrical Engineer and resubmit as required for initial submittal. I LWARRANTIES A.Guarantee all workmanship, material and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. PART II. - PRODUCTS 1. GENERAL All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. 2. ACCESS DOORS Furnish access doors to provide access to all j- boxes, pull boxes, and other equipment as required. Access doors shall be furnished by the Electrical Division to the General Contractor for installation by the General Contractor. PART III. - EXECUTION LSTORAGE All materials shall be properly stored to prevent damage due to any cause. Any item damaged mechanically or corrosively shall not be used. 2.PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY Where there are existing facilities and functions, be responsible for the protection against damage to and interruption of the Owner's operation. 3. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT t- A.Space Preference. RDAI 2363.00 16010 -4 Belfay Engineering Carefully check and coordinate the location and level of all pipes, ducts, etc. Run preliminary levels and check with all others so that conflicts in all locations may be avoided. Where conflicts occur, if any, the following preference schedule shall be followed: a.Recessed electrical light fixtures. b.Low pressure ductwork. c. Sprinkler piping. d.Soil, waste, vent and storm piping. e.Liquid heat transfer and refrigerant piping. f.Domestic water piping. g.Electric conduits. However, no ductwork or heating main shall have preference over plumbing lines below plumbing fixtures, or over electrical conduits above or below electric switchgear and panels. No piping conveying fluids shall be installed directly over electrical equipment. 4.ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL COORDINATION The interface between the Mechanical and Electrical Contractor shall be according to the "HVAC, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR COORDINATION SCHEDULE" on the DRAWINGS. 5. CLEAN -UP At the completion of work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including any all areas around or in equipment provided under the Mechanical Section. Remove off site, all rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave all equipment spaces absolutely clean and ready for use. END RDAI 2363.00 16010 -5 Belfay Engineering SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL .1 DESCRIPTION The Work of this section describes the materials and methods common to all sections of DIVISION 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .1 RACEWAY SYSTEMS .lAbove Ground, Interior (not including connections to vibrating equipment). .1Hazardous Locations or Exposed to Mechanical Damage. Rigid Steel Conduit only, with threaded couplings. .2All other areas above ground may have any of the following: .1Rigid Steel Conduit, threaded couplings. .2 IMC, threaded couplings. .3EMT, set screw or gland nut compression couplings. .4Type MC cable where permitted by codes. .5Type AC cable where permitted by codes. .6Type NM cable where permitted by codes. .2Above Ground, Exterior (not including connections to vibrating equipment). .1Hazardous Locations or Exposed to Mechanical Damage. Rigid Steel Conduit only, with threaded couplings. .2All other areas above ground may have either of the following: .l Rigid Steel Conduit, threaded couplings. .2 IMC, threaded couplings. .3 EMT, gland nut compression couplings. .3 Buried, Interior (under slab). Either type may be used. 1 Schedule 40 Rigid PVC conduit. RDAI 2363.00 16050 -1 Belfay Engineering .1 90 deg. C cable rated. .2 Solvent welded fittings. .3Coated rigid steel elbows when penetrating concrete. .2 Rigid Steel Conduit. .1 Threaded couplings. .2 Wrap and coat for corrosion protection. .4 Buried, Exterior Either type may be used. .1 Schedule 40 Rigid PVC conduit. .1 90 deg. C cable rated. .2 Solvent welded fittings. .2 Rigid Steel Conduit. .1 Threaded couplings. .2 Wrap and coat for corrosion protection. .5 Embedded in Concrete. Any one of the following types may be used. .1 Rigid Steel conduit. .2 IMC .3 EMT, above grade only, concrete tight fittings. .4Schedule 40 Rigid PVC conduit, 90 deg C cable rated, steel elbows. .6Connection To Vibrating Equipment and Recessed Lighting Fixtures (dry locations). .1 Flexible Steel Conduit lLess than 6' long and circuit conductors contained are protected by 20 amps or less, and fittings are approved for grounding. OR grounding. .2 Conduit and fittings approved for M .3A separate grounding conductor shall be installed within the conduit. ~ .7 Connection to Vibrating Equipment For the following locations: RDAI 2363.00 16050 -2 Belfay Engineering .1 Exterior location. .2Moist or humid atmosphere where condensation can be expected to accumulate. .3 Corrosive atmosphere. .4 Subjected to water spray. .5 Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. Liquidtight Flexible Metal conduit. .1Less than 6' long, and fittings are approved for grounding, and circuit conductors contained are protected by 20 amps or less for 1/2" size and 60 amps or less for 3/4" through 1 -1/4" size. OR .2A separate grounding conductor shall be installed within the conduit. .2 CONDUCTORS .1 Conductors. lConductors shall be copper except as otherwise noted or specified. .2 Insulation. .1 General .1 Sizes 14 AWG to 8 AWG type THHN. .2Sizes 6 AWG and up type THW or THHN -THWN. .3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS .1Provide panelboards and load centers in locations as shown on Drawings. Refer to Drawings to obtain the following information: .1 Main bus /circuit breaker rating. .2 Short circuit withstand rating .3 Number of spaces. .4 Mounting. .5 Supply voltage and phase. .6 Ground bus required. PART 3 - EXECUTION .1 OUTLETS .1 General. RDAI 2363.00 16050 -3 Belfay Engineering The exact location of outlets and equipment shall be governed by structural conditions and obstructions, or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures or other devices are installed, they will be symmetrically located according to the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling, provide a junction box for each fixture and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. .2 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS .lIdentify each meter on the meter stack with plastic nameplates. .2Nameplates shall have engraved lettering not less than 3/8" inch high on white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. .3All labels shall be in accordance with the drawings. AAll panelboards shall have typewritten directories inserted on the inside face of the door identifying each circuit. .3 EMERGENCY CIRCUITS lAll safety switches, panelboards, and junction boxes shall be painted red to clearly identify these components as part of the emergency circuit. .2All wiring for emergency circuits shall be run in separate raceways, boxes, and outlets. END RDAI 2363.00 16050 -4 Belfay Engineering SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART I. GENERAL LDESCRIPTION Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating lighting systems subject to the conditions of the contract. 2.REQUIRED SUBMITTALS Submit the following information for approval per SUBMITTALS paragraph in the GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Specification Section: A.Product data including photometrics on all lighting fixtures listed in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the DRAWINGS. PART II. - PRODUCTS LGENERAL Provide lighting fixtures in locations and manner as shown by the DRAWINGS and of type listed in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE with all accessories including lenses, louvers, reflectors, supports, frames, wiring boxes, lamps, tubes, ballasts, etc., as required to provide a complete system. PART III. - EXECUTION LGENERAL A.Set fixtures true, level, and symmetrical. Verify the type of ceiling to be provided before bidding, and field verify actual ceiling provided before ordering fixtures. RDAI 2363.00 16500 -1 Belfay Engineering 2XIXTURE SUPPORT A.Support fixtures only from structural elements which are capable of carrying the total weight. 3XINAL ADJUSTMENT Fixtures having an adjustable beam or adjustable aiming mounting shall be field adjusted to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Owner. Include an allowance in the bid to cover overtime for performing aiming and adjusting at night. END RDAI 2363.00 16500 -2 Belfay Engineering SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART I. GENERAL LDESCRIPTION Furnish and install a complete working fire alarm system. The system and all components shall be listed by U.L. The system shall be installed to comply with the Denver Building Code, the 2002 National Electric Code and NFPA part 72. 2.REQUIRED SUBMITTALS Submit the following information for approval. A.Product data including cut sheets on all devices. B.Complete shop drawings including sequence of operation of system. C.Battery calculations for fire alarm system. D.Voltage drop calculations. 3. FIRE ALARM CONSTRUCTION PERMIT. Contractor is responsible to prepare and submit all materials including Shop Drawings (stamped by a registered professional engineer if required) to secure a fire alarm construction permit. PART II. - PRODUCTS LGENERAL Provide devices as shown by the DRAWINGS with all accessories including batteries, aux. contacts, etc., as required to provide a complete system. 2.FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. An UL listed Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall have initiation and alarm zones as required plus a number of spare zones equal to 10% of total or not less than one spare, whichever is greater. If the system is an addressable type, it shall have the capacity to allow the addition of new devices in the amount of 10% of the total installed under this Contract. RDAI 2363.00 16721 -1 Belfay Engineering 3. SYSTEM POWERED SMOKE DETECTORS. Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type and be UL listed. A visual indication of alarm shall be provided by a latching light emitting diode on the detector which may be seen from ground level. This light shall flash to indicate that power is applied to the detector. The visible alarm signal shall be capable of remote LED annunciation. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to wind gusts up to 2500 feet per minute. The detector screen and cover shall be easily removable for field cleaning. Aux. contacts shall be supplied where needed to allow the system to function as shown on DRAWINGS. 4. SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTORS. Single station smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type and be UL listed. A visual indication of alarm shall be provided by a latching light emitting diode on the detector which may be seen from ground level. This light shall flash to indicate that power is applied to the detector. The detector shall be powered by the normal building power system and also equipped with battery backup. The detector shall be capable of emitting a signal when the batteries are low. 5. HEAT DETECTORS. UL listed heat detectors shall either be rate of rise or fixed temperature as required. Auxiliary contacts shall be supplied when required. 6. MANUAL ALARM STATIONS. UL listed manual alarm (pull) stations shall be dual action so designed that after actual emergency operation it cannot be restored to normal except by using a key. An operated station shall automatically condition itself to be visually detected. PART III. - EXECUTION LGENERAL A.Install all components and devices per manufacturers recommendations, NFPA part 72, the UBC, and the UFC and all local codes. Verify building conditions before any devices are ordered and provide all necessary hardware and equipment to allow proper installation. B.At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. RDAI 2363.00 16721 -2 Belfay Engineering 2.INSTRUCTION A.Provide instruction as required for operating the system. "Hands on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system shall be provided to a representative approved by the owner. B.Owners manuals on all equipment, including warranty information and a sequence of operation shall be provided by the contractor to the owner. C.Upon completion the manufacturer shall warranty all equipment free from defect for a period on one year from the acceptance of the complete system by the owner. The contractor shall warranty all wiring to be free from defect for a period of one year. END OF SECTION RDAI 2363.00 16721 -3 Belfay Engineering